A1. Background

A1 A1. BACKGROUND

The establishment of metropolitan municipalities meant the disestablishment of the local administrations, which were absorbed into the new structures. The region of Ekurhuleni was formerly known as the East Rand, which was home to a number of good sized towns that had developed around the mines and whose charters dated back a century.

The former local administrations of the nine towns in the East Rand - Alberton, Benoni, Boksburg, Brakpan, Edenvale/Lethabong, Germiston, Kempton Park/Tembisa, Nigel and Springs and neighbouring township areas - along with two other councils; the Khayalami Metropolitan Council and the Eastern Gauteng Services Council were amalgamated into the new metropolitan municipality.

Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality (EMM), formed on 5 December 2000, is the fourth-largest metropolitan municipality in the country. With the establishment of the metro, the new municipality was given a Tsonga name, Ekurhuleni, by the people of the region, meaning ‘place of peace’. The EMM implemented a Mayoral Executive and Ward Participatory System of local governance, which ensures that governance is taken right down to community level and that all citizens within the city are represented in decision-making. This increases residents’ sense of belonging, accountability and empowerment and actively involves them in all issues dealt with by the EMM.

The Executive Mayor heads up a team of 12 full-time councillors comprising his Mayoral Committee of 10, a Speaker and a Chief Whip of Council.

Ekurhuleni’s top leadership directs the city along private sector business principles, implementing the strategies and plans needed to meet the organisation’s priorities. These are: • Good governance; • Urban renewal; • Poverty alleviation; • Local economic development and job creation; • Prevention of HIV and Aids; • Safety and security; and • Community participation.

Day-to-day management and administration of the municipality is carried out by the City Manager and his staff of some 15 000, led by Deputy City Managers, Executive Directors, Directors, Customer Care Centre Heads and operational levels of management.

Accessibility of municipal ofﬁ ces and services remain a priority. Thus, the EMM has set up 20 Customer Care Centres (CCCs) in all major centres and more remote locations, providing a direct link between the municipality and the community it serves.

The region houses close on three million people in South Africa’s manufacturing heartland. It has a population density of around 1 250 people per km2, making it one of the most densely populated areas in the country.

OCTOBER 2010 1 A2 A2. EKURHULENI IN CONTEXT

The Metropolitan Municipality of Ekurhuleni was established in 2000. It covers a vast area from Germiston in the west to Springs and Nigel in the east. Ekurhuleni is one of six Metropolitan Municipalities resulting from the restructuring of local government. The former local administrations of nine towns in the East Rand - Alberton, Benoni, Boksburg, Brakpan, Edenvale/Lethabong, Germiston, Kempton Park/Tembisa, Nigel and Springs - were amalgamated into the new Metropolitan Municipality, along with two other councils - the Khayalami Metropolitan Council and the Eastern Gauteng Services Council.

Ekurhuleni has a total land area of ±2 000km2 that accommodates a total population of ±2.5 million (Census 2002). This constitutes 5.6% of the national population and makes up 28% of Gauteng’s population. The population density is approximately 1 250 people per km2, making Ekurhuleni one of the most densely populated areas in the country and province. By comparison, population density in Gauteng is 513 people per km2 and 38 people per km2 in the country.The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan economy is larger and more diverse than that of many of the smaller countries in Africa, including all the countries in Southern Africa. It accounts for nearly a quarter of the Gauteng economy, which in turn contributes over a third of the national GDP. Ekurhuleni contributes ±7% to the country’s spending power and ±7.4% to the nation’s production. In most respects - per capita income, unemployment, poverty, average wages and other indicators of human development - it is similar to the rest of Gauteng. However, there is one important structural difference: many of the plants for production of goods and commodities are located in Ekurhuleni. Manufacturing in Ekurhuleni accounts for just under 20% of the GDP of Gauteng.

In Ekurhuleni itself, manufacturing accounts for some 28% of total production. Because of the largest concentration of industry in the whole of South Africa (and in Africa), Ekurhuleni is often referred to as “Africa’s Workshop”. The downside of the manufacturing sector is that globalisation has a deﬁ nitive impact on the structure of production and on the demand for labour. Ekurhuleni, although not beneﬁ ting from direct capital investments as a result of the automotive sector developments in the country, continues to play the role of the workshop of the economy, with production of structural steel and fabricated metal products, serving as inputs into other areas’ economies. Annual economic growth in Ekurhuleni has been almost double the rate of the national manufacturing growth rate.

The economically active population is 52% compared to 38% nationally. Household income and per capita income exceed the national average by 10% and 33% respectively. The percentage of people living in poverty nationally is 49%, compared to 29% in Ekurhuleni.

Ekurhuleni has a network of roads, airports, rail lines, telephones, electricity grids and

2 OCTOBER 2010 A2 telecommunications that rivals that of Europe and America - a ﬁ rst world infrastructure supporting a well established industrial and commercial complex.

Ekurhuleni can in fact be regarded as the transportation hub of the country. The municipality is home to the OR Tambo International Airport (ORTIA), the busiest airport in Africa. The JIA services the entire continent and links to major cities throughout the world. Similarly, many of the world’s leading airlines ﬂ y into the ORTIA. Some 14 million passengers pass through this airport each year. In addition, a number of smaller domestic airlines connect the ORTIA with cities throughout South Africa.

South Africa’s largest railway hub is in Ekurhuleni [Germiston] and links the city to all the major population centres and ports in the Southern African region. A number of South Africa’s modern freeways and expressways connect Ekurhuleni to other cities and provinces. The Maputo corridor development, South Africa’s most advanced spatial development initiative, connects Ekurhuleni with Mozambique’s capital and largest Indian Ocean port. Direct rail, road and air links connect Ekurhuleni to Durban, South Africa’s largest and busiest port.

During the period 1995 to 2005, the Gauteng government made strategic investments in upgrading some of the ageing road networks linked to the industrial hub to promote the movement of goods and services. The Blue IQ projects, situated within Ekurhuleni, include the Wadeville-Alrode Industrial Corridor with linkages to the largest logistical hub, the City Deep Container terminal, the planned Gautrain rapid rail link to Johannesburg and Tshwane and the ORTIA Industrial Development Zone [IDZ]. The latter aims to cluster light manufacturing, more especially in beneﬁ ciation, and to develop an aero space park. The EMM’s annual budget is in the region of R13 billion, of which close on R2 billion is being budgeted annually for capital projects in line with the priorities set in the Integrated Development Plan [IDP]. The bulk of this expenditure is dedicated to upgrading facilities and infrastructure backlogs that were caused by apartheid.

BROAD OVERVIEW

Visioning, goal-setting and planning for the future without a clear knowledge and understanding of the present situation, as well as those factors which may inﬂ uence development, is a futile exercise. The GDS 2025 follows a landscape approach; describing the status quo in terms of three broad development landscapes, as follows: • Physical development which encompasses aspects such as the current settlement pattern and land uses, transportation links and infrastructural services, as well as the physical environment; • Economic development which encompasses economic productive activity and aspects related to the sustainable development of the area; and • Social development which encompasses the human element, including the

OCTOBER 2010 3 A2 socioeconomic profi le of the area and the provision of housing, basic infrastructure and other community services. The GDS 2025 development vision, agenda and strategy will be encapsulated within the above-mentioned 3 development landscapes, fi rstly defi ning where we are now, secondly articulating where we want to be in 18 years from now, and fi nally formulating strategies to attain our vision and agenda.

PHYSICAL DEVELOPMENT STATUS QUO SETTLEMENT PATTERN AND LAND USE

In terms of land use, Ekurhuleni comprises three main components, namely: • A central, east-west orientated mining and industrial activity belt which served as the core around which the nine towns were established; • Residential developments surrounding the above-mentioned activity belt; and • Rural/agricultural areas to the northeast and, in the central portion, to the south of the Metro.

Four major concentrations of historically disadvantaged communities exist in the area. All of these communities are situated on the outskirts of the main urban area and are in the areas furthest removed from where the bulk of job opportunities are situated. These four communities are Tembisa, the Katorus complex, the Kwatsaduza complex and the Daveyton/Etwatwa complex.

Together they accommodate approximately 65% of the total population of the Metropolitan area, of which 24% are situated in the Katorus complex, 14% in the Tembisa and Kwatsaduza complexes respectively, and approximately 12% in the Daveyton complex.

The existing settlement pattern represents the typical apartheid planning structure where the residential areas are situated on the periphery of the urban area, followed by a vacant buffer area, followed by industrial development which was intended to provide job opportunities, and which is then linked to the main economy via the rail and road network.

The mining belt was historically the core around which the various towns and settlements were established. In total nine towns developed in the vicinity of the mining belt with Germiston, Boksburg, Benoni, Brakpan, Springs and Nigel being part of the mining belt itself while Edenvale, Kempton Park and Alberton developed adjacent to it. The Metro has an evenly distributed, multi-nodal structure with no single, dominant node of activity.

4 OCTOBER 2010 A2 Due to past mining activities, large parts of the mining belt are vacant. Numerous mining related development constraints exist within this area, such as slimes dams and mine dumps, shallow undermining, radon emissions and so on. However, some of the areas offer substantial opportunities for inﬁ ll development within and adjacent to the mining belt, between the central activity corridor and the marginalised township areas on the periphery.

The CBDs and the surrounding inner city core areas (including the older industrial areas), are all to a greater or lesser extent characterised by urban decay and deterioration of the physical environment. During the last decade a number of large informal settlements have also developed in the mining belt, in close proximity to the CBDs and older industrial areas. Many of these settlements do not have even rudimentary services and large parts of them are situated on land that is unsuitable for housing due to various mining related development constraints.

There is a huge difference between the development standards in the previously disadvantaged township areas on the urban periphery and the previously white areas closer to the urban core. Although the closing of this gap has been a development focus of the municipality during the preceding 10 years, it still remains huge.

Ekurhuleni is unique in the sense that it lacks a clear identity and primary core area. All the other Metropolitan areas in South Africa developed around a primary core area or CBD, which gives identity to these centres, nationally and even internationally. Examples of these are Cape Town, Nelson Mandela, Durban, Johannesburg and Tshwane. Over time these Metropolitan areas have developed multi-nodal structures, but the core areas still remain dominant and lend character to these areas. The EMM is different in the sense that it currently has a multinodal structure, comprising of the nine CBDs of the formal local authorities, as well as other decentralised nodes, such as the East Rand Mall and Bedfordview. The municipality lacks a primary core, which lends character and identity to the Metro. This newly established institutional area was never planned as a single functional unit as the nine different local authorities in the past focused on their own interests. With the establishment of the EMM it is now necessary to start creating a distinctive identity for the Metropolitan area.

In conclusion it can be stated that Ekurhuleni, due mainly to the legacy of apartheid, is a spatially fragmented, inequitable city. This is by no means a unique situation - in fact, all major urban centres in South Africa suffer to a greater or lesser extent from this fate. The main challenge for the future will be to work towards the eventual creation of an integrated and equitable city where opportunities and choices are maximized for all sectors of the population of the city.

OCTOBER 2010 5 A3.1 A3. COUNCIL AND ADMINISTRATIVE STRUCTURE A3.1 FULL TIME COUNCILLORS

6 OCTOBER 2010 A3.2

A3.2 ADMINISTRATIVE STRUCTURE

OCTOBER 2010 7 A4 A4. EKURHULENI WEBSITE

www.ekurhuleni.gov.za

Selected information from this Guide and updates thereof will from time to time be made available on the Ekurhuleni website. The site also contains other, up to date information about Ekurhuleni. Visit www.ekurhuleni.gov.za

8 OCTOBER 2010

B1 B1. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY: METROPOLITAN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

Introduction

The MSDF has been reviewed at a time when there has been a global economic meltdown. This has been a challenge for those living below the poverty line, the loss of employment and the exacerbation of the socio-economic situation of the marginalised, some of whom are indigent and destitute. It is they who are susceptible to vulnerabilities that appeal to state intervention the most.

It is this context of globalisation that the then Minister of Finance, Trevor Manuel made the following statement in the budget speech of 11 February 2009: “..... If demand falls in Birmingham, factories close in Beijing. If production lines in China slow, demand for commodities from Africa dries up. The vegetables shop next to the mine closes, and the drivers of the delivery vehicles are asked to work short time, on half pay, and if the driver cannot pay his mortgage, the bank forecloses on his bond and the bank writes down in his balance sheet again.”

The recession was so dire in the United States that the state intervened (because of the failure of the unfettered/unbridled market) by bailing out ﬁ nancial institutions from the public coffers/purse. In our own country South Africa, the Independent Development Cooperation bailed out the motor manufacturing industry in a bid to curb job losses. Yet South Africa is a developing economy.

The obvious implication of a recession is reduced revenue for the state, including Council, and therefore the inability to fund capital projects; the delivery of much needed public services; and to maintain facilities, infrastructure and resources. It is worst for a Metro like Ekurhuleni which is located in the Gauteng Province whose economy is planned to grow at 8% by 2014 so as to cater for other provinces and cities that have no potential for growth. Ultimately there has been job loses, low economic growth as well as the inability of the state to develop sustainable livelihoods.

There has also been a challenge with availability of socio-economic data to support and guide some of the strategies developed in the MSDF as reviewed. The last census was undertaken in 2001 and the data collected and published by Statistics South Africa was used in the MSDF.

Although the initial MSDF has been conceptual, this one endeavoured to concretise the concepts at an implementation level. Therefore, issues of climate change, Agenda 21, Millennium Development Goals (MDGs), global economy which might be viewed to be abstract and conceptual, have been addressed with the intention to have them implemented.

OCTOBER 2010 1 B1 It is anticipated that the MSDF as reviewed will go a long way to improve the welfare of the people of Ekurhuleni. Gender mainstreaming, long-term vision and strategy is the mainstay of the MSDF. The MSDF still notes the competitive and comparative advantages of the metro being the OR Tambo airport and manufacturing industry.

The MSDF will give guidance in the context of the academic critique on the issue of wall –to- wall local spatial development frameworks (LSDFs) which were recommended for discarding in the light of the critique since Ekurhuleni is a city found within a developing economy and a developmental state. In this regard there is a need to develop a visionary yet implementable strategic MSDF. The next level of planning is detailed in the regional frameworks for which the administrative staffs have to produce guidance as to the number of planning regions. There will still be a third level of plans for key strategic local areas. These might be local spatial frameworks and/or precinct plans.

Review Process The departure point of this cycle of the MSDF review process focused on the following: o Incorporation of global and continental developmental protocols, as well as current (policy) developments at national (National Planning Commission), and provincial (Gauteng GDS and Global City Region) levels; o Technical Amendment, including the review of the urban edge; o Incorporation of some of the outstanding issues from key plans; and o Incorporation of certain sectoral studies concluded.

Development Objectives

Following the status quo assessment of the spatial structure of the EMM and the resultant development opportunities and constraints, the following development objectives are conﬁ rmed in order to support sustainable development within EMM region. • to create a single, uniform identity for Ekurhuleni Metro (unicity) • to optimise the comparative and competitive advantages of EMM (OR Tambo IA and manufacturing) • to promote the development of a sustainable compact urban structure which optimise the utilisation of all resources – land, engineering services, transportation infrastructure, social infrastructure and ecological resources • to create a sustainable and functional open space network that is accessible to the public and which: o protect, highlight and link the natural elements of EMM to form a high quality, tactile and functional living environment and movement system for fauna, ﬂ ora and humans;

2 OCTOBER 2010 B1 o link-up with, and enhance the man made elements of EMM (i.e. making open spaces such as squares (nodal), the servitudes of important internal roads (linear) and other service servitudes (linear) part of the EMM open space network; and o include as many of the EMM public open spaces (linear-linkage/nodal-cluster) as possible.

• to optimise the job creation capacity of the formal economy in the region by promoting sectoral specialisation and by linking these activity nodes to one another • to integrate the disadvantaged communities of the EMM into the urban fabric by way of o inﬁ ll development on strategically located vacant land o promoting corridor development along the main linkages between these communities and the major concentrations of job opportunities • to develop a well-deﬁ ned system of activity nodes/areas which include retail, industrial and commercial activities, and which holds the bulk of economic activity within the metropolitan area • to actively promote sustainable public transport by: o providing public transport along all the main corridors o promoting mixed use, high density development along the corridors o promoting Transit Orientated Development along the main railway infrastructure • To establish a full range of services within convenient distance for the entire community by way of Multi Purpose Customer Care Areas (CCAs). • Promote sustainable livelihoods development in the townships in particular by: o Encouraging retail development as kick start strategy. o Develop townships into model self sustaining neighbourhood development areas.

Guiding Principles

OCTOBER 2010 3 B1 Framework and negotiations between EMM, and the Gauteng Department of Agriculture and Rural Development (GDARD). Ekurhuleni also approved its biodiversity open space system (EBOSS) which forms part of the structuring elements. This open space system, which includes a primary and secondary open space system, is designed around the sensitive areas (i.e. the drainage systems, the ridges and the pans), parks, the sport/recreation grounds and other large open spaces (i.e. golf courses, offi ce parks/industrial parks with large gardens, cemeteries, etc.). • Focus on Promoting Economic Activity within Metropolitan Activity Area: The next principle for the Ekurhuleni Metro focuses on promoting economic activity within the central Metropolitan Economic Activity Area. This Metropolitan Activity Area holds the bulk of all job opportunities within the metro and includes the current active mines, all the major industrial areas, as well as all the major central business districts and shopping centres within the metro. It is also important to note that, within this Metropolitan Activity Area, the centre of gravity in terms of accessibility, visibility and economic activity lies within the triangular area linking the Central Business Districts of Kempton Park, Boksburg, Germiston and Benoni to one another. In view of current trends and the opportunities for development / redevelopment vested in this area (Rhodesfi eld, Kempton Park, East Rand Mall area, and the agricultural holdings adjacent to the north east and south of OR Tambo IA), should be afforded opportunity to become part of the future core identity. • Establish a system of functionally defi ned (specialised), and geographically demarcated activity nodes within the Metropolitan Activity Area: Having accepted the principle of promoting the Metropolitan Activity Area, the next step in the process will be to functionally demarcate the area into smaller functional units (core areas) in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Activity Area: o The Greater OR Tambo IA area which includes the Kempton Park, Edenvale and Benoni CBDs, Rhodesfi eld, the Isando, Spartan and Jet Park Complex. This area includes two Blue IQ projects; o the Central / Activity Belt which stretches from Germiston in the west up to Benoni CBD in the east and which includes the CBDs of Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni, o The mining activities and all industrial areas in this belt;

• Optimise linkages and connectivity within the Metropolitan Activity Area: With the four Core Areas and the individual Economic Activity Nodes within the Central Metropolitan Activity Area properly demarcated and functionally deﬁ ned, it will be important to next link the various activity nodes within the Metropolitan Activity Area to one another in order to maximise the connectivity between these nodes throughout the Metropolitan Activity Area. There are two main desire lines

4 OCTOBER 2010 B1 in this regard; the east-west desire line between the N12 and the N17 freeways, and a north-south line linking the Tembisa, Kempton Park, Germiston, and Alberton areas with their associated economic activities to one another, but also forming a functional part of the second concentric ring of development around the Greater Joburg Metro area. • Link disadvantaged communities to the Metropolitan Activity Area via a system of Public Transport Corridors: It is essential to link the communities from the four disadvantaged settlements to this Metropolitan Activity Area. This is achieved by designing the EMM public transport system in such a way that it feeds into the Metropolitan Activity Area. • Promote mixed use high-density development along linkages (development corridors) and in and around the activity nodes: In support of this, the EMM should then promote mixed use, high density development along these public transport corridors (subject to Road Access Management requirement) and in the areas in an around the activity nodes. • Structure the passenger transport system to support linkages (development corridors): As mentioned above the passenger transport system should be designed around the main strategic linkages within the EMM area. It is also highlighted in this regard that it is essential to promote Transit Orientated Development around the railway network within the EMM and within the core economic triangle. • Extend (and promote) economic activities into marginalised residential areas to become part of the Metropolitan Activity Area: The retail kick start implementation strategy will be promoted as a short term measure and the development of the PDAs into self sustaining neighbourhoods; as well as the development of a system of development nodes and corridors. • Promote inﬁ ll residential development in vacant areas within the metropolitan activity area as a priority and within the urban development boundary in general: Apart from the strategic linkages mentioned above, the EMM should then as a priority also promote inﬁ ll residential development in all the strategically located vacant areas that are suitable for development. • Focus on upgrading of engineering and social infrastructure in previously disadvantaged areas (Service Upgrading Priority Areas): The four disadvantaged areas should as a principle be declared as Service Upgrading Priority Areas in line with the Millinium Develoment Goals (MDGs). • Maintain and upgrade residential quality in rest of the area (Private Vehicle Orientated): As for the other residential areas within Ekurhuleni, the EMM should focus on maintaining the quality of life and the residential character of these areas as best as possible. As a priority the residential quality and safety and security of these areas

OCTOBER 2010 5 B1 should thus be promoted. • Promote social and municipal service delivery by an evenly distributed system of Customer Care Areas(CCAs): As a last principle the EMM should then promote the delivery of social and municipal services which would include amongst others clinics, pension payout points, police services, municipal service points, taxi ranks, retail activities, recreational activities and any other related activities in Multi Purpose Customer Care Areas which are evenly distributed throughout the entire metropolitan area of jurisdiction.

SDF Proposals

The proposed Spatial Development Framework for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality based on the broad MSDF objectives and principles. The structuring elements are discussed in more detail below. The SDF proposals are depicted on Map 11.

6 OCTOBER 2010 B1

OCTOBER 2010 7 B1 1. Activity Nodes or Areas: As previously highlighted there is a wide range of activity nodes or areas within the Metropolitan Activity Area which can be divided into four main core areas. These are the Greater OR Tambo International Airport Activity Area, the Central Activity Belt, the Alrode-Wadeville Corridor, and the Far East Activity Belt.

The Greater OR Tambo OR Tambo International Airport Activity Area includes the three Blue IQ projects (OR Tambo International Airport, Gautrain, and the OR Tambo IDZ, and Kempton Park, the proposed corporate ofﬁ ce precinct in Rhodesﬁ eld, the industrial complex of Isando, Spartan and Jet Park, the R21 Development Corridor and the Olifantsfontein-Clayville industrial area.

The Central Activity Belt comprises of the CBDs of Germiston, Boksburg, and Benoni, as well as mining activities and the industrial areas of Germiston, Anderbolt and Benoni South.

The Alrode-Wadeville Corridor includes the industrial areas of Wadeville and Alrode and is already a Blue IQ project.

Alberton CBD can functionally be linked to both the Central Activity Belt and the Wadeville-Alrode corridor. Rand Airport has the potential to support both these activity areas in future by way of a freight service.

The Far Eastern Activity Belt includes the CBDs of Brakpan, Springs and Nigel as well as the industrial areas of Vulcania, New Era, Nufﬁ eld and the Vorsterskroon and Pretoriusstad industrial areas around Nigel.

This concept is derived from a study completed during August 2000, titled: An Industrial Revitalisation Strategy for the Far East Rand. The Dunnottar Airfi eld as well as the Brakpan and Springs Airfi elds could play a signifi cant role in the development of this area in future.

As far as retail is concerned it is proposed that the 9 Central Business Districts which currently exist in the Ekurhuleni Metro area be maintained and strengthened. These areas are highly accessible by car and (in most cases) by rail and therefore caters for the entire EMM community. Billions of rand of transportation infrastructure, engineering services and buildings have been created in these areas, and the Metro cannot afford to neglect these areas or to allow these to decay. As and where there is a need/opportunity for the development of larger regional shopping malls, these should be located within the functional area of one of the CBDs in order to prevent these Malls from becoming competing entities for the CBDs. If correctly developed, a shopping mall can actually contribute towards the improvement of a CBD. As a principle, however, a decentralised regional shopping mall should not be supported by the EMM.

8 OCTOBER 2010 B1 Local and neighbourhood centres can, however, be, allowed at decentralised locations as and where the need arises.

The industrial areas in the Metro include the full range of industrial activities ranging from heavy and toxic industries to light industrial, commercial and warehousing activities. Within the context of the four Core Areas identiﬁ ed, some planning now needs to be done towards the functional specialisation of these industrial areas – both in terms of local and regional context. The strategy worked out for the Far East Activity Belt could serve as an example in this regard.

When looking at the spatial distribution of the industrial areas as well as the various retail nodes, it is evident that the triangular area around the OR Tambo International Airport represents a core focus area for the Ekurhuleni Metro. Large portions of land to the south and east of OR Tambo OR Tambo International Airport are still undeveloped/ underdeveloped which enhances the potential for large scale development/ redevelopment of these areas in future. These developments could be used to establish the identity of the Ekurhuleni Metro in future. The agricultural holdings area of Boksburg directly to the south of the OR Tambo in particular, has the potential to be developed in such a way that it promotes the identity of Ekurhuleni. Due to its proximity to OR Tambo International Airport, there will, however, be a limit on the height of development and the type of development (noise zones) that will be allowed. The same applied to the portion of the R21 corridor to the north of OR Tambo OR Tambo International Airport. The area south of OR Tambo OR Tambo International Airport already holds the East Rand Mall and associated developments. It is proposed that this precinct be developed for mixed use purposes mainly focused on retail and ofﬁ ce developments. The area is highly visual (especially from the surrounding freeway network), and therefore care should be taken that all developments in the area are aesthetically attractive in order to contribute towards establishing the identity and image of the new Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality.

A strong nodal network is promoted within the Ekurhuleni Metro. The types of nodes are to be delineated and deﬁ ned in greater detail in the RSDFs (whose regions are still to be identiﬁ ed. The following guidelines will serve as input to these processes.

2. Infi ll Development Priority Areas: There are fi ve main areas which are a priority in terms of infi ll development. These are the areas previously occupied by mining activities in the vicinity of Germiston (28), around the central park of Boksburg, to the east of Benoni (30), and to the northwest and west of the Springs CBD. All fi ve these pockets of land are strategically located within the core areas of the EMM and some detailed work have already been done on the suitability for the development of areas.

OCTOBER 2010 9 B1 3. Strategic Development Areas: As far as future development expansion is concerned, 8 major precincts were identiﬁ ed. The ﬁ rst is in the northern part of Tembisa around the Clayville industrial area. There are already development pressures in this area in the form of informal settlement, and it is believed that pressure for expansion into this area will increase in future. Although development in this area may seem peripheral in the context of Ekurhuleni, this land is very well located in the context of the Midrand strip, major developments in the Centurion area which are pushing southwards, and the R21 corridor.

The second Strategic Development Area represents the Esselenpark / Kaalfontein area in the vicinity of the R21 corridor. The land is strategically located in a triangle between Tembisa to the north, the residential areas of Kempton Park to the west, and the proposed R21 corridor to the east. It also forms part of the Tembisa – OR Tambo International Airport corridor as it is served by both the commuter railway line and route K105.

The third Strategic Development Area is the area to the northeast of the Johannesburg International Airport. The development pressures evident in this area stem from both close proximity of the OR Tambo International Airport, as well as the northward residential expansion pressure from Benoni.

The fourth and very important Strategic Development Area is the area to the north and northwest of the Daveyton/Etwatwa complex and in regional context the development of this area represents an inward direction of growth for the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex towards the Greater OR Tambo International Airport area. Several subsidised housing projects are already underway in this area. The next two areas of strategic importance are the area to the east of, and between Kwa-Thema and Duduza and the area adjacent to the west of Tsakane.

The seventh area of strategic signiﬁ cance is the area to the south of Sunwardpark and Van Dyk Park and the last one is the area to the south of Kathorus. The following areas are to be focussed on as priority development areas: • The Leeupoort area; • The northern areas of Benoni.

4. Residential Development in Strategic Development Areas and Other Focus Areas (Inﬁ ll Development Priority Areas): The principle of the establishment of viable communities is applied to residential development, whether housing is provided by the private sector or the public sector (low-income housing). In terms of policy, this implies that residential areas should be vibrant areas which are self-sustaining in the local neighbourhood context, but linked to urban opportunities through the movement network. The policy entrenches the principle that access enables empowerment.

10 OCTOBER 2010 B1 To achieve this, the strategy of residential infi ll development in Ekurhuleni, particularly in the core area between the N12 and N17 freeways is promoted, to bring residential opportunities in closer proximity to economic and employment opportunities. Although land prices in this area tend to be high, the long term effi ciency in terms of the optimal utilisation of existing infrastructure and limitation of travel distances should be considered. The comprehensive database regarding vacant land (publicly and privately owned) serves as an important tool in this regard. According to the detailed Study on the Strategic Economic Triangle (2004), the land stretching from the Germiston CBD in the west to Benoni CBD in the east is privately owned and poses challenges for public interventions. EMM can infl uence development around this strategically located land through incentives and development policies.

Development should also be encouraged in traditional growth areas, such as the areas to the west of Meyersdal where there is a strong demand for land, without compromising the existing environmental integrity.

5. Core Economic Development Triangle: In addition to these areas, the Strategy for Ekurhuleni Core Economic Development Triangle has identiﬁ ed four major strategic development areas:

The fi rst is the Rhodesfi eld residential area which is situated immediately to the west of OR Tambo International Airport. The Rhodesfi eld Gautrain Station has been completed and Rhodesfi eld is earmarked for redevelopment into offi ce parks. This has the potential to become a major support function to the OR Tambo International Airport and it could contribute signifi cantly towards establishing Ekurhuleni as an offi ce address.

The second is the Pomona Agricultural Holdings to the northeast of OR Tambo International Airport which functionally forms part of the R21 corridor. This area will in future feed directly into the midfi eld developments of OR Tambo International Airport via route K 90 and it is believed that the midfi eld developments of OR Tambo International Airport will stimulate economic development in this area signifi cantly. In the short term the bulk of the development in the Pomona area takes place adjacent to the R21 freeway which at present has the best development potential.

The third area of strategic signiﬁ cance is the Bardene/Bartlett area immediately to the south of OR Tambo International Airport. It is believed that this area will in future be able to serve three main functions. The portion immediately to the south of OR Tambo International Airport and to the north of the N12 freeway should be developed in such a way that it compliments the ACSA Park development which is intended to take place immediately to the north thereof. Typical development that could take place in this area is of high tech industrial parks and light industrial parks.

OCTOBER 2010 11 B1 Immediately to the south thereof on the opposite side of the N12 freeway there is an emerging local activity node (around the East Rand Mall) which serves the local community in terms of retail as well as a mixture of land uses taking place along the Northrand Road as well as Trichard and Elizabeth Roads in a north-south direction. These three routes represent activity spines in local context.

There are still large pockets of vacant land available in this area (agricultural holdings which could be intensiﬁ ed and utilised for inﬁ ll development). The area has great visual exposure from the existing freeway network (N12 and R21) and it will have future exposure via routes PWV 14 and 13. The aesthetic quality of the area will be enhanced once the interim land uses have been faced out in 5 years time. The southern portion of Beyerspark should be developed for predominantly residential purposes accommodating the higher and middle income groups in future.

The fourth area of strategic signiﬁ cance in the study area is the mining belt to the south between the industrial area of Boksburg and Germiston CBD. This area currently holds in excess of 20 000 informal structures and it is proposed that the upgrading and formalisation of these units take place within the mining belt on mining land that becomes available for development. These portions of land which fall within the functional reach of the railway system and speciﬁ cally railway stations should be developed for transit oriented development purposes.

As far as connectivity and movement is concerned the main issue in the area is to promote north-south movement to the east of the OR Tambo International Airport. This has been achieved to a large degree with the recent upgrading of rout K157. To the south of OR Tambo International Airport the current road network comprising rout K90 and Trichard and Elizabeth Road currently carries large volumes of trafﬁ c with frequent incidences of congestion. It this is to be fully developed Council will need to properly plan to accommodate all trafﬁ c movements in this area.

The third aspect of concern regarding connectivity is the functional linkage between Germiston and the OR Tambo International Airport. At present there are no direct linkages between these two areas and the only functional links that can be achieved will be via route PWV 14 and portion of route PWV 13. It is proposed that the possibility of implementing at least one leg per direction of these two facilities be investigated as soon as possible. It is crucial to the future successful development of the mining belt that the connectivity between OR Tambo International Airport and Germiston CBD be established as soon as possible.

6. Service Upgrading Priority Areas: There are four major Service Upgrading Priority Areas in the Metro; being the four complexes of disadvantaged communities including Tembisa, Kathorus, Kwatsaduza and Daveyton/Etwatwa. As a principle the EMM will focus on development of these townships as model neighbourhoods with ‘CBDs” in their own right in the long term.

12 OCTOBER 2010 B1 In the short to medium term retail development should be allowed in terms of the approved retail implementation strategy as well as its capital expenditure and operational programmes towards upgrading the services and facilities in these areas to levels comparable with that of the rest of the Metro.

7. EMM Regional Open Space: The Ekurhuleni Biodiversity Open Space Strategy (EBOSS) has been approved. It is the basis of the detailed Strategic Environmental Assessment which is required by law.

8. Mining As far as mining is concerned, there are four major concentrations of mining land in the area which includes the area in the Reiger Park vicinity, the area to the east of Benoni, the area to the east of Springs and three sites in the vicinity of the Kwatsaduza complex.

As illustrated in the Regional Overview of Ekurhuleni, the contribution of mining to the economy of the region has declined to almost marginal proportions. The mining legacy has however left prominent tracks on the spatial structure of the area. The objective of spatial restructuring implies that planning should be done to give direction to the future uses of mining land.

The precise impact of mining activities on the environment is, however, critical information required for land use planning. While mining operations have already ceased in many areas, the reclamation and rehabilitation of mining land is a very time consuming process. Operational mining activities are also envisaged to continue for the considerable future (at least thirty years).

Some of the vestiges of past mining activities in the area include surface mining areas, shallowly undermined land, slimes dams, mine dumps and residential villages. The ﬁ ndings of detailed investigations conducted into the future use of mining areas, indicate that the chances of meaningful use of these areas for other purposes in the short term are virtually zero.

While reclamation of mining areas is currently underway, it should be taken into account that after reclamation of a slimes dam, a waiting period of at least 10 years is imposed before the land can be safely developed for human habitation.

The pollution caused by mining activities is a further factor to be considered in land use proposals. Three main types of pollution have been identiﬁ ed: • Radon gas pollution; • Chemical pollution; and • Dust pollution (posing health hazards and a nuisance factor).

OCTOBER 2010 13 B1 In general development can occur on undermined areas, subject to building restrictions and environmental considerations. Because of the cost involved in the rehabilitation of mining land, high-value land uses are required to make development feasible. Construction may take place on shallowly undermined land, (shallower that 90m of the shallowest reef) provided that a detailed investigation is done and that the development and proposed measures are approved by the Department of Minerals and Energy Affairs and GDARD.

Desk-top information is available regarding the impact of mining operations for most of the mining land in Ekurhuleni. In the case of Germiston and Benoni, detailed investigations have been done to determine the suitability of land for development. In the case of Benoni detailed land use proposals were done accordingly. Land use proposals have also been done for mining land in Boksburg, although these are not based on the same level of investigations than in the other two instances.

The Hloekisa Project is intended to conduct detailed investigations for all the mining land posing a possibility for reclamation in the next twenty years. In the interim, the Spatial Development Framework indicates existing mining areas and broad development proposals for areas subject to possible reclamation.

9. Urban Edge: (See MSDF Map 11) The Urban Edge was introduced to the EMM community through the IDP community participation process, including the Development Forum meetings. The Urban Edge as depicted on the MSDF. The following should be noted regarding the boundary as illustrated on Map 11: o In line with the provincial guidelines, the EMM conﬁ rms that this line can and may be amended in future as and where this may be required, based on the merit of the situation. o The Urban Edge in the vicinity of the R21 freeway will shift eastwards to follow the Rietvlei stream as approved in the 1999 Gauteng Spatial Development Framework (Phase 3). This is proposed to ensure that proper development on both sides of the freeway is possible, as it is a development corridor.

In terms of the Ekurhuleni Environmental Management Framework and in line with the recommendations of the Provincial Urban Edge Policy, an Ecological/Environmental edge has been identiﬁ ed for this Ekurhuleni. This line indicates the line beyond which no future or long term development should take place, from an Environmental point of view. This line must not be confused with the Urban Edge.

Subject to all environmental and other conditions, the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality will, as a principle, support development proposals in the vicinity of the R21 freeway both to the east and west which can and will promote the development of the R21 corridor concept as planned by the Metropolitan Municipality.

14 OCTOBER 2010 B1 The provincial edge was amended in the following areas: o the area to the northeast and north of Pomona, Farramere and Rynﬁ eld; o the area to the north of the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex; o the area between Nigel and the Kwatsaduza complex; o The U-shaped area to the west of Kwatsaduza, south of Sunward Park, Dalpark and Dalview, and east of Vosloorus.

More detailed motivation for these amendments will be forwarded to the Gauteng Department of Economic Affairs and Finance.

10. Peripheral Uses The entire area around the Urban Edge which falls directly outside the Urban Edge is proposed to be earmarked for what is termed Peripheral Uses. It is virtually impossible to have a sharp distinction between urban activities and extensive agriculture and therefore it is envisaged that a transition area will develop around the Urban Edge which may comprise of a range of different peripheral uses. It is proposed that low intensity land uses like agricultural holdings, rural residential uses, low intensity service industries (typically those occurring on agricultural holdings) as well as urban agriculture be promoted in the fringe area around the Urban Edge. If properly developed, these uses can actually support the Urban Edge and serve as a barrier for the future expansion of the urban environment. It is also necessary for the EMM to optimally utilise all the opportunities for urban agriculture in this area as and where it occurs – especially those areas near to the disadvantaged communities.

It must also be noted that the central area and to the north of Daveyton-Etwatwa holds some potential for LED development. This area also falls under the peripheral uses.

11. Extensive Agriculture The areas outside the Urban Edge which do not fall within the peripheral use zone are earmarked for extensive agriculture. These areas are the more remote parts of the Ekurhuleni Metro which are furthest removed from the urban activity.

It must be emphasised that the people living in these areas also need services like retail, health, education, etc. and the development of such services and facilities must be catered for in the rural areas despite the fact that these areas fall outside the Urban Edge. The concept of concentrating such facilities at pre-determined Multi-Purpose Customer Care Areas in the rural areas should be promoted.

Way forward

In conclusion the spatial geography of Ekurhuleni, besides being dysfunctional internally, its towns evolved and grew functionally around developments in the

OCTOBER 2010 15 B1 Johannesburg CBD. The distance of the metro from the Johannesburg CBD makes Ekurhuleni unique. This necessitates robustness and ﬂ exibility in the development of Ekurhuleni as a city with in particular spatial form and identity. The report on the recently established National Planning Commission is more relevant in this context in that it states with regard to the need for a national vision that this is a learning process and government is likely to make mistakes along the way as follows:

“It is not necessary to ﬁ rst construct a complete six lane highway before we can embark on a journey”. Green Paper on the National Planning Commission 2009.”

This journey to construct a ‘six lane lane highway’ for Ekurhuleni started in 2000.

The MSDF should be reviewed in the context of the (1) establishment of the National Planning Commission (NPC) which still has to provide a national vision and national strategic planning; (2) the delimitation of new wards from 88 to 101 for the 2011 local government elections; (3) as well as the fact that the next census will be conducted next year 2011; and (4) For the sake of comprehensiveness and public participation, this MSDF will be work in progress. It will however still be part of the approved 2010/2011 IDP.

The Spatial Development Framework is being reviewed currently. The Draft Reviewed Document is contained on the CD provided as Annexure “C”.

16 OCTOBER 2010 B2 B2. REGIONAL SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORKS

INTRODUCTION

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality completed and adopted a Spatial Development Framework for the Ekurhuleni area in June 2005, as part of its Integrated Development Plan (IDP). During the formulation of the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework, the need for more detailed land use guidelines was identiﬁ ed and it was decided to formulate Spatial Development Frameworks for each of the three Service Delivery Regions in Ekurhuleni. This document presents the Spatial Development Framework for the Southern Region, which was formulated with the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework as premise.

The Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework (SDF) highlights priority investment and development areas and will serve as a guide to decision-makers and investors. What should be emphasised regarding the SDF is that it is an integral component of the IDP and translates this plan into spatial implications and guidelines for development. It is therefore not a tool to be used on in isolation, but should support decision-making within the context of the IDP.

The Regional Spatial Development Framework represents the second of three levels of plans to be established in the Ekurhuleni Metro. The three levels of plans are as follows: • Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework; • Service Delivery Region Spatial Development Frameworks; and • Local Spatial Development Frameworks.

Three Regional Spatial Development Frameworks were approved on 5 June 2007 by the EMM City Development portfolio Committee. An Executive Summery of each is included in this Section.

OCTOBER 2010 17 B2.1 B2.1 NORTHERN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

1. BACKGROUND

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality completed and adopted a Spatial Development Framework for the Ekurhuleni Municipality in June 2005, as part of its Integrated Development Plan (IDP). During the formulation of the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework, the need for more detailed land use guidelines was identiﬁ ed and it was decided to formulate Spatial Development Frameworks for each of the now defunct three Service Delivery Regions in Ekurhuleni. This document presents a summary of the Spatial Development Framework for the Northern Planning Area (scope of the area is still deﬁ ned by the boundary of the erstwhile Northern Service Delivery Region), which was formulated with the Metropolitan Spatial Development framework as premise.

It highlights priority investment and development areas and will serve as a guide to decision-makers and investors. What should be emphasized regarding the SDF is that it is an integral component of the IDP and translates this plan into spatial implications and guidelines for development. It is therefore not a tool to be used in isolation, but should support decision-making within the context of the IDP.

The SDF for the Northern Planning Area represents the second of three levels of plans in Ekurhuleni Municipality: • Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework; • Service Delivery Region Spatial Development Frameworks; and • Local/Zonal/Precinct Spatial Development Frameworks.

The Northern Planning Area comprises the area of Tembisa, Kempton Park, Edenvale, Bedfordview, Bapsfontein areas, Olifantsfontein/Clayville areas and portions of the former Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni municipal areas. It borders onto the City of Johannesburg in the west, the City of Tshwane and Kungwini Municipalities in the north and east respectively. In the south it borders onto the Southern and Eastern planning areas.

2. DEMOGRAPHICS AND POPULATION PROJECTIONS

The Northern Planning Area houses 658 800, which represents 27% of the total population of the Ekurhuleni metropolitan area. The population growth rate in the Northern Planning Area is the lowest in the metropolitan area, with 2.5% per annum, compared to the 2.6% of the Eastern area and the 3.1% of the Southern area.

18 OCTOBER 2010 B2.1 3. ECONOMIC FEATURES

Lower income areas such as Tembisa are characterized by a high number of young people who are in future going to complete for limited employment opportunities. The level of education and skills in lower income communities can often not be matched with the required knowledge and skills for available job opportunities. High numbers of illegal immigrants also compete with locals for work.

High quality residential environments make the Northern Planning Area an attractive residential destination for high income families with signiﬁ cant buying power (e.g. Ferrarmere, Glen Marais, Rynﬁ eld, Bedfordview etc), which supports the development of new and expansion of existing business enterprises.

Three out of four of provincial strategic importance BIQ projects in Ekurhuleni metropolitan area are situated in the Northern Planning Area, namely, the Gautrain, O.R Tambo Airport and the IDZ. The aforementioned development projects possess immense potential to unleash unprecedented market forces with far reaching positive economic spin-offs beyond the borders of this Northern Planning Area and Ekurhuleni Metropolitan borders.

4. SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK PROPOSALS

This Spatial Development Framework reﬂ ects the predominant land uses anticipated in the different parts of the Northern Planning Area.

On the scale of the SDF the following aspects have been identiﬁ ed as spatial structuring elements around which other land uses are structured. A short description of the each of these elements follows below:

4.1 Urban Development Boundary

The urban development boundary is a line, which spatially represents a policy initiative aim at redirecting patterns of urban development. This is done by forcing parties involved in urban development to ﬁ rst consider all options available for development within the urban boundary, before considering development outside the urban boundary. The intention with the urban development boundary is not to stiﬂ e development. The intention is rather to optimize the utilization of opportunities for development within this boundary and promote the development of a more compact urban environment that is economically more sustainable and preserves the natural environment, as well as land with high agricultural potential in the surrounding rural areas.

OCTOBER 2010 19 B2.1 4.2 O. R. Tambo International Airport (ORTIA)

The ORTIA and surrounding industrial and commercial development forms a major industrial /commercial district in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area. The ORTIA and its surrounds represent the important strategically located land in Gauteng Province in terms of the Gauteng Spatial Development Framework (Phase 3 document, 2000). The Airport is one of the three (other two being the IDZ and Gautrain) Blue IQ projects of strategic signiﬁ cance being planned in the area.

The Airport freight and linked export processing zone to the east of the Airport is an area of growing economic importance, and has a direct impact on the surrounding area and creates a demand for development opportunities along the R21 Development Corridor. There is also a demand for more hotel facilities near the Airport, as most passengers at present are accommodated in Sandton area or even further from the Airport.

4.3 Freeways and Major Roads

The freeways proposed through the Northern Planning Area that are of most signiﬁ cance at this stage of development in the metropolitan area and the northern area in particular, are the PWV 13, PWV 14 and PWV15. The PWV13 is proposed to serve as an extension of the existing R21 freeway, linking it to the existing N17 and N3 to the south. The proposed PWV 14, will link the ORTIA through the R 21 Freeway to the north and Johannesburg CBD through the M2-Motorway to the southwest. The proposed PWV15 will link the existing R21 freeway past the eastern side of the ORTIA to the existing N12 freeway.

4.4 Rail Lines

Signiﬁ cant commuter orientated railway lines through the Northern Planning Area serve as a strong basis for public transport and link the lower income residential areas across the metropolitan area to the employment areas around the ORTIA. The Gautrain initiative by the Gauteng Provincial Government to get people to make use of public (rail) transport, rather than private vehicles, also runs partially through the Northern Planning Area.

4.5 R21-Development Corridor

The R21-freeway is supported by the existing Route K105 (Pretoria Road), as well as the existing railway line that runs along Route K105. Therefore, as regard to the transportation function, the R21-freeway has the potential to serve as the regional mobility spine along which intensive land use can be accommodated; hence the Municipality has established a development corridor between the ORTIA and its

20 OCTOBER 2010 B2.1 common boundary with the City of Tshwane to the north (Please consult the R21- Corridor Development LSDF Brochure).

Natural Watercourses

On the scale of the Northern Planning Area the signiﬁ cance of natural watercourses stem from the associated concerns about the conservation of natural open spaces, as well as the effect of catchment areas on gravitational engineering services (such as sewer storm-water).

Extensive Agricultural

The Bapsfontein area is earmarked for extensive agricultural. This entire area is situated out-side the urban development boundary and consists predominantly of natural open space, crop farming, rural residential uses, as well as the Sentra Rand railway -shunting yard in the eastern corner of the sector.

Central Business Districts (CBDs)

The CBDs of Kempton Park and Edenvale occur in the Northern Planning Area. It is proposed that these two CBDs, which currently exist in the Northern Planning Area be maintained and strengthen. These areas are highly accessible by car and in the case of Kempton Park CBD, by rail.

Regional Activity Node

Existing decentralized regional activity nodes (in particular regional shopping malls) that affect the CBDs in the Northern Planning Area include Festival Mall, Eastgate, East Rand Mall, Lake Side Mall and Morthmead Mall/Square.

Existing Industrial

The main concentration of existing industrial areas in the Northern Planning Area, occur on the western side of the ORTIA, in the areas known as Isando, Spartan, Jetpark and Elandsfontein. Other prominent existing industrial areas in the Northern Planning Area include Clayville/Olifantsfontein, Commercia, Chloorkop, Sebenza, Eastleigh, Lilianton and Anderbolt.

Proposed Industrial

When looking at the spatial distribution of the industrial areas as well as the various retail nodes, it is evident that the triangular area around the ORTIA represents a core focus area for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. Large portions of land to the

OCTOBER 2010 21 B2.1 south and east of ORTIA are still undeveloped /underdeveloped, which enhances the potential for large-scale development/re-development of these areas in future. The same applies to the land on either side of the R21-freeway (the R21 development corridor) to the north of ORTIA.

Mixed Use

Mixed land uses normally occur where parts of the existing urban environment (normally residential areas) is inﬁ ltrated by new land uses that did not historically occur in particular areas. The end result is normally a variety of non-residential uses, combined with a variety of residential typologies and densities. Normally no predominant land use or character can be identiﬁ ed in such an area. The SDF for the Northern Planning Area Document has earmarked areas where mixed land uses are recommended.

Mining/Quarries

Very little mining activities take place in the Northern Planning Area, other than mining activities in the central mining/activity belt encroaching over the boundary between the Northern Planning Area and the Southern and Eastern Planning Areas.

Existing Residential

The existing residential component of the Northern Planning Area for housing for communities along the full range of income levels, from the lower income residential areas (e.g. Tembisa/Phomolong/Winnie Mandela Park/Tswelopele) to the high income residential areas, such as Bedfordview, Glen Marais, and Ferrarmere etc.

Proposed Residential

Some new residential developments are proposed. The existing residential areas also experience residential inﬁ ll development in the form of new residential developments (medium to high density) on open land within these areas.

5. IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY

5.1 Strategic Spatial Priorities

The following strategic spatial initiatives/programmes/projects should be pursued by the municipality in the Northern Planning Area towards implementation of the Spatial Development Framework. The order of the items listed does not, however, reﬂ ect any order of priority or importance:

• Installation of municipal services infrastructure in and around the R21-Development

22 OCTOBER 2010 B2.1 Corridor, Pomona area including the area to the east and northeast of the ORTIA to accommodate the pressure for new development in these areas; • Facilitate the development of a number of major road linkages; • Construction of new/off -ramps, to enhance accessibility to and from existing freeways, at strategic points along such freeways; • Construction of Dann Road and the Elgin Road bridge to alleviate severe traffi c congestion at the Elgin Road Bridge ( at the intersection with Pretoria Road) and to provide a direct transportation link from Tembisa (and the Kempton Park North suburbs) to the employment areas around the R21 development corridor and ORTIA; • Regional Density Policy; • Rhodesfi eld & Kempton Park CBD ((revise current LSDF in light of Gautrain plan and the Urban Renewal Strategy); • Tembisa CBD infrastructure Development; • Construction - PWV 14, PWV 13, K 86, K111 & 220; • Regional Integrated Transport Plan; • Urban regeneration - Implementation (CBDs); • Facilitate the regeneration of the Edenvale and Kempton Park CBDs through the implementation of the Urban Renewal Programme; • Implementation of the transportation corridor concept along route K105; • Facilitate implementation of the proposed extension of the railway line in Tembisa from the Leralla Station past Phomolong, Rabie Ridge, Ivory Park and Winnie Mandela Park, with a loop back to Tembisa; • Upgrade of roads and engineering services infrastructure in the lower income residential areas of Tembisa/Phomolong /Winnie Mandela Park/Tswelopele; • Develop taxi facilities at all railway stations, in order to improve accessibility to and from the railway stations and encourage the use of trains, by making it more convenient; • Link the railway line from the existing Leralla railway station in Tembisa southwards to the existing railway line in the Chloorkop area, which leads further south to the employment areas on the western side of the ORTIA; • Liaise with the Gauteng Provincial Government towards the planning and implementation of the proposed Gautrain project within the Northern Planning Area with a station in Rhodesfi eld and inside the ORTIA. This will include revising existing Areas 4 & 5 LSDFs applicable in both Rhodesfi eld and Kempton Park CBD areas; • Conduct a land audit to determine the availability and land take-up rate for future development in different land use sectors, e.g. industrial/commercial, business, subsidy housing. This will serve as basis to determine a more informed urban edge/ urban development boundary and to plan for future installation of bulk engineering infrastructure. This will concurrently facilitate the speedy delivery of housing

OCTOBER 2010 23 B2.1 programmes since new LSDFs /revised LSDFs will ensure that parcels of land are optimized in line with the inclusive human settlement approach/policy as adopted by the Municipality’s Housing Department.

PRIORITY SPATIAL ISSUES-forthcoming from this situational analysis and the proceeding description of the status quo in the northern SDR, certain key issues were identiﬁ ed.

• Pressure for new development in areas towards the north and east of O.R. Tambo International Airport (ORTIA); • Confl ict between the pressure of development as opposed to the need to preserve valuable agricultural land and environmental sensitive areas; • Numerous waste disposal sites and quarries (such as in Chloorkop and the northern parts of Germiston) need rehabilitation; • The character of up market, sought after residential areas are under threat; • The options of land uses in certain areas are limited; • Existing low income residential areas far away from areas of work; • Incapacity of road systems/networks to accommodate high traffi c volumes resulting in traffi c congestion; • Decay of CBDs and older industrial areas; • Informal settlement together with a huge demand for affordable housing; • A lack of well maintained public open space, sport facilities, health care facilities and other communities facilities prevail in the lower income residential areas; • Need for upgrade of road networks and engineering services infrastructure in lower income residential areas; • Limited formal business centres are developed in lower residential areas result in leakage of spending power from these areas; • Effects of AIDS on economic development and the demand for health care facilities, welfare facilities and cemeteries; • Mismatch of existing skills and education to available job opportunities; • A number of cross boundary issues relating to municipal services still need to be resolved ,as a result of the demarcation of new municipal boundaries; and • OR Tambo International Airport (ORTIA) and surrounding industrial commercial developments as central industrial/commercial hub within the Ekurhuleni metropolitan area.

24 OCTOBER 2010 B2.1 DEVELOPMENT OBJECTIVES-The following development objectives have been formulated to march the proceeding key issues as closely as possible, with the aim of addressing the various issues as directly as possible.

• To be supportive in creating a single, uniform identity for Ekurhuleni Metro (unicity); • To promote the development of a compact urban structure which optimise the utilisation of all resources; • To promote the formulation of an environmental strategy for the NSDR to; • To optimise the job creation capacity of the formal economy in the NPA; • To integrate the disadvantaged communities of the NSDR/NPA into the urban fabric; • To develop a well deﬁ ned system of nodes which holds the bulk of economic activity of the NSDR/NPA; • To actively promote sustainable public transport; and • To establish a full range of services within convenient distance for entire communities.

DEVELOPMENT CONCEPT-The development concept elaborates on each of the development objectives listed.

• To be supportive in creating a single, uniform identity for Ekurhuleni Metro (unicity); • To promote the development of a compact urban structure which optimise the utilisation of all resources; • To promote the formulation of an environmental strategy for the NSDR/NPA to address, suggest actions and allocate responsibility to direct sustainable environmental management in the NSDR/NPA; • To optimise the job creation capacity of the formal economy in the Region/NPA by promoting specialisation in manufacturing, transport, ﬁ nance, local retail, and institutional uses; • To integrate the disadvantaged communities of the NSDR/NPA into the urban fabric; • To develop a well deﬁ ned system of nodes which hold the bulk of economic activity of the NSDR/NPA; • To actively promote sustainable public transport; and • To establish a full range of services within convenient distance for entire communities by way of Multi Purpose Service Delivery Centres.

OCTOBER 2010 25 B2.1 NORTHERN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

26 OCTOBER 2010 B2.2 B2.2 SOUTHERN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

1. BACKGROUND

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality completed and adopted a Spatial Development Framework for the Ekurhuleni area in March 2003, as part of its Integrated Development Plan (IDP). During the formulation of the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework, the need for more detailed land use guidelines was identiﬁ ed and it was decided to formulate Spatial Development Frameworks for each of the three Service Delivery Regions in Ekurhuleni. This document presents the Spatial Development Framework for the Southern Region, which was formulated with the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework as premise.

The Southern Area comprises the areas of Germiston, Katlehong, Tokoza, Vosloorus and portions of the old Alberton, Boksburg, Brakpan and Eikenhof areas. The economic structure of the Southern Region is focused on the established industrial nodes of Alrode and Wadeville. The sub-region is well connected to the east-west mining belt and core economic activity areas in Johannesburg and Ekurhuleni.

Two of the four Economic Activity Areas identiﬁ ed in terms of the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework are situated in the Southern Area, namely: • The Central Activity Belt, comprising the CBDs of Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni, as well as mining activities and prominent industrial areas of Germiston, Anderbolt and Benoni South; and • The Alrode-Wadeville Corridor, which includes the industrial areas of Wadeville and Alrode (also a Blue IQ project).

OCTOBER 2010 27 B2.2 2. DEMOGRAPHICS

38% of the Metro population resides in the Southern Region, which represents 645 634 people - the largest portion of the metro. The population grew by 3.1% from 1996 to 2002 compared to 2.7% of the metro as a whole, an increase of 150 000 people in six years. The region has a projected growth rate of 1.7 up until 2010, which further decreases to 0.7 until 2015. This is largely due to the anticipated effect of HIV and AIDS.

3. SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT PROPOSALS

The Southern Region Spatial Development Framework comprises the following key components and refers to the Map on the reverse side of this pamphlet: • Regional Activity Nodes in the area include the CBDs of Alberton, Germiston and Boksburg; • Transit Orientated Development Points: Additional activity nodes that are to be developed as part of Transport Orientated Development are the Ramakonopi node1, Goldspot node2 and Natalspruit node3 and Spruitview node4; • Community Service nodes that are of strategic importance are: Tshonweni/Admin Triangle5, Goldspot2, Palm Ridge6, Alberton CBD, Meyersdal commercial node7, Germiston CBD, Boksburg CBD, Ramakonopi node1, Spruitview node4; • The Urban Development Boundary indicates the areas where future developed is to take place within the metro and region; • Amenities in the region include sport and recreation facilities, shopping and commercial facilities, healthcare services, safety and security as well as Local Government ofﬁ ces. Higher order amenities are to be located within identiﬁ ed activity nodes to perform the function of a strong institutional presence as part of Transport Orientated Development; • Existing Freeways are to play an important role as part of the development of the linkages between nodes as part of TOD and include: N3, N17 and R59; • Proposed Freeways to be developed include: PWV routes 13, 15, 14 and 16; • Major Roads to be constructed inter alia are: K126, K123, K133 and K131; • Railway Lines are to be optimised in use as a component of the public transport system. Development in the disadvantaged areas around rail infrastructure is to focus on Katlehong station8, Natalspruit station9, Kwesine station10 as well as the stations in the Industrial areas of Wadeville11, Alrode12, Germiston13 and Dunswart14; • Major components in the Regional Open Space System are: Meyersdal (Klipriviersberg) Nature reserve15, the Natalspruit wetland system16 including the Rondebult Bird Sanctuary16, as well as the far southern portion of the Southern Region that forms part of the Suikerbosrand Nature Reserve17;

28 OCTOBER 2010 B2.2 • Existing residential areas are as indicated on the Map on the reverse side of this pamphlet; • Proposed residential areas are to be confi ned to within the Urban Edge, focussing largely on infi ll development within the mining belt and the area between the N17 and N318; • Peripheral Land Uses are to focus on development that has infi ll housing and commercial activity (light industrial and service industries) as priority; • Mixed Use areas are areas in transition where the process of urban renewal is current. Development of specifi c areas such as these, are to be guided by specifi c policies and land use management systems; • Existing industrial areas of Wadeville11, Alrode12, Germiston19, and Boksburg20 are to be consolidated; • Proposed Industrial areas, ie Mapleton21, Junctionhill x422 and mining belt infi ll areas23, are to act as infi ll development with same use, in an effort to consolidate the existing industrial areas as single units. Additional industrial areas are to feed off increased activity generated by improved transport links; • Airports/Fields: Rand Airport24 in Germiston is centrally located and is to be incorporated as a key element of the development of a tourism node that includes Germiston Lake, as well as Reading and Germiston golf courses; • Mining Dumps are in the process of being recycled with the resultant vacant land becoming available for infi ll development23; • Agricultural Holdings in the Norton’s Small Farms are to be developed for infi ll housing25. Other areas of agricultural holdings include Klippoortje Agricultural Lots26, that is proposed for continued future intensive agriculture activity with residential infi ll development considered on merit within the framework of a precinct plan. Agricultural Holdings in the Mapleton21 area are to be for the future development of commercial (light industrial) or infi ll residential uses. The Rietspruit Agricultural Holdings area27, is for continued extensive agricultural use; • Extensive Agriculture: Land to be used for future extensive agriculture. The Rietspruit Agricultural Holdings area is for continued extensive agricultural use27; • The development of the Mining Belt23 in the Southern Region is subject to suitable land becoming available, as mine dumps are recycled. The area is either severely undermined or soil-polluted. Suitable land that becomes available is to be used for infi ll development, with housing being the primary focus and commercial and light industry playing a complementary role in smaller supportive activity nodes; • The Public Transport concept centres around promoting movement along north- south linkages as well as improvement of non-radial movement within the region, utilising road and rail transport infrastructure. Transport Orientated Development is applied within the circular movement concept, where activity nodes are connected through the development of the linkages that connect them. The purpose of non- radial movement patterns, as a complement to the development of north-south

OCTOBER 2010 29 B2.2 transport linkages, is to widen choice of movement as a component to the goal of increasing the scope of possible combinations of different strategic land uses. More combinations in land use increases ﬂ exibility in order to respond to the demand in the development and investment markets, in an effort to improve the regional competitive advantage.

4. IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY

The following items forms part of the RSDF Implementation Strategy: • Regional Environmental Scoping Report; • Mining Belt Soil Study; • Local Spatial Development Framework Priorities; • Integrated Transport Plan for; and • State of the Environment Report.

30 OCTOBER 2010 B2.2 SOUTHERN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

OCTOBER 2010 31 B2.3 B2.3 EASTERN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

1. INTRODUCTION

2.1 BACKGROUND

The Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework (SDF) is a plan outlining the desired spatial form of the metropolitan area as contemplated in Section 26(e) of the Municipal Systems Act, Act 32 of 2000. It also highlights priority investment and development areas and will serve as a guide to decision-makers and investors. What should be emphasised regarding the SDF is that it is an integral component of the IDP and translates this plan into spatial implications and guidelines for development. It is therefore not a tool to be used on in isolation, but should support decision-making within the context of the IDP.

The Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework represents the ﬁ rst of three levels of plans to be established in the Ekurhuleni Metro. The three levels of plans are as follows:

1. Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework; 2. Eastern Spatial Development Frameworks; and 3. Local/ Zonal/ Precinct Spatial Development Frameworks.

The difference between the Metropolitan SDF and the Eastern SDF’s may be described as follows:

1. The Metropolitan SDF is development orientated and more conceptual, to allow for growth and changing circumstances. It indicates broad, desirable land use patterns and is therefore not a mechanism intended to evaluate individual land use applications. 2. The Eastern SDFs are formulated with the Metropolitan SDF as a basis, but are more detailed and specifi c. The Eastern Development Framework is thus a refi nement of the Metropolitan SDF indicating specifi c land use proposals for pockets of land and providing adequate detail to assess development proposals. These frameworks cover the entire SDF Region.

32 OCTOBER 2010 B2.3 3. Local Spatial Development Frameworks (LSDFs) are formulated for specifi c local areas and do not cover the entire SDF REGION. LSDFs are used where the need for a fi ne level of detail with proposals up to individual erf level exits, or where specifi c trends and tendencies require an overall policy approach. The LSDFs use the Metropolitan SDFs as a basis, but give comprehensive proposals regarding development type, size, phasing and management measures. While the LSDFs cannot override the Metropolitan SDF, this level of detailed planning is intended for use on a daily basis in land use management and hence requires regular revision in accordance with development trends.

The SDF becomes binding on the Municipality through the adoption of the IDP. It should however be noted that IDPs are to be revised annually and this opportunity should be used to revise the SDF. This revision should consider the outcome of sectoral strategies and the other components of the hierarchy of plans, as well as changing trends and tendencies or local circumstances.

2.2 EASTERN SDF AREA

This document represents the Eastern Spatial Development Framework of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. The Ekurhuleni area has been divided into three SDF Regions, namely North, South and East, with a Spatial Development Framework formulated for each of these areas.

The Eastern REGION comprises the areas of Benoni, Daveyton, Etwatwa, Springs, Nigel, KwaThema, Tsakane, Duduza and Brakpan. The economic structure of the Eastern Region is focused on the established but declining industrial areas of the Far East Rand, characterised by heavy industries. It borders onto Mpumalanga Province in the east.

Benoni, Brakpan, Springs and Nigel are the four of the nine Central Business Districts in the Eastern Region of Ekurhuleni. These areas hold considerable public and private investment and the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework promotes the protection and regeneration of these areas, to make optimal use of these resources.

2.3 PROPOSALS FROM THE METROPOLITAN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK (MSDF)

The Ekurhuleni Strategic Plan identiﬁ es the following priorities as the 7 thrusts which should be foremost when formulating any plan.

1. Urban Renewal

OCTOBER 2010 33 B2.3 2. Poverty Alleviation 3. Local Economic Development and Job Creation 4. Prevention of HIV/Aids 5. Safety and Security 6. Good Governance 7. Community Participation

The section below provides a synopsis of the proposals put forward by the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework. It is however important to refer to the detailed SDF document for the concept and principles behind the SDF as well as more detail regarding these proposals. The proposals are (Figure 1):

2.3.1 Implementation of an Urban Development Boundary (UDB). It is important to note that UDB should not be seen as a rigid regulatory mechanism that will stiﬂ e all development initiatives. It is rather a policy statement aimed at redirecting patterns of growth and forcing all parties involved in development to reconsider all options available - including opportunities within the urban boundary. This is a line put in place for the next few years, but obviously, as circumstances demand it, it can/will be amended. The following guidelines for development will apply: • Land uses within the Urban Development Boundary: Within the Urban Development Boundary, land use that is consistent with the relevant LSDF, the spatial development framework, land use management plan and/or town planning scheme should be permitted, subject to the normal procedures and legislation e.g. environmental considerations, transportation requirements etc. Note that the UDB does not imply that the entire area within can/should be allowed to develop and that development rights are therefore guaranteed. Factors such as timing, availability of services, the environment etc. must and should still be applicable when considering an application within the boundary. • Land uses outside the Urban Development Boundary: Land uses that are rural in nature would be more desirable, and should therefore be promoted outside the UDB, rather than inside it. Where applicable, it will also have to be in line with provincial policies e.g. DACEL policy on subdivision of land etc. • Agricultural Land. The ﬁ rst priority is not to preserve agricultural within the UDB. Agricultural land in strategic areas may be protected or agriculturally used or may be allowed to bank land for future urban uses. High potential agricultural land is only one of the key elements for successful farming.

Land uses complying with the following criteria should be allowed in the rural areas outside the Urban Development Boundary:

(a) Extensive agriculture;

34 OCTOBER 2010 B2.3 (b) Conservation Areas/Nature Reserves; (c) Recreational Facilities e.g. hiking trails/hotels/game lodges; (d) Farm stalls and home industries; (e) Rural residential uses/Agricultural Holdings in speciﬁ c areas; (f) Any other related development/service;

Provided that the proposed development/service: (g) Services primarily the local market; and/or (h) Is resource based; and/or (i) Is located at a deﬁ ned and approved service delivery centre.

Developments/services not complying with the criteria set in (a) – (f) may thus only be allowed if it complies with criteria (h), (i) and (j).

Applications outside the Urban Development Boundary that do not comply with the criteria are not prohibited, but speciﬁ c measures will be applicable. Please refer to the detailed SDF document in this regard.

2.3.2 Peripheral Uses: The area directly outside the UDB is earmarked for this use. It is envisaged that a transition area will develop around the Urban Development Boundary, which may comprise a range of different peripheral uses. It is proposed that low intensity land uses like agricultural holdings, rural residential uses, low intensity service industries (typically those occurring on agricultural holdings) as well as urban agriculture be promoted in the fringe area around the Urban Development Boundary. These uses should support and protect the Urban Development Boundary and serve as a barrier for the future expansion of the urban environment. It is also necessary to optimally utilize opportunities for urban agriculture in this area, especially those areas near to the disadvantaged communities. The potential of the Sentrarand area to the north of Daveyton-Etwatwa holds some potential for LED development.

2.3.3 Extensive Agriculture: These are the areas outside the UDB and peripheral use zone, where extensive agriculture should be protected and promoted. The provision of services, such as health, education, retail etc. should also be catered for in these areas.

2.3.4 Activity Nodes or Areas: there is a wide range of activity nodes or areas accommodating a variety of activities in Ekurhuleni. The Metropolitan Activity Area can be divided into four main core areas, namely:

1. Greater Johannesburg International Airport Activity Area; which includes the three Blue IQ projects (JIA1, Gautrain2, and the IDZ3) the CBD of Edenvale4

OCTOBER 2010 35 B2.3 and Kempton Park5, the proposed corporate offi ce precinct in Rhodesfi eld6, the industrial complex of Isando, Spartan and Jet Park7, the R21 Development Corridor8 and the Olifantsfontein-Clayville industrial area9; 2. Central Activity Belt: comprising the CBDs of Germiston10, Boksburg11, and Benoni12, as well as mining activities and the industrial areas of Germiston13, Anderbolt14 and Benoni South15; 3. Alrode-Wadeville Corridor; which includes the industrial areas of Wadeville16 and Alrode17 and is already a Blue IQ project; and 4. Far East Activity Belt; comprising the CBDs of Brakpan20, Springs21 and Nigel22 as well as the industrial areas of Vulcania23, New Era24, Nuffi eld25 and the Vorsterskroon and Pretoriusstad26 industrial areas around Nigel, which are the subject of an Industrial Revitalisation Strategy.

In terms of retail, the existing nine Central Business Districts should be maintained and strengthened, to protect the public and private investment in these areas. The implementation of Business Improvement Districts is proposed as a strategy to improve safety, security and overall environmental improvement in the CBDs.

The industrial areas include the full range of industrial activities, from heavy and toxic industries to light industrial, commercial and warehousing activities. Within the context of the four Core Areas identiﬁ ed, the functional specialisation of these industrial areas should be promoted both in terms of local and Regional context.

The triangular area around the Johannesburg International Airport represents a core focus area for Ekurhuleni. Large portions of land to the south and east of JIA are still undeveloped/ underdeveloped, which enhances the potential for large-scale development/ redevelopment of these areas in future. These developments could be used to establish the identity of the Ekurhuleni Metro in future. The agricultural holdings of Boksburg27 directly to the south of the JIA in particular have the potential to be developed in such a way that it promotes the identity of Ekurhuleni. Due to its proximity to JIA, there will, however, be a limit on the height of development and the type of development (noise zones) that will be allowed. The same applies to the portion of the R21 corridor to the north of JIA8. The area south of JIA already holds the East Rand Mall and associated developments. It is proposed that this precinct (27) be developed for mixed use purposes mainly focused on retail and ofﬁ ce developments. The area is highly visual (especially from the surrounding freeway network), and therefore care should be taken that all developments in the area are aesthetically attractive in order to contribute towards establishing the identity and image of the new Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality.

2.3.5 Infi ll Development Priority Areas: There are fi ve main areas, which are a priority in terms of infi ll development (utilising un/underdeveloped land in central locations). These are the areas previously occupied by mining activities

36 OCTOBER 2010 B2.3 in the vicinity of Germiston28, around the central part of Boksburg29, to the east of Benoni30, and to the northwest31 and west of the Springs CBD32. All ﬁ ve these pockets of land are strategically located within the core areas of the EMM and some detailed work has already been done on the suitability for development of Germiston28, Boksburg29 and Benoni30.

2.3.6 Strategic Development Areas: As far as future residential expansion is concerned, eight major precincts were identiﬁ ed, namely: 1. Olifantsfontein/ Clayville (linking to the Midrand area); 2. Esselenpark/ Kaalfontein area34. This forms part of the Tembisa-JIA corridor as it is served by both the commuter railway line and route K105; 3. Pomona/Benoni North (area north-east of JIA); 4. Area north and north-west of Daveyton - inward direction of growth for the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex towards the Greater JIA area; 5. KwaThema-Duduza37; 6. Tsakane West38; 7. Boksburg South39; and 8. Katorus South40.

2.3.7 Service Upgrading Priority Areas: The EMM should focus its capital expenditure and operational programs towards upgrading services and facilities in the previously disadvantaged areas to levels comparable with that of the rest of the Metro. There are four major complexes of disadvantaged communities earmarked as Service Upgrading Priority Areas, namely: 1. Tembisa; 2. Katorus; 3. Kwatsaduza; and 4. Daveyton/Etwatwa.

2.3.8 Regional Open Space: A Regional open space system is proposed for the metropolitan area and has been schematically illustrated in the SDF. It must be noted that a detailed Strategic Environmental Assessment is to be conducted in the near future, to enhance the detail pertaining to the Regional Open Space System.

2.3.9 Mining: There are four major concentrations of mining land in the area which includes the area in the Rygerpark vicinity, the area to the east of Benoni, the area to the east of Springs and three sites in the vicinity of the Kwatsaduza complex. These areas have been earmarked for mining related activities.

OCTOBER 2010 37 B2.3 2.3.10 Transportation: The land use framework as highlighted above must be supported by a transportation network and services in order to materialise. The following is a summary of the main features in this regard:

1. Rail: The entire urban complex of the EMM is served by rail infrastructure, which links the disadvantaged communities of Tembisa, Katorus and Daveyton- Etwatwa to all four the core areas of economic activity identiﬁ ed. In fact, the railway line is central to each one of the four core areas. In line with national and provincial policy guidelines, the railway service should represent the core service around which public transport is provided. It also presents an opportunity for Transit Orientated Development which essentially means that the layout and design of land uses around the railway stations are all orientated towards promoting the utilization of the railway system. The rail infrastructure also links to Gautrain, which provides for an Ekurhuleni commuter station at Rhodesﬁ eld6.

2. Road: Freeway Network: The freeway network ensures good Regional accessibility and links Ekurhuleni to all major centres in the Southern Africa context. The current freeway network is, however, mainly radially orientated towards Greater Johannesburg. The priority expansion of the freeway network in Ekurhuleni evolves around the PWV15 which will unlock the development opportunities to the east of JIA; route PWV13 which will directly link JIA with the N3 and which will improve accessibility of the Central Activity Belt around Boksburg; and route PWV14 which will link Germiston and the Central Activity Belt to JIA and the R21 and N12 freeways.

Second Order Road Network: The main objective of this network is to: 3. Serve the metropolitan area in north-south and east-west directions of movement; 4. Link residential areas to one another and to the core areas of economic activity; 5. Link areas of economic activity to one another; 6. Promote mixed use and high density developments adjacent to these routes (subject to road access management requirements); and 7. Promote transport along these routes as a priority.

Six main north-south desire lines have been identiﬁ ed. These include:

1. Route K117/K127/K123 which runs from Tembisa through the Isando- Spartan complex, through the Central Activity Belt near Germiston station and

38 OCTOBER 2010 B2.3 surrounding industrial areas, through the Wadeville industrial area, linking to Vosloorus and Katlehong, from where it links to Alrode and further towards Alberton CBD. 2. Route K105/K90/K131 which links to the following areas: Tembisa Kempton Park CBD, Isando, Spartan, Jet Park, JIA, Boksburg CBD, Sunward Park and Vosloorus; 3. K155 which is the extension of R21, PWV15, and then passes through the industrial areas of Anderbolt, Van Dykpark, Vosloorus, Thokoza and Alberton; 4. K109 which links the northern suburbs of Benoni to the Benoni CBD and Benoni South industrial area, from where it stretches southwards past Tsakane and eventually link up with the N3 freeway; 5. K161/K154 which serves Daveyton-Etwatwa from where it passes through two inﬁ ll priority areas (31 and 32), southwards towards the Springs CBD, New Era industrial area, then past the communities of KwaThema, Duduza and Nigel up to where it links to the N3. This route could serve as the central spine around which the Far East Activity Belt is developed in future; and 6. K175 which links Etwatwa to Springs CBD.

In an east-west direction there are three priority areas:

• K68 which is to link the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex to the JIA Activity Area, and which will also serve Strategic Development Areas 35 and 36 on ﬁ gure 31; • K106 which links the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex to the Central Activity Belt including Benoni, Boksburg and Germiston; and • K132/K163/K116, which links Springs to Brakpan CBD (Far East Activity Belt) and then to Boksburg (Central Activity Belt).

OCTOBER 2010 39 B2.3 EASTERN SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK

40 OCTOBER 2010 B2.4 2.4 MSDF IMPLICATIONS FOR THE EASTERN SDF REGION

2.4.1 Implementation of an Urban Development Boundary (UDB) Development within the Urban Development Boundary consists of existing residential uses and supportive land uses such as community facilities, open spaces and business uses. The SDF Region holds considerable potential for development within the Urban Development Boundary. The Region further includes pockets of active agriculture, dispersed between peripheral and urban activities. These uses are however under pressure, due to the northward expansion of residential activities. The Urban Development Boundary has speciﬁ c implications on this area in terms of designating an area where urban activities will be permitting and deﬁ ning the land uses to be permitted outside the boundary. Areas have also been earmarked for peripheral uses, to act introduce a transition area between urban and agricultural areas and to protect the latter.

2.4.2 Peripheral Uses These include agricultural holdings and agricultural areas where a diversity of land uses may occur, including rural residential, agriculture, light service industries, commercial uses, hospitality uses and tourism related activities. The peripheral uses to the south support and protect the Urban Development Boundary and serve as a barrier for the future expansion of the urban environment. The optimal utilisation of these areas for peripheral uses will support the disadvantaged communities of Daveyton/ Etwatwa.

2.4.3 Extensive Agriculture These are the areas outside the UDB and peripheral use zone, where extensive agriculture should be protected and promoted. The provision of services, such as health, education, retail etc. should also be catered for in these areas.

2.4.4 Activity Nodes or Areas The Economic Activity Areas in the SDF Region include the Far East Activity Belt; comprising the CBDs of Brakpan20, Springs21 and Nigel22 as well as the industrial areas of Vulcania23, New Era24, Nufﬁ eld25 and the Vorsterskroon and Pretoriusstad26 industrial areas around Nigel, which are the subject of an Industrial Revitalisation Strategy.

2.4.5 Infi ll Development Priority Areas The Eastern Region offers the opportunity for infi ll development through reclamation of strategically located land situated in the mining belt. There are three infi ll priority areas in this Region, namely east of the Benoni CBD, south of Daveyton in the vicinity of Modder East and south-west of the Springs CBD.

OCTOBER 2010 41 B2.4 2.4.6 Strategic Development Areas The Eastern Region also offers the potential for future residential expansion, in terms of the Strategic Development Areas in the earmarked in the north and south of the Region. This includes the area north and north-west of Daveyton, with inward direction of growth for the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex towards the Greater JIA area. The KwaThema, Duduza and Tsakane West areas have also been earmarked as Strategic Development Areas to allow for further expansion of this residential complex.

2.4.7 Service Upgrading Priority Areas The Kwatsaduza (KwaThema, Duduza and Tsakane) and Daveyton-Etwatwa complexes have been earmarked as a Service Upgrading Priority area, where expenditure by the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality should be focused on the upgrading of services and facilities to levels comparable with the rest of the metro.

2.4.8 Transportation The Eastern Region is well serviced in terms of railway infrastructure and therefore offers the potential for Transit Orientated Development, to strengthen the railway service as the core service around which public transport is provided.

There are no major new freeways (PWV routes) proposed for the Eastern Region, but the Region includes three of the six major north-south desire lines, namely: • K109 which links the northern suburbs of Benoni to the Benoni CBD and Benoni South industrial area, from where it stretches southwards past Tsakane and eventually links up with the N3 freeway; • K161/K154 which serves Daveyton-Etwatwa from where it passes through two inﬁ ll priority areas (near Modder East and the Springs CBD) southwards towards the Springs CBD, New Era industrial area, then past the communities of KwaThema, Duduza and Nigel up to where it links with the N3. This route could serve as a central spine around which the Far East Activity Belt is developed in future; and • K175, which links Etwatwa to the Springs CBD.

Two of the east-west desire lines affect the Eastern Region, namely: • K106, which links the Daveyton-Etwatwa complex to the Central Activity Belt including Benoni, Boksburg and Germiston; and • K132/K163/K116, which links Springs to Brakpan CBD (Far East Activity Belt) and then to Boksburg (Central Activity Belt).

42 OCTOBER 2010 B3 B3. LOCAL SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORKS (LSDFs)

Section 26(e) of the Municipal System Act (32 of 2000) states that a municipality’s Integrated Development Plan must reﬂ ect “a spatial development framework...”. The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality approved its Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework (MSDF) in June 2005 in accordance with the provisions of the said act and the Municipal Planning and Performance Management Regulations, 2001 (Government Notice 22605, August 2001).

The MSDF represents the fi rst of three levels of frameworks to be established in the Ekurhuleni Metro. The three levels are set out as follows in the MSDF: • Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework (MSDF); addressing metropolitan wide issues and providing broad, overall development guidelines; • Regional Spatial Development Frameworks (RSDF); these are formulated for the three Service Delivery Regions (SDRs) namely North, East and South. These frameworks refi ne the MSDF proposals and will provide more detailed development guidelines; and • Local Spatial Development Frameworks (LSDF); these are formulated for designated areas within each Service Delivery Region. These plans will provide detailed development guidelines to address specifi c issues, in line with the MSDF and RSDFs.

LSDF AREAS

The EMM City Development Portfolio Committee resolved in June 2007 that wall-to- wall LSDF should be prepared for the entire EMM area. In this regard, the EMM area was divided into 103 LSDF areas.

Map 1 provides a structure for the demarcation of LSDF areas. LSDF areas are demarcated as to be able to do planning on an erf level of detail, and with sufﬁ cient public participation. If an LSDF area is too big, detail is lost in the process and it is not possible to have effective public participation as the number of people involved becomes to large. If the LSDF area is too small, planning becomes too isolated and the focus on the ‘bigger picture’ (RSDF and MSDF) is lost. The demarcation of LSDF areas was done based on the following: • Size; • Existing land use; • Existing LSDF boundaries; • Grouping of Functional areas; • Planning around nodal areas; • Physical boundaries such as mayor roads, power line servitudes, water course, railway lines;

OCTOBER 2010 43 B3 • Cadastral boundaries; • Ward boundaries; and • Municipal boundaries.

CURRENT LSDFS

A total of 54 of the 103 demarcated LSDF areas are already covered by an approved LSDF or similar plan. A further 13 LSDFs are currently being drafted.

As part of the current MSDF and ASDF review process, local SDFs will be absorbed into Area SDFs.

LSDF MODULES

From drafting previous LSDFs it became clear that a combined, inter-departmental approach need to be followed. To this end speciﬁ c modules needs to be added per LSDF, based on the needs, characteristics and development trends of the speciﬁ c area. Future LSDFs will thus include the following modules: • Project Management; • Spatial Plan; • Land Use Plan; • Strategic Environmental Assessment; • Geotechnical Study; • Local Open Space Plan; • Housing Plan; • Economic Plan; • Informal Trade Plan; • Public Land Implementation Plan; • Urban Design Plan; • Road Planning & Access Management Plan; • Storm Water Management Plan; • Public Transport Plan; • Water Local Master Plan; • Waste Water Local Master Plan • Electricity Local Master Plan; • Waste Management Plan; • Social Facilities Plan; • Transport Modelling;

44 OCTOBER 2010 B3 • Marketing Strategy; • GIS and mapping; • Legal Requirements; and • Participation Process.

OCTOBER 2010 45 B3 EMM LSDF AREAS

46 OCTOBER 2010 B3 EMM LSDFs

Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 1 Bonaero Park & Bonaero Park Kempton Park Approved Surrounding Areas (Extentions and adjacent farm portions; ORTIA North East) 2 ORTIA East ORTIA East, Kempton Park Approved for Atlasville, Park part of area Heaven, Impala park 3 OR Tambo OR Tambo Kempton Park Approved International Airport International Airport (West, Central, South), Emperor’s Casino 4 Aero City Rhodesﬁ eld, Kempton Park Approved Rhodesﬁ eld ext 1, Kempton CBD, Festival Mall) 5 Kempton Park ext’s Kempton Park Kempton Park Approved ext’s (incl. Nimrod Park, Allengrove & ext’s & parts of Zuurfontein) 6 Glen Marais Glen Marais Kempton Park Approved (incl. Glen Marais ext’s, Aston Manor, Birghleigh AH, Kempton Park AH, Pomona & Bredell AH) 7 Pomona & Bredell Pomona Kempton Park Approved & Bredell Agricultural holdings (Including Brentwood Park agricultural holdings) 8 R21 Corridor R21 Corridor Kempton Park Approved 9 Esselen park Esselen Park, Kempton Park Approved vacant land 10 Glen Erasmia - Glen Erasmia - Kempton Park Approved as Glen Eagle Glen Eagle LSDF 8

OCTOBER 2010 47 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 11 Birch Acres K60 Kempton Park Approved Development Plan (incl Birchleigh North, Birch Acres, Norkem Park) 12 Birchleigh,Van Birchleigh,Van Kempton Park Approved Riebeeck Park Riebeeck Park 13 Terenure Terenure Kempton Park Approved including Kempton Park West; parts of Chloorkop 14 Esther Park Esther Park, Kempton Park Approved Edleen and Kempton Park Extention 5 and 11 15 Isando - Spartan Industrial Area Kempton Park Approved (Cresslawn, Crydon & Ext 1, Spartan, Isando) 16 Ehlanzeni Ehlanzeni Tembisa 1 Approved (including Vusimuzi, Welomlambo, Ethafeni, Jiyane and Esiphetweni) 17 Iqqaqga Iqqaqga, Tembisa 1 Approved Esivana ,Emkatini, Ikusasa, Elindinga, Emoyeni, Esekelo, Idulweni, Esiziba, Inxiweni & Ibaxa) 18 Teanong Teanong, Tembisa 1 Approved Motsu, Tembisa x5, Leboeng, Tsenolong, Moakeng & x1, Temong, Litafeng, Moteong, Seotloana, Gahlanzo, Mpho & Lekaneng )

48 OCTOBER 2010 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 19 Oakmoor Oakmoor Tembisa 1 Approved (including Makh ulong,Moriting, Mashimong,Se dibeng, Tshepo, Sethokga, Ecaleni, Tembisa Ext 7,Mgantsha, Kopanong and Tlamatlama) 20 Winnie Mandela Winnie Mandela Tembisa 2 Approved Park Park 21 Olifantsfontein & Olifantsfontein & Tembisa 2 No Plan Clayville Clayville 22 Midstream and Midstream and Tembisa 2 No Plan surrounding areas surrounding areas 23 Tembisa West Tembisa West Edenvale No Plan (incl Leralla Station) 24 Phomolong - Phomolong / Edenvale Re do Chloorkop Chloorkop (include Commercia x9) 25 Edenvale Edenvale Edenvale Approved 26 Bedfordview Bedfordview Edenvale Approved, out dated 27 Meadowdale and Elandsfontein Germiston No Plan surrounding areas farm areas, including Highway Gardens, Meawbrook, Meadowdale, Klooper Park and Tunney 28 Primose and Northern Germiston No Plan surrounding areas suburbs of Germiston, including Primose CBD 29 Lilianton and Lilianton and Boksburg No Plan ERPM -Land ERPM -Land 30 Boksburg North Boksburg North, Boksburg Approved and surrounding Ravenswood, areas Beyers Park, Anderbolt

OCTOBER 2010 49 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 31 East Rand Mall East Rand Mall, Boksburg No Plan and surrounding Huges, Jet Park areas 32 Lakefi eld - Lakefi eld, Benoni No plan Farramere and Farramere and surrounding areas surrounding areas (incl Government Village alignment) 33 Rynfi eld and Rynfi eld & Benoni Approved surrounding areas surrounding Holdings (Pretoria Rd, O’Reilly Merry Str) 34 Benoni North A.H Benoni North Benoni Approved and surrounding A.H; (including areas Nortons‘s Home Estates, Brentwood Park AH, & Rietpan) 35 Marister & Benoni Marister & Benoni Approved, out AH area Benoni AH area dated 36 Elandsfontein Farm Elandsfontein Kempton Park No Plan Portions, etc Farm Portions, etc 37 Babsfontein Babsfontein Kempton Park No Plan 38 Sentra Rand area Sentra Rand Kempton Park Approved, out area dated 39 Mayfi eld and Putfontein Benoni Approved, out surrounding areas Lilyvalle dated Mayfi eld area 40 Etwatwa A Etwatwa A Etwatwa No plan (Barcelona) (Barcelona) 41 Etwatwa B Etwatwa B Etwatwa No plan 42 Etwatwa C Etwatwa C Etwatwa No plan (Blesbokspruit (Blesbokspruit area) area) 43 Chris Hani and Chris Hani Daveyton No plan surrounding areas 44 Sinaba Stadion Sinaba Stadion Daveyton No plan and surrounding and surrounding areas area 45 Daveyton West Daveyton West Daveyton No plan 46 Area south of Area south of Etwatwa No plan Daveyton Daveyton 47 Welgedacht, Enstra Welgedacht, Springs No plan Area Enstra Area

50 OCTOBER 2010 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 48 Modder East Modder East Springs No plan LSDF 49 New Modder and New Modder Brakpan No plan surrounding areas and Surrounds (incl mining belt) 50 Benoni CBD and Benoni CBD and Benoni Approved, out surrounding areas Surrounds dated 51 Carnival City and Carnival Brakpan Approved surrounding areas City - Dalpark Area, Wattville, Leachville 52 Dalview Dalview Brakpan No plan 53 Brakpan CBD and Brakpan CBD Brakpan In process surrounding areas 54 Brakpan Noord and Brakpan Noord Brakpan No plan surrounding areas an vacant land to the north (undermined areas) 55 Weltevreden and Old Brakpan Brakpan Approved surrounding areas Location, Dal Fouche, New State Era, Brenthurts 56 Geduld and Geduld, Fresh Springs No plan surrounding areas Produce Market, Presidentsdam 57 Bakerton - Bakerton Springs No plan Welgedacht Welgedacht 58 Casseldale - Casseldale Springs No plan Strubenvale Strubenvale 59 Springs CBD and Springs CBD, Springs No plan surrounding areas Avenues, Springs Ext, undermined areas 60 N17 Industrial Belt Sallies Village, Springs No plan New Era, Pollak Park, Fullcrum 61 Sallies Village - Sunairpark, Brakpan No plan Minnebron Rand Colliers, Minnebron 62 Withok Estates Withok Estates Brakpan Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 63 Labore, Langaville Labore, Kwa-Thema Approved: Langaville Kwatsaduza SDF

OCTOBER 2010 51 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 64 Tsakane A Tsakane A Tsakane Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 65 Geluksdal Geluksdal Tsakane Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 66 Tsakane B Tsakane B Tsakane Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 67 Duduza Duduza Duduza Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 68 Langaville Langaville Kwa-Thema Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 69 Kwa-Thema C Kwa-Thema C Kwa-Thema Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 70 Kwa-Thema A Kwa-Thema A Kwa-Thema Approved: Kwatsaduza SDF 71 Kwa-Thema B, Kwa-Thema B, Kwa-Thema Approved: Maryvlei Maryvlei Kwatsaduza SDF 72 Selcourt and Selcourt Springs No Plan surrounding areas 73 Daggafontein area Daggafontein Springs No Plan area 74 Struisbult - Struisbult, Nigel No Plan Marrievale Marrievale 75 Dunottar - Sharron Dunottar - Nigel No Plan Park Sharron park 76 Pretoriusstad and Spaarwaterdam, Duduza No Plan surrounding areas Pretoriusstad, Area East of Duduza 77 Vosterkroon and Vosterkroon Nigel No Plan surrounding areas 78 Nigel CBD and Nigel Central Nigel Approved surrounding areas Business Area (Alrapark/ Mackenzieville area) 79 Central Germiston Central Germiston Approved (LSDF1 SSDR) Germiston LSDF (LSDF1 SSDR) 80 Reiger Park (LSDF Reiger Park Boksburg Approved 2 SSDR) LSDF (LSDF 2 SSDR)

52 OCTOBER 2010 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 81 Boksburg CBD and Boksburg CBD Boksburg Approved surrounding areas & Surrounding Areas (LSDF 3 SSDR) 82 Sunward Park - Sunward Park Boksburg Housing Plan Leeuwpoort (including approved Leeuwpoort) 83 Wadeville Wadeville Germiston No Plan 84 Rand Airport Rand Airport Germiston Approved (LSDF 7 SSDR) (LSDF 7 SSDR) 85 Alberton – New Alberton – New Alberton Approved Redruth (LSDF 8 Redruth (LSDF SSDR) 8 SSDR) 86 Meyersdal Meyersdal Alberton Approved, out dated 87 Brackenhurst - Brackenhurst Alberton Approved Brackendowns (LSDF 10 SSDR) 88 Alrode Alrode Tokoza No Plan 89 Natalspruit - Natalspruit - Tokoza Approved Tokoza (LSDF 13 Tokoza (LSDF SSDR) 13 SSDR) 90 Tshongweni Tshongweni Kathlehong 1 Approved 91 Spruitview - Spruitview Vosloorus Approved Volsoorus (LSDF - Volsoorus 14 SSDR) (LSDF 14 SSDR) 92 Roodekop - Roodekop, Germiston No Plan Klippoortjie Klippoortjie 93 Dawn Park - Villa Dawn Park, Villa Vosloorus No Plan Liza Liza 94 Area West of Area West of Brakpan No plan Withok estates Withok estates 95 Area west of Area west of Brakpan No plan Tsakane Tsakane 96 Mapleton Mapleton Vosloorus Approved, out dated 97 Vosloorus Vosloorus Vosloorus Approved, out dated 98 Moleleki - Moleleki - Vosloorus Approved, out Vosloorus Vosloorus dated 99 Ramakanopi Ramakanopi Kathlehong 2 Approved, out dated 100 Alrode South Alrode South Tokoza No Plan 101 Eden Park Eden Park Tokoza Approved (LSDF 18 SSDR) 102 Palm Ridge Palm Ridge Kathlehong 2 Approved, out dated

OCTOBER 2010 53 B3 Main Areas to Nr LSDF Name Main CCC Status* be included 103 Magagula Magagula Vosloorus Approved, out dated - Tembisa SDF All of Tembisa Tembisa 1 & 2 Approved - Northern SDF North All Approved - Eastern SDF East All Approved - Southern SDF South All Approved - Metropolitan SDF Ekurhuleni All Approved

54 OCTOBER 2010

C1 C1. EKURHULENI GROWTH & DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY 2025

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Table of Contents Page

INTRODUCTION 2

EKURHULENI IN CONTEXT 3

THE GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY 2025 4

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES 4

ECONOMIC TRANSFORMATION 5

SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION 5

VISION, MISSION AND VALUES 6

GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 2025 AGENDA 7

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES AGENDA AND STRATEGY 7

ECONOMIC TRANSFORMATION AGENDA AND STRATEGY 9

SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION AGENDA AND STRATEGY 11

MUNICIPAL TRANSFORMATION AND INSTITUTIONAL DEVELOPMENT 13

GDS IMPLEMENTATION MECHANISM 14

KEY FOCUS AREA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES 15

SERVICE DELIVERY CONCEPT 23

STAKEHOLDER ALIGNMENT AND PARTICIPATION 23

MONITORING, EVALUATION AND REVIEW 23

CONCLUSION 24

GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS 24

The GDS is a strategy for all sectors of society. It is intended to build a common vision and purpose across traditional barriers between government, the private sector and civil society.

OCTOBER 2010 1 C1 INTRODUCTION

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality (EMM) was established in 2000 through the amalgamation of 11 East Rand local authorities during the ﬁ nal phase of local government rationalisation and transformation that was undertaken in post-apartheid South Africa. The socio-economic and spatial challenges caused by apartheid social engineering cannot be solved over the short term – they call for a strategic and long term response. The EMM recognised this and embarked on a process to formulate a long-term development strategy in 2004.

During a Mayoral Committee workshop on 29 January 2005 it was resolved to name the strategy the Ekurhuleni Growth and Development Strategy (GDS), 2025. A GDS Steering Committee comprising senior management of the Municipality, supported by a Political Oversight Committee of Members of the Mayoral Committee (MMC), formulated the strategy, and in June 2005 the draft GDS was introduced to be discussed within the broader community. The EMM Council approved the ﬁ nal GDS document in August 2005.

The GDS is a strategy for all sectors of society. It is intended to build a common vision and purpose across traditional barriers between government, the private sector and civil society. The GDS provides a framework and point of reference for all the EMM plans, policies and strategies in its various areas of operation. The broad development strategies and targets contained in the GDS will be further contextualised and reﬁ ned in the IDP and in the various sectoral strategies and policies of the Metro.

Many Great Strategies are simply great visions. And great visions can be a lot more inspirational and effective than the most carefully constructed plan. Only when we recognise our fantasies can we begin to appreciate the wonder of reality.

Henry Mintzberg

2 OCTOBER 2010 C1 EKURHULENI IN CONTEXT

Ekurhuleni covers the eastern part of Gauteng from Germiston in the west to Springs in the east. It has a total land area of ±2000km and accommodates ±2.5 million people.

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan economy is larger and more diverse than that of many of the smaller countries in Africa, including all the countries in Southern Africa. It accounts for nearly a quarter of the Gauteng economy, which in turn contributes over a third of the national GDP. Ekurhuleni contributes ±7% to the country’s spending power and ±7.4% to the nation’s production. Because of the largest concentration of industry in the whole of South Africa, and in Africa, Ekurhuleni is often referred to as “Africa’s Workshop”.

Ekurhuleni has a network of roads, airports, rail lines, telephones, electricity grids and telecommunications that rivals that of Europe and America - a ﬁ rst world infrastructure supporting a well established industrial and commercial complex. Ekurhuleni can in fact be regarded as the transportation hub of the country. The municipality is home to the Johannesburg International Airport (JIA), the busiest airport in Africa. South Africa’s largest railway hub is in Ekurhuleni (Germiston) and links the city to all the major population centres and ports in the Southern African region. A number of South Africa’s modern freeways and expressways connect Ekurhuleni with other cities and provinces.

The EMM’s annual budget is in the region of R11 billion, of which ±R1 billion is annually being budgeted for capital projects in line with the priorities set in the Integrated Development Plan [IDP]. The bulk of this expenditure is dedicated to upgrading facilities and infrastructure backlogs that were caused by apartheid.

The improvement of skills levels to attract and support local economic growth is of critical importance.

OCTOBER 2010 3 C1 THE GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY 2025

STATUS QUO

The GDS 2025 follows a landscape approach, describing the status quo in terms of three broad development areas, infrastructure and services, economic and social. The main characteristics of each development area are summarised below. These characteristics determined the speciﬁ c focus areas around which the GDS was formulated.

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES

• As it consists of nine CBD’s with no clearly identifi able core area and no central theme, Ekurhuleni lacks a clear identity and should fi nd innovative ways to create a unique identity for itself. • Due to the conglomeration of nine East Rand towns and large vacant land parcels in the mining belt around the urban core, Ekurhuleni’s spatial distribution is fragmented, causing an inequitable city. This has lead to low development densities with historically disadvantaged communities situated on the urban periphery. • Many areas in the city have poor transportation linkages and offer poor mobility. This is due, in part, to high levels of congestion on the national and provincial road network and freeway interchanges and large parts of the planned provincial road system not having been built. There are also inadequate linkages between certain nodes in the EMM as well as a lack of integrated public transport nodes/systems. Some 22% of the municipal road network is still gravel and, although there is a good rail network, it is underutilised. • Many areas in the city have an ageing and poorly maintained trading services infrastructure which is subject to frequent breakdowns. Many communities have inadequate access to basic services due to infrastructure backlogs experienced in township areas and informal settlements. • Due to mining activities, urbanisation and industrialisation, environmental problems such as dolomite, informal settlements, industry and pollution, Ekurhuleni is characterised by large areas of degraded environment. However, some unique environmental opportunities such as rivers and wetlands, ridges and agricultural potential have also been identifi ed. • Many areas in the city are decayed, performing poorly and in need of urban renewal, but at the same time present an opportunity to capitalise on existing infrastructure to build vibrant urban communities. • Current ICT infrastructure such as broadband, is inadequate to accommodate the rapid technological growth, which is required, particularly in high-tech hubs such as around the OR Tambo International Airport.

4 OCTOBER 2010 C1 ECONOMIC TRANSFORMATION

• The local economy requires a greater degree of sustainable diversiﬁ cation as it is dominated by the manufacturing sector. • As elsewhere in South Africa, unemployment is high at ±40% and policies to promote labour absorption and job creation will be of crucial importance to the future of the city. • The improvement of skill levels to attract and support local economic growth is of critical importance as technical skill levels are low and not a good ﬁ t for the skill demands of the local economy. The literacy rate is 84%, but computer literacy is low. • Due to the location of the OR Tambo International Airport within its borders, Ekurhuleni is a gateway to Africa, and opportunities for tourism promotion and development locally should be taken advantage of. These include opportunities for business and retail tourism and the Klipriviersberg, Wetlands and Bird Sanctuaries. • No city can survive without new investment in physical, economic and social infrastructures. Therefore, investment promotion and facilitation will be a key focus area to attract entrepreneurs and address the varying levels of investment throughout the Metro. • There is skewed distribution of wealth and resources, with the greatest portion of the wealth in the city still in the hands of a small elite. Broad-based economic transformation as well as entrepreneurial activity will be promoted at every opportunity.

SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION

• With ±30% of the local population living in poverty and the current unemployment rate at ±40%, the levels of poverty and unemployment in Ekurhuleni are unacceptably high, and need to be addressed in a sustainable way. The majority of people living below the poverty line live on the urban periphery, far away from job opportunities and social amenities. • Many people in Ekurhuleni still live in overcrowded informal settlements without adequate access to engineering and social infrastructure. The creation and promotion of sustainable human settlements is therefore an important priority. There is a housing backlog with 134 000 shacks in informal settlements and 36 000 backyard shacks. This is worsened as the inﬂ ux is set to continue and many informal settlements are situated on land not suitable for housing. Well-located land suitable for housing development is a scarcity. Past subsidy schemes have also resulted in mono-functional, non-sustainable areas. • High levels of HIV and Aids and other poverty-related diseases such as TB are experienced in the poor communities and access to health care is inequitable. There is a high rate of infant and child malnutrition.

OCTOBER 2010 5 C1 • The crime and domestic violence rates are unacceptably high, and a higher level of safety and security for the inhabitants of the city will be pursued. Various risks such as airports, gas pipelines and old mining areas have the potential for leading to disasters. • The city is characterised by inadequate and inequitable provision of and poorly maintained parks, sport and recreational facilities, public places and cemeteries. Green areas are fragmented and disjointed with no central theme.

VISION, MISSION & VALUES

The strategic focus of the Ekurhuleni GDS 2025 is to build on the vision of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality:

The Smart, Creative and Developmental City.

It is based on this vision that a mission statement was developed as a way of forging ahead towards achievement. The mission statement is:

Ekurhuleni provides sustainable and people centred development services that are affordable, appropriate and of high quality. We are focused on social, environmental and economic regeneration of our city and communities, as guided by the principles of Batho Pele and through the commitment of a motivated and dedicated team.

In pursuing the above-mentioned vision and mission the EMM is committed to upholding the following core values:

• Performance Excellence; • Integrity; • Community Centeredness; • Transparency; and • Cooperative Governance.

When you deplore the conditions in the world, ask yourself, am I part of the problem or part of the solution? Source unknown

6 OCTOBER 2010 C1 INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES AGENDA AND STRATEGY

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have a well-developed and vibrant core economic area, which imparts a unique character and identity to Ekurhuleni.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines: • The core economic development triangle situated between the Kempton Park, Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni CBD’s will receive priority in terms of future investment; • The inﬂ uence of the OR Tambo International Airport and the potential spin-offs from the adjacent Blue IQ projects [Gautrain and IDZ] will be maximised by means of further infrastructural investment; and • A number of urban regeneration projects will be launched in the triangle, of which the proposed Germiston Government Precinct will be the ﬁ rst.

SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have an integrated and equitable city.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• The prevailing pattern of outward urban growth and expansion will be redirected inwards. No urban development will be allowed outside the urban edge as demarcated in the SDF; • Inﬁ ll development will be promoted at all times, especially in and around the urban core areas; • Accessibility to the urban core areas will be improved; • The old, degraded mining areas will be upgraded and rehabilitated and developable vacant land parcels will be released for development; • Existing informal settlements in the core areas will be upgraded or removed; and • There will be incentives and rewards for private development in the core areas.

ROADS AND TRANSPORT

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have a high quality, integrated and well-maintained transportation infrastructure and integrated public transport systems, ensuring a high degree of mobility and choices for commuters.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

OCTOBER 2010 7 C1 • An integrated land use / transportation plan will be undertaken; • The EMM will lobby for the extension of the current freeway and provincial road system; • The EMM will continue to improve its own road system; • Public transport will be promoted through a range of initiatives, including densiﬁ cation along major corridors, the promotion of more effective services and the integration of public transport modes and systems; and • Alternative modes of transport such as walking and cycling will be promoted.

SERVICES INFRASTRUCTURE

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have high quality and well-maintained services, distributed equitably throughout the urban areas.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Densiﬁ cation and inﬁ lling will be promoted to ensure maximum, cost-effective utilisation of the existing infrastructure; • Equity in service provision will be ensured by eliminating the backlogs within the townships and informal settlements. High-growth areas in Ekurhuleni will, however, not be neglected; and • Water savings will be promoted and alternative energy sources explored.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to show a substantial increase in the general quality of the environment.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Environmental upgrading in areas such as the mining belt and the old industrial areas will be a major focus in years to come; • Ekurhuleni’s unique environmental assets, such as the wetlands and water bodies, will be protected and improved; and • Sustainable development within the parameters set by the EMF will be pursued.

URBAN RENEWAL

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have functional, sustainable, and attractive urban areas.

8 OCTOBER 2010 C1 In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• The focus will be on all poorly performing “urban economy areas”, not only on the CBD’s; • A long term urban renewal strategy and institutional vehicle will be developed; and • The EMM will provide a co-ordinating function and strategic advice to development agencies in the private and public sectors.

ICT INFRASTRUCTURE

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have productive and resourceful application of ICT.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• The EMM will on an ongoing basis liaise and co-operate with the main service providers; • Broadband infrastructure will be provided in selected priority high-tech hubs such as the OR Tambo International Airport and surrounds; and • The EMM will work jointly with Joburg and Tshwane to promote the “Smart Province” concept.

ECONOMIC TRANSFORMATION AGENDA AND STRATEGY

ECONOMIC DIVERSIFICATION

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have a diversiﬁ ed local economy able to meet local needs, support sustainable development and adapt to changes in accordance with global demands and shifts.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Value-added manufacturing and beneﬁ ciation will be promoted; • Further development of the transport and logistics industries will be promoted; • Intensive agriculture will be promoted, including organic food production, aquaculture and the beneﬁ ciation of agricultural products; and • Small-scale mining opportunities will be promoted.

OCTOBER 2010 9 C1 JOB CREATION

Ekurhuleni aims to have unemployment reduced by half by 2014 and by half again by 2025, based on the unemployment ﬁ gures of 2004.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Skill development programmes should be aligned with the needs of the local economy; • The EMM will work towards a climate which is conducive to entrepreneurial activities; • The EMM will implement labour-intensive public works programmes; and • The EMM will promote local employment creation as part of its procurement supply chain process.

SKILLS DEVELOPMENT

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have a skilled community exhibiting capabilities in self- reliance, innovation and continued learning of new skills to meet the needs of a growing economy.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Information on local skills needs and gaps will be fed into the national skills development strategy; • Entrepreneurial skills development will be promoted and encouraged; • The EMM will lobby for tertiary learning institutions and research and development facilities; • EMM library services will be utilised in skills development initiatives; and • The EMM procurement policy will promote and encourage skills transfer.

TOURISM PROMOTION

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to promote the economy of the region and create jobs and a safe and secure environment, by establishing it as a tourism destination of choice.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

10 OCTOBER 2010 C1 • Opportunities presented by the OR Tambo International Airport gateway into Africa will be utilised. Business and shopping tourism will be speciﬁ cally promoted; • The townships and wetland areas are recognised as potential tourism draw cards and will feature strongly in the EMM’s tourism development strategy; and • The EMM will promote and lobby for the establishment of a regional tourism organisation as well as the development of a gateway information centre at the OR Tambo International Airport.

INVESTMENT PROMOTION

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have increased inward investment in skills and technology, property and sustainable development.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• The provision of quality services at affordable, competitive prices as well as prompt, efﬁ cient service and a safe, secure environment will be the primary tools at the disposal of the EMM to promote ongoing investment and development; • The EMM will develop effective information dissemination and marketing programmes; and • The “Customer Care Centre” concept will ensure effective service delivery.

ECONOMIC TRANSFORMATION

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have an inclusive, wealth-generating economy.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• The EMM’s procurement policy will reﬂ ect the desire to achieve broad-based economic transformation; • The informal sector of the economy will be supported through various means; • Skills development will be promoted and supported; and • The EMM will leverage its assets to promote BBBEE.

SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION AGENDA AND STRATEGY

POVERTY AND UNEMPLOYMENT

In line with the national objective, Ekurhuleni aims to halve poverty in the next 10 years

OCTOBER 2010 11 C1 up to 2015, and to halve it again in the following 10 years, up to 2025.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Sustainable job creation in excess of new entrants into the labour market will be pursued; • Skills development, and speciﬁ cally entrepreneurial skills development, will be promoted; • The EMM will lobby for public investment initiatives and public works programmes; and • Sustainable urban agriculture and small-scale farming initiatives will be targeted as an important mechanism to ensure food security for the poor.

HUMAN SETTLEMENTS

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have its entire population housed in integrated and functional, sustainable human settlements.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• Housing inﬁ lling and densiﬁ cation will be prioritised; • Housing provision will be integrated with engineering and social services provision. Sustainable communities will be created; • A functioning property market will be created through the development of mixed income human settlements; and • A range of alternative housing typologies and tenure options will be provided.

HEALTHCARE AND FACILITIES

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have equitable health care and facilities across all sectors of society - substantially reduced rates of poverty-related disease.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines: • The EMM recognises that the best way to ﬁ ght disease is to reduce poverty and to ensure increased access to shelter and basic services; • The EMM will promote improved co-operation and co-ordination between all role players in the health sector;

12 OCTOBER 2010 C1 • The EMM will ensure better access to primary health care facilities; and • Community involvement and awareness will be promoted.

SAFETY AND SECURITY

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have a high level of safety and security evidenced by a drastically reduced crime rate.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines:

• The EMM recognises the correlation between poverty and the safety and security risk in communities. Strategies aimed at economic growth and poverty relief is relevant to this sector; • The EMM will promote improved co-operation and co-ordination between all role players in the safety and security sector; • Community education and involvement will be promoted; and • A range of programmes will be undertaken, including the establishment of precinct police stations, installation of CCTV surveillance systems and ongoing modernisation of ﬂ eet and equipment.

PARKS, SPORT AND RECREATIONAL FACILITIES

By 2025, Ekurhuleni aims to have world-class parks, sport and recreational facilities.

In order to achieve this, it will implement the following strategic imperatives and guidelines: • Facilities will be clustered in strategic localities. Multi-functional sports and recreation nodes will be developed; • With regard to sporting facilities, the successful staging of international events, in particular the 2010 Soccer World Cup tournament, is a key priority, and to this end the EMM will work closely with the various organising bodies; • As far as parks and recreational facilities are concerned, selected existing well- developed and maintained regional facilities will be further upgraded and extended to become ﬂ agship facilities; • A regional open space system will be developed, predicated mainly on the natural features in the region, such as the various streams, dams, pans, wetlands and ridges in the metro; and • The EMM will focus on the aesthetic upgrading of high-visibility areas, such as the main entrances to the city, areas abutting the freeways and main arterials, and the area around the OR Tambo International Airport.

OCTOBER 2010 13 C1 GOOD GOVERNANCE PRINCIPLES

The EMM will adhere to the following general principles pertaining to good governance:

• Sound political and management leadership is required to steer the EMM towards fulfi lling its vision, mission and the desired GDS outcomes; • Better service delivery through the principles of Batho Pele will underpin all activities of the EMM; • Corporate discipline is a commitment by the EMM’s senior management to adhere to behaviour that is universally recognised and accepted to be correct and proper; • Transparency is the ease with which an outsider is able to make meaningful analyses of the EMM’s actions, its economic fundamentals and the non-fi nancial aspects pertinent to the organisation. It refl ects whether or not stakeholders obtain a true picture of what is happening within the organisation; • Independence is the extent to which mechanisms have been put in place to minimise or avoid potential confl icts of interest that may exist; • Individuals or groups in the EMM, who make decisions and take actions on specifi c issues, need to be accountable for their decisions and actions. Mechanisms must exist and be effective to allow for accountability; • With regard to management, responsibility pertains to behaviour that allows for corrective action and for penalising mismanagement; and • The systems that exist within the EMM must exhibit fairness and take into account all those that have an interest in Ekurhuleni and its future. The rights of various groups have to be acknowledged, respected and balanced against each other.

GDS IMPLEMENTATION MECHANISM

The implementation of the GDS agenda will take place through the IDP. The linkage between the GDS and IDP is shown schematically below: 2005>>

Growth and Development Strategy 2025

Integrated Development Plan (IDP) (Short and Medium Term)

2005>> 2009 The IDP in turn determines the budget, which together with detail performance management targets, will ensure implementation of projects and service delivery.

14 OCTOBER 2010 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Speciﬁ c outcomes and milestones have been set for each GDS focus area, as indicated below. These will be further reﬁ ned in the IDP.

KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Clear City Identity A well-developed • An identifi ed core economic and vibrant core area: economic area • Area identifi ed in 2004 to which imparts a be prioritised in terms of unique character development. and identity to • Increased development and Ekurhuleni. investment in the core economic triangle of Ekurhuleni: • Gautrain construction and related development adjacent to the OR Tambo International Airport. • Successful development of the R21 corridor. • Successful development of the Government Precinct in Germiston. • Subsidy-linked housing development in the mining belt. Spatial An integrated • Improved accessibility and Development and equitable mobility throughout the city. metropolitan area. INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES • Strong east-west corridor along the N12 /N17 freeways and north-south corridor along the R21 freeway. • Areas of urban density - infi ll development on vacant and underutilised land between the urban core and the peripheral township areas. • A managed and respected urban edge.

OCTOBER 2010 15 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Roads & Transport High quality, Effective and integrated planning integrated and and implementation: well-maintained • Integrated Transport Plan in place by 2007. transportation • Transport Authority esta-blished infrastructure, by 2009. integrated • Road Agency established by public transport 2012. systems, • High quality integrated and well- ensuring a maintained infrastruc-ture. high degree of • Roads building programme in mobility and place by 2006. choices for • Current backlog of gravel roads commuters. to be eradicated in 2015. Additional freeways built: • Upgrading R21 and R24 for additional capacity and lanes by 2010. • PWV 13/14 built by 2020. • PWV 15 built by 2025. A strategic network of public transport corridors providing sub- regional linkages: • Improved usage of public transport services. • Taxi recapitalisation by 2010.

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES • Modal integration for public transport to Gautrain by 2010. • Bus services to cover all areas in Ekurhuleni by 2015. • Transport information centre established by 2020. • Start building additional rail linkages by 2020. • Modal transfer facilities provi-ded at all stations by 2025. More use of non-motorised transport: • Pedestrian and bicycle-strategies in place by 2007.

16 OCTOBER 2010 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Services High quality and Well-maintained services in all well-maintained areas: services, • All maintenance backlogs to be equitable eradicated by 2010. services All communities to have equitable access to services: throughout the • All people to have access to urban areas. potable water by 2008. • All people to have access to basic sanitation services by 2010. • All people to have access to electricity by 2012. More sustainable disposal of solid waste: Comprehensive waste minimi-sation strategy (including recycling) to be in place by 2007. Improved stormwater manage-ment: • Stormwater Masterplan to be in place by 2007. • Stormwater system backlogs to be eradicated by 2020. Environmental A substantial A clearly deﬁ ned and functional Management increase in the open space network: general quality of • Open space plan to be ﬁ nalised by 2007. the environment. • 50% of open space system to be

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES developed by 2015. • 100% of open space system to be developed by 2025. All development to be guided by an EMF: • EMF’s for the entire Ekurhuleni area to be in place by 2006. Measurable decline in land, water and air pollution: • Pollution monitoring systems to be in place by 2010. Measurable increase in the utilisation of alternative energy sources: • Strategy to be in place by 2010.

OCTOBER 2010 17 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Environmental A substantial Substantial environmental Management increase in the improvement in the mining belt: continued general quality of • Implementation of Hloekisa project the environment. to commence by 2006. • All mine dumps/slimes dams with economically viable mineral content to be removed by 2025. • All other mine dumps/slimes dams to be rehabilitated to acceptable standards by 2025. Integrated and sustainable protection of natural resources: • Wetland conservation strategy and programme to be in place by 2007. Urban renewal Functional, • Normalisation of urban econo- sustainable, and my areas reﬂ ected through attractive urban minimal vacancy rates, high areas. investor conﬁ dence and high demand for expansion. Quality public environment guiding, promoting and sustaining private investment and development expansion in urban economy areas. Supportive institutional capacity, commitment and approach. By 2010: INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES - Basic prerogatives for implementation in place: - Service delivery, security, incentives, land use support, initial catalysts. - Administrative structure in place ensuring account-ability and support. - PPP’s in place. - Development agency in place. By 2015: - Committed public investment framework and programme. - Committed large-scale private investments. - Measurable and sustainable growth in urban economy areas.

18 OCTOBER 2010 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES ICT Infrastructure Productive and World-class ICT infrastructure in resourceful support of the Gauteng “Smart application of Province” vision and economic growth in Ekurhuleni: ICT. • Institutional structure to support/ accommodate external ICT focus by 2006. • 100% Synergy and connec-tivity with our development partners, including govern-ment, by 2010. Economic A diversiﬁ ed local Sustainable growth in a variety of Diversiﬁ cation economy able local economic sectors: to meet local By 2010: needs, support - A range of Government incentives sustainable to be in place. develop-ment - A measurable increase in and adapt to “Smart Industries” [Aerospace, changes in I.T., Logistics, Plastics, Agro- processing]. accor-dance with By 2015: global demands - A measurable increase of exports and shifts. into Africa. Job Creation Unemployment Reduced unemployment: to be reduced • EMM Job summit to be held in by half by 2014 2006. • 50% reduction in unemploy-ment and by half by 2015. again by 2025 • 75% reduction in unemploy-ment based on the by 2025. unemployment

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES ﬁ gures of 2004. Skills Development A skilled Improved mechanisms and community programmes to impart skills: exhibiting • EMM Centre of Excellence to be established by 2006. capabilities in • Mentoring programme for project self-reliance, management and technical skills innovation to be implemented by 2007. and continued • Institute of Technology to be re-skilling to established by 2010. meet the needs • Ongoing strengthening of ties with of a growing Educational Institutions. economy. Improved Skills: • Measurable increase in the percentage of the population which is technically and scientiﬁ cally skilled by 2015. • Adult illiteracy wiped out by 2020. OCTOBER 2010 19 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Tourism Promotion To promote the Development of tourism facilities: economy of the region, create By 2010: - Making the most of opportunities jobs and a safe created by the Soccer World Cup. and secure - African Shopping Hub, Craft environment, Market and Wine Emporium by establishing developed. a tourism - Business tourism facilities around the JIA. destination of choice. Increased tourism: • Ekurhuleni to be the preferred sporting/cultural/ heritage destination by 2015. • Business tourism to increase by 50% by 2020. Investment Increased inward Increased levels of public and Promotion investment private investment in all areas: in skills and By 2010: technology, - A range of government investment property and incentives to be in place. sustainable - Measurable increase in effective development. service delivery and information dissemination through “Customer Care Centre” implementation. INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES - CID’s in place.

From 2015 onwards: - Measurable increase in investment in strategic priority areas such as the mining belt. Economic An inclusive, Greater participation in the formal Transformation wealth- economy by all sectors of society: generating • Strategy to leverage EMM assets to ensure BBBEE to be in place by economy. 2007. • Enabling procurement policy to be fully implemented by 2008.

20 OCTOBER 2010 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Poverty and In line with Improvement in skills levels: Unemployment the national • All milestones as set out under objective, the the “Key Focus Area: “Skills Development” are relevant. aim is to halve Reduction in unemployment: poverty in the • All milestones as set out under next 10 years “Key Focus Area: “Job Creation” up to 2015, and are relevant. to halve it again Poverty relief and other social programmes: in the following • Integration to be achieved between 10 years, up to all initiatives/ programmes and 2025. institutions driving such initiatives/ programmes, by 2010. Human Settlements All people in • Upgrading/formalisation of all Ekurhuleni informal settlements, including to be housed the eradication of the basic services backlog, to be achieved in integrated by 2012. and functional • Housing backlog (including the sustainable formalisation of backyard shacks) human to be eradicated by 2015. settlements. • Social amenities backlog to be eradicated by 2020. Healthcare and Equitable • Functional partnership achieved Facilities healthcare and and maintained with all social facilities across institutions in EMM by 2010. • Measurable increase in all sectors

INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES community-based HIV and Aids of society- programmes by 2010. substantially • Acceptable access to Primary reduced rates of Health Care and social poverty-related development services by all communities [including rural disease. communities] by 2015. • 50% reduction in maternal and child-under-ﬁ ve mortality rates by 2015. • Environmental pollution levels to be in line with internationally accepted standards by 2015. • Extending operating hours to 24 hours in all health centres and large clinics by 2025.

OCTOBER 2010 21 C1 KEY FOCUS AREA 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Safety and Security A high level By 2010: of safety and - Pro-active management of security - a disasters in accordance with an integrated and comprehensive drastically Disaster Management Plan. reduced crime - Elimination of civil disobedience rate. by means of various community- based programmes and drives. By 2015: - 50% Reduction in serious and violent crimes. - 50% Reduction in fatalities and injuries due to occupational, domestic and road accidents. Parks, Sport and Ekurhuleni to By 2010: Recreational have world-class - Upgrading of 4 stadiums in Facilities parks, sports Ekurhuleni to world-class level. By 2015: and recreational - Reclamation of our African identity facilities. through arts, culture and heritage. INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES By 2025: - Equitable provision of facilities to all communities in Ekurhuleni. - 100% of the Metro-wide open space system to be developed and maintained.

22 OCTOBER 2010 C1 SERVICE DELIVERY CONCEPT

The current EMM service delivery concept is one of Service Delivery Regions [SDR’s] and Customer Care Centres [CCC’s]. In order to ensure quality service delivery, CCC’s have been established throughout the municipality to ensure that the EMM applies the principles of Batho Pele (people ﬁ rst).

STAKEHOLDER ALIGNMENT AND PARTICIPATION

The solutions to many of the critical development issues in Ekurhuleni lie outside the ambit of the local government mandate and a joint, cooperative and integrated approach to the implementation of the GDS is therefore of the utmost importance. The GDS must be owned and embraced by all the development stakeholders in the area, not only by the municipality.

MONITORING, EVALUATION AND REVIEW

The process of monitoring, evaluation and review of the GDS outcomes and milestones through the IDP is schematically illustrated below:

GDS Key Focus Area Milestones

Develop Key Performance Intervention and review Indicators (KPI’s) and targets for inclusion in the IDP

Monitoring and evaluation Develop Individual of implementation performance targets

OCTOBER 2010 23 C1 CONCLUSION

We have a vision of being the smart, creative and developmental city - that is our destination, but to arrive at our destination we need a roadmap. The Growth and Development Strategy 2025 will be our roadmap, guiding our actions and showing us the way during the next 20 years.

GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS

BBBEE Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment CBD Central Business District CCC Customer Care Centre CCTV Closed-Circuit Television CID City Improvement District EMF Environmental Management Framework EMM Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality GDS Growth & Development Strategy ICT Information and Communications Technology IDZ Industrial Development Zone ORTIA OR Tambo International Airport PPP Public-Private Partnership SDF Spatial Development Framework SDR Service Delivery Region

24 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C2 C2. INTEGRATED DEVELOPMENT PLAN (IDP)

TABLE OF CONTENT 1. Introduction 26 2. Status Quo 29 3. Vision, Mission, Values and Strategic Priorities 35 3.1 Vision 3.2 Mission 3.3 Values 4. Ekurhuleni Growth and Development Strategy (EGDS) 2025 36 5. Institutional Structure 48 6. Reviewed EMM Service Delivery Model 50 7. Review of the Integrated Development Plan 50 8. Spatial Development Framework 59 9. Disaster Management Plan 65 10 Multi Year Financial Plan (Under Separate Cover) 68 11. Performance Management System 68 12. Twenty Priority Townships Programme 76 12.1 Tembisa as part of 20 PTP 95 12.2 Wattville as part of 20 PTP 95 13. Provincial Plans, Programmes and Budgets 96 14. Ekurhuleni Turnaround Strategy 96 15. Conclusion 98

Annexures and ﬁ les contained on the Compact Disk (CD) provided: Annexure “A” GDS 2025 Annexure A1” Addendum to the GDS 2025 Annexure “B” Reviewed Service Delivery Model Annexure “C” Consolidated Ward Priorities Annexure “D” Reviewed EMM Disaster Management Plan Annexure “E” Tembisa Urban Management Plan and Master Plan Framework Annexure “F” EMM Turnaround Strategy Annexure “G” Combination of completed roads since July 2006

OCTOBER 2010 25 C2 C1 1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Background Integrated Development Planning is a process through which municipalities prepare a strategic development plan which extends over a ﬁ ve-year period. The Integrated Development Plan (IDP) is a product of the IDP process. The EMM IDP is the principal strategic planning instrument which guides and informs all planning, budgeting, management and decision –making processes in the municipality. Through Integrated Development Planning which necessitates the involvement of all relevant stakeholders, a municipality: • Identify its key development priorities; • Formulate a clear vision, mission and values; • Formulate appropriate strategies; • Develop the appropriate organizational structure and systems to realize the vision and mission; and • Align resources with the developmental priorities.

In terms of the Systems Act, all municipalities have to undertake an IDP process to produce IDP’s. As the IDP is a legislative requirement it has a legal status and it supersedes all other plans that guide development at local government level.

In a nutshell, the IDP process entails an assessment of the existing level of development and the identifi cation of key development priorities. The vision and mission statements for the long term development fl ow from the aforesaid, with specifi c reference to critical developmental and internal transformational needs. The development strategies and objectives will be directed at bridging the gap between the existing level of development and the vision and mission. A very critical phase of the IDP process is to link planning to the municipal budget (i.e. allocation of internal or external funding to the identifi ed projects); because this will ensure that the IDP directs the development and implementation of projects.

During the past nine years we have made defi nite progress in enabling the people of this region to enjoy the fruits of liberation and democracy. We have seen substantial improvements made in providing healthcare, building houses and providing water, electricity and sanitation and the bucket system has been eradicated. We have laid a solid foundation and are on course to improving the lives of our communities. As we celebrate the change in our communities, we are also aware of the many challenges we still face. The unemployment rate has come down from approximately 40% in 2001 to just over 34% in 2006. Our fi ght against poverty and underdevelopment will be further intensifi ed to work towards halving unemployment. Our responsibility as a sphere of government is to ensure that the quality of life of all that live and work in Ekurhuleni is improved. We will continue to engage in both progressive and meaningful discussions

26 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C2 with our communities and stakeholders to shape a clear path from which governance and development will draw guidance and direction. The council will continue to pursue and encourage community participation programmes to ensure our plans are in line with community needs. We have a responsibility to contribute to the process of transforming the lives of our people from the conditions of abject poverty and underdevelopment. In our fi ght against poverty, racism and underdevelopment, we are committed to ensuring that equitable service delivery becomes the norm in Ekurhuleni. For this reason EMM have to focus on the following National and Provincial priorities and its plans support the following: • Building good Governance and a Development State • Accelerate Growth, Decent work and leading to Sustainable Livelihoods • Building Economic and Social Infrastructure • Comprehensive Rural development strategy, Land and Agrarian Reform and Food Security • A strengthened skills and human resource base • Improved health profi le of the country • Intensifi ed fi ght against crime and corruption

The EMM IDP contains plans and programmes which will enable the achievement of inter alia the following: • All communities will have access to clean water and basic sanitation by 2014; • There is universal provision of free basic services; • Creation of safety and security for communities, including plans to deal with disaster and emergencies; • Utilize sports, recreation, arts and culture for social and physical renewal and building of single identity of Ekurhuleni community; • Environmental management, including dealing with conditions of dolomite prevalent in the city; • Development of an integrated transportation system linking both rail, road and air transportation, and emphasizing the development of metro bus system; • Providing health care and facilities to all our communities and support it by introducing social upliftment programmes across the municipality.

OCTOBER 2010 27 C2 C1 1.2 The Planning Framework The following is a graphic illustration of the strategic planning framework followed in the planning process of reviewing the EMM IDP

National and Provincial Plas and Guidelines inter alia: • SON Address EKURHULENI GDS 2025 • NSDP WARD PRIORITIES • PGDS • GSDP

5-YEAR IDP

Annual IDP Multi Year Budget

SDBIP

Implementation

Performance Assessment

Annual Report

Through the above process National and Provincial programmes and their respective targets are being addressed. Inter alia, the following National targets are contained in the IDP and Budget albeit dependent is on additional funding to be made available from national and provincial spheres: • All people will have access to potable water by 2014 – This target has been achieved. All communities in EMM have access to potable water according to the minimum level of service • All people will have access to basic sanitation services by 2014 • All people to have access to electricity by 2014; and • Upgrading/ formalization of all informal settlements, including the eradication of the basic services backlog to be achieved by 2014 It should be noted that the achievement of the above is dependent on the provision of additional resources ( Financial and Human).

28 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C2 2. STATUS QUO

2.1 Introduction The Metropolitan Municipality of Ekurhuleni was established in 2000. It covers an extensive geographical area, from Germiston in the west to Springs and Nigel in the east. Ekurhuleni is one of six metropolitan municipalities resulting from the restructuring of local government.

The former local administrations of the nine towns in the East Rand – Alberton, Benoni, Boksburg, Brakpan, Edenvale/Lethabong, Germiston, Kempton Park/Tembisa, Nigel and Springs – were amalgamated into the new Metropolitan Municipality, along with two other councils – the Khayalami Metropolitan Council and the Eastern Gauteng Services Council.

Ekurhuleni has a total surface area of + 2 000km² that accommodates a population of + 2.7 million (Source: Global Insight Regional eXplorer (ReX) v.351). This constitutes + 5.6% of the national population and makes up 28% of Gauteng’s population. The population density is approximately 1 400 people per km², making Ekurhuleni one of the most densely populated areas in the country and province. By comparison, population density in Gauteng is 596 people per km² and 39 people per km² in the country.

The Ekurhuleni metropolitan economy is larger and more diverse than that of many small countries in Africa, including all the countries in Southern Africa. It accounts for nearly a quarter of the Gauteng economy, which in turn contributes over a third of the national Gross Domestic Product. Ekurhuleni contributes + 7% to the country’s spending power and + 7.4% to the nation’s production. In most respects – per capita income, unemployment, poverty, average wages and other indicators of human development - it is similar to the rest of Gauteng. However, there is one important structural difference: many of the factories for production of goods and commodities are located in Ekurhuleni. Manufacturing in Ekurhuleni accounts for just less than 20% of the GDP of Gauteng. In Ekurhuleni itself, manufacturing accounts for some 28% of total production output. Because of this, the largest concentration of industry in the whole of South Africa (and in Africa), Ekurhuleni is often referred to as “Africa’s Workshop”.

The downside of the strong manufacturing sector is that globalisation has a deﬁ nite impact on the structure of production and on the demand for labour. Ekurhuleni, although not beneﬁ ting from direct capital investments as a result of the automotive sector developments in the country, continues to play the role of the workshop of, for example the economy, with production of structural steel and fabricated metal products serving as inputs into other areas’ economies. In the period 1998 to 2003, annual economic growth in Ekurhuleni has expanded constantly at almost double that of the national manufacturing growth rate. The economically active population is 57%

OCTOBER 2010 29 C2 C1 compared to 40% nationally. Household income and per capita income exceed the national average by 10% and 33% respectively. The percentage of people living in poverty nationally is 44.4%, compared to 24.2% in Ekurhuleni (Source: Global Insight Regional eXplorer (ReX) v.351).

Ekurhuleni has a network of roads, airports, rail lines, telephones, electricity grids and telecommunications that rivals that of Europe and America – a ﬁ rst world infrastructure supporting a well established industrial and commercial complex. Ekurhuleni can, in fact, be regarded as the transportation hub of the country. The municipality is home to the OR Tambo International Airport, the busiest airport in Africa. O R Tambo International Airport services the entire continent and links to major cities throughout the world. Similarly, many of the world’s leading airlines ﬂ y into O R Tambo International Airport. Some 14 million passengers pass through this airport each year. In addition, a number of smaller domestic airlines connect O R Tambo International Airport with cities throughout South Africa. South Africa’s largest railway hub is in Ekurhuleni (Germiston) and links the city to all the major population centres and ports in the Southern African region. A number of South Africa’s modern freeways and expressways connect Ekurhuleni to other cities and provinces. The Maputo corridor development, South Africa’s most advanced spatial development initiative, connects Ekurhuleni with the capital of Mozambique and the largest South African Indian Ocean port. Direct rail, road and air links connect Ekurhuleni to Durban, the biggest and busiest port within South Africa. During the period 1995 to 2005, the Gauteng government was strategic in upgrading some of the ageing road networks linked to the industrial hub, to promote the movement of goods and services.

The Blue IQ projects, situated within Ekurhuleni, include the Wadeville-Alrode Industrial Corridor with linkages to the largest logistical hub, the City Deep Container terminal, the planned Gautrain rapid rail link to Johannesburg and Tshwane and the O R Tambo International Airport Industrial Development Zone (IDZ). The latter aims to cluster light manufacturing, more especially in beneﬁ ciation, and to develop an aero space park. The EMM’s annual budget is in the region of R13,5 billion, of which more than R2 billion is being budgeted annually for capital projects in line with the priorities set in the Integrated Development Plan (IDP). The bulk of this expenditure is dedicated to upgrading facilities and removing infrastructure backlogs that were caused by apartheid.

2.2 The Current Situation The Growth and Development Strategy 2025 GDS depicts the status quo that exists in Ekurhuleni. It follows a landscape approach, describing the status quo in terms of three Key Performance Areas namely: Infrastructure and Services, Economic Transformation and Social Transformation. The present status quo of these Key Performance Areas (KPA) are summarised below. These characteristics determined the speciﬁ c focus areas around which the GDS was formulated. What follows is a high level summary of the status of development in Ekurhuleni:

30 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C2 2.2.1 Infrastructure and Services (Physical Development) • As it consists of nine CBDs with no clearly identifi able core area and no central theme, Ekurhuleni lacks a clear identity and should fi nd innovative ways to create a unique identity for itself; • Due to the conglomeration of nine East Rand towns and large vacant land parcels in the mining belt around the urban core, Ekurhuleni’s spatial distribution is fragmented, causing an inequitable city. This has lead to low development densities with historically disadvantaged communities situated on the urban periphery; • Many areas in the city have poor transportation linkages and offer poor mobility. This is due, in part, to high levels of congestion on the national and provincial road network and freeway interchanges and large parts of the planned provincial road system not having been built. There are also inadequate linkages between certain nodes in the EMM as well as a lack of integrated public transport nodes and systems. Some 22% of the municipal road network is still gravel and, although there is a good rail network, it is underutilised; • Many areas in the city have an ageing and poorly maintained trading services infrastructure which is subject to frequent breakdowns. Many communities have inadequate access to basic services due to infrastructure backlogs experienced in township areas and informal settlements; • Due to mining activities, urbanisation and industrialisation, environmental problems such as dolomite, informal settlements, industry and pollution, Ekurhuleni is characterised by large areas of degraded environment. However, some unique environmental opportunities such as rivers and wetlands, ridges and agricultural potential have also been identifi ed; • Many areas in the city are decayed, performing poorly and in need of urban renewal, but at the same time present an opportunity to capitalise on existing infrastructure to build vibrant urban communities; and • Current ICT infrastructure such as broadband is inadequate to accommodate the rapid technological growth required, particularly in high-tech hubs such as those surrounding OR Tambo International Airport.

2.2.2 Economic Transformation • The local economy requires a greater degree of sustainable diversiﬁ cation as it is presently dominated by the manufacturing sector; • As is the case elsewhere in South Africa, unemployment is high at ±35% and policies to promote labour absorption and job creation will be of crucial importance to the future of the city; • The improvement of skills levels to attract and support local economic growth is of critical importance as technical skills levels are low and not compatible with the skills requirements of the local economy. The literacy rate is 84% for

OCTOBER 2010 31 C2 C1 example, but computer literacy is low; • Due to the location of OR Tambo International Airport within its borders, Ekurhuleni is a gateway to Africa, and opportunities for tourism promotion and development locally should be exploited. These include opportunities for business and retail tourism and the Klipriviersberg, Wetlands and Bird Sanctuaries; • No city can survive without new investment in physical, economic and social infrastructure. Therefore, investment promotion and facilitation must be a key focus area to attract entrepreneurs and address the varying levels of investment throughout the Metro; and • There is skewed distribution of wealth and resources, with the greatest portion of the wealth in the city still in the hands of a small elite. Broad based economic transformation as well as entrepreneurial activity will be promoted at every opportunity.

2.2.3 Social Transformation • With ±24% of the local population living in poverty and the current unemployment rate at ±35%, the levels of poverty and unemployment in Ekurhuleni are unacceptably high, and need to be addressed in a sustainable way. The majority of people living below the poverty line, live on the urban periphery, far away from job opportunities and social amenities; • Many people in Ekurhuleni still live in overcrowded informal settlements without adequate access to engineering and social infrastructure. The creation and promotion of sustainable human settlements is therefore an important priority. There is a housing backlog with 134 000 shacks in informal settlements and 36 000 backyard shacks. This is constantly worsening as the inﬂ ux is set to continue and many informal settlements are situated on land not suitable for housing. Well-located land suitable for housing development is not readily available. Past subsidy schemes have also resulted in mono-functional, non- sustainable areas; • High levels of HIV and Aids and other poverty related diseases such as TB are experienced in the poor communities and access to health care is inequitable. There is a high rate of infant and child malnutrition; • The crime and domestic violence rates are unacceptably high and a higher level of safety and security for the inhabitants of the city will be pursued. Various risks such as airports, gas pipelines and old mining areas have the potential for causing disasters; and • The city is characterised by inadequate and inequitable provision of and poorly maintained parks, sport and recreational facilities, public places and cemeteries. Green areas are fragmented and disjointed with no central theme.

32 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C2 2.3 Economic Profi le In order to go somewhere, you need to know where you are, fi rst. Local government has a need to be able to assess the demographic, economic, and socio-economic status quo; as well as measure growth and development on a sub-national level and, more specifi cally, on local metropolitan municipality levels. This type of information and estimates are needed for activities such as: • Policy and strategy decisions; • Economic planning; • Market development; and • Infrastructure planning, development, and delivery.The economic profi le overview of Ekurhuleni serves to inform decision makers regarding the characteristics of the Ekurhuleni economy.

As a result of the lag in the statistical data reporting and collection process, it is currently only possible to provide estimates for economic variables up to the year 2006. National-level information from Statistics South Africa and the South African Reserve Bank for 2006 has also been used.

Ekurhuleni’s key demographic and socio-economic characteristics are summarised in the following table and put in context when viewed with the Gauteng provincial and South African national picture. National boundaries have changed over the last decade, thus ﬁ gures in the demographic context differs from the 2002 report. The region covers approximately 2 000 square kilometers, which translates into 11.63% of Gauteng and 0.16% of the national areas, respectively. Evident is that the area is extremely densely populated when compared with both Gauteng and national population density. Ekurhuleni houses approximately 5.7% of the country’s population and 27.32% of the Gauteng province’s total population. Income levels in Ekurhuleni are above national average (which is to be expected for most urban areas in South Africa), but below that of the Gauteng province’s average. Unemployment rates are similar to the national average, but higher than that of the Gauteng province on average; while the percentage of people in poverty is lower than the national average, but similar to Gauteng’s average.

Table 1: Ekurhuleni key comparative statistics, 2006

EKURHULENI GAUTENG SOUTH AFRICA Region area (sq km) 1,928 16,579 1,221,246 Population 2,699,394 9,897,610 47,560,742 Population Density (nr of ppl 1,400 596 39 per sq km) Economically active population (as % of total 57.3% 57.0% 40.5% population) No of households 868,976 3,155,402 12,883,990

OCTOBER 2010 33 C2 C1 EKURHULENI GAUTENG SOUTH AFRICA Average Household income 107,349 142,905 94,090 (rand, current prices) Annual per capita income 34,557 45,642 25,489 Gini Coefﬁ cient 0.59 0.58 0.64 Formal sector employment 696,204 3,670,360 9,896,088 (estimates) Informal sector employment 98,234 477,803 2,110,379 (estimates) Unemployment rate 34.3% 30.0% 37.7% % of persons in poverty 24.2% 22.9% 44.4% Poverty gap (R million) 1,172 9,903 37,897 Human Development index 0.68 0.71 0.62 (HDI) Index of buying power (IBP) 0.08 0.35 1.00 Share of economic output 6.6% 33.7% 100.0% (GVA % of SA 2006) Economic growth 1996-2006 (GVA % growth pa) 2.7% 4.1% 3.4% (Constant 2000 prices) Source: Global Insight Regional eXplorer (ReX) v.351

The Human Development Index (HDI) for Ekurhuleni indicates that the area fares better than the national average, whilst lagging slightly behind the Gauteng average. The HDI for Ekurhuleni is 0.68, which is indicative of a medium-developed municipality. The buying power in the area is based on Global Insight’s Index of Buying Power (IBP), which indicates that only 8% of the country’s spending power is located in Ekurhuleni compared to 35% in Gauteng as a whole.

However, Ekurhuleni is a large and signiﬁ cant local economy in the South African economic context. Some summary estimates (presented in Table 2) illustrate that Ekurhuleni has a resident population of approximately 2.7 million people; the area contributes approximately 7% to national production and has a share of approximately 6.6% of national employment. Over the period 1996 to 2006, Ekurhuleni’s economy grew by an estimated average of 2.7% per annum. Ekurhuleni contributes approximately 19% to the total economic output of the Gauteng province. Evident from the table is that Ekurhuleni did not share in the same strong growth that Johannesburg exhibited over the same period.

34 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C2 Table 2: Population, output, employment, and economic growth in South Africa’s major cities

Contribution Average to National Share of Annual Population in Area Economic National Economic 2006 Output in Employment Growth 2006 1996 - 2006 Ekurhuleni 2,699,394 6.6% 7.0% 2.7% City of Cape Town 3,132,774 10.0% 11.2% 4.3% eThekwini 3,300,906 7.9% 10.6% 4.0% City of Johannesburg 3,460,916 17.9% 16.3% 4.9% Nelson Mandela Bay 1,077,556 2.3% 3.5% 3.4% City of Tshwane 2,129,866 9.2% 8.4% 4.8% Gauteng 9,879,610 37.1% 33.7% 4.1% South Africa 47,560,742 100.0% 100.0% 3.4% Source: Global Insight Southern Africa – Regional eXplorer

Since information used to derive economic activity estimates are in most cases reported by company head ofﬁ ces, combined with the fact that many manufacturing operations have head ofﬁ ces in the Johannesburg and other metropolitan municipalities—while the production plants are located in Ekurhuleni— one necessarily needs to interpret the economic performance-estimates in such context. This may imply that some of the estimates obtained for Ekurhuleni may be on the conservative side.

3. VISION, MISSION & VALUES Strategic work undertaken by Ekurhuleni since 2000 to guide the Integrated Development Planning Process included the development of a long term vision, mission and organisational values. To be able to change the situation reﬂ ected in the status quo, the strategic focus of the Ekurhuleni GDS 2025 is to build on the long term vision of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality.

3.1 Vision The Smart, Creative and Developmental City

3.2 Mission It is based on the above vision that a mission statement was developed as a way of forging ahead towards achievement. The mission statement is:

OCTOBER 2010 35 C2 C1 3.3 Values In pursuing the above-mentioned vision and mission the EMM is committed to upholding the following core values: • Performance Excellence; • Integrity; • Community Centeredness; • Transparency; and • Cooperative Governance.

4. EKURHULENI GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY (EGDS) 2025

To be able to achieve the vision of becoming The Smart, Creative and Developmental City, and direct the attention to the status quo, a strategic development agenda was put in place that guides the EMM planning and budgeting processes. It has been set along three development areas as well as one relating to municipal transformation and institutional development, to ensure the institutional capacity and administrative support to the organisation to deliver on its mandate. The agenda set along the four different development areas in the EGDS 2025 is as follows:

36 OCTOBER 2010 C2 ll development on vacant fi ed in 2004 to be prioritized i.t.o. development. fi ed core economic area : fi economic triangle of Ekurhuleni: to JIA. Germiston. and north south corridor along the R21 freeway. and underutilized land between the urban core peripheral township areas. by 2010. An identi Area identi • Increased development and investment in the core • Gautrain construction and related development adjacent • Successful development of the R21 corridor. • Successful development of the Government Precinct in • Subsidy-linked housing development in the mining belt. Improved accessibility and mobility throughout the metropolitan area. • Strong east-west corridor along the N12 / N17 freeways Areas of urban density – in • • A managed and respected urban edge. A • Effective and integrated planning implementation: Plan in place by 2007. Transport • Integrated Authority established by 2009. Transport • Agency established by 2012. • Road • High quality integrated and well-maintained infrastructure : • Roads building programme in place by 2006. • Current backlog of gravel roads to be eradicated in 2015. Additional freeways built : • Upgrading R21 and R24 for additional capacity lanes • PWV 13/14 built by 2020. • PWV 15 built by 2025. A well-developed and vibrant core economic area A which imparts a unique character and identity to Ekurhuleni An integrated and equitable city. High quality, integrated and well-maintained High quality, transportation infrastructure, integrated public transport systems, ensuring a high degree of mobility and choices to commuters. STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Clear City Identity Spatial Development. Roads & Transport 4.1 INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES 4.1 INFRASTRUCTURE

OCTOBER 2010 37 C2 nalized by 2007. ﬁ ned and functional open space network: ﬁ 2010. 2006. All maintenance backlogs to be eradicated by 2010. A strategic network of public transport corridors A providing sub-regional linkages. • Improved usage of public transport services : recapitalization by 2010. Taxi • • Modal integration for public transport to Gautrain by 2010. • Bus services to cover all areas in Ekurhuleni by 2015. information center established by 2020. Transport • • Start building additional rail linkages by 2020. • Modal transfer facilities provided at all stations by 2025. More use of non-motorized transport: • Pedestrian and bicycle-strategies in place by 2007. services in all areas. Well-maintained • All communities to have equitable access services: All people to have access potable water by 2008. • All people to have access basic sanitation services by • All people to have access electricity by 2012. • More sustainable disposal of solid waste: Comprehensive waste minimization strategy [including recycling] to be in place by 2007. Improved storm water management : • Storm water Master plan to be in place by 2007. • Storm water system backlogs to be eradicated by 2020. clearly de A • Open space plan to be • 50% of open space system to be developed by 2015. • 100% of open space system to be developed by 2025. All development to be guided by an EMF: • for the entire Ekurhuleni area to be in place by EMF’s High quality, integrated and well-maintained High quality, transportation infrastructure, integrated public transport systems, ensuring a high degree of mobility and choices to commuters. High quality and well-maintained services, equitable services throughout the urban areas substantial increase in the general quality of A environment STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Roads & Transport Service Infrastructure Environmental Management

38 OCTOBER 2010 C2 ected through ﬂ dence and ﬁ minimal vacancy rates, high investor con high demand for expansion. Quality public environment guiding, promoting and sustaining private investment and development expansion in urban economy areas. commitment and Supportive institutional capacity, approach. initial catalysts. and support. mineral content to be removed by 2025. acceptable standards by 2025. resources: place by 2007. By 2010 : • Basic prerogatives for implementation in place: • incentives, land use support, security, Service delivery, • Administrative structure in place ensuring accountability • in place. PPP’s • Development agency in place. Measurable decline in land, water and air pollution : • Pollution monitoring systems to be in place by 2010. Measurable increase in the utilization of alternative energy sources: • Strategy to be in place by 2010. Substantial environmental improvement in the mining belt: • Implementation of Hloekisa project to commence by 2006. • All mine dumps/slimes dams with economically viable • All other mine dumps/slimes dams to be rehabilitated Integrated and sustainable protection of natural • conservation strategy and programme to be in Wetland Functional, sustainable, and attractive urban areas • Normalization of urban economy areas re A substantial increase in the general quality of A environment STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Urban Renewal Environmental Management

OCTOBER 2010 39 C2

partners, including government, by 2010. areas. Agro-processing]. Logistics, Plastics, I.T., World-class ICT infrastructure in support of the Gauteng World-class “Smart Province” vision and economic growth in Ekurhuleni. • Institutional structure to support/accommodate external ICT focus by 2006. • 100% Synergy and connectivity with our development By 2015 : • Committed public investment framework and programme. • Committed large-scale private investments. • Measurable and sustainable growth in urban economy Sustainable growth in a variety of local economic sectors. By 2010 : • range of Government incentives to be in place. A • measurable increase in “Smart Industries” [Aerospace, A By 2015 : • Africa. measurable increase of exports into A Reduce unemployment • EMM Job summit to be held in 2006 • 50% reduction in unemployment by 2015 • 75% reduction in unemployment by 2025 ed local economy able to meet fi gures of 2004. Productive and resourceful application of ICT. A diversi A Functional, sustainable, and attractive urban areas needs, support sustainable development and adapt to changes in accordance with global demands and shifts. Unemployment to be reduced by half 2014 and by half again 2025 based on the unemployment fi cation fi STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES ICT Infrastructure Urban Renewal Economic Diversi Job Creation 4.2 ECONOMIC TRANSFORMATION

40 OCTOBER 2010 C2 cally skilled by 2015. ﬁ World Cup. World developed. destination by 2015. technical skills to be implemented by 2007. strengthening of ties with Educational Institutions. which is technically and scienti Development of tourism facilities: By 2010 : • Making the most of opportunities created by Soccer • African Shopping Hub, Craft Market and Wine Emporium • Business tourism facilities around the JIA. Increased tourism: • Ekurhuleni to be the preferred sporting/cultural/heritage • Business tourism to increase by 50% 2020. Improved mechanisms and programmes to impart skills: • EMM Centre of Excellence to be established by 2006. • Mentoring programme for project management and • to be established by 2010. Ongoing Technology Institute of Improved Skills: • Measurable increase in the percentage of population • Adult illiteracy wiped out by 2020. To promote the economy of region, create jobs To and a safe secure environment, by establishing a tourism destination of choice. A skilled community exhibiting capabilities in self– A reliance, innovation and continued reskilling to meet the needs of a growing economy STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Tourism Promotion Tourism Skills Development

OCTOBER 2010 41 C2 place by 2007. 2008. place. information dissemination through “Customer Care Centre” implementation. areas such as the mining belt. Greater participation in the formal economy by all sectors of society. • Strategy leverage EMM assets to ensure BBBEE be in • Enabling procurement policy to be fully implemented by Increased levels of public and private investment in all areas: By 2010 : • range of government investment incentives to be in A • service delivery and Measurable increase in effective • in place. CID’s From 2015 onwards: • Measurable increase in investment strategic priority An inclusive, wealth-generating economy. Increased inward investment in skills and property and sustainable development. technology, STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Economic Transformation Investment Promotion

42 OCTOBER 2010 C2 ve mortality ﬁ including the eradication of basic services backlog, to be achieved by 2012. shacks] to be eradicated by 2015. social institutions in EMM by 2010. programmes by 2010. development services by all communities [including rural communities] by 2015. Development” are relevant. are relevant. programmes and institutions driving such initiatives/ programmes, by 2010. rates by 2015. internationally-accepted standards by 2015. and large clinics by 2025 • Upgrading/formalization of all informal settlements, • Housing backlog [including the formalization of backyard • Social amenities backlog to be eradicated by 2020. • Functional partnership achieved and maintained with all • Measurable increase in community-based HIV/Aids • Acceptable access to Primary Health Care and social • 50% reduction in maternal and child-under- Improvement in skills levels: • Area: Skills All milestones as set out under the “Focus Reduction in unemployment: • Area: Job Creation” All milestones as set out under “Focus Poverty relief and other social programmes: • Integration to be achieved between all initiatives/ • Environmental pollution levels to be in line with • Extending operating hours to 24 in all health centres All people in Ekurhuleni to be housed integrated and functional sustainable human settlements. Equitable health care and facilities across all sectors of society–substantially reduced rates poverty– related disease. In line with the national objective, aim is to halve poverty in the next 10 years up to 2015, and halve it again in the following 10 years, up to 2025. STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Human Settlements Healthcare and Facilities Poverty and Unemployment 4.3 SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION 4.3 SOCIAL

OCTOBER 2010 43 C2 and heritage. Ekurhuleni. developed and maintained. integrated and comprehensive Disaster Management Plan. community–based programmes and drives. occupational, domestic and road accidents. By 2010: • Upgrading of 4 stadiums in Ekurhuleni to world-class level. By 2015: • African identity through arts, culture Reclamation of our By 2025: • Equitable provision of facilities to all communities in • 100% of the Metro-wide open space system to be By 2010: • Pro-active management of disasters in accordance with an • Elimination of civil disobedience by means various By 2015: • 50% Reduction in serious and violent crimes. • 50% Reduction in fatalities and injuries due to Ekurhuleni to have world-class parks, sports and recreational facilities. A high level of safety and security – a drastically A reduced crime rate. STRATEGIC FOCUS AREASTRATEGIC 2025 AGENDA OUTCOMES AND MILESTONES Sports and Recreational Facilities Safety and Security

44 OCTOBER 2010 C2 4.4 Municipal Transformation and Institutional Development

The EMM will adhere to the following general principles: • Sound political and management leadership is required to steer the EMM towards fulfi lling its vision, mission and the desired GDS outcomes; • Better service delivery through the principles of Batho Pele will underpin all activities of the EMM; • Corporate discipline is a commitment and EMM’s senior management shall adhere to behavior that is universally recognised and accepted to be correct and proper; • Transparency is the ease with which an outsider is able to make meaningful analyses of the EMM’s actions, its economic fundamentals and the non fi nancial aspects pertinent to the organisation. It refl ects whether or not stakeholders are able to obtain a true picture of what is happening within the organisation; • Independence is the extent to which mechanisms have been put in place to minimise or avoid potential confl icts of interest that may exist; • Individuals or groups in the EMM, who make decisions and take action on specifi c issues, need to be accountable for their decisions and actions. Mechanisms must exist and be effective to allow for accountability; • With regard to management, responsibility pertains to behaviour that allows for corrective action and for penalising mismanagement; and • The systems that exist within the EMM must exhibit fairness and take into account all those that have an interest in Ekurhuleni and its future. The rights of various groups have to be acknowledged, respected and balanced against each other.

4.5 Addendum to the Ekurhuleni GDS 2025 following the Growth and Development Summit 2006 The following reﬂ ect resolutions taken during the EMM Growth and Development Summit held on 1 and 2 September 2006. These have been translated into an addendum to the EGDS 2025.

4.5.1 Functional Sustainable Human Settlements • Implement energy-efﬁ cient housing solutions; • EMM will pro-actively acquire / allocate land for sustainable human settlements; • Private sector and SMME involvement will be actively promoted and LED initiatives will be incorporated into the housing programme; • Promote community involvement in local environmental rehabilitation and management; • Promote community involvement in crime prevention; • Integrate the HIV and Aids strategy with the housing programme;

OCTOBER 2010 45 C2 • Promote the conversion and / or rehabilitation of existing developments, especially in the inner city areas, for housing (Brownfi elds development); • Promote housing development close to the core areas of Ekurhuleni; • Promote and support aesthetically innovative housing developments; • Promote integrated and holistic approaches to the creation of settlements and eliminate red tape; • Eradicate water and sanitation backlog by 2014; and • EMM, in conjunction with Provincial and National Government, will attempt to raise bridging fi nance to compliment its own funding for achieving targets. 4.5.2 SANRAL Gauteng Freeway Improvement Scheme • Upgrade the N12 between Gillooly’s and Daveyton; • Upgrade the N17 between Springs and Ermelo; • Upgrade the N3 between Alberton and the Buccleuch interchange – planning to commence in 2008 / 9; • Construct the PWV14 between the O R Tambo International Airport and the M2 in Germiston – project to be completed in 2012 /13; • Roll out an Intelligent Transport System (ITS) to the N12 and N17; and • Develop an overload control centre in line with Provincial strategy. 4.5.3 Provincial Perspective • Improve access to townships (Gauteng 20 Priority Townships Programme); • Address the road requirements around OR Tambo International Airport in the light of the new ACSA Masterplan; and • Establish a Joint Transport Management Agency with Joburg and Tshwane Metro’s and the Province. 4.5.4 Municipal Roads and Stormwater Networks • 20 Priority Townships Programme will be completed by March 2009; • Current backlog of tertiary roads to be eradicated by 2012; • Current stormwater backlog to be eradicated by 2014; and • EMM will lobby for the upgrading of the R21 and R24 before 2010. 4.5.5 Gautrain • O R Tambo International Airport / Sandton link will be completed by June 2010; and • The feeder and distribution system will be rolled out in time for 2010. 4.5.6 SARCC / Metrorail / Province • Upgrade Rhodesfi eld station to integrate with Gautrain; • Upgrade the following rail corridors within EMM:

46 OCTOBER 2010 C2 • Olifantsfontein / Germiston /Johannesburg – priority • Daveyton / Germiston – priority • Kwesine / Germiston – next phase; • Upgrade rolling stock – explore local manufacturing options; • Re-introduce the railway police to combat crime on trains; • EMM will lobby for extensions to the current commuter rail network to include: • The southern parts of Katlehong and Palm Ridge • Etwatwa and • Kwatsaduza; and • Achieve modal integration at all stations by 2010. 4.5.7 Taxi Re-capitalisation and Taxi’s • Taxi ranks will be upgraded as follows: • 35 seater taxis will be catered for • People with disabilities will be provided for and • Security will be provided for; • Shelters will be constructed at bus stops and taxi lay-byes; • Skills development initiatives within the taxi industry will be supported; and • Community safety aspects related to the taxi industry will be addressed. 4.5.8 Municipal Bus Services • The municipal bus services will be extended – the current bus plan must be implemented and the old ﬂ eet must be replaced. 4.5.9 Soccer World Cup 2010 • Build non-motorised transport facilities in Tembisa and Vosloorus; and • Build model transfer at major stations. 4.5.10 Freight • Support the development of a new cargo terminal at O.R.Tambo International Airport; • Support the development of an IDZ linked to the airport; and • Support the development of a link between City Deep and the Rand Airport.

The GDS 2025 and its Addendum is attached as Annexure A and A1 in the CD Provided. The agenda set above is to be achieved by the year 2025 and informs all medium term planning of EMM. Speciﬁ c outcomes and milestones are set for each of the eighteen different focus areas. Through the IDP, these outcomes and milestones are broken down into measurable performance targets and performance indicators. These are

OCTOBER 2010 47 C2 reﬂ ected in the different operational strategies of all the various departments. Details of departmental Plans are contained on the CD provided.

EMM is in the process to review the GDS 2025. This will take place in line with the reviewed Provincial GDS that is currently being ﬁ nalized.

5. INSTITUTIONAL STRUCTURE

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality (EMM) has implemented a Mayoral Executive and Ward Participatory System of local governance which ensures that governance is taken right down to community level and that all citizens within the metropolis are represented in decision-making. This increases residents’ sense of belonging, accountability and empowerment and actively involves them in all issues dealt with by the metropolitan municipality.

The municipality comprises 175 councillors, of both elected (88 ward representatives) and proportional (87 Councillors) representation. Each of the 88 ward councillors chairs a ward committee as part of the Ward Participatory System that brings participation down to community level.

Ward councillors play a central role in the communication process between the communities they represent and the Council, reporting back regularly through ward meetings and assisting the community in identifying needs and priority areas of development which feed into the municipality’s planning processes.

The Executive Mayor heads up a team of 13 full-time councillors comprising herself, a Mayoral Committee of 10, a Speaker and a Chief Whip of Council.

Political oversight of the administration is ensured via Section 80 committees in control of the different portfolios in Council, which comprise: • Corporate Services and City Planning; • Community Safety; • Roads Transport and Civil Works; • Water and Energy • Health • Economic Development; • Finance; • Sport, Recreation, Arts & Culture; • Environmental Development; and • Housing.

Councillors also serve on the Development Tribunal where political oversight is ensured over the physical development of the Metropolitan area.

48 OCTOBER 2010 C2 The Political Structure is outlined below:

Mayoral Committee

Executive Mayor MMC: City Development MMC: Finance MMC: Community Safety MMC: Infrastructure Services MMC: Health MMC: Economic Development MMC: Housing MMC: Environmental Development MMC: Sport, Recreation, Arts & Culture MMC: Corporate Services

Other Committees • Development Tribunal • Audit • Municipal Public Accounts Committee (MPAC) • Gender • Grants-in-aid • Public Participation and Petitions

The above political structure is supported by the following organisational structure:

OCTOBER 2010 49 C2

CITY MANAGER

• City Development • Infrastructure Services • Finance

• Economic Development • Health • Legal and Administrative Services • GDS / IDP • Sport, Recreation, Arts and Culture • Human Resources • Customer Care Centres • Community Safety Management and • Housing Development

• Environmental Development • Information Communications • Fleet and Facilities Technology

50 OCTOBER 2010 C2 6 REVIEWED SERVICE DELIVERY MODEL

The Business Plan for Customer Care Centre (CCC) was ofﬁ cially approved in November 2007. This resulted in twenty Customer Care Areas (CCA’s) been established in all areas within Ekurhuleni.

The CCCs have been operational for over two years and it is generally accepted that it has improved service delivery within Ekurhuleni. However, the CCC concept has been reviewed and improved to fulﬁ l the mandate of government, which is to bring government services to communities and to provide ultimately a “one stop-shop” for all government services.

Sufﬁ cient practical experience has now been gained to put forward proposals to further enhance the original concept i.e. Customer Care Service Delivery Model (CCSDM) and to make it more effective, efﬁ cient and practical.

During the previous two years of the implementation of the CCSDM, the CC has become the face of EMM in terms of servicing customers and as a result customers now demand responses and information from CC ofﬁ ces.

This results in the CCSDM not been able to fully deliver on its mandate to service all communities’ equitability and providing a “one-stop shop” for service delivery.

The creation of EMM Service through the establishment of CCA will ensure that there is a “one-stop shop” for customers. This will reduce customers’ frustrations of being sent from pillar to post. This will also allow immediate interventions to correct/ intervene on any service delivery matter.

The CCA Managers will ensure that community’s queries and/or requests are addressed timeously and in terms of the Batho Pele Principles.

The Reviewed, approved Service delivery Model is attached as Annexure “B” and is contained on the CD provided.

7. REVIEW OF INTEGRATED DEVELOPMENT PLAN

The review of the Integrated Development Plan (IDP) in terms of the Municipal Systems Act has been guided and informed by the following principles: • It must support and work towards achieving the Vision, Mission, Values and the Seven Strategic Priorities of EMM. • Working towards the achievement of the EMM GDS 2025 Outcomes and Milestones (Strategic Objectives).

OCTOBER 2010 51 C2 C2 • Focus on service delivery in terms of the eradication of backlogs and the maintenance of infrastructure. • Address community priorities (needs) as identifi ed in the IDP as well as newly identifi ed priorities. • Addressing the deliverables set at the Mayoral Lekgotla. • Provincial plans and programmes applicable to the specifi c department. Budget allocations by the respective provincial sector departments to these projects should also be refl ected as far as possible.

The review of the IDP focused on formulating measurable performance indicators and targets set for the 5, 3 and 1 year. These targets informed the multiyear budgets prepared as well as the SDBIP.

In addition to the above, Departments were requested to ensure that the numbers of the various wards, in which projects identiﬁ ed in the budget will be implemented, are correct as this has been a ongoing problem over the last number of years.

There are also different categories of wards in terms of level of development. The categorising of wards is as follows: • Underdeveloped Wards • Developed, Residential • Developed, Industrial/Commercial/CBD • Mixed Wards • Multi-Wards

Mixed wards are wards where there are combinations of underdeveloped areas, residential, commercial or CBD areas.

7.1 Community Participation Community participation focused on a one day workshop in each of the twenty different Customer Care Areas which took place and had the following approach:

A. REVIEW PROCESS The process will entail a full one day workshop per CCC which focused around the following: 1. Consider content of Departmental Service Delivery Plans and Projects (IDP) per CCA area, per ward.(All wards in the CCA area to be part of the workshop) a) Capital projects per CCA and per ward b) Maintenance projects per CCC and per ward 2. CBP ward plan

52 OCTOBER 2010 C2 a) IDP Capital projects. b) 5 prioritized objectives. c) Discretionary Funding project: 08/09 – feedback on implementation 09/10 – planning and implementation 11/12 – project planning The purpose of the process is inter alia to sensitize departments to visibly reﬂ ect ward priorities in departmental plans and budgets and indicate assistance and support with CBP discretionary funds projects.

A1. DEPARTMENTALSERVICE DELIVERY PLANS AND PROJECTS FEEDBACK PER CCC AREA a) Departments to provide feedback on departmental plans and projects per CCC area, per ward (capital and maintenance).

A.2 CBP WARD PLAN a) IDP Capital projects The objective is to determine the three top capital priorities per ward. To do this consideration must be given to: i. Current fi nancial year capital projects; ii. Long list of ward needs as contained in IDP. iii. List of prioritized ward needs as per gap analysis contained in the annexure, and; iv. Linkage between the above mentioned and the 5 prioritized objectives in the CBP plan. b) 5 Prioritized objectives i. Reaffi rmation/ Refi nement and possible amendments where required to the 5 prioritized objectives per ward plan. ii. Ensure that amendments and refi nements are captured. iii. Linkage to a) above. c) Discretionary funding projects 08/09 – feedback on implementation. 09/10 projects. 10/11 projects.

The objective is to evaluate completion and non completion of the discretionary fund for 08/09 and to plan for the implementation of the discretionary funds in the current ﬁ nancial year and further to identify projects for the discretionary funds for the 2010/2011 ﬁ nancial year.

OCTOBER 2010 53 C2 C2 i. Once projects have been identiﬁ ed, the process on procedure for developing the projects and accessing funds as attached must be followed. ii. Each project must be captured in a project schedule iii. Discretionary fund projects should not take over existing services and must be once off’s only, as far as possible. iv. Costing of the projects to be clearly developed, calculated and stipulated.

The above process had various roleplayers that included the following: • The Ward Councillors • CCA Managers • Ward Committee Members • Representatives from Social Groups within the ward • Ofﬁ cials from the EMM service delivery departments • Community Development Workers and • Public Participation Ofﬁ cials

The following is the schedule of workshops that took place: Date of Meeting Customer Care Centre 2 November 2009 Venue Tokoza (Ward 52. 54, 56, 57, 58) Tokoza Youth Center c/o Khumalo & Mabusa str Amanda van Zyl Time (011) 999 - 2796 09:00 – 19:00 3 November 2009 Alberton (Wards 37, 38, 53) Venue Council Chamber Alberton Civic Center Clive Dunstan Time (011) 999 - 2643 14:00 – 19:00 4 November 2009 Tembisa 2 (Wards 1, 2, 3, 4, 7) Venue Olifantsfontein Community Hall Mmabatho Rantho Time (011) 999 - 4522 09: 00 – 19:00

54 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Date of Meeting Customer Care Centre 6 November 2009 Katlehong 1 Venue (Wards 40, 48, 49, 50, 51, 55) D.H Williams Hall Time Lappies de Beer 09:00 – 19:00 (011) 999 - 1411 9 November 2009 Daveyton (Wards 68, 69, 70, 71) Venue Stompie Skosana Stephen Nowatha Time (011) 999 - 7375 09:00 – 19:00 11 November 2009 Tsakane (Wards 82, 83, 85) Venue Tsakane Community Hall Lidia Joubert Time (011) 999 - 8002 09:00 – 19:00 12 November 2009 Venue Springs (Wards 72, 75, 76) Springs Civic Center Main Hall Supper Room Sakie Kekane Time (011) 999 - 8517 15:00 – 19:00 13 November 2009 Edenvale (Wards 11, 12, 18, 19, 20) Venue Council Chambers Edenvale Lorraine Mokgatle Time (011) 999 - 3111 09:00 – 19:00 16 November 2009 Tembisa 1 (Wards 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14) Venue Rabasotho Hall Arthur Zwane Time (011) 999 - 4239 09:00 – 19:00 17 November 2009 Etwatwa (Wards 26, 65, 66, 67) Venue Stompie Skosane Hall Nompumelelo Phakathi Time (011) 999 - 6978 09:00 – 19:00 18 November 2009 Katlehong 2 (Wards 59, 60, 61, 62, 63) Venue Palmridge Hall Xolisile Tshabalala Time (011) 999 – 1520 09:00 – 19:00

OCTOBER 2010 55 C2 C2 Date of Meeting Customer Care Centre 19 November 2009 Brakpan (Wards 31, 74, 73) Venue Brakpan Council Chambers 3rd ﬂ oor Papa Mokebe Time (011) 999 - 8069 09:00 – 19:00 20 November 2009 Venue Vosloorus (Wards 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 64) Civic Center Community Hall M.C Botha Drive Hennie Botha Time (011) 999 - 5742 09:00 – 19:00 23 November 2009 Boksburg (Wards 22, 32, 33, 34, 42) Venue Boksburg Council Chambers Ace Phiri Time (011) 999 - 5533 09:00 – 19:00 (Wards 84, 86, 87, 88) 24 November 2009 Duduza = Ndoli Mosiane Venue (011) 999 – 9303 Monty Motloung Hall Nigel = Thandiwe Radebe Time (011) 999 – 9187 09:00 – 19:00 (011) 999 – 9187 25 November 2009 Kwa-Thema (Wards 77, 78, 79, 80, 81) Venue Kwa-Thema Hall Matshidiso Phalatse Time (011) 999 – 8915 09:00 – 19:00 27 November 2009 Benoni (Wards 24, 27, 28, 29, 30) Venue Benoni Council Chambers Mirriam Mahlangu Time (011) 999 - 7356 09:00 – 19:00 30 November 2009 Germiston (Wards 21, 35, 36, 39, 41) Venue Old Council Chambers Germiston Ariel Mabelane Time (011) 999 - 0624 14:00 – 19:00 2 December 2009 Kempton Park Venue (Wards 13, 15, 16, 17, 23, 25) Council Chambers Kempton Park Neli Thabatha Time (011) 921 - 2108 18:00 – 22:00

56 OCTOBER 2010 C2 After the Draft IDP and Budget was tabled to the council on 25 February 2010, ward councilors were requested to verify and update their respective ward priorities.

A consolidated ward priority list is contained as Annexure “C” which is contained on the CD provided.

The community has identiﬁ ed the following as priority service delivery areas through the IDP process: • Clinics • Facilities for disabled, aged and youth • Housing development • Pollution • Poverty alleviation and economic development • Roads • Safety and security • Sports facilities

As part of the Public Participation Process, the community was given an opportunity to provide comments on the IDP and Budget. A IDP / Budget conference was held on 13 March 2010 and more than 3500 members from the various communities across Ekurhuleni participated in it. The main issues raised by the community through the process conﬁ rmed the following IDP priority areas: Environmental Development

• Refuse Removal • Illegal Dumping • Garbage Bin Usage • Grass Cutting • Dumping Sites • Clean up campaigns • Waste Management • Rodents • Pollution • Eco Guides • Environmental Health • Environmental Training

OCTOBER 2010 57 C2 C2 Infrastructure Services: Road, Transport & Civil Works • Gravel Roads • Maintenance of Roads / Potholes • Street lights (impact on crime) • Paving required • Tarred Roads • Storm Water • Sinkholes / Dolomite • Speed Humps • Zebra Crossing • Bridges • Street Names & Road Signs • Blocked Sewerage

Community Safety • Crime prevention • Community Police Forum (CPF) • Community Safety Courts • Delayed Reaction Time • Rules & Regulations • EMPD Precincts

Health • ARV Treatments • Health / Clinic Needs • Indigent Management • Social Support • Need for Ambulances • Mobile Clinics • Youth Development • Care Givers

2010 and Special Projects • Economic Development • Opportunities for Business during Worldcup • Development of Soccer Grounds • Public Viewing Areas

58 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Housing • Review of Housing Policy • Building of New Houses • Corruption in Housing Matters • Development of Existing RDP Houses • Development of Informal Settlements • Title Deeds Complaints

Sport, Recreation, Arts and Culture • Building of Art Centre / Entertainment Centre • Building of Halls and Multi-purpose Centres • Swimming Pools • Sport and Recreational Facilities • Building of New Parks and Maintenance of Existing Parks • Building and Maintenance of Stadiums • Library Needs (shortage of media, extension of hours, shortage of equipment, mobile libraries)

Local Economic Development • Job Creation • Business Opportunities for the Community • Poverty Alleviation • Food Gardens • Co-operatives • Tourism • Economic Development

General • Complaints against councillors and staff • Ward committee empowerment • Skills Development • Provision of Bursaries • Recruitment Processes • Account Complaints • Schools • ID documents

OCTOBER 2010 59 C2 C2 • SASSA • New police stations • Community Media

The above matters raised by the communities have been covered in departmental Plans, Programmes and Budgets. The matters that link to National and provincial departments will be communicated to the other spheres for addressing.

It should be noted that over the last number of years, Roads have been the highest ward priority. Since July 2006, nearly R 950 000 000-00 worth of new roads have been built in all the different wards in Ekurhuleni. Annexure “G” on the compact disc (CD) provided, contains a list of these roads.

8. SPATIAL DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK (The EMM SDF is currently under complete review and this process will only be ﬁ nalised by June 2011.)

Executive Summary (The following is an executive summary on work in progress on the SDF review)

The MSDF review has been commissioned at a time when there has been a global economic meltdown. This has been a challenge for those living below the poverty line, the loss of employment and the exacerbation of the socio-economic situation of the marginalised, some of whom are indigent and destitute. It is they who are susceptible to vulnerabilities that appeal to state intervention the most.

The obvious implication of a recession is reduced revenue for the state, including Council, and therefore the inability to fund capital projects; the delivery of much needed

60 OCTOBER 2010 C2 public services; and to maintain facilities, infrastructure and resources. It is worst for a Metro like Ekurhuleni which is located in the Gauteng Province whose economy is planned to grow at 8% by 2014 so as to cater for other provinces and cities that have no potential for growth. Ultimately there has been job loses, low economic growth as well as the inability of the state to develop sustainable livelihoods.

Although the initial MSDF has been conceptual, this review process endeavours to concretise the concepts at an implementation level. Therefore, issues of climate change, Agenda 21, Millennium Development Goals (MDGs), global economy which might be viewed to be abstract and conceptual, have been addressed with the intention to have them implemented.

It is anticipated that when the reviewed MSDF is ﬁ nalised, it will go a long way to improve the welfare of the people of Ekurhuleni. Gender mainstreaming, long- term vision and strategy is the mainstay of the MSDF. The MSDF still notes the competitive and comparative advantages of the metro being the OR Tambo airport and manufacturing industry.

Departure Point and process

The departure point of this cycle focused on the following: o Incorporation of global and continental developmental protocols, as well current (policy) developments at national (National Planning Commission), and provincial (Gauteng GDS and Global City Region) levels, o Technical Amendment, including the review of the urban edge, o Incorporation of some of the outstanding issues from key plans o Incorporation of certain sectoral studies concluded.

OCTOBER 2010 61 C2 C2 Development Objectives Following the status quo assessment of the spatial structure of the EMM and the resultant development opportunities and constraints, the following development objectives are confi rmed in order to support sustainable development within EMM region. • to create a single, uniform identity for Ekurhuleni Metro (unicity) • to optimise the comparative and competitive advantages of EMM (OR Tambo IA and manufacturing) • to promote the development of a sustainable compact urban structure which optimise the utilisation of all resources – land, engineering services, transportation infrastructure, social infrastructure and ecological resources • to create a sustainable and functional open space network that is accessible to the public and which: o protect, highlight and link the natural elements of EMM to form a high quality, tactile and functional living environment and movement system for fauna, fl ora and humans; o link-up with, and enhance the man made elements of EMM (i.e. making open spaces such as squares (nodal), the servitudes of important internal roads (linear) and other service servitudes (linear) part of the EMM open space network; and o include as many of the EMM public open spaces (linear-linkage/nodal-cluster) as possible; • to optimise the job creation capacity of the formal economy in the region by promoting sectoral specialisation and by linking these activity nodes to one another • to integrate the disadvantaged communities of the EMM into the urban fabric by way of o infi ll development on strategically located vacant land o promoting corridor development along the main linkages between these communities and the major concentrations of job opportunities • to develop a well-defi ned system of activity nodes/areas which include retail, industrial and commercial activities, and which holds the bulk of economic activity within the metropolitan area • to actively promote sustainable public transport by: o providing public transport along all the main corridors o promoting mixed use, high density development along the corridors o promoting Transit Orientated Development along the main railway infrastructure • To establish a full range of services within convenient distance for the entire community by way of Multi Purpose Customer Care Areas (CCAs). • Promote sustainable livelihoods development in the townships in particular by: o Encouraging retail development as kick start strategy.

62 OCTOBER 2010 C2 o Develop townships into model self sustaining neighbourhood development areas.

Guiding Principles

The following is a summary of the main components which, in combination represents an approach towards the restructuring of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area. • Implement a statutory Urban Development Boundary: In the fi rst place the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality has adopted the principle of an urban development boundary to contain urban sprawl and to protect the agricultural areas surrounding the urban complex in the metro. • Formalise and protect the Metropolitan Open Space System: The metropolitan open space system is conceptually based on the Gauteng Open Space Policy – Phase 2, the Eastern Gauteng Region Environmental Management Framework and negotiations between EMM, and the Gauteng Department of Agriculture and Rural Development (GDARD). Ekurhuleni also approved its biodiversity open space system (EBOSS) which forms part of the structuring elements. This open space system, which includes a primary and secondary open space system, is designed around the sensitive areas (i.e. the drainage systems, the ridges and the pans), parks, the sport/recreation grounds and other large open spaces (i.e. golf courses, offi ce parks/industrial parks with large gardens, cemeteries, etc.). • Focus on Promoting Economic Activity within Metropolitan Activity Area: The next principle for the Ekurhuleni Metro focuses on promoting economic activity within the central Metropolitan Economic Activity Area. This Metropolitan Activity Area holds the bulk of all job opportunities within the metro and includes the current active mines, all the major industrial areas, as well as all the major central business districts and shopping centres within the metro. It is also important to note that, within this Metropolitan Activity Area, the centre of gravity in terms of accessibility, visibility and economic activity lies within the triangular area linking the Central Business Districts of Kempton Park, Boksburg, Germiston and Benoni to one another. In view of current trends and the opportunities for development / redevelopment vested in this area (Rhodesfi eld, Kempton Park, East Rand Mall area, and the agricultural holdings adjacent to the north east and south of OR Tambo IA), should be afforded opportunity to become part of the future core identity. • Establish a system of functionally defi ned (specialised), and geographically demarcated activity nodes within the Metropolitan Activity Area: Having accepted the principle of promoting the Metropolitan Activity Area, the next step in the process will be to functionally demarcate the area into smaller functional units (core areas) in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Activity Area:

OCTOBER 2010 63 C2 C2 o The Greater OR Tambo IA area which includes the Kempton Park, Edenvale and Benoni CBDs, Rhodesfi eld, the Isando, Spartan and Jet Park Complex. This area includes two Blue IQ projects; o the Central / Activity Belt which stretches from Germiston in the west up to Benoni CBD in the east and which includes the CBDs of Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni, o The mining activities and all industrial areas in this belt; • Optimise linkages and connectivity within the Metropolitan Activity Area: With the four Core Areas and the individual Economic Activity Nodes within the Central Metropolitan Activity Area properly demarcated and functionally defi ned, it will be important to next link the various activity nodes within the Metropolitan Activity Area to one another in order to maximise the connectivity between these nodes throughout the Metropolitan Activity Area. There are two main desire lines in this regard; the east-west desire line between the N12 and the N17 freeways, and a north-south line linking the Tembisa, Kempton Park, Germiston, and Alberton areas with their associated economic activities to one another, but also forming a functional part of the second concentric ring of development around the Greater Joburg Metro area. • Link disadvantaged communities to the Metropolitan Activity Area via a system of Public Transport Corridors: It is essential to link the communities from the four disadvantaged settlements to this Metropolitan Activity Area. This is achieved by designing the EMM public transport system in such a way that it feeds into the Metropolitan Activity Area. • Promote mixed use high-density development along linkages (development corridors) and in and around the activity nodes: In support of this, the EMM should then promote mixed use, high density development along these public transport corridors (subject to Road Access Management requirement) and in the areas in an around the activity nodes. • Structure the passenger transport system to support linkages (development corridors): As mentioned above the passenger transport system should be designed around the main strategic linkages within the EMM area. It is also highlighted in this regard that it is essential to promote Transit Orientated Development around the railway network within the EMM and within the core economic triangle. • Extend (and promote) economic activities into marginalised residential areas to become part of the Metropolitan Activity Area: The retail kick start implementation strategy will be promoted as a short term measure and the development of the PDAs into self sustaining neighbourhoods; as well as the development of a system of development nodes and corridors. • Promote infi ll residential development in vacant areas within the metropolitan activity area as a priority and within the urban development boundary in

64 OCTOBER 2010 C2 general: Apart from the strategic linkages mentioned above, the EMM should then as a priority also promote inﬁ ll residential development in all the strategically located vacant areas that are suitable for development. • Focus on upgrading of engineering and social infrastructure in previously disadvantaged areas (Service Upgrading Priority Areas): The four disadvantaged areas should as a principle be declared as Service Upgrading Priority Areas in line with the Millinium Develoment Goals (MDGs). • Maintain and upgrade residential quality in rest of the area (Private Vehicle Orientated): As for the other residential areas within Ekurhuleni, the EMM should focus on maintaining the quality of life and the residential character of these areas as best as possible. As a priority the residential quality and safety and security of these areas should thus be promoted. • Promote social and municipal service delivery by an evenly distributed system of Customer Care Areas(CCAs): As a last principle the EMM should then promote the delivery of social and municipal services which would include amongst others clinics, pension payout points, police services, municipal service points, taxi ranks, retail activities, recreational activities and any other related activities in Multi Purpose Customer Care Areas which are evenly distributed throughout the entire metropolitan area of jurisdiction.

Way forward In conclusion the spatial geography of Ekurhuleni, besides being dysfunctional internally, its towns evolved and grew functionally around developments in the Johannesburg CBD. The locational distance of the metro from the Johannesburg CBD makes Ekurhuleni unique. This necessitates robustness and ﬂ exibility in the development of Ekurhuleni as a city with in particular spatial form and identity. The report on the recently established National Planning Commission is more relevant in this context in that it states with regard to the need for a national vision that this is a learning process and government is likely to make mistakes along the way as follows:

“It is not necessary to ﬁ rst construct a complete six lane highway before we can embark on a journey”. Green Paper on the National Planning Commission 2009. This journey to construct a ‘six lane lane highway’ for Ekurhuleni started in 2000.

OCTOBER 2010 65 C2 C2 this MSDF will be work in progress. It will still be part of the 2010/2011 IDP review process however.

The Spatial Development Framework is being reviewed currently and will be ﬁ nalised by June 2011.

9. DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

The EMM Disaster Management plan was approved in 2007 and has been reviewed and is included in the IDP.

Executive Summary The Disaster Management Act (Act 57 of 2002) provides disaster management personnel with a new focus on disaster management. It presents new challenges in not only negotiating and writing up a disaster management plan but also in developing disaster management plans for general public scrutiny. Public scrutiny and acceptance of disaster management plans, prior to its implementation, has become a legislative requirement as identiﬁ ed by Section 26(g) of the Local Government: Municipal Systems Act, Act 32 of 2000.

The Municipal Systems Act, in Section 25 indicates that each municipality should adopt a “single, inclusive and strategic plan for the development of a municipality.” The plan referred to is the Integrated Development Plan. The same Act in section 26(g) dictates that “applicable disaster management plans”, are a core component of the Integrated Development Plan of a Municipality.

Therefore, the challenge is to develop a disaster management plan which all stakeholders – community, public, commercial, etc - of a municipal entity are able to comprehend and implement within their own setting and which indicates the procedures and processes required to minimise the threat of disaster, utilising a developmental approach. Another challenge includes community and other stakeholder participation in not only the activation of disaster response procedures but also in mitigation and development initiatives, which would lead to sustainable development.

It should be noted that disaster management is not only reactive, but now focuses on actions aimed at preventing disasters, or mitigating the impact of disasters. Different line functions and departments must contribute in varying degrees to disaster management. The needs identiﬁ ed in the corporate disaster management plan will indicate where line functions and departments must contribute. These contributions will then be included in line function and departmental disaster management plans.

Disaster management plans cover the whole disaster management continuum, and must address actions before, during and after disasters. Disaster management plans are compiled on the basis of a generic plan including standard operating procedures

66 OCTOBER 2010 C2 and best practice, and then expanded with risk-speciﬁ c plans that address disaster management for special circumstances where the generic plan needs to be adapted. The main strategy of all disaster management activities will be disaster risk reduction. A risk reduction strategy will ensure alignment with the strategies adopted internationally. The United Nations’ International Strategy for Disaster Reduction highlighted the following challenges posed by disasters:

1. Disaster loss is on the rise with grave consequences for the survival, dignity and livelihood of individuals, particularly the poor and hard-won development gains. Disaster risk is increasingly of global concern and its impact and actions in one region can have an impact on risks in another, and vice versa. This, compounded by increasing vulnerabilities related to changing demographic, technological and socio-economic conditions, unplanned urbanization, development within high- risk zones, under-development, environmental degradation, climate variability, climate change, geological hazards, competition for scarce resources, and the impact of epidemics such as HIV/AIDS, points to a future where disasters could increasingly threaten the world’s economy, and its population and the sustainable development of developing countries.

2. Disaster risk arises when hazards interact with physical, social, economic and environmental vulnerabilities. Events of hydro meteorological origin constitute the large majority of disasters. Despite the growing understanding and acceptance of the importance of disaster risk reduction and increased disaster response capacities, disasters and in particular the management and reduction of risk continue to pose a global challenge.

3. There is now international acknowledgement that efforts to reduce disaster risks must be systematically integrated into policies, plans and programmes for sustainable development and poverty reduction, and supported through bilateral, regional and international cooperation, including partnerships. Sustainable development, poverty reduction, good governance and disaster risk reduction are mutually supportive objectives, and in order to meet the challenges ahead, accelerated efforts must be made to build the necessary capacities at the community and national levels to manage and reduce risk. Such an approach is to be recognized as an important element for the achievement of internationally agreed development goals, including those contained in the Millennium Declaration.

4. The importance of promoting disaster risk reduction efforts on the international and regional levels as well as the national and local levels has been recognized in the past few years in a number of key multilateral frameworks and declarations.”

South Africa was part of the Hyogo Framework of Action meeting in Japan during

OCTOBER 2010 67 C2 C2 January 2005 with one of our personnel, and Councillors, participating as part of the South African delegation.

The Disaster Management Plan of Ekurhuleni predetermines, to the extent possible, actions to be taken by all departments, stakeholders and cooperating private organisations, to prevent disasters and to reduce the vulnerability of EMM residents to any disasters that may occur. The plan further aims to establish capabilities for protecting citizens from the effects of disasters and for mechanisms to respond effectively to the actual occurrence of disasters, and then to provide for recovery in the aftermath of any disaster involving extensive damage or other debilitating inﬂ uence on the normal pattern of life within the community of the municipality.

The Disaster Management Plan provides the basis for the development of risk specifi c plans which would take into account the peculiarities of different risks. A fl ood has a different risk profi le to drought and an earthquake has a different risk profi le to a toxic chemical release.

Disaster Management is the business of all stakeholders in Ekurhuleni and so the integration of disaster response plans, the integration of sustainable development and the integration of risk reduction measures must be a coordinated focus of all stakeholders. It is only through sustainable development which considers the impact of development on future generations that we as a municipality would be able to leave a legacy of a healthy and safe world for all to be enjoyed.

The plan provides the results of consultation of disaster response role-players. Each Department of Council is able to identify its disaster responsibilities to ensure that any response to a disaster means that responders do not work against each other but rather compliment efforts to ease the effects of a disaster and so ensure a speedy recover from the disaster. The plan further aims to ensure that sustainable development remains just that, by the application of disaster management principals related to disaster risk reduction, mitigation of disaster risks and prevention.

The typical disaster response scenario would allow for immediate response actions by the Emergency Services in the form of emergency medical services (ambulance), fi re and rescue and metro police services. Other departmental role-players like engineers, electricians, building inspectors, health workers, housing offi cials, to name a few and a host of non-municipal role-players like amateur radio operators, fi rst aid organisations, the SPCA and the like, all have a joint and or supporting responsibility during the response to a disaster. The Disaster Management Centre would be activated and senior departmental offi cials would be required to participate in the decision making processes at the Centre while the disaster declaration is being done by the Executive Mayor.

The longer term disaster effects would continue to be coordinated from the Disaster

68 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Management Centre using relevant departments to supply the necessary skills and direction. These actions would ensure that rehabilitation, and if necessary, reconstruction occurs in order to normalise the disaster stricken community. Funding of post disaster response would take place by utilisation of own internal funds and then secondly by approaching the Provincial and National Government for additional disaster response funding and through the application of Municipal Finance legislation related to emergency purchases.

In conclusion, the Municipal Disaster Management Plan aims at ensuring that Ekurhuleni makes every effort to identify and then reduce disaster risk through proper and timely disaster risk reduction actions. For the disaster events which cannot be prevented, the disaster management plan provides all role-players with pre-determined guidelines on the processes to be followed to save lives and protect property and the environment.

The Reviewed Disaster Management Plan is reﬂ ected as Annexure “D” and is contained on the CD provided.

10. MULTI YEAR FINANCIAL PLAN

The DRAFT 2010/2011 – 2012/2013 Multiyear Financial Plan is contained under separate cover.

11. PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A municipality is required to utilise a PMS as a primary mechanism to plan, monitor, measure, review and improve the implementation of the municipality’s Integrated Development Plan (IDP). The IDP process and the Performance Management process should be seamlessly integrated. The IDP fulﬁ ls the planning stage of Performance Management and, in turn, Performance Management fulﬁ ls the implementation, management, monitoring and evaluation of the IDP implementation. The performance of an organisation is integrally linked to that of its employees and it is important to manage both at the same time.

The process commences when consultation takes place with all relevant role players. Thereafter, a long term vision and IDP is developed and revised. A PMS is developed and implemented during the same process. After this, regular monitoring, measurement and reviewing of organisational and employee performance takes place. Results are reported on and plans for improvement are developed as part of the review of the IDP. Performance of the organisation is reported on quarterly and annually in terms of specifi c requirements. The review of the performance of individuals takes place on a quarterly basis in September, December and March of every fi nancial year and a fi nal assessment is done after the June year-end.

OCTOBER 2010 69 C2 C2 Measurement of organisational performance during a particular ﬁ nancial year is facilitated through the implementation and assessment of the Service Delivery Budget Implementation Plan (SDBIP). The annual SDBIP populated with Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), measures and targets, is an integral part of the PMS and must be annually approved and adopted by council. The contents of the SDBIP are taken up into the Performance Agreements of all Section 57 employees, contract workers as well as in performance appraisals of other municipal employees. A 100% alignment is thus ensured.

The PMS should provide a mechanism for ensuring increased accountability between the community and the council, the political and administrative components of the municipality, as well as between each department and the ofﬁ ce of the City Manager. The PMS must also provide a mechanism for learning and improvement in that knowledge must be obtained, in respect of which approaches have the desired impact and enables the municipality to improve delivery. Another important function of the PMS is that it should provide the leadership and management of the municipality with timely diagnostic signals of the potential risk that are likely to impede the implementation of the IDP. This will enable the implementation of interventions where it is necessary and possible to do so.

The Municipal Planning and Performance Management Regulations, Regulation 796 of 2001 to the Systems Act ,contains the following important prescriptions relating to a municipality’s PMS:

Regulation 7(1) – A municipality’s PMS entails a framework that describes and represents how the municipality’s cycle and processes of performance planning, monitoring, measurement, review, reporting and improvement will be conducted, organized and managed; including determining the roles of the different role-players. Regulation 7(2) – in developing a PMS a municipality must ensure that the system: (a) complies with al the requirements set out in the Act (Systems Act); (b) demonstrates how it is to operate and be managed from the planning stage up to the stages of review and reporting; (c) clariﬁ es the roles and responsibilities of each role-player, including the local community, in the functioning of the system; (d) clariﬁ es the process of implementing the system within the framework of the Integrated Development Planning process; (e) determines the frequency of reporting and the lines of accountability for reporting; (f) relates to the municipality’s employee performance management process; (g) provides for the procedure by which the system is linked to the municipality’s Integrated Developmental Planning process

70 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Regulation 8 – A PMS must be established before or at the same time as the commencement by the municipality of the process of setting KPIs and targets in accordance with its integrated development plan.

Regulation 11(1) – A municipality must review its KPIs annually as part of the performance review process.

Regulation 14(4)(a)(ii) – A performance audit committee must review the municipality’s PMS and make recommendations in this regard to the council of that municipality. The EMM Performance Management System is currently being evaluated and will be reviewed in the next ﬁ nancial year.

12. TWENTY PRIORITY TOWNSHIPS PROGRAMME The Twenty Priority Townships Programme that focuses on the upliftment and development of previous disadvantaged communities included inter alia the following: • Beautifying the townships; • Providing decent schools; • Providing clinics; • Providing sport and recreational facilities; • Providing lighting; • Streets; • All formal houses; • Providing adequate storm water drainage systems; • Roll out of MPCCs; • Providing libraries; • Providing taxi ranks; • All roads in these townships to be tarred by 2009; and • Each area has a vibrant commercial and transport hub.

Of the Twenty townships selected, seven fall within Ekurhuleni: • Tembisa; • Katlehong; • Daveyton; • Wattville; and • Kwatsaduza (Kwa-Thema, Tsakane & Duduza).

The Gauteng Department of Housing is the coordinator of this programme and by implication this became the responsibility of the Housing Departments at Local Government.

OCTOBER 2010 71 C2 C2 At the Premier’s Coordination Forum, which met on October 2006 the following recommendations were confi rmed: • The Twenty Prioritized Township Programme be regarded as an intergovernmental programme funded and supported by both spheres of government. • The Integrated Development Plans of the Municipalities be reviewed to ensure that the strategic priorities as defi ned by the mandate as determined by the Premier be supported. • The Provincial Government and Municipalities cooperate to review the IDP’s and to prioritize the projects to be implemented to support the revised IDP’s by end November 2006 and that Council approval of the revised IDP’s be obtained by end January 2007 • The Provincial Departments and Municipalities reprioritize their capital budgets and grant funding allocations to fi nance the reprioritized projects in the Twenty Prioritized Townships. • The Provincial Departments include in their Budget Statement 3’s which must be submitted to Treasury by end November 2006 the revised budgets. • The funding required to implement projects to address the 11 Premier’s Directives be determined as well as the budget shortfall once the reprioritized budgets have been fi nalized. • The communication plan be discussed with the communication units of the Municipalities before end November 2006 to ensure that the Mayors and Municipal Managers are supporting the communication process. • The Municipalities confi rm their appointment of the Members of the Mayor Committees responsible to manage the 20 PTP within Council as well as the Municipal Twenty Prioritized Township Programme coordinators before end October 2006. • The responsible Departmental and Municipal offi cials report monthly within 7 days after month end on the progress made to implement funded projects within the 20 PTP to their respective management structures and that these reports be copied to the Provincial Programme Manager to enable him to prepare progress reports to the Executive Council and the Premier’s Coordination Forum. • The various accounting offi cers monitor the progress of all projects to ensure that the funded projects be implemented timeously to ensure that the various targets are met. • The services of the Provincial Programme Manager be utilized by the accounting offi cers to address deviations from project programmes and cash fl ows. In short this meant that no additional funding would be forthcoming and that the Municipalities would be expected to align their IDPs and capital budgets to address the backlogs in those specifi c townships. Municipalities are encouraged to access grant funding like the “Neighbourhood Development Partnership Grant” of National Treasury. Ekurhuleni has submitted eight applications for this grant, all of which have

72 OCTOBER 2010 C2 been approved in principle. The EMM Housing Department has so far obtained bids for technical assistance for four of these approved applications, which will then be followed by capital grant funded projects. On investigation, it was established that the capital budget and IDP of Ekurhuleni does indeed fulﬁ l these requirements, although the targets like “All roads in these townships to be tarred by 2009” cannot be met without substantial additional funding. The Municipal Roads Turnkey Programme and the EPWP programme of the Gauteng Department of Public Works will, however, ensure that many priority roads are tarred during this time. Other services and community facilities are also being upgraded and provided through the budget. This information is provided to the GDoH to inform them of progress within the 20PTP areas.

It should also be noted that EMM is also addressing the same principles in the other previously disadvantaged townships. EMM has over the last number of years allocated approximately 60% of its capital budget towards the previously disadvantaged townships.

The following table reﬂ ects the progress made on the PTP projects in Ekurhuleni.

OCTOBER 2010 73 C2 C2 Outputs business plan for Pedestrian safety inclusive of a pedestrian management plan business plan for Pedestrian safety inclusive of a pedestrian management plan Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Development of a 0.00% Development of a 0.00% Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments - - - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year Total Total 3,962,653 - Budget 15,000,000 - wards wards All wards 20,000,000 All wards 6,311,597.62 6,311,597.62 18,000,000 4,242,888.54 All wards 31.56% 8,969,585.05 6,000,000 All wards 49.83% 3,930,000 All wards 29,694.89 15,570,000 1,351,442.61 - 423,833.86 34.39% 736,956.67 Paved roads 4.73% Walkways Project Name Ward legacy projects Upgrade Infrastructure Creation Initiatives motorised infrastructure All Upgrade to Economic All Industrial Hives & Other Job All EntrancesTown Development of All wardsAll 1,000,000 Danida Project: Nurseries -27,763.62 -27,763.62 All wards -2.78% 3,000,000 29,763.00 Developed entrances 55,726.00 1.86% Hothouses, Fences PTP PTP Projects ce ce All Upgrade street lighting around All Establish base camps - Facilities ce All Upgrade all roads & nonfi fi fi Department IS: RTCW All Stormwater Turnkey Multi 2010 Of 2010 Of Economic Development Economic Development Environmental Development: Parks Environmental Development: Parks IS: RTCW All Roads Turnkey Multi 2010 Of

74 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Outputs infrastructure Area greater Tembisa Recreatonal Facilities Improvement Improvement Improvement Improvement serve this township infrastructure sewer reticulation Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% 0.00% Provision of New Construct roads in the 0.00% 0.00% Infrastructure Infrastructure 0.00%Community 0.00% EMM Community EMM 0.00% 0.00% Construct services to Provision of New 0.00% Plus Actual 224,177.74 2.24% Infrastructure on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments ------Actual 224,177.74 Expenditure Year to Date Year - 500,000 31,027.73 156,333.75 31.27% Extend the water and / or Total Total 3,962,653 - 1,000,000 - Budget 15,000,000 - 15,000,000 - 6868 4,500,000 - 6,000,000 - Multi Multi wards wards wards wards wards All wards 1,000,000 - Project Name Ward c Sign ﬁ Etwatwa Etwatwa Traf Rds Depots Development PTP PTP Projects Daveyton Construct of Precinct Station Daveyton Construction of Precinct Station Department IS: RTCWSRAC AllCCC’s Roads Turnkey CCC’s All Daveyton Daveyton Building UpgradeCCC’s Upgrade: Recreation Facilities Daveyton All wards Etwatwa New Building CCC’s Daveyton 70 2,000,000 Etwatwa New Building Multi 250,669.53 Daveyton 2,000,000.00 Etwatwa New Building (NDPG) 4,338,570 66 100.00% 26,500.00 66 - Upgrading of Sport & 67 26,500.00 10,000,000 0.61% 1,962,233 Infrastructure - Community Safety Community Safety IS: RTCWIS: RTCW All Roads Turnkey All Stormwater Turnkey Multi Multi IS: RTCW All East:Eastern Reg, Impl New IS: RTCW All East: Eastern Region, Upgr of IS: RTCW All Township Contribution

OCTOBER 2010 75 C2 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To 0.00%Community 0.00% EMM Community 0.00% EMM Community EMM 0.00% improve service To 0.00% improve service To Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments ------Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year 400,000 - Total Total Budget 71 400,000 - 67 500,000 - 67 500,000 - wards Project Name Ward Daveyton Glass Substation Era Substation PTP PTP Projects Daveyton Cons Fire Station/House Daveyton Cons Fire Station/House Etwatwa Daveyton 66Thokoza Const Precinct Stations Daveyton 22/ 6.6 kV trf at Fibre 58 2x20 MVA 400,000 4,500,000 - Daveyton 22/ 6.6 kV trf at New 2x20 MVA - Daveyton MIG-Community Lighting Multi Department Community Safety Community Safety Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Community Safety

76 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Pathways, Roads maintain the various networks and EL EL equipment of the Metro to facilitate acceptable service standards delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To 0.00% improve service To Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments 410,404.50 82.08% improve service To - - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year 500,000 - Total Total Budget 67 2,000,000 308,188.76 308,188.76 15.41% Building, Roads, Fence, wards Project Name Ward tourism PTP PTP Projects Daveyton Develop: Blesbokspruit for Daveyton Cell Development - Rietfontein 77 1,000,000 1,000,000.00 1,000,000.00 100.00% refurbish, adapt and To Daveyton 68 Install passage lights - Ward 68Daveyton 200,000 69 Install passage lights - Ward 69 - Daveyton 200,000 High Mast Zenzele (12) - Multi Department Environmental Development: Parks Environmental Development: Solid Waste Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy

OCTOBER 2010 77 C2 C2 Outputs water pipes with in the street to faciliate meter reading and maintenance:: water pipes with in the street to faciliate meter reading and maintenance:: Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Replace existing midblock 0.00% Provide new outfall sewer 0.00% Replace existing midblock 0.00% Improve Public Transport 0.00%Public Improve 0.00% Improve Public Transport 0.00%Public 0.00%Stormwater Improve Improve 0.00%CLINIC Transport 0.00% NEW Public 0.00% Improve Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments ------Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year Total Total 1,000,000 - 5,000,000 - 4,000,000 - Budget 70 4,500,000 - 65 1,200,000 - Multi Multi Multi wards wards wards Project Name Ward Daveyton (W55) C/F Construction of Turnkey Construction of Interchange Rank CLINIC PTP PTP Projects Daveyton Relocate midblock water Department IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: RTCW Daveyton East: Daveyton and Etwatwa, IS: RTCW Daveyton Construct Daveyton CBD/N12 IS: RTCWIS: RTCWIS: RTCW Daveyton Rank (C/F)Taxi Daveyton Station IS: RTCW Daveyton Construction of Bee eater SteetIS: RTCW Daveyton 70 Paving around Bee EaterIS: RTCW Daveyton RankTaxi Daveyton Station Daveyton 0 Bhengu Street Stormwater Daveyton 4,000,000 Taxi Upgrade Daveyton CBD 70 0 1,500,000 70 - 5,110,000 1,300,000 1,261,445.00 3,000,000 1,261,445.00 - 97.03% - - Health Daveyton & UPGRADE EMAPHUPENI EXT

78 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Outputs developments the Knoppiesfontein water tower at the Reservoir in Kwa-Thema to improve water supply and to facilitate maintenance. will be located and Valves marked and replaced if New valves necessary. will be installed where required to proper maintenance. exisitng steel main water line Improvement Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% 0.00% supply to new Water Construct bulk water main 0.00% New booster pump to feed 0.00% Upgrade water network 0.00% Replacement of an Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments - - - - - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year 200,000 - Total Total 3,000,000 - Budget 26 1,000,000 - 26 500,000 400,612.59 400,612.59 80.12% Construct bulk water main 78 1,000,000 - 6826 100,000 - 500,000 419,277.44 419,277.44 83.86% Construct bulk water main Multi Multi wards wards Project Name Ward 106 bulk water P6 C/F 106 bulk water P6 C/F Etwatwa X19 Katlehong Building Upgrade 41 5,617,367 867,573.99 921,418.99 16.40% Infrastructure waternetwork C/F steel pipe ring (P3) Knoppiesfontein Res PTP PTP Katlehong Projects Daveyton Daveyton: Putfontein 26IR Ptn Daveyton Daveyton: Putfontein 26IR Ptn Daveyton Network C/F Upgrade Water Daveyton Kwa-Thema: Upgrading of Daveyton Daveyton: Rehabilitate 450dia Daveyton Etwatwa: Construct main water Daveyton Daveyton: Booster Pump Department IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater CCC’s IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater

OCTOBER 2010 79 C2 C2 Outputs Improvement enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Improvement holds Plus 4.26% Infrastructure Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00%Community EMM 0.00%Community EMM 0.00% Infrastructure 0.00% 0.00% serve 500 000 house To Community EMM Plus Actual 379,141.18 on Venus on Venus Expenditure - Commitments -

- - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year

Total Total Budget 62 1,000,000 - 61 6,000,000 46 - 8,000,000 2,365,507.07 46 4,548,123.74 56.85% 2,700,000 1,412,289.00 59 1,412,289.00 Park 52.31% Park 50,000 50,000.00 50,000.00 100.00%CLINIC NEW ces Katlehong 2 60 266,667 - ﬁ Project Name Ward cation of Sontonga street 0 2,300,000 575,605.72 575,605.72 25.03% improve service To ﬁ Katlehong Building UpgradeKatlehong 2 New Building 40DM Satellite Of - 60Const Fire Station/House Zonkezizwe KatlehongEstablish MVRA/DLTC 8,895,635 55Construction Precinct Stations 375,127.18 Zonkezizwe/Zama Electri 5,076,000 - Develop: Multi Purpose Park Spruitview Develop: Multi Purpose Park Spruitview EXT& UPGRADE Ramokonopi Clinic PTP PTP Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Projects Department Community Safety Electricity & Energy Environmental Development: Parks Health CCC’s CCC’s Environmental Development: Parks Community Safety Community Safety Community Safety

80 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Outputs change, the need for sidewalks arise and there is a huge back log in the CCC areas. change, the need for sidewalks arise and there is a huge back log in the CCC areas. in the Katlehong area with regard to rehabilitation of the roads stands in Moleleki Ext 1&2 CENTRE Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% As pedestrian patterns 0.00% As pedestrian patterns 0.00% The re is a huge back log 0.00% Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments - - - - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year 500,000 - 500,000 - Total Total 3,500,000 - Budget 40 250,000 23,684.21 23,684.21 59 9.47%CLINIC 40 NEW 1,895,000 1,265,190.04 1,265,190.04 60 66.76% 5,000,000 439,187.65 439,187.65 CLINIC 8.78% NEW 6,800,000 CLINIC 3,000,382.89 NEW 3,000,382.89 44.12% Essential services to 671 Multi Multi wards wards wards Project Name Ward NEW CLINIC KATHLEHONG NEW CLINIC KATHLEHONG Level 2 NORTH Family Skills Centre (South)EXT& UPGRADE Ramokonopi Clinic 49 NEW CLINIC KATHLEHONG Level 2 NORTH Moleleki Ext 1 & 2 Essential 6,335,000 1,455,440.00 services. CF 1,455,440.00 Construction of Sontonga SteetRehabilitation of roads 22.97% 0 SKILLS DEVELOPMENT Sidewalks General (2Katlehong 21,000,000 Multi CCC) - Sidewalks General (Katlehong CCC) PTP PTP Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Projects Department IS: RTCW IS: RTCW Health Health Housing IS: RTCW Health Health IS: RTCW

OCTOBER 2010 81 C2 C2 Outputs c to and from ﬁ jobs is necessary to provide funds to construct roads departmentally biggest back log in the Southern region is, is underlain by dolomite and to construct roads, one minimise the risk of sink holes being formed log in the Katlehong area with regard to Stormwater drainage of roads in Katlehong and these funds are counter funding to a MIG Grant access road to Katlehong and willaccommodate the traf Katlehong from the N3 and the Northern suburbs Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year Total Total 8,000,000 5,456,604.50 7,113,982.44 88.92% sustain departmental To 6,500,000 397,288.72 1,722,760.04 26.50% The area where the 6,000,000 4,012,149.88 4,073,466.97 67.89%2,000,000 The re is a huge back 384,680.00 384,680.00 19.23% There is a huge back log Budget Multi wards wards wards wards Project Name Ward Tertiary Rds South Dept Tertiary Construction Access Rd to Katlehong Northern 40 22,000,000 8,526,172.95 8,526,172.95 Roads on Dolomite 38.76% This road is the second Multi SW Masterplan in Katlehong Multi Roads in Katlehong CF Tertiary Multi PTP PTP Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Projects Department IS: RTCW IS: RTCW IS: RTCW IS: RTCW IS: RTCW

82 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Outputs maintenanceand lining it will reduce maintenance expenditure Kathlehong in roads and SW Magagula Heights Improvement the order of 600 km roads should still be built of sport facility art centre Improvement Improvement holds Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Canal needs frequent 0.00% Address the backlog 0.00% Provide water ring feed 0.00% Reduce the back log. In 0.00% Construction of community 0.00% serve 500 000 house To Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments ------Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year Total Total 1,000,000 - Budget 20,284,867 - 40 10,600,000 3,018,764.14 3,018,764.14 62 28.48%Acces road to Norhern 1,500,000 - 62 200,000 - 78 276,610.81 11,605,801 276,610.81 2.38% Infrastructure Multi wards wards ces Tsakane ces Tsakane 82 266,667 - ﬁ Project Name Ward South: Katlehong & Thokoza, South: Katlehong & Lining of Canal between Thokoza Katlehong and Access Road to Northern Katlehong Roads in Katlehong MIG Tertiary Multi Magagula Heights Road and SW Phase4 Augment water s Magagula Heights Upgrade water mains ZonkiziweConstruction: Katlehong Stadium 62 51Art CentreUpgrade: Katlehong 200,000 Duduza Building Upgrade 12,000,000 49 5,223,022.57 5,223,022.57 5,500.00 Thema New Building/ Kwa Extension 43.53% 5,500.00 New Building/ExtensionTsakane 500,000 87 Construction of last phase 2.75% 82DM Satellite Of 3,100,453 Construct bulk water main - 25,650.00 9,475,369 212,446.36 450,494.00 212,446.36 14.53% 2.24% Infrastructure Infrastructure PTP PTP Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Katlehong Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department IS: RTCW IS: RTCW and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater CCC’s IS: RTCW IS: RTCW SRAC CCC’s CCC’s Community Safety SRAC

OCTOBER 2010 83 C2 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To 0.00%Community EMM 0.00%Community EMM 0.00%Community EMM 0.00%Community EMM 0.00%Community EMM Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments 349,245.00 34.92% improve service To ------Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year - 350,000 - Total Total 1,000,000 - Budget 8277 1,468,598 - - 82 9,696,184 - Multi Multi wards wards 87 500,000 - 87 7,196,184 - Project Name Ward Const Fire Station/House Duduza Const Fire Station/House Tsakane Const Fire Station/House Kwa- Thema Const Fire Station/House Tsakane Const Fire Station/House Duduza Academy Kwa-Thema Training Protective structures (Kwa 77Thema) 500,000 310,934.75 NDC MV Switchgear 423,711.75 Replacement 84.74% EMM Community PTP PTP Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department Electricity & Energy Community Safety Community Safety Community Safety Community Safety Community Safety Community Safety Electricity & Energy

84 OCTOBER 2010 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To 0.00% improve service To Plus Actual on Venus on Venus Expenditure Commitments - - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year 500,000 - 896,000 252,794.69 769,417.87 85.87% improve service To Total Total Budget 10,000,000 2,620,152.18 7,070,659.95 70.71% improve service To 17 500,000 - Multi Multi wards wards wards Project Name Ward New Tsakane SubstationNew Tsakane Multi Mini-Sub Upgrades in Various Subs Elect Netw Restitution - Kwa- Thema Germiston North - Install 20MVA (trf no 3) PTP PTP Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy

OCTOBER 2010 85 C2 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus 13.02% improve service To Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To 0.00% improve service To 0.00% improve service To

Plus Actual 138,530.65 on Venus on Venus Expenditure - - - Commitments

- - -

Actual 138,030.65 Expenditure Year to Date Year

500,000 500,000 Total Total 1,064,000 1,000,000 Budget 80 77 Multi wards wards Project Name Ward Completion of Ring Cables - Kwa-Thema Low cost service connections Multi New Reticulation - Ekuthuleni & Ext 3 Kwa-Thema MIG - Upgrading of Streetlighting Areas - Var PTP PTP Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy

86 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus 5.74% improve service To 64.47% Park 81.75% improve service To 54.50% improve service To Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To

Plus 22,951.60 Actual 644,654.39 817,509.00 136,251.50 on Venus on Venus Expenditure - Commitments

- - -

22,951.60

Actual 471,104.39 Expenditure Year to Date Year

200,000 400,000 250,000 Total Total 1,000,000 1,000,000 Budget Multi Multi Multi Multi wards wards wards wards wards Project Name Ward MIG - High Mast Kwa-Thema Multi MIG- Rehab High Mast Kwa- Thema & Ext incl MIG-H/masts:Tsakane Geluks MIG - Rehab High Masts: Tsakane Multi-Purpose Develop: Tsakane Park PTP PTP Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department Environmental Development: Parks Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy

OCTOBER 2010 87 C2 C2 Outputs and sewer infrastructure in Reiverside, Kwa-Thema stations Plus 5.74% Paving 21.29% New Park 17.31% NEW CLINIC 83.58% Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Upgraded existing water 0.00%CLINIC NEW 0.00%CLINIC NEW 0.00%CLINIC NEW Transport 0.00%Public 0.00% Improve Stormwater Improve 0.00% 0.00% Eliminate sewer pump Provide new outfall sewer

Plus 57,405.00 Actual 638,739.09 865,407.91 835,826.06 on Venus on Venus Expenditure ------Commitments

------

19,250.00

Actual 638,739.09 865,407.91 835,826.06 Expenditure Year to Date Year

900,000 188,000 800,000 Total Total 3,000,000 1,000,000 5,000,000 3,500,000 2,310,000 2,000,000 5,000,000 1,000,000 Budget 10,500,000 0 8686 81 Multi Multi Multi Multi wards wards wards wards Project Name Ward Develop: Tsakane Multi-Purpose Develop: Tsakane Park Develop: Vlakfontein Cemetery 88 83New Clinic Ward TSAKANE X 10 CLINIC New Level 2 TSAKANE X 10 CLINIC New Level 2 83 level 2New Clinic Ward 83Upgrade services Riverside, Mashimimi 83 Develop Kwa-Thema Economic node sidewalks Rank Taxi Bluegumview Closure Open Channels Kwatsaduza East: Kwatshaduza, Construction 86of Turnkey East Duduza,Plan Link Rd K136 & Rd 1894 PTP PTP Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department Health Environmental Development: Parks Health IS: RTCW Environmental Development: Parks Health Health Housing IS: RTCW IS: RTCW IS: RTCW IS: RTCW

88 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 ll ﬁ Outputs ll Zulu tower and ﬁ pumpstations sport facility MAINS TO 100mm DIAM TO MAINS TSAKANE NETWORK IN water pipes with in the street to faciliate meter reading and maintenance:: station library facility with dedicated pumps to dedicated pumps to Xhosa reservoir Plus 5.82% Construction of a new Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Upgrading of sewer 0.00% Building of a world class 0.00% WATER 0.00% UPGRADE WATER UPGRADE 0.00% Replace existing midblock 0.00% 0.00% Upgrade water pump Provision of potable water 0.00% Modify Zulu pump station

Plus Actual 174,710.00 on Venus on Venus Expenditure ------Commitments

------Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year

50,000

200,000 200,000 200,000 500,000 100,000 200,000 Total Total 3,000,000 Budget 15,000,000 78 8184 86 81 Multi Multi wards wards wards Project Name Ward Springs: Kwa-Thema: Upgrade Network Water Network Water Tsakane: Nigel: P1 P/S Zulu Water Tsakane: Nigel: Multi Isolate Midblock water Kwa- Thema Nigel: Upgrade/Eliminate Rockville pumpst Upgrade Xhosa water Tsakane: p station Tsakane Provide water Tsakane: x 6 and 10 Stadium Tsakane Re-construct Construction: New Library 82Langaville PTP PTP Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Kwatsaduza Projects Department IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater SRAC IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater SRAC IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater

OCTOBER 2010 89 C2 C2 Outputs of sport facility holds Improvement Improvement delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus 57.04% Construction of last phase 10.68% Infrastructure 83.27% improve service To 95.47% improve service To Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% serve 104 000 house To 0.00% Infrastructure 0.00% improve service To

Plus Actual 684,401.75 416,344.50 477,328.90 on Venus on Venus 5,703,533.70 Expenditure - - - Commitments

- - - -

Actual 681,801.75 133,898.90 5,703,533.70 Expenditure Year to Date Year

266,666 500,000 500,000 500,000 Total Total 6,409,136 Budget 11,037,700 11,037,700 10,000,000 3 wards wards ces Tembisaces 6 ﬁ Project Name Ward Re-Construct Tsakane Stadium Tsakane Re-Construct 82 Building PTP PTP Tembisa 12 x High mast lights (Tembisa) Multi Tembisa DM Satellite Of Tembisa Main feeder cables 14 Tembisa Protective Structures (Tembisa) Multi Kwatsaduza Projects Department SRAC CCC’s Tembisa Building Upgrade Tembisa 6 Electricity & Energy CCC’sCommunity Safety Tembisa 2/ Winnie Mandela New Tembisa Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy

90 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Plus 99.66% improve service To 99.66% improve service To 23.57% improve service To Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% improve service To

Plus Actual 298,980.00 298,980.00 on Venus on Venus 1,635,018.00 Expenditure - Commitments

- - - - Actual Expenditure Year to Date Year

300,000 300,000 500,000 Total Total 6,936,000 Budget 4 1 wards Project Name Ward (Tembisa) (Tembisa) PTP PTP Tembisa 4 Protective Structures Ward Tembisa 1 Protective structures Ward Tembisa Substations-upgrade Tembisa Multi Tembisa Additional MIG Projects All wards Projects Department Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy

OCTOBER 2010 91 C2 C2 Outputs delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life delivery, enhance delivery, revenue, improve reliability of elec supply, improve the standard of life Buildings Plus 1.57% NEW CLINIC 83.27% improve service To 83.07% improve service To 18.90% NEW CLINIC 13.89% Roads, Services, Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Park 0.00%CLINIC NEW 0.00%CLINIC NEW

Plus 26,712.00 Actual 416,344.50 415,354.50 756,028.08 694,684.48 on Venus on Venus Expenditure - - - Commitments

- - - - -

26,712.00

Actual 756,028.08 676,484.48 Expenditure Year to Date Year

50,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 Total Total 1,500,000 4,000,000 5,000,000 1,700,000 Budget 9 6 13 12 Project Name Ward Motsua FOR PHAPHAMA Cemetery Clinic (North) Level 2 PTP PTP Tembisa 8 High Mast Ward 8 Tembisa 6 High Mast Lighting Ward 6 Tembisa Develop: Multi Purpose Park Tembisa Develop: New Northern Projects Department Electricity & Energy Electricity & Energy Environmental Development: Parks Health Tembisa & UPGRADE Etafeni Clinic EXT 14 Environmental Development: Parks Health TembisaTHCC EXTENTION & UPGRADE Health Tembisa & UPGRADE Etafeni Clinic EXT 14 Health Tembisa New Phomolong (ITHERELENG)

92 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 ooding ﬂ Outputs infrastructure the building program and in a cost effective architecturally acceptable standard Appraisal of proposed buildings in consultation with owner departments, Planning, Design, Compile building program & Supervision and contract administration infrastructure potential at areas targeted. Improve stormwater management facility Plus 0.87% Provision of New 3.87% NEW CLINIC Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% 90% compliance to 0.00% Provision of New 0.00%the Reduce 0.00% Catalyst for development 0.00% Provision of one taxi

Plus Actual 262,040.02 174,192.91 on Venus on Venus Expenditure - - - - - Commitments

- - - - -

Actual 262,040.02 174,192.91 Expenditure Year to Date Year

200,000 100,000 Total Total 2,000,000 7,000,000 1,500,000 4,500,000 Budget 30,000,000 12 Multi Multi Multi Multi wards wards wards wards Project Name Ward MIG upgrading bridge SW C/F Clinic (North) Level 2 PTP PTP Projects Department IS: RTCW Tembisa Depot Upgrading Tembisa 8 IS: RTCW Tembisa Rank B C/FTaxi Oakmoor 4 IS: RTCW Tembisa Roads and SW Tembisa Greater IS: RTCW Tembisa Natural Watercourses Tembisa IS: RTCWIS: RTCW Tembisa Esangweni Pedestrian facilities/ Tembisa Roads and Tembisa Greater Health Tembisa New Phomolong (ITHERELENG)

OCTOBER 2010 93 C2 C2 Outputs over spruit upgrade existing building pump station under capacity pipes facility outfall sewer pipe old with many defects occur. tembisa under capacity pipes Plus 0.23% Construct new water 0.17% Reline or replace old 3.63% New booster pump to feed 49.27% Construct new and 53.68% Repalce sewers that are Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Provision of safe crossing 0.00% Provision of one taxi 0.00% Consolidate and upgrade 0.00% Replace existing water 0.00% Reline or replace old 0.00% Replace existing pipeline 0.00% Construct bulk water main

2,326.28 3,317.23 Plus 36,343.21 Actual 492,702.00 107,368.65 on Venus on Venus Expenditure ------Commitments

------2,326.28 3,317.23

36,343.21

Actual 492,702.00 107,368.65 Expenditure Year to Date Year

200,000 500,000 200,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 Total Total 1,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 Budget 8 8 10 14 1414 14 10 14 14 Project Name Ward bridge Depots (N Region) tower (MIG) res Tembisa str Motsu Isekelo Tembisa res Tembisa Tembisa tower C/F PTP PTP Tembisa New water pressure Tembisa: Tembisa Relining of r feed for Tembisa: Tembisa OF sewer Western Tembisa: 10 Tembisa Replace w/p Zephania Tembisa: Tembisa main out s in Tembisa Repl Tembisa Replace water pipe Tembisa: Tembisa Relining of r feed for Tembisa: Tembisa Replace main water - Isekelo Tembisa New water pressure Tembisa: Tembisa Building new & upg Tembisa: Projects Department IS: RTCW Tembisa Rank (MIG)Taxi Oakmoor 4 IS: RTCW Tembisa Dan Nkabinde Rd: Reconstr of IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater IS: Water and IS: Water Wastewater

94 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 Outputs facility Lights facility0 Plus 0.01% 26.60% New Park 10.78% Roads, Landscaping, 60.42% Construction of sport Percentage Expenditure Spent (Actual Commitments) 0.00% Provide new outfall sewer 0.00%Stormwater Improve 0.00% Construction of sport

5,116.00 5,116.00 Plus 53,899.00 Actual 292,548.78 on Venus on Venus 5,438,218.89 Expenditure - - - Commitments

- - - -

5,116.00 5,116.00

Actual 292,548.78 5,438,218.89 Expenditure Year to Date Year

500,000 Total Total 5,500,000 1,000,000 1,100,000 7,000,000 9,000,000 Budget 60,000,000 30 30 30 Multi wards All wards Project Name Ward Kingsway, Construction of Kingsway, Turnkey Construction Wattville / Benoni Wattville Wattville surrounding development ( 2010 projects as Mayoral decision) PTP PTP Wattville Develop Existing Cemetery - Wattville Develop: Community Parks Projects ce Wattville Precinct and Tambo OR ﬁ Department IS: RTCW Wattville Leachville and East: Wattville, IS: RTCW Wattville Khama Road Wattville SRAC Tembisa Upgrade: Makhulong Stadium 7 SRAC Tembisa Upgrade: Makhulong Stadium Environmental Development: Parks 7Environmental Development: Parks 2010 Of

OCTOBER 2010 95 C2 C2 12.1 The Tembisa Project as part of 20 PTP One of the greatest challenges facing South Africa nearly 16 years into our democracy is the issue of addressing the economic development of exclusion areas, speciﬁ cally African townships. The approach of exclusion by design as purported by the apartheid policies has ensured that location-related, design and institutional factors cause a township to be virtually dysfunctional from inception. The common factors that these areas share are: • Lack of formal economic activity; • Lack of formal business nodes; • Lack of social infrastructure; • Poor quality public open space; • Non-existent recreational facilities; • Poor public transport linkages; and • Township ‘row-type’ housing.

However, things are starting to change. Township renewal projects are making their appearance through the larger metropolis in South Africa. Examples includes; the Umlazi Renewal Project (Durban); Alexandra Renewal Project (Johannesburg); and the Bekkerdals Renewal Project (Johannesburg).

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality has recognised and initiated processes to facilitate the change. To that end, this report presents the urban management plan and the master plan framework for the Tembisa Township. This report and operational plan illustrates our commitment to change the current disparities that are evidenced by former townships in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. It is exciting times indeed, and it is our hope that this ambitious project not only rejuvenates the aesthetics of the Tembisa area, but more importantly looks toward the establishment of processes for the development of human capital. We aim to restore the pride of our people that reside in the Tembisa area by creating social, economic and infrastructural change that will promote integrated settlements for the people of Tembisa.

Details of the Tembisa Urban Management plan and Mater Plan Framework is contained in Annexure “E” on the CD.

12.2 Wattville as part of 20 PTP EMM have also prioritised the Wattville area to be fast tracked in terms of the eradication of backlogs in basic services, roads and storm water and social facilities. These are nearly completed and soon the residents of Wattville will be able to live and work in an area with proper functional services. This includes the development of the OR Tambo precinct in Tamboville. This is a multimillion rand project and cuts across various departments which will provide for economic growth and job creation, tourism

96 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 opportunities in the area as well as supporting Cultural development.

13. PROVINCIAL PLANS, PROGRAMMES AND BUDGETS Information regarding the provincial plans, programmes and budgets were not yet received from the Gauteng Province. This is a great concern to EMM as it hampers the process of integration and Alignment. During the Provincial Technical Steering Committee processes in 2009, provincial departments committed to provide details of their respective plans, programmes and budgets to municipalities, but it did not happed up to when this document was ﬁ nalized.

14. EKURHULENI TURNAROUND STRATEGY Parliament approved a process whereby all municipalities in the country must draft Turnaround Strategies which must be included in their respective IDP’s.

Background A provincial support team was appointed by the MEC for Gauteng Local Government and the Executive Mayor of Ekurhuleni in April 2009. This team was tasked with developing a “case for change” for the City. The case for change was to identify short- and long term challenges, to prioritise these challenges, and to make recommendations in respect of how to address these challenges within the City. The organisational diagnosis ﬁ ndings suggested a clear case for change within the City of Ekurhuleni. The diagram below provides a pictorial representation of the key challenges facing the City. These are discussed in the paragraphs that follow.

A Summary of the Key Case for Change Components

Lack of Strategic Alignment Governance and Compliance A B E Organisational T Delivery Model TE R LI FE People Strategic The Case Practices

Alignment for Change

& Capacity

A Vision for the future Vision A A

Operational L Planning and Prioritisation L

Financial Viability

OCTOBER 2010 97 C2 C2

Ekurhuleni is a City that is not strategically aligned to National and Provincial objectives, and has poor capacity to plan and integrate projects to deliver services to the communities it serves. Budgets are not strategically assigned to projects, and the consequence is a Metro that plans for the short-term in Departmental silos. No integrated, formalized and comprehensive system exists to manage and monitor the performance of projects. To this end, the City is unable to track performance against project deliverables and audit completed projects to ensure adequate service delivery or take corrective action.

Inconsistent service delivery model Service delivery is further hampered by an organisational structure that is ill-deﬁ ned and unsuited for the context in which the City of Ekurhuleni operates. The design of the new organisational structure has become plagued with implementation challenges. The consequence is a City that operates within a unclear and inconsistent service delivery model, with some of the municipality departments operating on structures dating back to the 2000 amalgamation and some parts of the municipality operating on a “new service delivery model”, that is not well-integrated within the City.

People skills, capacity and practices Signiﬁ cant challenges face the City in respect of how it is currently staffed and how it needs to be staffed into the future to deliver on the objectives laid down in the GDS and IDP. Findings depict a City that has too many staff in some areas, too little staff in other areas with a mismatched skills set for what the organization actually requires.

The HR function is not well received within the organization and is heavily criticized for being too administrative and not strategic enough. HR practices are erratic, with recruitment backlogs prevailing, performance management only partially implemented and practiced, and discipline and grievance management lacking clear process. Capacity problems are also signiﬁ cant within the municipality: the skills strategies developed do not align to the IDS or GDS and are not founded in reality or prioritisation. High turnover is prevalent in an ageing workforce with a very high vacancy rate.

Financial Viability Financial viability is a challenge within Ekurhuleni with respect to cash fl ow shortages as a result of poor debt management and ineffi cient credit control. A holistic view of revenue management is not present within the City, and no integrated fi nancial management strategy exists. The City’s expectations in respect of expenditure and the amount of revenue collected is mismatched, with the City experiencing a defi cit between expenditure and collection year-on year. The problem is compounded by the current fi nancial/economic recession. The revenue base is shrinking and with the loss of employment opportunities, more pressure is exerted on the city to service demands for free basic services.

98 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C2 Corporate Governance Corporate governance is of serious concern within the municipality with supply chain management, performance management, ﬁ nancial management, structural problems and labour relations all areas of concern from a governance perspective. The City needs to improve structures, systems and processes to deal with these issues as a matter of urgency.

Conclusion Having highlighted concerns and challenges it must be noted that Ekurhuleni has pockets of excellence and skilled staff with innovative ideas and ideals to take the City forward. The intention of the organisational diagnosis report is not to undermine or disregard the good work that is being done throughout the City. Rather, the report intends to 1) highlight those challenges that act as a serious impediment to service delivery within the City and 2) attempt to assist the City to expand those pockets of excellence to realizes its enormous potential. Details of the EMM Turnaround Strategy report is contained in Annexure “F” on the CD.

15. CONCLUSION The EMM IDP has been reviewed in line with the various National and Provincial Guidelines, the EMM GDS 2025 and community priorities. Departmental plans include strategic objectives, indicators and targets which is included in the SDBIP.

OCTOBER 2010 99 C3.1 C3.1 C3. CITY DEVELOPMENT POLICIES

C3.1 POLICY: CRÈCHE/NURSERY SCHOOLS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. PROBLEM STATEMENT 2. PURPOSE 3. DEFINITION 4. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS 5. TOWN PLANNING PROCEDURE 5.1 Form for Crèche Guidelines 6. RELEVANT LEGISLATION

1. PROBLEM STATEMENT

There are different crèche policies and Town Planning Schemes to deal with the applications for crèches within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. The existing Town Planning Schemes differ in terms of the processing of the applications.

2. PURPOSE

To develop a uniform policy regarding the processing of the applications on crèches.

3. DEFINITION

DEFINITIONS TO BE INCLUDED INTO THE VARIOUS TOWN PLAN- NING SCHEMES IN THE EKURHULENI METROPOLITAN MU- NICIPALITY

Crèche: is deﬁ ned as any building or premises maintained or used for the custody and care during the whole or part of the day on all or only some days of the week, for more than six children of preschool going age and which has been registered as a place of care under the Children’s Act, 1960.

Crèche-cum-nursery school: means any building or premises maintained or used for the custody, care and tuition during the whole or part of the day on all or only some days of the week and where a nursery school programme applies, of more than six children of preprimary going age and which has been registered as a place of care under the Children’s Act, 1960.

100 OCTOBER 2010 C3.1 C3.1 Day mother: is deﬁ ned as any person who, with or without, a proﬁ t motive, cares for a maximum of six children away from their parents and needs to register only at the Council under the Welfare Act.

Full day care centre: functions all day usually from 07:00 to 17:00 and some exceptions where parents working night shift can leave the child / children in the school’s care overnight. A full day care centre may admit infants, preschool children and school children, depending on the registration certiﬁ cate.

Half-day care centre: is a care centre where children are only cared for in the morning or afternoons and may admit infants, preschool children and school children, depending on the registration certiﬁ cate. The children are cared for, for periods of more than four hours at a time necessitating the provision of snacks and resting facilities.

Play group: is a place where the maximum of nineteen children between the ages of three years and preschool age are cared for not more than four hours a day and no resting or meals are provided.

Pre-primary school: functions during normal school hours only and exclusively for children aged three years and older. The registration of a preprimary school is vested exclusively in the respective educational departments.

After-school centre/after-care centre: functions in the afternoons during school terms and is intended to care for school children. An after school / after care centre may however also offer full day care of schoolchildren during school holidays if the registration certiﬁ cate permits this. An after school / after care centre is not operated exclusively at a school building but in a suitable place.

There can be a combination of the care facilities as well, but the underlying principle is that the facility is a care facility for children.

4. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS

4.1 Alignment with the Existing Town Planning Scheme

It is therefore recommended that:

• If the scheme is in line with the policy, the scheme must prevail; and • If the scheme is not in line with the policy, the scheme should be amended.

4.2 Precinct Plans and LIDPs

The application may be evaluated in terms of the existing precinct plans and Local

OCTOBER 2010 101 C3.1 C3.1 Integrated Development Plans in the area.

4.3 Parking requirements

The following parking requirements should be applied: • On site parking must be provided and no on / off loading of children will be permitted in the road. An area must be deﬁ ned for the off and on loading of the children; • One parking per teacher; and • Or as determined by the trafﬁ c engineers.

4.4 Square metre per child

The Department of Health will determine the square metre per child in terms of the relevant Health bylaws or Health Act.

4.5 Site Development Plan

A Site Development Plan should be submitted with the application indicating the access to the site by car and pedestrians where the on and ofﬂ oading of the children will take place. • The play areas for the children. • Secure areas (if any required). • And where alterations and additions will take place (if any). • The layout of the structure to be utilised for the care centre.

5. TOWN PLANNING PROCEDURE

The following procedure is recommended depending on the number of children:

CHILDREN APPLICATION <10 Primary right (written consent) 10 - 29 Special Consent of Council 30 or more Rezoning application

Where there are less than 10 children (i.e. 9 or less) this is a primary right and a Written Consent from Development Planning Department must be obtained.

Special Consent Use application will be required from 10 children and up to and including 29 children or where the relevant Town Planning Scheme allows the employment of more employees with the Special Consent of Council. In this category a

102 OCTOBER 2010 C3.1 C3.1 crèche is seen as a local development where the needs of the surrounding community are been accommodated and is a fairly lowkey activity.

For 30 children and above, a rezoning application must be submitted. The crèche is not only supporting the local community anymore but is more a regional activity and is extending beyond the borders of the local community. The property must be rezoned to “Educational” where a “Place of Instruction” is defi ned as primary right in the relevant Town Planning Schemes by defi nition and includes a crèche, nursery school, preprimary school or child care centre. Failing which a “Special” zoning will have to be utilized should the applicable Town Planning Scheme not have a defi nition for the crèche, primary school, preprimary school or child care centre.

This process will be for all the abovementioned care facilities.

5.1 Form for Crèche Guidelines

The following discussion broadly outlines the process that is followed with regard to an application for crèche.

The applicant must ﬁ rst determine the number of children they want to have on site.

Once this has been determined the Directorate: Development Planning can determine what application will be required.

On receiving the application a form “Crèche guidelines” (attached as Annexure 1) is completed to assess the application.

The applicant’s main responsibility in submitting a Special Consent Use application or rezoning application is to prove need and desirability. Need is usually determined by the proximity to other crèches (a good indication of this is if any other crèches in the neighbourhood object) or the waiting list/present number of children.

The Development Planning Department then considers the application in terms of the guidelines “Position and Desirability” which will ultimately determine the desirability of the institution. It will be seen that the main issue here is placing of the site in terms of access but also affects the site in terms of noise.

A lower order road usually is a quiet one and even a small increase in noise levels will have a disturbing infl uence on the neighbours and is mostly not approved. If there are objectors the issue of noise/nuisance is of critical importance but it has been shown that if the application is on a lower order road the objectors are very vocal; if not they usually accept it rather well. In most cases if the Department is considering recommending approval the applicant is fi rst requested to speak to the objectors to try to fi nd some kind of compromise. If no compromise can be reached the applicant is

OCTOBER 2010 103 C3.1 C3.1 informally advised to address certain issues and as in the above case usually responds to these in writing to be presented to the committee for consideration.

The third section is “Physical properties”. It must be made clear that the Health department has the controlling authority regarding the square meter required and this calculation gives us an indication of the numbers to compare to what is asked by the applicant. On receipt of the application it is referred to the Departments of Health & social development, Public safety, Roads, Transport and Civil Works for their comments. If the department thinks that the application is unique then conditions are set that differ from the standard conditions for consent uses.

One of the main nuisance factors is the issue of parking which is easily dealt with in the following way:

• Adequate space must be provided for off and on loading of children (no parking or stopping in the road will be permitted); • one parking space is required per teacher; and • Additional parking as and if required by the Department: Roads, Transport and Civil Works.

The above can be seen in the second column in this section. As can be seen from this all parking must take place on site. This is also dealt with as one of the conditions in the standard conditions.

The important aspects of the application are shown in the shaded boxes in the various sections. These are then summarised in the summary section at the bottom of the page.

6. RELEVANT LEGISLATION

• Health legislations. • Town Planning Schemes.

Conditions to be added to the crèches with more than one teacher:

6.1 On and off loading of the children must take place on the erf. 6.2 One parking bay must be provided for each teacher (additional parking as and if required by the Director: Roads, Transport and Civil Works). 6.3 Pedestrian movement must be discussed with the Department of Public Safety and the cost of any road signs will be borne by the applicant. 6.4 The erf must comply to the conditions and regulations as contained in the standard health bylaws as promulgated in the Provincial Gazette as well as the

104 OCTOBER 2010 C3.1 C3.1 Council’s Public health bylaws and regulations. This can be obtained from the Department: Health and Social Development. 6.5 The institution must be registered with the Department of Sports, Recreation & Welfare and with the Provincial education department. A health certiﬁ cate must also be obtained from the Council’s Department: Health and Social Development. 6.6 The maximum number of children to be accommodated on the erf that will be determined upon registration may not exceed the number agreed upon by this approval. 6.7 The erf used for the nursery school or any part thereof may not be occupied for residential purposes. 6.8 All poisonous plants must be removed from the erf. 6.9 Walls must be provided/extended on all boundaries up to a height of 2.4 metres if required to do so by the neighbours. Building plans must be submitted and approved before construction and all costs are to be borne by the applicant. 6.10 A Site Development Plan must be submitted with the application for approval, prior any rights for a care center is exercised on the erf.

ANNEXURE ‘A’ CRÈCHE GUIDELINES

TYPE OF APPLICATION Children requested Persons employed (incl owner) Consensus >>>

POSITION OF DESIRABILITY Aspect Evaluation This one On main road with middle barrier Negative On main road without middle barrier Negative On secondary road near trafﬁ c light Negative On lower order roads Negative Objections Negative Extra conditions form dept’s Negative On secondary road Positive Near a school Positive On any road near an activity centre Positive Discussion with objectors Positive

OCTOBER 2010 105 C3.1 C3.1 Locational evaluation

SUMMARY OF APPLICATION Approval from other dept’s: Approve location: Approve up to: Final recommendation:

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS

106 OCTOBER 2010 C3.2 C3.2 C3.2 POLICY: HOME ENTERPRISES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Problem statement 2. Purpose 3. Related Legislation 4. Main considerations 5. Reasons why an application for a home enterprise needs to be submitted if it is operated by more than one person from the property 6. Deﬁ nition 7. Uses not classiﬁ ed as home enterprises 8. General conditions for home enterprises 9. Further conditions applicable to formal applications for home enterprises in addition to the conditions under point 9:

1. PROBLEM STATEMENT

Numerous people from the community operate their professions/ occupations from their residential properties.

There are numerous reasons why it occur, the main reasons being:

• The profession or occupation is of such a nature and scope that it does not justify the acquisition of a full business property, considering business property taxes and the size of the fl oor area needed (approx 50m2/ one offi ce); • The person does not have the fi nancial means to acquire a business property; • Retrenchments; • Some persons do it as a hobby/ and or second income; • It is of such a nature that it does not competitively compete with formal businesses; • In some areas, there is no formal business infrastructure serving the immediate community, which in many cases do not have transport to visit formal businesses; and • Safety and convenience.

2. PURPOSE

The purpose of a home enterprise policy is to recognise the need for and existence of occupations from home and standardise conditions on which these professions/

OCTOBER 2010 107 C3.2 C3.2 occupations will be managed.

3. RELATED LEGISLATION

• All Town Planning Schemes in operation. • The Black Communities Development Act of 1984.

4. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS

• All town planning schemes in operation in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan . • Municipality’s area of jurisdiction accommodate home industries/ occupations in some form. • The amenity and character of the residential neighbourhood. • The size and scope of the occupation/ profession. • Formal businesses.

5. REASONS WHY AN APPLICATION FOR A HOME ENTERPRISE NEEDS TO BE SUBMITTED IF IT IS OPERATED BY MORE THAN ONE PERSON FROM THE PROPERTY

• Previously these occupations from home were only seen for the elitist group, be it doctors, attorneys etc. What about mechanics, carpenters etc.? They need to be better managed to avoid problems in the future. • Certain occupations may have a detrimental affect on the surrounding neighbours, for example a panel beater. Such professions/ occupations may be conducted from home if it is a primary right. • Should a larger enterprise be exercised as a primary right from the property and is causing a disturbance to the area, it could lead to legal problems, as the use is not illegal, but only the effect thereof. • The effects of a large occupation/ profession, rather than the occupation itself, are sometimes difﬁ cult to observe and to quantify; the information necessary if one wish to prosecute. • An application form can clearly stipulate occupations which may have a detrimental affect on the residential amenity of the area, and which shall not be permitted. • Informing the neighbours of future activities in their area that may affect them. • Other legislation from other departments may be necessary to stop the effects of the activities, like noise regulations etc. • The activities’ working hours, days number of people can be stipulated and the applicant be informed beforehand, thus minimising effects on the surrounding properties, especially considering the fact that certain people are doing work at

108 OCTOBER 2010 C3.2 C3.2 night that might be intrusive. • It is easier to advise people on a certain home businesses and their conditions beforehand, than trying to stop activities which are seen as a primary right. • Keeping of a Database on large home enterprises, thus making informed decisions, as well as advising applicants. • Can link up with GIS applications in the future to see trends. • It must be made clear that this is a written consent and not a special consent. It will therefore not necessary to be inline with the special consent column in the Town Planning Schemes. • Rather be proactive than reactive. Thus identifying problems areas before they happen.

It is in light of the abovementioned that this policy is proposed.

Please note the intent is not to go on a ‘witch hunt’, but rather to phase it in over time and to build a database of such activities.

Existing occupations/ professions from home will be protected by Section 43 of the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance of 1996 (Continued use of certain land or buildings).

6. DEFINITION

A small scale enterprise, practice or occupation, subject to such requirements and conditions imposed by the Metropolitan Municipality and/or any applicable bylaw and/ or legislation, is operated from a residential property whereas the enterprise, practice or occupation is seen as a primary right on the property if the resident is the only person involved that works directly from home, whereas the enterprise, practice or occupation shall be subordinate to the residential use of the property and is operated in such a way that the residential character and use of the dwelling house and environment are, in the opinion of the Metropolitan Municipality, not adversely affected or changed.

In addition to the above, should the enterprise, practice or occupation be operated by more than one (1) person and at most three (3) people on the property, of which at least one (1) must reside permanently on the property, written permission of the Metropolitan Municipality needs to be obtained.

7. USES NOT CLASSIFIED AS HOME ENTERPRISES

Activities conforming to the deﬁ nition of a shop, undertakers, tourist information bureau, building society agency, banking agencies, animal hostel, escort agency, towinservice, place of entertainment or institution, place of education for more than nine (9) people, panel beater, spray painter, parcel delivery service, travel agency, shooting range and/

OCTOBER 2010 109 C3.2 C3.2 or shooting instructions, butchery, taxi business, fi sh monger, vehicle rental agency, manufacturing of concrete products, transport contractor, place of refreshment, coal and wood merchant, noxious activity and/ or any such industries which, in the opinion of the Metropolitan Municipality, does not conform to the defi nition of a home enterprise or does not fi t in the particular environment or is of such nature that it should preferably be located on a suitably zoned erf.

The Metropolitan Municipality however, reserves the right to approve any related uses, should it be of the opinion that the related use can be classiﬁ ed as a home enterprise.

8. GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR HOME ENTERPRISES

8.1 Not more than 50m2 of the property or 25% of the fl oor area of the dwelling unit, or outbuildings on the property, whichever is the smallest, may be utilised for the home enterprise. 8.2 The storage area of the home enterprise shall not exceed 20m2 of the fl oor area allowed for the home enterprise under condition 1. 8.3 No goods may be stored or displayed in such a manner that it will be visible from outside the property. 8.4 Parking, as well as loading and offl oading activities directly related to a nonresidential activity, shall take place on the property; and no parking outside the property will be allowed. 8.5 Loading and offl oading of goods may only be done with a vehicle not exceeding a gross mass of 3500 kg. 8.6 No retail trade may take place on the property, provided the occasional and incidental selling of goods related and subordinate to the home enterprise of which only 10% of the area allowed under condition 1 may be utilised. 8.7 The primary use of the property and buildings, being residential, must be preserved. 8.8 The exhibition of a notice/ sign or plaque on the boundary fence, building or free standing sign on the property, to indicate only the name, profession/ occupation, business logo and telephone number of such a permanent resident, shall be permitted: provided the aforementioned notice sign or plaque shall not exceed the size of an A3paper sheet. 8.9 Only two (2) notices/ signs or plaques referred to under condition 8 may be placed. 8.10 The notice/ sign or plaque referred to under condition 8 may not be erected on the road reserve or encroach the road reserve bordering the property. 8.11 An interference with the amenities of the neighbourhood by means of noise, smell, dust, aesthetic appearance or any other manner, shall not be permitted.

110 OCTOBER 2010 C3.2 C3.2 9. FURTHER CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO FORMAL APPLICA- TIONS FOR HOME ENTERPRISES IN ADDITION TO THE CONDI- TIONS UNDER POINT

9.1 An Application for a Home Enterprise shall be lodged in terms of the application procedure/ application form prescribed by the Metropolitan Municipality. 9.2 The application shall be accompanied by a onceoff payment of a predetermined application/ administration fee. 9.3 The application shall stipulate the number of people involved on the property, the type of enterprise, the area to be used, the machinery to be used, parking to be provided, as well as the working days and hours. 9.4 The Home Enterprise may only be exercised once the Metropolitan Municipality has given its written consent. 9.5 All relevant legislation in respect of Trading Licences, Healthand Building Regulations are applicable to the enterprise (if an application for a home enterprise is approved, an application for a trading licence where applicable must be lodged). 9.6 The surrounding neighbours’ written comments need to be obtained, either by hand or registered post. Where comments cannot be obtained for whatever reason, proof must be submitted that comments were requested. 9.7 A maximum of three (3) of the people involved in the home enterprise may work directly from the property, of which at least one (1) shall be a permanent resident of the property. The aforementioned number does not include additional persons that may be involved in a speciﬁ c enterprise, but do not work directly from/on the property, for e.g. gardening services. 9.8 The number of people mentioned under point 7 does not include a domestic worker and/or gardener which are not involved in the home enterprise. 9.9 The Metropolitan Municipality may require a small site plan to be submitted, indicating the areas required/ used for nonresidential activities, as well as parking. 9.10 On receipt of a complaint of whatever nature, the Metropolitan Municipality reserves the right to impose further conditions and/ or requirements, or to withdraw the consent completely without any liability for compensation for damages or losses thus incurred, but only after the matter has been investigated and the ‘offender’ has been afforded a reasonable time to rectify the situation. 9.11 The necessary amendments must be affected to the building plans in accordance with provisions of the National Building Regulations; be it for new additions or for the amended use of existing rooms. 9.12 The Metropolitan Municipality reserves the right to impose any further conditions and/ or additional restrictive measures on the home enterprise.

OCTOBER 2010 111 C3.2 C3.2 9.13 With the approval of the home industry application, half of the 40% tax rebate on residential properties shall be forfeited. 9.14 The above does not prejudice any rights allocated to residential properties in areas developed in terms of the Black Communities Development Act of 1984 and which do not fall under a town planning scheme in operation. Such uses shall be managed in accordance with the applicable legislation.

112 OCTOBER 2010 C3.3 C3.3 C3.3 POLICY: MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. BACKGROUND 2. ADDITIONAL CONCERNS 3. PURPOSE 4. DEFINITIONS 5. SCOPE 6. LEGISLATION 7. CURRENT THINKING 8. PRINCIPLES 9. ROLE CLARIFICATION 10. APPLICATION PROCEDURE & REQUIREMENTS 11. GUIDELINES FOR THE EVALUATION OF APPLICATIONS 12. IMPLEMENTATION 13. CONCLUSION

ANNEXURES

“A1”- DEFINITIONS

“A2”- APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

“A3”- GUIDELINES FOR THE EVALUATION OF APPLICATIONS

1. BACKGROUND

In response to the establishment of Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality and the challenges posed by an increasing number of cellular mast applications, EMM adopted a uniform policy for dealing with the erection of cellular masts and associated equipment on 29 November 2001, under Item LED 127-2001. The various policies and procedures used by the disestablished administrations comprising EMM were used as a basis for the current metro-wide policy.

The above mentioned policy has been in use since its approval and is posing a number of serious practical implications which have adversely impacted on the rate of processing and approving such applications on the part of EMM. This had a negative effect on both the telecommunications industry and the community as it has resulted in a slow rate of providing this service.

OCTOBER 2010 113 C3.3 C3.3 The problem of slow delivery was caused by inter alia, the following factors:

• In terms of the current policy, the cell mast is regarded as a land use. This subjects the applications to complex and time consuming procedures which are characteristic of land use applications; • The application is furthermore subjected to dual advertising in the newspaper and Government Gazette to fulfi l the requirements of both the Town Planning Scheme/Town Planning Ordinance, 1986 and Environmental Impact Assessment. This duplication of effort is very confusing to the public, as well as unnecessarily time consuming and costly for the service providers. Furthermore, the procedure unnecessarily burdens the offi cials of the Development Planning department resulting in ineffi cient use of Council resources; and • The current policy sets out evaluation criteria with regards to height, colour, type of structure of which issues are adequately covered in the Environmental conservation act and GAUCONS. This normally leads to confl icting records of decisions on the same application by Ekurhuleni and GDACE which take a considerable amount of time and effort to unravel.

In the light of the above it is therefore considered imperative to completely shift from the paradigm that the cell mast is a land use to that of being considered as Infrastructure. The applications will therefore only be subject to an application for a building plan in terms of the National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act 103 of 1977 which is the responsibility of the Roads Transport and Civil Works Department.

This will also give recognition to the role of provincial authority and streamline our processes accordingly in line with the concept of cooperative governance. Best practice elsewhere in the province has indicated a shift in that direction and there are lessons to be learned from their systems. Hence a new policy is being formulated to replace the existing one.

2. ADDITIONAL CONCERNS

In addition to the above problem, it has been brought to the attention of this department that the following two other problems need to be looked into if speedy delivery is to be made possible:

• That the process of approving building plans is usually unnecessarily long thereby delaying the ﬁ nalization of the cell mast applications; and • That where the proposed mast is to be erected on council owned property, the process of acquiring the lease on the property is usually too long.

114 OCTOBER 2010 C3.3 C3.3 3. PURPOSE

The new policy seeks to correct the inadequacies as outlined above. Through this policy it is intended to align with the current thinking as indicated by provincial and national policies and legislation as well as lessons learned from the best practice in the Province. The objective of this report is to propose/adopt a new uniform policy for the erection of Mobile Telecommunication Infrastructures within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality area of jurisdiction to replace the policy adopted on 29 November 2001 under Item LED 127 – 2001.

4. DEFINITIONS

A list of commonly used terminology in the telecommunications industry is attached as Annexure “A1” in order to assist in the interpretation of concepts within this policy and also to assist the ofﬁ cials when dealing with submissions from the service providers.

5. SCOPE

5.1 This policy shall apply within the area of jurisdiction of Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. 5.2 It will apply to erection of equipment and infrastructure relating to mobile telephones and it speciﬁ cally excludes public telephones operated from shipping container. The telephone containers are catered for in terms of a separate policy named “Placement and use of Shipping Containers on properties within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Area”. 5.3 This policy covers all types of mobile telecommunication Infrastructure (needed).

6. LEGISLATION

The erection of cellular masts are regulated by the following legislation

• Environmental Conservation Act 73 of 1989 and the National Environmental Management Act, (Act 107 of 1998) Cellular masts are subject to an Environmental Impact Assessment, which has to be approved by GDACE. Furthermore, the EIA process makes provision for a process of advertising in order to solicit public opinion.

• National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act 103 of 1977 Based on the above legislation, the mobile telecommunication infrastructure is subject to the process of building plan approval by the local authority.

OCTOBER 2010 115 C3.3 C3.3 • Town Planning Schemes A Town Planning Schemes has as its primary objective the control over the use of buildings and use of land. In other words it provides for a legislative framework which sets the parameters for development of land and the use of the buildings or land.

Town Planning Schemes do not however provide for inter alia outdoor advertising signage because this is governed by the Outdoor Advertising By- laws. Schemes also are not used to regulate infrastructure installations for example electricity networks, water reticulation networks, sewerage systems, telecommunications networks managed by Telkom, gas distribution networks, etc. The provision of infrastructure, which provides the city with the necessary basic services in order for it to function, is not considered to be a “land use” within the ambit of the town planning schemes. There are certain exceptions with large structures such as water reservoirs. It therefore makes sense in terms of the above argument to regard a cellular mast as infrastructure.

7. CURRENT THINKING

Some Metropolitan Municipalities have formulated policies in terms of which masts associated with mobile telecommunications are regarded as infrastructure. This is the case with Joburg Metropolitan Municipality and Sedibeng District Municipality. The shift is regarded as the best practice and EMM wants to follow suit.

8. PRINCIPLES

8.1 The policy aims to move from a mode of “control and restrict” to a mode of “facilitate and enable” in order to encourage investment by the mobile telecommunications industry and resultant high levels of service delivery. 8.2 The policy is geared to achieve high levels of efﬁ ciency in the part of EMM within the constraints of limited human capacity. 8.3 The application procedure must be clear, simple and user friendly on the part of the developers so as not to create unnecessary hassles for the applicants. 8.4 The consideration process must be easy to understand and apply on the part of EMM ofﬁ cials to enable speedy decision making. 8.5 In terms of the application process and requirements the functions of all the important role players must be recognised and safeguarded. 8.6 The policy must give due recognition to the important role played by GDACE in terms of GAUCONS with regards to taking care of environmental issues relating to location and appearance of a cellular mast, in order to avoid unnecessary duplication and bureaucracy. 8.7 The policy must strike a balance between the responsibility of the applicant to

116 OCTOBER 2010 C3.3 C3.3 submit as prescribed and on time and the obligations of the municipality to make a decision in the shortest time possible. 8.8 The procedures should take cognisance of organizational structure of EMM and come up with measures to expedite processes within the existing constraints. 8.9 Process of canvassing the opinion of interested and affected parties must not be duplicated. 8.10 In all instances a record of decisions from the Department of Agriculture, Conservation and Environment must be a prerequisite for the approval of building plans.

9. ROLE CLARIFICATION

Based on the purpose of this policy as well as the principles contained herein, it is important to clearly deﬁ ne the roles in order to enhance understanding and implementation of this policy by all affected parties. The proper execution of the respective roles and responsibilities will lead to the achievement of the objective of this policy.

9.1 GDACE

In this policy the role of GDACE is seen as follows:

• Environmental concerns

To take care of all possible environmental and visual impacts associated with Mobile Telecommunications Infrastructure. This therefore means that the responsibility to approve the type of structure; colour, height, location, etc will be fully in the hands of GDACE. Furthermore, they have established GAUCONS. This is a strategy in terms of which mobile telecommunications infrastructure is assessed taking into considerations a wide range of environmental issues.

GDACE has a speciﬁ c responsibility in terms of telecommunications infrastructure development and authorisation as per the mandate that they have to fulﬁ l in terms of the EIA Regulations that are implemented in terms of the Environmental Conservation Act. In this way GDACE is recognised as an authority and experts in terms of environmental matters and being therefore in a better position to take care of environmental concerns.

This on the part of EMM means that no criteria in this policy will be formulated for approving the above aspects and the ROD of GDACE will be upheld in the above regard. This will alleviate the problem of conﬂ icting ROD’s.

• Public participation

OCTOBER 2010 117 C3.3 C3.3 The EIA process takes care of public participation in a similar manner as development applications as follows: • Newspaper advertisement • Gazette notice • Site notice • Registered post to adjacent properties

No additional public participation or advertising will therefore be required by the applicants or conducted by the Council.

• Integrated Environmental Management Regulations

The new Integrated Environmental Management Regulations in terms of the National Environmental Management Act (Act 107 of 1998) will be promulgated shortly and will replace the current ECA EIA Regulations. This may require the policy to be amended and updated after consultation with GDACE.

9.2 Telecommunications Industry or appointed Representative

• Submission of application

The applicant / developer shall submit a complete prescribed application together with the required documentation, fees and or authorizations to the EMM. The EMM will not take in any incomplete applications and will only consider applications that have all the required documents according to Annexure “A2”.

9.3 Privately Owned Land

Where private land is concerned, a Special Power Of Attorney and /or the land owner’s consent authorising the applicant to proceed with the application shall also form part of the application.

9.4 Council Owned Land

The applicant shall obtain lease agreement on the land prior to submission of the building plans.

9.5 EMM

Roads, Transport and Civil Works. In terms of the current organisational structure of EMM, the function of building control lies within the Department of Roads, Transport and Civil Works. In terms of

118 OCTOBER 2010 C3.3 C3.3 this policy the need for any town planning processes has been removed thus making the processing and implementation of mobile telecommunication infrastructures to lie only in the RTCW department. This department will be responsible for the approval of applications in terms of the Building Regulations as well as the Telecommunications Infrastructure policy on the submission of the required documents as listed in “Annexure A2” of the policy.

All the relevant departments to comply with the requirements of “Annexure A2”, and RTCW will coordinate processing of the building plans. Furthermore, the said department shall ensure compliance with the requirements of this policy.

• Development Planning Department

Should there be any objections to an application for cell mast further to public notiﬁ cation, through the Development Tribunal, the Development Planning Department shall hear such objections and ensure the resolution thereof.

The department will ensure that building lines restrictions are adhered to when building plans get circulated to them by the RTCW department.

• Corporate and Legal Department

As custodian to all Council properties, the Corporate and Legal department shall be responsible to enter and ﬁ nalize all the necessary lease agreements and power of attorney between Council and the respective telecommunications company. This applies where council land is used to erect a cell mast.

It is the responsibility of the applicant to ensure ﬁ nalisation of the lease agreement prior to submission of building plan application.

• Environment and Tourism Department

The department is the custodian of all environmentally related matters including the erection of telecommunications in infrastructure and they will form part of the process including the evaluation of the building plans. They will also ensure compliance with the R.O.D from GDACE as is the case with any other decision received from GDACE. The applicant has to also accept the ROD, as part of the approval.

10. APPLICATION PROCEDURE AND REQUIREMENTS

The procedure and requirements for submission of applications to EMM is attached as Annexure “A2”. The said list shall serve as a guideline to applicants. The ofﬁ cials in RTCW department shall also use it to evaluate and check completeness of applications.

OCTOBER 2010 119 C3.3 C3.3 Various requirements are applicable according to the type of application. Application types are classiﬁ ed as follows:

CLASSIFICATION 1 – NEW CELLULAR MAST

1. Monopole 2. Lattice 3. Disguised/camouﬂ aged (signage, church steeple, tree, ﬂ oodlight etc)

CLASSIFICATION 2 – SHARING/CO-LOCATION

1. Existing mobile telecommunications infrastructure (Vodacom, MTN, Cell C masts etc.). 2. Existing Structures (i.e. Building, water towers etc.)

CLASSIFICATION 3 – EXTENSION/UPGRADE

1. Extension to height of mast 2. Land area increase (i.e. Increase in footprint of site)

Should any cellular base station become redundant or decommissioned, it together with all supporting and related structures must be removed and the site rehabilitated to its pre-construction state at the cost of the applicant.

11. GUIDELINES FOR THE EVALUATION OF APPLICATIONS

The guideline for processing of applications is attached as Annexure “A3”. The said guidelines in conjunction with the application procedure and requirements (ANNEXURE A2) shall be used by ofﬁ cials of the RTCW to evaluate the mobile telecommunication infrastructure applications.

12. MPLEMENTATION

12.1 In terms of this policy it should be resolved to replace the existing policy. 12.2 All applications for cellular reception masts, base stations and all other related Mobile Telecommunication Infrastructure submitted prior to the approval of this policy, be ﬁ nalised in terms of the relevant “old policies” taking into account the provisions and intentions of this policy. The EMM however reserves the right to insist on compliance with this new policy, in cases where it is of the opinion that non-compliance thereof, will adversely affect the environment. 12.3 Any upgrading of, or alterations or modiﬁ cations to antennae/masts shall be effected in compliance with the provisions of this policy.

120 OCTOBER 2010 C3.3 C3.3 12.4 All applications for mobile telecommunication infrastructure shall be lodged, evaluated and authorised by the RTCW department. 12.5 The RTCW department shall grant, consider and or request additional information on an application within a stipulated period, failing which the application shall be considered incomplete and therefore will not be evaluated.

13. CONCLUSION

Adequate legislation exists and is available as a legal basis in terms of which mobile telecommunication infrastructure applications can be considered. Adherence to the development guidelines ensure an orderly process for the development of a mobile telecommunication network within the boundaries of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality area of jurisdiction.

ANNEXURE “A1”

DEFINITIONS (Defi nitions are provided to assist in the interpretation of aspects and understandings and are not an attempt to redefi ne existing defi nitions in existing legislation and policies of either Municipal or Provincial such as the Gauteng Communications Network Strategy (GAUCONS) or the EIA Regulations GN R1183.). This is also not a complete list of all terminology relating to the telecommunications industry.

1. “MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE” means, but is not limited to any one or more of the following:

1.1 “Cellular Base station site” means any structure designed and used for the accommodation of equipment used in the transmitting or receiving of electronic communication signals and which is or is not physically connected to Cellular Masts on the site. This means all relevant related equipment associated with cellular telecommunication, and includes the cellular mast, as well as the equipment container, which houses all the radio equipment for transmission purposes, inclusive of Land. 1.2 “Cellular Masts” means any form of mast or any other structure intended for the use to transmit or receive electronic communication signals intended for cellular handsets and may or may not include a base station. It also means any solid or lattice structure longer than 5.7 metres (mast pole, monopole guyed tower, lattice tower, freestanding tower or other structure) designed and primarily used to support antenna. 1.3 “Erection” shall mean the initial erection and subsequent upgrading, alteration or modiﬁ cation of cellular masts. 1.4 “Antenna” Means any system of wires, poles, rods or devices used to receive or transmit electromagnetic waves (antenna) and the associated

OCTOBER 2010 121 C3.3 C3.3 feeder cables between the mobile telecommunications equipment (equipment) and the antenna. The antenna can be mounted directly on the equipment or attached to a building or any other antenna support structure. 1.5 “Equipment Room” means a structure to house mobile telecommunications equipment associated with an antenna support structure and/ or antenna. This can be a separate building used exclusively for the equipment or it can be a container or a room or rooms within a building with another predominant use. 1.6 “Microwave Dish” means any device incorporating a reﬂ ective surface that is solid, open mesh, or bar conﬁ gured that is shaped as a shallow dish, cone, horn or other, and is used to transmit and/or receive electromagnetic signals. 1.7 “Extension” means requiring increasing the fenced area to cater for another user’s equipment shelter. 1.8 “Upgrade” means extending the height of the cellular mast.

2. Other terms used in mobile telecommunication infrastructure applications:

2.1 “Monopole” means a pole type structure, with a landing platform or crowsnest. This could be made of steel or concrete with an internal or an external ladder access. 2.2 “Lattice Structure” means a structure made up of multiple steel members that make up the legs and horizontal and diagonal sections. These steel members could be tubular or angular steel. This also comprises of either an internal or external crows nest. 2.3 “Tree Structure” means monopole disguised as a tree.

3. General terms and acronyms used in this policy:

3.1 “Council” means the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. 3.2 “EMM” means Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. 3.3 “DACE”means the Department of Agriculture, Conservation and Environment, Gauteng Province. 3.4 “RTCW” means the department of Roads, Transport and Civil Works, Civil Works Division. 3.5 “Environmental Conservation Act” means the Environmental Conservation Act, No 73 of 1989. 3.6 “Building Regulations” means the provisions of the National Building Regulations and Buildings Standards Act 103 of 1977.

122 OCTOBER 2010 C3.3 C3.3 3.7 “CAA” means Civil Aviation Authority. 3.8 “Service Provider” means Vodacom, MTN, Cell C and other operators.

NOTE: THE ABOVE IS A LIST OF DOCUMENTATION THAT NEEDS TO ACCOMPANY THE BUILDING PLAN. THE RESPECTIVE DEPARTMENT ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR CORRECTNESS AND COMPLIANCE AS INDICATED IN THE BODY OF THE POLICY DURING PROCESSING OF THE BUILDING PLAN.

NB* The cell mast shall not carry any advertisement signs/boards.

Clear warnings on the dangers of the mast, if any, shall be written in te predominant languages of the residents.

The classiﬁ cations in the above table refer to the following:-

CLASSIFICATION 1 – NEW CELLULAR MAST

1.1 Monopole 1.2 Lattice 1.3 Disguised/camouﬂ aged (signage, church steeple, tree, ﬂ oodlight etc)

CLASSIFICATION 2 – SHARING/CO-LOCATION

2.1 Existing mobile telecommunications infrastructure Vodacom, MTN, Cellmasts etc.). 2.2 Existing Structures (ie. Building, water towers etc.)

CLASSIFICATION 3 – EXTENSION/UPGRADE

3.1 Extension to height of mast 3.2 Land area increase (ie. Increase in footprint of site)

ANNEXURE “A3”

GUIDELINES FOR THE EVALUATION OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNI- CATION INFRASTRUCTURE APPLICATIONS

The receipt and processing of applications shall be done by ofﬁ cials as per the criteria that follows below. The said criteria shall be used in conjunction with the application procedure and requirements (ANNEXURE A2)

OCTOBER 2010 123 C3.3 C3.3 1. Completeness in terms of submission of all required documents. 2. Ensuring compliance with the provisions of the relevant legislation. 3. Decision and ﬁ nalization of the application . 4. Notiﬁ cation of the applicant. 5. Timeframes to be adopted as per the National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act 103 of 1977.

124 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 C3.4 POLICY: REZONINGS ON FARM PORTIONS AND AGRICULTURAL HOLDING

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. PURPOSE 2. MOTIVATION 3. PROCESS 4. CONDITIONS

1. PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

The purpose of this report is to establish a uniform procedure for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality with regards to the evaluation of land use applications submitted on farm portions and agricultural holdings in terms of the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 1986.

2. MOTIVATION

Until recently the disestablished Local Councils of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality interpreted the defi nition of a “township” in terms of the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 15 of 1986 differently. This resulted in procedures that are not followed uniformly throughout the Metro. For example an application to establish a guest house on an agricultural holding in one Service Delivery Centre might only be allowed with a township establishment application, whereas the same rights might be allowed with a rezoning application or consent use (where allowed in terms of the Town Planning Scheme) in another Service Delivery Centre, subject to certain conditions. The criteria used by each Service Delivery Centre differs when evaluating whether an application should be submitted in terms of a rezoning or a township establishment procedure. Since in most cases it is argued that a rezoning/consent use (where permissible) application is a more expedient and a more simplifi ed process to follow, private applicants use this disparity and non•conformity in procedures to motivate rezoning applications where a township application would have been appropriate. This causes confusion with applicants as well as offi cials.

2.2 WELMA BOERDERY HIGH COURT JUDGEMENT

A recent High Court Judgement in the matter between “Welma Boerdery (PTY) LTD and Pretoria Council implied that rezoning of a farm portion to a single land use is not legally possible. Based on the interpretation of this decision the Development Planning Tribunal recently decided to keep all applications for rezoning on farm portions in abeyance until clarity is obtained from the Townships Board on the deﬁ nition of a single use. Several applications for rezonings on farm portions and agricultural holdings were

OCTOBER 2010 125 C3.4 C3.4 therefore been delayed for several months.

It is therefore necessary to approve a uniform policy on dealing with rezonings on farm land versus township establishment in order to ensure speedy processing of applications and economic development.

2.3 PROCEDURAL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TOWNSHIP ESTABLISHMENT AND REZONING

A simpliﬁ ed summary of the township establishment procedure is as follows: • Submission of a motivating memorandum including all the relevant documentation. This includes a layout plan taking into consideration factors such as the contours of the land, geo-technical conditions, etc.; • Advertisement of the application and circulation thereof to external and internal parties; • Approval of the layout plan if no objection was received; • Submission of layout plan for allocation of erf numbers by the Surveyor General; • Drafting conditions of establishment including comments received; • Submission of application for ofﬁ cial approval of the township in terms of delegations; • Compliance of pre-proclamation conditions by the applicant, which includes submission of an approved general plan, amendment scheme maps, payment of guarantees for the installation of engineering services to the satisfaction of the Council, opening of a township register; and • Proclamation of the Township.

The process for a rezoning application is: • Preparation of a motivating memorandum submitted by an applicant; • Advertisement of the application and circulation thereof to external and internal parties; • Submission of the application for approval in terms of delegations if no objection was received; and • Applicant compliance with approval conditions which may include payment or guarantees for the installation of engineering services to the satisfaction of the Council prior to the opening of a township register.

The difference between the two procedures is as follows: • Township establishment is a legal process whereby agricultural land is converted into individual sites to which certain land rights are allocated; • After the creation of the sites, land use rights in a township can be changed through a rezoning application; • The process of township establishment is used when the intention is to create

126 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 multiple portions of land which can be transferred to different owners; • The information and documentation required for submission as part of a township establishment application is more comprehensive than that of a rezoning application; and • The information requirements are set out under schedule 7 of the Town planning and Township Regulations, 15 of 1986 for a rezoning application and section 18 for a township establishment application.

From the above it is clear that a rezoning application is a simpler and shorter and less expensive procedure than that of a township establishment application. A rezoning application is usually submitted in respect of land located in an already approved township. The amount of information required for a rezoning application is considerably less than that required for a township establishment application. It is therefore assumed that the intention of the legislator was to allow rezonings only with regards to erven in already approved townships.

2.4 RECENT DECISIONS TAKEN BY THE MINISTER OF DEVELOPMENT PLANNING AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT

The Transvaal Provincial Administration, (now the Department of Development Planning and Local Government) issued a statement in April 1986 to all Local Authorities that:

“ …as a general guideline, business, industrial and other rights may be granted on agricultural holdings and farm portions without the necessity of township establishment provided that the proposed development consists of a single development , the development on the ground on approval does not comply with the deﬁ nition of township as contained in the Town-planning and Townships Ordinance, 25 of 1965, and the land is not to be subdivided. “

Based on the above guideline, local authorities approved rezonings on farm portions where the application complies with the above requirements. Since a single development is not deﬁ ned in terms of this guideline the deﬁ nition of a single development has been interpreted differently.

The Benoni Service Delivery Centre recently submitted two applications to the Townships Board in terms of section 130 of the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 15 of 1986 for investigation. The purpose was to establish whether these applications constituted an illegal township. Although these recommendations have not been approved by the MEC and have therefore no legal status, the principles contained in this document can be used as a guideline. The key issues of that report are summarised as follows: • The “Welma Boerdery” Judgement did not prove that the amendment scheme procedure cannot be used on farm portions;

OCTOBER 2010 127 C3.4 C3.4 • The deﬁ nition of a township must be interpreted within the context of the whole Ordinance. It then becomes clear that the need to establish a township arises in those circumstances where development of a single piece of land will take place, entitling various persons to obtain rights in various components of that single piece of land and making a particular use or uses thereof. It does not apply to a single development of a particular piece of land in single ownership. Comprising various components which will remain in single ownership; • A single development with a single owner does not constitute an illegal township; • The Townships Board decided that the above statement, dated April 1986 to all Local Authorities is still valid; • The proposed development comprising of the following does not constitute an illegal township: a main house occupied by the owner, a second house occupied by the parents of the owner, usual outbuildings of which one is occupied by domestic servants and an outbuilding measuring 550 m2 containing storage facilities. (A business for the storage of equipment to construct stages and seating facilities for events.); and • The merits of the application has been evaluated in terms of the scale and impact of the proposed use as well as the frequency of the activity on the property.

2.5 EXISTING POLICIES

2.5.1 TSHWANE METROPOLITAN COUNCIL

Shortly after the “Welma Boerdery “ high court case the Tshwane Metro decided not to allow any rezonings on farm land and agricultural holdings. This policy is however reviewed currently and a new policy is being proposed by the Tshwane Metropolitan Legal and Corporate Department. A copy of this proposed policy was obtained and the contents contained in this policy are relevant to the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Council. Approval was obtained from The Department of Tshwane Metro to refer to their proposed policy as well as their legal opinions.

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality also has several Town Planning Schemes in operation in its area of jurisdiction. Some of these Schemes allow consent uses on farm land and agricultural holdings whereas others do not make provision for secondary uses under “Agricultural “ zonings and therefore a rezoning application is required. Since these schemes are legal documents they have to be implemented by the relevant Metropolitan Departments.

The Tshwane policy has contradictory principles in terms of the deﬁ nition of a township as stated in the Ordinance. The following comments are made on this policy: • A “Business” or “Industrial” use can be allowed with a rezoning application even though multiple uses can be accommodated as primary rights under

128 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 these zonings. For example under a “Business 1” zoning implies that building plans can be approved for shops, places of refreshment, businesses, residential units which are primary rights under this zoning. This could lead to the creation of an illegal township; • The policy also makes provision for the approval of consent uses on farm land. The policy however does not indicate if only one consent use will be allowed or whether all the consent uses provided for under a speciﬁ c zoning can be allowed; • The policy is not clear on whether uses should be accommodated under one roof; and • The policy is not clear on the deﬁ nition of a single use or single development.

Based on a discussion with an ofﬁ cial from the Tshwane Legal and Corporate Department, the policy is interpreted as follows: • Only a single land use is permissible, such as a crèche or a shop or a factory with a rezoning procedure; • Only one consent use on a farm portion will be allowed even though provision is made for several consent uses under a speciﬁ c zoning; and • Single buildings are preferred.

2.5.2 JOHANNESBURG METROPOLITAN COUNCIL

According to discussions with the Johannesburg Metro’s Legal adviser, they have appointed a Senior Advocate to formulate an opinion on the “Welma Boerdery” Court case. His ﬁ ndings were that the High Court decision was correctly taken and that future applications should be evaluated against the deﬁ nition of a township as stated in the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 15 of 1985. Examples of uses that will require a township establishment application in terms of the Johannesburg policy are provided below: • Filling station; • A zoning including agriculture, residential and a scaffolding business; and • Any zoning that allows more than one use.

2.5.3 EKURHULENI METROPOLITAN MUNICIPALITY

A recent study was done to determine which policies have been approved in each Service Delivery Centre. Based on this study, only Alberton and Kempton Park Service Delivery Centres have approved policies on this matter. Most of the recommendations made as part of these policies are still applicable and will be incorporated into the proposed Metro Policy. The Kempton park policy basically also only allows rezoning applications when a single use is applied for. The existing engineering services would also have to be able to service the proposed use. If major upgrading or provision of services is necessary a township establishment application would be required. It is

OCTOBER 2010 129 C3.4 C3.4 submitted that the recommendations contained in this policy is relevant and should be adopted as the policy for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality after providing for a few amendments.

2.6 DEFINITION OF A TOWNSHIP

The Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 1986 deﬁ nes a township as follows: “township” means any land laid out or divided into or developed as sites for residential, business or industrial purposes or similar purposes where such sites are arranged in such a manner as to be intersected or connected by or to abut on any street, and a site or street shall for the purposes of this deﬁ nition include a right of way or any site or street which has not been surveyed or which is only notional in character.

Based on the above a site does not need to have legal cadastral boundaries and can therefore comprise only a portion of land for which a title deed exists. The street does not have to be surveyed and can only be imaginary. This implies that a dwelling house plus a shop which is divided or connected by a driveway on a farm portion constitutes an illegal township. The key issues in this deﬁ nition are a single use and a single building which can be allowed on land with a rezoning procedure without the creation of an illegal township. A development comprising of a dwelling house, a building for a factory and the agricultural use can therefore not be allowed without township establishment in terms of this deﬁ nition.

The above defi nition might have been formulated in an era when town planning policies were more control orientated, than developmental. It is therefore submitted that the defi nition of a township is too restrictive and does not contribute to fl exible town planning procedures and speedy development. This defi nition does not support the new developmental oriented policies of provincial and local government. In order to ensure speedy development many local governments have therefore interpreted this defi nition to suit its own local town planning policies, causing great confusion.

Although this Metropolitan Council should also support a developmental view, it is still bounded by the legal framework of the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 15 of 1986. The proposed policy should therefore not be in contradiction with this deﬁ nition. A local authority does not have the jurisdiction to contravene legislation even though it does not agree with it.

It is therefore proposed that an action be initiated whereby the Provincial Government be requested to re•evaluate the defi nition of a township and amend the existing legislation to support its development policies. The argument might be raised that such an exercise may be futile in view of the proposed new legislation on land uses planning. It is however submitted that a strong case can be made in view of the uncertainty regarding the framework for completion of this new legislation. The amendment of the defi nition could provide a short to medium term solution, whereas the fi nalisation of the

130 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 new legislation might be longer term solution.

2.7 SINGLE USE VERSUS SINGLE DEVELOPMENT

Based on the above, it is clear that the Townships Board and the Department of Development Planning and Local Government has a less restrictive outlook than the policies of Johannesburg and Tswhane Metropolitan Councils. The Townships Board will allow a single development where as the Metro Councils will allow a single use.

A single use can be defi ned in its strictest form as one single land use, excluding any subservient or related uses for example only an offi ce or a church. The question however arises whether a storage area should be allowed as part of this offi ce use and whether this would then still comply with the defi nition of a single use. In the case of an offi ce, the answer might seem straight forward, however when evaluating an application for a fi lling station the matter becomes more complex. A fi lling station is usually associated with a car wash facility, motor repairs, quick serve shop and an auto bank. The question therefore arises whether this constitutes a single development or a single use.

If the policy allows for a “single development”, to take place on a speciﬁ c holding or farm portion the danger exist that multiple uses may be exercised, under one roof which will also lead to the establishment of an illegal township for example a shopping Centre. The proposed policy should therefore rather allow for a single use.

The defi nition of a single use should therefore take into consideration the following: • A single use should constitute a single land use including land uses which are related and subservient to the main use; • Related and subservient uses are uses that are usually associated with the specifi c use and without which the use will not be able to function properly. These land uses must be so inter related that it is not necessary to mention them separately for example, a offi ce with rights for a fi lling station; • When defi ning a single use it is important to make provision for the primary rights on the property namely “Agriculture” and “Residential” The Residential component should also allow a second dwelling to make provision for accommodation of extended family. It might seem that allowing an agricultural use, residential for the owners of the land plus a single use constitute a multiple use and therefore an illegal township. Cognisance must however be taken that agriculture and residential for agricultural purposes are exempted from township establishment and can therefore be allowed without being considered as two additional uses. This will also make provision for the guideline as followed by the Department of Development Planning and Local Government; • The principles of single ownership and single site should be refl ected in the

OCTOBER 2010 131 C3.4 C3.4 defi nition; and • A fi lling station should be classifi ed as a single use but it must be limited to the inclusion of a C store limited to a maximum of 150 m2 Auto Teller Machine and a car wash facility (depending on the defi nition of a fi lling station in the relevant town planning scheme). The collection of these uses is normally expected to be found at a fi lling station and are usually associated with this use (included in the defi nition of a fi lling station).

2.8 PROVISION OF ENGINEERING SERVICES

The provision and availability of the necessary engineering services should be considered when evaluating applications on farm portions. In terms of the township establishment procedure, services agreements are required prior to proclamation of a township. These agreements ensure that the funds are available to provide the necessary services to the satisfaction of the local authority’s requirements. The transfer of all properties in the proposed township cannot take place unless the Council has certifi ed to the deeds offi ce that the necessary services have been installed or that it is satisfi ed that it will be installed within a certain time period.

This is however not a requirement in terms of the rezoning procedure. The rezoning procedure requires that a local authority inform the applicant that a certain amount is payable for the provision of services after proclamation of the rights. The exercising of the rights and approval of building plans are therefore held over until such payment has been received. Should an applicant not make the payments necessary to ensure the provision of the required services the amendment scheme can be withdrawn.

It is therefore suggested that the Council adopt a policy whereby it is ensured at an early stage in the process that the necessary services arrangements are provided for. In this regard it is proposed that the applicant be provided with the cost implications for provision of services, prior to approval of the application. A written acceptance of these preliminary cost and service implications must be obtained from the applicant and made part of the approval conditions. One of the conditions to be complied with, prior to the proclamation of the rights should be that a services agreement be entered into between the local authority and the developer or owner. These conditions should however not prejudice Council’s decision and it should be made clear in any correspondence that the conditions are draft and could be amended at the decision stage. These conditions must be agreed to prior to the submission of the application (or the granting of an amendment scheme number)for approval. Should the draft conditions be amended by Council, the applicant will be given a period of 30 days from the date of notiﬁ cation of the decision to give comments on the amended conditions. If the applicant does not agree with the amendments the dispute will be handled according to the normal procedure e.g. Portfolio Committee Hearing.

One of the main problems concerning rezonings is that the applicant does not pay

132 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 the contributions etc or comply to other conditions, e.g. road widenings etc as with a rezoning this is only enforesable after proclamation. With a township establishment application this problem does not arise.

It is thus also proposed that the necessary contributions etc be paid and most conditions be complied with before the amendment scheme is proclaimed.

PROCEDURE AND CONDITIONS

1. The township establishment procedure shall be the norm in changing land use rights on farm portions and agricultural holdings. 2. The change of land use of farm portions and agricultural holdings can be permitted in exceptional circumstances through rezoning or a consent use procedure (if permitted by the applicable town planning scheme) without the necessity of township establishment, provided that: 2.1 The development does not comply with the deﬁ nition of a township i.e. it does not consist of more than one site, which is arranged to be intersected, connected by or to abut on any street. “Site” shall mean ground chosen or used for a town or building and does not need to have legal cadastral boundaries; 2.2 The application comprises a single development with a single use and a single owner; 2.3 A single land-use such as “Special” for a warehouse or “Special” for a shop can be allowed with a rezoning procedure; 2.4 Agricultural use and dwellings associated with agriculture can be included as primary rights. A dwelling unit can also be included as a primary right; 2.5 The essential services are available or can be provided to the satisfaction of the relevant department. All service fees and contributions will be payable as per the Council’s policy in this regard from time to time; 2.6 If required a services agreement must be entered into between the Council and the developer prior to the proclamation of the rights; 2.7 Payment of the bulk services contributions, endowments, internal services or guarantees to this effect should be paid prior to the proclamation of the rights. (if required by the relevant departments.); 2.8 Where the Council is of the opinion that due to the impact or size of the development an application for township establishment is necessary, a rezoning application will not be acceptable; 2.9 Township establishment shall be required if a public road over any part of the property is required; 2.10 Council reserves the right to request additional information which would normally accompany an application for township establishment where

OCTOBER 2010 133 C3.4 C3.4 required such as fl ood line certifi cation, mineral right holders consent, geological reports, etc; 2.11 Where the land is so situated that it can be included in an Approved township by extension of the boundaries of that township and such inclusion is deemed desirable, a condition requiring such inclusion will be imposed; 2.12 The maximum fl oor area of the proposed use must be limited as part of the approval conditions. (as service contributions etc are determined by the fl oor area); 2.13 No alteration or expansion of the above mentioned land use rights is allowed except with a new application. Such an application must be in line with this policy; 2.14 Interrelated and or subservient uses in loose-standing buildings on a site ( such as a guest house / dwelling plus hall, or a warehouse plus accompanying offi ce) is also permissible without the township establishment procedure. These land uses must be so interrelated that they do not have to be mentioned separately; 2.15 The land may not be subdivided or any portion thereof sub let in order to ensure single ownership; 2.16 Partial rezoning of a portion of land shall not be allowed. The fl oor Area; of the land uses shall be restricted to a specifi ed amount and the bulk services and other contributions shall be calculated based on this fl oor area; 2.17 The following list gives examples of land uses which can be obtained on farm portions and agricultural holdings by means of a rezoning or Council Consent depending on the applicable Town Planning Scheme: 2.17.1 “Special” for a Crèche, a Nursery school, an after school centre; 2.17.2 “Special” for a Place of Public worship or a Church; 2.17.3 “Special” for a Guest House; 2.17.4 “Special” for a Household enterprise, a medical consulting room or a home offi ce; 2.17.5 “Special” for a Filling station including a dwelling unit; 2.17.6 “Special” for a Spaza shop including a dwelling unit; 2.17.7 “Special” for a Warehouse including a dwelling unit; 2.17.8 “Special” for a Second dwelling; 2.17.9 “Special” for a Golf course, a Private Open Space or a Golf Driving Range Agricultural including a shop; 2.17.10 Agricultural including a warehouse; and 2.17.11 Uses exempted from township establishment in terms of the Town Planning and Townships Ordinance, 15 of 1986.

134 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 NOTE: A zoning such as “Commercial solely for a single warehouse is also applicable.

2.18 The following are land uses which can only be obtained by means of township establishment: 2.18.1 Any zoning in terms of the town planning scheme that will allow multiple uses as primary rights, such as a Business 1 zoning; 2.18.2 Shopping centres; 2.18.3 Ofﬁ ces: sectional title; 2.18.4 Industries: sectional title; 2.18.5 Sectional or group Housing; and 2.18.6 Public Garage.

3. The following process shall BE ADOPTED in dealing with applications on farm land and agricultural holdings: 3.1 Applicants will be encouraged to submit a preliminary proposal (including proposed fl oor area), which will be screened by the Planning Department to confi rm that the correct procedure will be followed; 3.2 A preliminary proposal can be in the form of a letter and must indicate the proposed rights applied for and proof to the satisfaction of the Council that the proposed development will not result in a township as defi ned in the Ordinance; 3.3 Conditions 2.1 and 2.2 will be implemented by requesting a preliminary proposal prior to the allocation of an Amendment Scheme number when receiving such a request on a farm portion or agricultural holding; 3.4 When evaluating the proposal, cognisance must be taken of the impact of planned / future national and provincial roads, availability of engineering services, Spatial development Framework etc. Where applicable the comments of provincial Departments for example Gautrans could be required prior to taking a decision on the proposal; 3.5 An offi cial answer is given to the applicant in writing indicating the process to be followed. This letter will indicate that the matter has been evaluated purely from a procedural point of view and must in no way be construed that the application will be approved; 3.6 If the decision in point 2.5 indicated that the amendment scheme route can be followed a list of draft conditions and cost implications pertaining to the provision of engineering services must be provided to the applicant. These conditions must be mutually agreed upon in writing, prior to the allocation of a amendment scheme number and the submission of the amendment scheme application. It must also be stated that fi nal conditions will however only be laid down with the evaluation of the

OCTOBER 2010 135 C3.4 C3.4 formal application; and 3.7 In terms of this policy consent use applications (where permitted by the town planning scheme) must be processed the same as rezoning applications in terms of referring of applications, determining service contributions, requesting ﬂ ood line certiﬁ cations, geological reports, etc.

4. The following standard conditions must BE LAID DOWN as part of the approval of all rezoning/consent use (where applicable) applications on farm portions and agricultural holdings. These draft conditions must be accepted in writing by the applicant before the allocation of a amendment scheme number and the submission of the application (see 2.6). 4.1 All necessary contributions/endowments/guarantees must be paid prior to the promulgation of the amendment scheme. 4.2 If required by the local authority a service agreement must be drawn up prior to the promulgation of the amendment scheme. 4.3 The applicable engineering connections will only be allowed once the site development plan has been approved. 4.4 The applicable connection fees are payable upon application. 4.5 A qualifi ed engineer must confi rm that the property is not affected by a 1:100 year fl ood line before the amendment scheme can be approved. 4.6 A geological engineer must confi rm that the soil/geology is suitable for the land use rights applied for before the application can be approved. The report from the geological engineer must indicate what is the maximum development potential that can be accommodated on the property ( e g Height, FAR and coverage) and mention any dolomitic risks involved. 4.7 The applicant will not be at liberty to demand any other higher order engineering services from Council once the application has been approved. 4.8 The property may not be subdivided. 4.9 No part of the holding or any interest in any development on the property may be alienated whether by sectional title or any other means other than alienation of the registered property together with improvements as a single entity. 4.10 No building may be sub•let except as a single entity. 4.11 The necessary environmental authorisation must be obtained. 4.12 If the mineral rights have been severed from the owner of the holding, the consent of the mineral rights holder(s) has to be obtained. 4.13 If required by the local authority a certifi cate that is signed by a professional geological engineer to confi rm that the buildings comply to the fi ndings and recommendations of a geological report, must be submitted to the

136 OCTOBER 2010 C3.4 C3.4 local authority together with any building plans. 4.14 A detailed plan or report in respect of all the building structures signed by a professional engineer must be submitted to the local authority together with any building plans if required by the local authority. 4.15 The holding must be excised from the Agricultural Holdings (Transvaal) Registration Act, 1919 (Act 22 of 1919) and the description of the property as farmland must be submitted. (Proof of the registration of the excision must be submitted before the rezoning can be proclaimed). 4.16 A site development plan or if permitted by the local authority a detailed site plan submitted as part of the building plan has to be submitted for approval prior to or simultaneously with the submission of any building plans.

OCTOBER 2010 137 C3.5 C3.5 C3.5 POLICY: SECOND DWELLING UNITS

CONTENTS 1. PROBLEM STATEMENT 2. PURPOSE OF THIS REPORT 3. DEFINITIONS 4. EXISTING POLICIES 5. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS AND PRINCIPLES 5.1 General 5.2 Reasons for applications 5.3 Residential densiﬁ cation 5.4 Implications for engineering services 5.5 Considerations with regard to neighbours 5.6 Sizes of erven 5.7 Other development controls 5.8 Agricultural holdings and farm portions 6. TOWN PLANNING PROCEDURES 6.1 Type of application 6.2 Changes to delegations 7. LEGISLATION 7.1 Development Facilitation Act 7.2 Removal of Restrictions 7.3 Gauteng Development Planning Bill 7.4 Town Planning Schemes 8. PROPOSED POLICY 8.1 Deﬁ nition 8.2 Development Guidelines 8.3 Procedure and controls

1. PROBLEM STATEMENT

An application for the erection of a second dwelling unit, usually relates to an owner of land, who applies for permission to erect a second dwelling unit (sometimes called a “granny ﬂ at”) on the same property. Such property is usually zoned Residential 1, but may also be zoned Residential 5, or may be an agricultural holding or a farm portion.

Prior to the amalgamation of nine local authorities on the East Rand into the present Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality, each of the erstwhile local authorities had it’s

138 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 own policy and procedure with regard to second dwelling units on erven normally intended for the erection of a single dwelling house. As a result of the amalgamation, there is a need to formulate a standardised approach and procedure to permissions for the erection of second dwelling units on residential erven, agricultural holdings and farm portions in Ekurhuleni.

2. PURPOSE OF THIS REPORT AND POLICY

The purpose of this report is to investigate and summarise the existing policies and procedures of the various areas within Ekurhuleni, to investigate the main considerations which need to be taken into account and to then arrive at a proposed policy on the matter, as well as to make suggestions with regard to the standardisation of procedures relating to second dwelling units.

It follows that the purpose of this proposed policy is to enable landowners to obtain permission for the erection of second dwelling units with the minimum of effort and cost, while maintaining an appropriate degree of control.

3. DEFINITIONS

It is important to note that the various town planning schemes in operation in Ekurhuleni contain different defi nitions of what a dwelling unit is and of what a second dwelling unit is. (E.g. in some schemes the defi nition of a dwelling unit is such that it automatically includes a second dwelling unit.) As there are different defi nitions in operation, it is, for the purposes of this exercise, necessary to defi ne what is meant with fi rstly, a dwelling unit, secondly, with a dwelling or dwelling house and, thirdly, with a second dwelling unit. Such defi nition may not necessarily be suitable to eventually incorporate into a uniform town planning scheme for Ekurhuleni. The purpose is to defi ne the relevant terms, in order to enable common understanding of the term and to make meaningful discussion on the matter possible.

3.1 Deﬁ nition of a dwelling unit.

For the purposes of this report, a “dwelling unit” is deﬁ ned as follows: “An interconnected suite of rooms which does not include more than one kitchen, designed for the occupation and use by a single family and which is a dwelling or part of a building containing two or more dwelling units It may also include such outbuildings and servant’s quarters as are ordinarily incidental thereto.”

3.2 Deﬁ nition of a dwelling / dwelling house.

Both “dwelling” and “dwelling house” are deﬁ ned as: “A single free-standing dwelling unit.”

OCTOBER 2010 139 C3.5 C3.5 3.3 Deﬁ nition of a second dwelling unit.

A “second dwelling unit” is defi ned as: “ An additional dwelling unit situated on the same erf as a dwelling or dwelling house, and which may be attached or detached to the original dwelling or dwelling house.” The intention is that this defi nition would include what is commonly known as a “granny fl at”, but that that a “second dwelling unit” not be limited to a “granny fl at”.

As a result of this investigation, it may be required to amend the deﬁ nitions of some of the town planning schemes presently in operation in the area of Ekurhuleni.

4. EXISTING POLICIES

The policies and procedures presently applicable to the various areas within Ekurhuleni are summarised in the attached Annexure 1. They vary from a situation where an owner wishing to erect a second dwelling unit has to rezone his property in order to change the density classiﬁ cation of such property (e.g. from “one unit per erf” to “one unit per 500m2”) to a situation where the erection of a second dwelling unit is a primary right on a property. In some cases services contributions are charged, in others not. All the various practices appear to be functional, with the exception of the situation where rezoning is required, which is impractical and unnecessarily expensive. From comparing these policies and procedures, it is clear that there is a need for standardisation.

It also needs to be mentioned that there are several local areaspeciﬁ c policies in operation, designed to deal with the unique development needs of speciﬁ ed areas. These also need to be taken into account.

5. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS AND PRINCIPLES

5.1 General

In this section of the report the main matters to be taken into account during the formulation of an appropriate policy and procedures are discussed.

5.2 Reasons for applications

From experience it is known that reasons why an owner would want to erect a second dwelling unit on his property, usually is one or more of the following: • Accommodation of elderly parents; • Accommodation of children who have recently ﬁ nished school and who are in need of affordable accommodation;

140 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 • Generating an extra income from the rental of the second dwelling unit; and • This tendency results in residential densiﬁ cation, which is discussed further under the next heading.

5.3 Residential densiﬁ cation.

In town planning circles there appears to be consensus that residential densiﬁ cation has many beneﬁ ts, which include the following: • Better utilisation of urban infrastructure; • Reduces the need to travel, by concentrating residences near communal facilities and transport routes; • Promotes the effectiveness and economic viability of public transport systems; • Promotes optimal use of land and reduces loss of productive agricultural land; • Prevents urban sprawl; • Reduces the need for duplication of community services such as libraries and clinics; • Promotes security; and • Reduces the cost of housing by using existing infrastructure.

These principles are supported by various policy documents and legislation, e.g. the Development Facilitation Act, 67 of 1995.

In view of the above, it is clear that all forms of residential densiﬁ cation, including the erection of second dwelling units should be supported in principle, subject to compliance with all relevant legislation.

The one exception is however the noise zones in proximity to airports, which should be treated as in the restrictions on densifi cation as described in the Residential Densifi cation Policy, implying that no second dwelling units should be allowed in those areas within which the abovementioned policy does not allow residential densifi cation.

5.4 Implications for engineering services.

Some SDC’s require applicants to pay services contributions (e.g. Alberton, Boksburg, Germiston), others do not (e.g. Edenvale, Springs).

In most areas, services infrastructure is not optimally used. The additional load created by second dwelling units can initially be accommodated easily. The view is however held that the cumulative effect of the increasing number of second dwelling units will eventually require additional capacity to be created in terms of bulk services.

OCTOBER 2010 141 C3.5 C3.5 One possible option is that a relatively low standardised services contribution fee be calculated by Municipal Infrastructure and possibly by Roads, Transport and Civil Works. This standardised contributions should be payable before building of the second dwelling unit may commence. The contribution amount should be revised annually, in order to make provision for increases in the cost of providing infrastructure.

The approach would imply charging a relatively high application fee, (which is intended to at least partially reimburse Council for costs which may have to be incurred for bulk services extensions), but charging no other services contributions or contributions for the provision of open spaces. The advantage of this approach is that the large number of individual calculations required for the calculation of services contributions will not be necessary, and that followup on the payment of contributions will also not be necessary, thereby reducing the administrative workload. Charging a relatively high application fee may however prove to be a major obstacle in especially low income areas.

It is suggested that an even better approach, which would also include the beneﬁ ts of the previous proposal, would be not to charge an additional application fee for the erection of second dwelling units, nor to formally charge services contributions or contributions for the provision of parks, but to rather bring in a provision that appropriately zoned properties lose their rebate on assessment rates (which would normally apply to such properties used exclusively for residential purposes), upon receiving permission for the erection of a second dwelling unit. This provision will provide Council with reliable additional income, which can be used for the upgrading of services, as and when necessary.

It should be noted that the approval of building plans lapses after a period of one year, as stipulated in terms of the National Building Regulations, if the owner does not apply for extension. This implies that an approval for the erection of a second dwelling unit will also lapse if it is not exercised within one year, except if the owner applies for extension.

The rebate on assessment rates should however only be reinstated if the owner requests this, and after it has been conﬁ rmed that no second dwelling unit has been erected.

The concern has also been expressed that there is no guarantee that the additional funds will be reserved for the upgrading of infrastructure. It must be admitted that this is extremely difﬁ cult to control, but in view of the fact that many SDC’s have not been charging services contributions at all, this is not seen as a serious problem. At least some of the funds received will be available as a general source of income for Council, to be used as Council sees ﬁ t.

142 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 5.5 Considerations with regard to neighbours.

Some SDC’s require neighbours (of erven which are the subject of applications) to comment on applications (e.g. Alberton, Boksburg).

Many SDC’s (Brakpan, Edenvale, Kempton Park, Springs) do not require comments from neighbours. This appears not to be causing any signiﬁ cant problems. It is therefore suggested that the comments of neighbours not be required as part of the application procedure. This does not however mean that ofﬁ cials should not apply their discretion in possible problematic cases and require applicants to consult with neighbours where serious infringement on privacy is foreseen.

To further limit the impact of the erection of a second dwelling unit on neighbours, it is suggested that it be required that second dwelling units, which are higher than one storey, be situated at least two metres from the side boundaries.

Requirements with regard to side spaces as contained in Town Planning Schemes, the National Building Regulations and other legislation should however also be complied with.

5.6 Sizes of erven.

It is important to note that the sizes of erven vary greatly between different areas. The generally accepted minimum in previously disadvantaged areas is around 250 m2, while there is not really an upper maximum. Erven larger than 2500 m2 are however relatively rare. The exception is agricultural holdings and farm portions, which may be very large in area.

It is suggested that the erection of second dwelling units on residential 1 and 5 erven, only be allowed on erven (or subdivisions of erven) with a minimum area of 500 m2, subject thereto that the subdivision of erven with an area of 500 m2 and smaller, on which a second dwelling unit has been erected, will not be allowed and that all other development controls must be adhered to. This will result in a maximum density of one dwelling unit per 250 m2 property area.

The above will, for example, allow an erf of 2000 m2, with a suitable density classiﬁ cation, to be subdivided into four portions, each of 500 m2, and that it will theoretically be possible (but unlikely) to erect two dwelling units on each of these subdivided portion, but it will not be possible to subdivide a portion of 500 m2 further and thereby sell each of the two units separately. Such subdivision will however still be subject to the applicable density classiﬁ cation in terms of the town planning scheme in operation, implying that subdivision will in most cases only be possible after amendment of the town planning scheme by the owner, in order to increase the allowed density.

OCTOBER 2010 143 C3.5 C3.5 It should however be noted that many erven in townships where land use management is still done in terms of the socalled Annexure F (of the repealed Black Communities Development Act), the erection of a second dwelling unit is a primary right, regardless of the size of the erf. No policy can therefore prevent the owner of such an erf to erect a second dwelling unit, provided that all other applicable legislation is complied with.

It should also be noted that there are a small number of areas, such as Bedfordview, Terenure (in Kempton Park SDC) and Meyersdal in Alberton SDC, which have speciﬁ c policies dealing with the erection of second dwelling units. These policies were derived from public participation with the communities living in those areas, resulting in policies aimed at addressing the unique problems and development needs of those areas, similar to precinct plans or local development frameworks. It is recommended that such tailor-made area-speciﬁ c policies in operation in not be tampered with, as it is bound to cause development problems in such areas and it is also very likely to be opposed vigorously by the communities concerned. It is therefore recommended that such policies be allowed to override the general policy on second dwelling units as proposed in this document.

5.7 Other development controls

5.7.1 Size of unit

The majority of SDC’s presently stipulate a maximum size for second dwelling units (e.g. 100 m2 or a maximum area of a percentage of the main dwelling on the erf (e.g.70% or 50% of the area of the main dwelling).

In order to ensure that granting the primary right to the erection of second dwelling units does not place very large burdens on infrastructure, to protect the living environment of existing residents, to recognise the primary reasons for allowing the erection of second dwelling units (see 5.2 above), and to limit abuse of this concession by especially developers, it is suggested that the size of second dwelling units be limited to 100 m2, excluding garages and other outbuildings. This allows for the erection of a second dwelling unit of reasonable size, without “writing a blank cheque” in this regard.

5.7.2 Number of units

Only one additional dwelling unit shall be allowed per erf (or subdivided erf), that is, the original dwelling unit and the second dwelling unit on a residential 1 (or 5) erf with a minimum area of 500 m2, subject thereto that the subdivision of an erf of 500 m2, on which a second dwelling unit has been erected, will not be allowed. Agricultural holdings and farm portion need to be treated differently

144 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 in this regard, as discussed in more detail below.

In this respect the concern has also been raised that developers may try to obtain permission for the erection of large numbers of second dwelling units in new residential townships or on blocks of vacant erven, thereby doubling the development potential of such areas and also doubling the burden on infrastructure. It should be kept in mind that the separate sale of the main dwelling and the second dwelling unit is not possible, without subdivision, which allows for requiring services contributions. Sale of second dwelling units by means of sectional title should also not be allowed. These measures should control the danger as described above.

5.7.3 Further development controls

It is suggested that other development controls on residential 1 and 5 erven, as contained in the various town planning schemes be maintained. Although there are minor variations between town planning schemes, typically these would be as follows:

Coverage: 50% of the area of the erf, for single or doublestorey buildings; and 30% of the area of the erf, for 3 storey buildings. FAR: 1,0 Height: 3 storeys (more than 2 storeys is rare, except on steeply sloped erven). Side spaces: Usually 2 metres on two erf boundaries, further regulated by building regulations (but also taking into account the suggested 2 m side spaces for second dwelling units higher than one storey). Building restriction lines: As per scheme. Parking: As per scheme.

5.8 Agricultural holdings and farm portions

Agricultural holdings and farm portions are different because their sizes are usually much larger than those of residential 1 (or 5) erven and various zonings are also applicable, e.g. Agricultural or Undetermined. For above reasons the limits in terms of erf size mentioned elsewhere in this document are not applicable. It is however necessary to address the erection of additional dwelling units on such properties speciﬁ cally, as the erection of one dwelling unit is usually a primary right on such properties, but second and further dwelling units may present problems.

It is therefore suggested that the erection of one second dwelling unit on agricultural

OCTOBER 2010 145 C3.5 C3.5 holdings and farm portions be made a primary right, with all the controls as suggested for other properties, with the following additions / amendments: 5.8.1 Only one additional second dwelling unit shall be allowed. 5.8.2 All other applicable legislation must also be complied with, e.g. restrictive title conditions. 5.8.3 This policy regarding the erection of second dwelling units shall not be construed to prevent the owner of from erecting accommodation for bona ﬁ de employees on the property. Accommodation for bona ﬁ de employees may be erected as follows: Farm portions of less than 5 ha: one unit Farm portions of 5 ha and more: six units Agricultural holdings: three units

These units may contain kitchens. The owner shall be required to submit an afﬁ davit that the units are for persons employed on the property.

6. TOWN PLANNING PROCEDURES

In this section the necessary town planning procedures are discussed. The following are of relevance:

6.1 Type of application

As mentioned before, different procedures are presently used by the various SDC’s to process applications for the erection of second dwelling units. In essence, there are two options available:

• Grant all residential 1 and residential 5 erven, agricultural holdings and farm portions the primary right to erect a second dwelling unit, subject to compliance with all other requirements as discussed above. In this case the building plan becomes the application document, and formal permission for the erection of a second dwelling unit is not necessary. No neighbour’s comments are required. • Provide for a formal application procedure, basically requiring the completion of an application form, submitting the comments of neighbours and after approval, the submission of building plans.

It is suggested that the ﬁ rst alternative be accepted, as being the simplest, which creates the least administrative burden, while still maintaining an acceptable level of control.

It should however again be stressed that all other applicable legislation and procedures should also be complied with, e.g. the removal of restrictive title conditions.

146 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 6.2 Changes to delegations

If the abovementioned approach is accepted, the existing delegation to the Executive Director: Development Planning, to approve applications for the erection of second dwelling units, can be repealed, once a uniform town planning scheme is in operation. The need to approve applications in terms of areaspeciﬁ c policies must however be taken into account.

7. LEGISLATION

Legislation, which may have a bearing on the erection of second dwelling units, is discussed brieﬂ y under this heading.

7.1 The Development Facilitation Act, 67 of 1995

As stated before, this Act strongly supports residential densiﬁ cation by means of the development principles embodied in the Act. As such this Act does not present obstacles to formulating a policy on the matter and it is thus not discussed further.

7.2 The Gauteng Removal of Restrictions Act

Many older Conditions of Establishments of townships and title deeds contain restrictions on the erection of second dwelling units. In such cases a formal application to remove such restrictive condition is required in accordance with the said Act. It is suggested that all such applications be supported in principle, subject to the process required in terms of the Act being followed. It should also be noted that in terms of amendments to the Act, local authorities have been given the powers to approve such applications, thereby simplifying applications of this nature substantially.

7.3 The Gauteng Development Planning Bill

The abovementioned Bill has been in a draft format for a considerable time. Promulgation is expected fairly soon. This may necessitate major changes to town planning schemes and procedures. This should not however have a large inﬂ uence on the principles of a policy on second dwelling units. Such principles should merely be incorporated into procedural changes, which may become necessary due to the promulgation of the Act.

7.4 Town planning schemes

One of the major obstacles to a uniform policy and procedure with regard to second dwelling units, is that much of the policy and procedure in force at the various SDC’s is embodied in the town planning schemes in the area, all of which are different. To have

OCTOBER 2010 147 C3.5 C3.5 one uniform policy is to a large extent meaningless if there is no standardisation on the level of town planning schemes.

The ideal solution to this problem is to replace the many town planning schemes in operation in the area with one uniform scheme. This is however a task of mammoth proportions, with many complicated legal implications, which should not be underestimated. It is furthermore not recommended to attempt this process before the new Gauteng Development Planning Act is fully operational, as this Act is bound to change most of the underlying legal points of departure for the compilation of a uniform town planning scheme.

It is recommended that all town planning schemes in operation in the area of Ekurhuleni, be amended to conform to this new policy on the erection of second dwelling units.

The principles of this policy should then also be incorporated into the new uniform town planning scheme, to be compiled after the promulgation of the Gauteng Development Planning Act.

Some town planning schemes may already be in such a format that no amendments will be required to implement the policy fully.

It is suggested that a clause similar to the following be incorporated into the new scheme:

“Notwithstanding anything contrary contained in this Scheme, a second dwelling unit may be erected on erven, agricultural holdings and farm portions, which are situated in use zones...... (residential 1),………..(residential 5), ...... (agricultural) and ...... (undetermined), subject to the following conditions: • A second dwelling unit may only be erected on an erf with a minimum area of 500 m2. • The combine coverage of all buildings on the erf shall not exceed the maximum coverage allowed in term of this Scheme. • The combined fl oor area ratio of all buildings on the erf shall not exceed the maximum coverage allowed in terms of this Scheme. • No second dwelling unit shall be higher than two storeys, or be built on a level higher than the second storey of the fi rst dwelling unit. • Two additional parking spaces shall be provided on the erf for use by the occupants of the second dwelling unit, provided that if the second dwelling unit has only one bedroom, only one additional parking space may be provided. • Only one additional second dwelling unit shall be allowed per agricultural holding or per farm portion. • In addition to a second dwelling unit, accommodation for bona fi de employees may be erected on agricultural holdings and farm portions in the following ratio’s: Farm

148 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 portions of less than 5 ha: Not more than one unit. Farm portions of 5 ha and more: Not more than six units. Agricultural holdings: Not more than three units.

Further provisions may be necessary, depending on the format of the new scheme.

8. PROPOSED POLICY ON SECOND DWELLING UNITS

It is recommended:

That the following policy guidelines be adopted throughout the area of Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality with regard to the erection of second dwelling units on residential 1 and residential 5 erven, agricultural holdings and farm portions:

8.1 Deﬁ nition

For the purposes of this policy, a “second dwelling unit” is deﬁ ned as: “An additional dwelling unit situated on the same erf as a dwelling or dwelling house, and which may be attached or detached to the original dwelling or dwelling house.”

8.2 Development guidelines

8.2.1 The erection of second dwelling units in all areas of Ekurhuleni, is supported by Council in principle, as a means of achieving residential densifi cation and the optimal use of infrastructure. 8.2.2 The erection of second dwelling units in noise zones, in proximity to airports, shall only be allowed if in accordance with the restrictions on residential densifi cation within noise zones, as stipulated in the Ekurhuleni Residential Densifi cation Policy. 8.2.3 With exception of the erven as described in 8.2.2 above, all erven zoned residential 1, residential 5, agricultural holdings and farm portions (with appropriate zonings), with a minimum area of 500m2, shall be granted the primary right to erect one second dwelling unit per property, subject to compliance with all relevant development controls in terms of this policy and with all relevant municipal and other legislation. 8.2.4 Previously approved areaspecifi c policies, for limited local areas within the Municipality, which were formulated in consultation with the community concerned, in order to address unique development problems and needs, shall remain in force. 8.2.5 No services contribution fee or contributions for the provision of public open space shall be levied on the erection of all second dwelling units. 8.2.6 Appropriately zoned erven, in respect of which permission has been given for the erection of second dwelling units, shall upon receiving such

OCTOBER 2010 149 C3.5 C3.5 permission, forfeit the rebate on assessment rates, usually applicable to appropriately zoned erven, used exclusively for residential purposes.

8.3 Procedure and controls

8.3.1 Applicants wishing to apply for permission for the erection of a second dwelling unit shall submit a building plan in accordance with the requirements of the National Buildings Regulations and Building Standards Act, 1977 and shall pay the normal prescribed application fee required for the submission of such building plan. 8.3.2 Upon approval of the building plan for the erection of a second dwelling unit, the property concerned shall forfeit the rebate on assessment rates, usually applicable to appropriately zoned erven, used exclusively for residential purposes. The rebate on assessment rates shall only be reinstated upon request by the owner, and after it has been conﬁ rmed that no second dwelling unit has been erected. 8.3.3 The erection of second dwelling units shall be subject to the following conditions:

a. Number of units:

Only one additional dwelling unit shall be allowed per erf (or subdivided erf), with a minimum area of 500 m2, subject thereto that the subdivision of erven with an area of 500 m2 and smaller on which a second dwelling unit has been erected, will not be allowed and that all other development controls must be adhered to.

Second dwelling units erected in terms of this policy shall not be sold by means of sectional title.

b. Size of units:

No second dwelling unit shall have a gross ﬂ oor area of more than 100 m2, excluding garages and other outbuildings.

c. Coverage:

The combined coverage of the ﬁ rst and second dwelling unit shall not exceed the maximum coverage allowed in terms of the Town Planning Scheme.

150 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5 d. Floor Area Ratio:

The combined Floor Area Ratio of both dwellings shall not exceed the maximum FAR allowed in terms of the Town Planning Scheme.

e. Height:

No second dwelling units shall be higher than 2 storeys or be built on a level higher than the second storey of the ﬁ rst dwelling unit.

f. Side spaces:

No second dwelling unit with a height of more than one storey shall be erected closer than 2 metres from any side boundary of the property, or in contravention of any town planning scheme or other legislation.

g. Building restriction line:

As per Town Planning Scheme.

h. Parking:

Two additional parking spaces shall be provided on the erf for use by the occupants of the second dwelling unit, provided that if the second dwelling unit has only one bedroom, only one parking space shall be required, or as per existing town planning scheme.

i. Services connections:

Only one sewerage, water and electricity connection shall be provided per erf (or subdivided erf, agricultural holding or farm portion).

Electricity supply to the second dwelling unit must be taken from the main dwelling unit and submetered by the applicant if required. The applicant is to apply for an upgraded electrical connection if the existing supply is inadequate for both dwellings.

j. Aesthetic treatment:

OCTOBER 2010 151 C3.5 C3.5

The second dwelling unit shall be aesthetically acceptable and shall blend in with the design and construction of the main building.

8.3.4 In addition to the above, the erection of additional dwelling units on agricultural holdings or farm portions shall be subject to the following:

a. Only one additional (second) dwelling unit shall be allowed per agricultural holding or per farm portion. b. In addition to a second dwelling unit, accommodation for bona ﬁ de employees may be erected on agricultural holdings and farm portions in the following ratio’s:

Farm portions of less than 5 ha: Not more than one unit. Farm portions of 5 ha and more: Not more than six units. Agricultural holdings: Not more than three units.

ANNEXURE 1

SECOND DWELLING UNITS – SUMMARY OF POLICIES AND PRO- CEDURES MARCH 2003.

152 OCTOBER 2010 C3.5 C3.5

AREA APPLICATION SERVICES PROCEDURE NEIGHBOURS SIZE OTHER TYPE CONTRI- COMMENTS BUTIONS Alberton Consent in Y Comments of Y If erf <1900m2 terms of a neighbours. No 100m2 70% of special clause adverts main dwelling in Scheme erf >1900m2 (Clause 20(3)) floor area 2nd unit not restricted Benoni Consent in Y Form Comment Y Maximum respect of of neighbours coverage 40% Scheme No adverts 2 storeys Boksburg Primary right – N Building plans Y Erf must be consent of (None yet) and consent of 800m2. Not abutting abutting owner >100m2 House owners required 2 X area of 2nd required unit. Brakpan Building Plan N Building plan N Maximum 40% only of house Not >100m2 Edenvale Primary N Building Plan N 100 m2, except rightincluded in with permission. definition if erf Erf 991m2 larger than 1400m2: 990m2 attached. Erf >1400m2: detached. Germiston Special Y No adverts – site N 100m2, if consent Standardised notice only bigger to Cl. without Adverts – site notice only Bedfordview Special Y No advertssite Y 120m2 consent Standardised notice only without Adverts – site notice only Kempton Building Plan N Building Plan N Erf > 500m2 Park Nigel Amendment Y Amendment N/A N/A Scheme scheme amendment of density Springs Primary right – N Building plan N No limit. included in Coverage of definition of 50% may not dwelling house be exceeded.

OCTOBER 2010 153 C3.6 C3.6 C3.6 POLICY: SECURITY TOWNSHIPS (NEW DEVELOPMENTS)

1.1 A NEW SECURITY TOWNSHIP The township is subject to the following conditions:

(a) A legal entity must be instituted by the owner/developer. (b) All the relevant conditions must be incorporated into the constitution of the legal entity. (c) A copy of the constitution of the legal entity must be submitted to the local authority before the approval of any site development plan or building plan. (d) The owner/developer is liable for the cost of the installation of a streetlighting network. The maintenance thereof and the power usage cost will be the responsibility of the legal entity / respective property owners. (e) The local authority will not take over the streetlighting network. (f) The street lighting supply should be metered and the legal entity is liable for the electricity consumption. (g) Once the electrical network has been installed, same will be transferred to the local authority free of cost, who shall maintain the networks (except the internal streetlights). (h) Plans for the internal electrical network certiﬁ ed by a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer must be submitted to the relevant department for consideration and ﬁ nal approval. (i) The sewer, water and electrical networks must be installed to the satisfaction of the relevant departments. (j) A “rightofway” servitude must be registered over the private road in favour of all the proposed erven and the local authority. (k) A servitude for municipal services in favour of the local authority must also be registered over the private road. (I) The abovementioned servitudes must be indicated on the general plan and be registered simultaneously with the transfer of any erven to their respective owners. (m) The design of the internal roads (by a professional Civil Engineer) must be submitted to the relevant department for approval. (n) A stormwater management plan (designed by a professional engineer) must be submitted to the relevant department for approval. (o) The roads and stormwater infrastructure will not be taken over by the local authority and the maintenance of these services remains the responsibility of the legal entity.

154 OCTOBER 2010 C3.6 C3.6 (p) The legal entity must indemnify the local authority against any and all claims regarding: • the maintenance and the provision of any roads and stormwater services in the development (the provision of engineering services under paved areas to be avoided); • any damage to the paving which is caused by an emergency vehicle or any vehicle of the local authority that is involved in any maintenance of services; and • any damage and/or incidental damage to the water and sewer infrastructure (shall be for the account of the owner). (q) The owner / developer is responsible for all road markings and signs in the proposed development. Road markings and signs must be determined in conjunction with the relevant departments. (r) Unhindered access must be given to emergency vehicles and all service authorities (water, electricity, Telkom, etc) at all times. (s) The owner/developer is liable for the erection of street name signs on the private road (RightofWay servitude). (t) The owner/developer must undertake to notify all buyers of all the conditions as stipulated by the local authority in writing.

The following must also be incorporated in the Conditions of Establishment:

(i) Pre-proclamation conditions:

Indication of Servitude

(a) The applicant shall at his own expense indicate a servitude for municipal purposes in favour of the Local Authority over the whole of Erf .... on the general plan. (b) The applicant shall at his own expense indicate rightofway servitudes in favour of all the other erven over the whole of Erf .... on the general plan.

General

The applicant shall satisfy the local authority that a street name has been approved by the local authority.

(ii) In Conditions of Establishment

Engineering Services

OCTOBER 2010 155 C3.6 C3.6 (a) The applicant shall be responsible for the installation and provision of internal engineering services to the satisfaction of the relevant department. (b) Once water, sewer and electrical networks have been installed, same will be transferred to the Local Authority, free of cost, who shall maintain these networks (except internal street lights) subject to (a) above. (c) The ‘legal entity will be responsible for the maintenance of’ the internal roads (including stormwater) and the internal streetlights (including electrical power usage).

(iii) In Conditions of Title

(a) Every owner of the erf, or of any subdivided portion thereof, or any person who has an interest therein shall become and shall remain a Member of the Home Owners’ Association and be subject to its constitution until he/she ceases to be an owner of aforesaid. Neither the erf nor any subdivided portion thereof nor any interest therein shall be transferred to any person who has not bound himself/ herself to the satisfaction of such Association to become a Member of the Home Owners’ Association. (b) The owner of the erf or any subdivided portion thereof, or any person who has an interest therein, shall not be entitled to transfer the erf or any subdivided portion thereof or any interest therein without the Clearance Certiﬁ cate from the Home Owners’ Association that the provisions of the Articles of Association of the Home Owners’ Association have been complied with. (c) The term “Home Owners’ Association” in the aforesaid conditions of Title shall mean the home owners association of ...... (a duly recognized legal entity).

Erf …......

(a) A servitude for municipal purposes in favour of the local authority, as indicated on the general plan to guarantee access to the local authority’s personnel and vehicles in order to carry out repair and maintenance work to the water, sewer and electrical networks (excluding street lights) after they have been taken over by the local authority must be registered over the entire erf. (b) The erf shall be registered in the name of the duly registered legal entity. (c) A rightofway servitude in favour of all the other erven in the township as indicated on the general plan must be registered over the entire en to guarantee access to a public road to all the residents.

1.2 THE SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENTIAL ERVEN (i) A “RightofWay” servitude over the whole of proposed portion ...... in favour of erven ...... and as indicated on Sketch Plan , must be

156 OCTOBER 2010 C3.6 C3.6 registered. (ii) A servitude for “Municipal purposes” in favour of the Local Authority covering the total area of proposed portion and as indicated on Sketch Plan , must be registered. (iii) The abovementioned servitudes must be registered simultaneously with the transfer of any portion to its respective owner (iv) The roads and stormwater infrastructure will not be taken over by the Local Authority and the maintenance of these services remains the responsibility of the legal entity. (v) The legal entity must indemnify the Local Authority against any and all claims regarding: • the maintenance and the provision of any roads and stormwater services in the development. (The provision of engineering services under paved areas to be avoided); • any damage to the paving which may be caused by an emergency vehicle or any vehicle of the Local Authority that is involved in any maintenance of service; and • any damage and/or incidental damage to the water and sewer infrastructure (shall be for the account of the owner). (vi) The design of the internal roads (by a professional civil engineer) must be submitted to the relevant department for approval. (vii) A stormwater management plan (designed by a professional engineer) must be submitted to the relevant department for approval. (viii) The owner/developer is responsible for all road markings and signs in the proposed development. Road markings and signs must be determined in conjunction with the relevant departments. (ix) Unhindered access must be given to emergency vehicles and all service authorities (water, electricity, Telkom, etc.) at all times. (x) The street name ...... be allocated to the private road/servitude (...... ) as indicated on, Sketch Plan...... (xi) The owner/developer is liable for the erection of street name signs on the Private Road! “RightofWay” servitude. (xii) A legal entity must be instituted by the owner/developer. (xiii) All the relevant conditions, for example conditions (iv), (v) and (vi), must be incorporated into the constitution of the legal entity. (xiv) A copy of the constitution of the legal entity must be submitted to the Local Authority. (xv) The developer/owner must accept all the abovementioned conditions in writing. This written acceptance from the owner/developer must also include an undertaking that all buyers will be notiﬁ ed of all the conditions stipulated by the

OCTOBER 2010 157 C3.6 C3.6 Local Authority, in writing. (xvi) Plans for the internal electrical network certiﬁ ed by a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer must be submitted to the relevant department for consideration and ﬁ nal approval. (xvii) The owner/developer is liable for the cost of the installation of a streetlighting network. The maintenance thereof and the power usage cost will be the responsibility of the legal entity/ respective property owners. (xviii) The Local Authority will not take over the streetlighting network. (xix) The streetlighting supply should be metered and the legal entity is liable for the electricity consumption. (xx) Once the electrical network has been installed, same will be transferred to the Local Authority free of cost, who shall maintain the network (except the internal streetlights). (xxi) The water, sewer and electrical networks must be installed to the satisfaction of the relevant departments.

2. That where necessary, the relevant Townplanning schemes BE AMENDED in order to incorporate the deﬁ nition of a private road as proposed and although not a necessity, include a private road use zone.

3. That the provisions of the policy BE APPROPRIATELY COMMUNICATED to Ward Committees and relevant stakeholders by the Development Planning Department.

4. That the Executive Director: Development Planning INCLUDES the comments of other departments, to the extent appropriate, in the conditions reﬂ ected in (2) above.

158 OCTOBER 2010 C3.7 C3.7 C3.7 POLICY : PLACEMENT AND USE OF SHIPPING CONTAINERS ON PROPERTIES WITHIN THE EKURHULENI METROPOLITAN AREA

1. PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

The purpose of this report is to provide feedback on workshops held and to further propose the adoption of a uniform policy on the placement and use of shipping containers on properties within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area.

2. MOTIVATION

2.1 Background

Over the past few years there has been a steady increase in the placement and use of shipping containers within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area for various business purposes. Numerous requests from the public to place shipping containers on properties indicate the pressing demand and desirability for businesses operating from shipping containers.

Businesses operating from shipping containers (and other informal businesses) provide essential services that would otherwise not be available to the community, particularly in the previously disadvantaged areas (e.g. telecommunications and retail). Furthermore, these informal and/or micro businesses, with the backing of large formal establishments (e.g. Vodacom, MTN, Telkom, Bakeries and Coca-cola), provide alternative employment in the face of current high unemployment rate in South Africa in general and speciﬁ cally within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area.

It is therefore obvious that the need for the usage of shipping containers within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area cannot be negated nor ignored. Thus it is critical to set in place mechanisms and procedures to facilitate and support the proper and legitimate accommodation of shipping container for business purposes.

2.2 Portfolio Committee Decisions

On 19 June 2001 the LED Portfolio Committee considered the draft policy on shipping containers and resolved inter alia as follows: (a) THAT the draft policy BE CIRCULATED to other departments of the Metropolitan Council for their urgent comment, with report back to this committee. Furthermore, on 02 July 2002 the Development Planning Portfolio Committee considered the ﬁ nal draft policy under Item DP 91 -2002 and resolved as follows:

OCTOBER 2010 159 C3.7 C3.7 (b) THAT the ﬁ nal draft policy on the use and placement of shipping containers in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipal area BE APPROVED AND IMPLEMENTED after the workshop with Councillors has been held.

2.3 Policy Workshops

A Metro-wide workshop was held on Wednesday 28 August 2002 at the Boksburg Civic Centre in the Council Chamber.

The conclusion of the workshop was that in view of the poor turnout! attendance at the Workshop, further workshops be held per Service Delivery Region in order to solicit wider input into the proposed policy. Follow up workshops were then held as follows:

Southern SDR: 09h00 on Monday 14 October 2002 Alberton Civic Centre, 3rd Floor Auditorium Northern SDR: 09h00 on Tuesday 15 October 2002 Kempton Park Civic Centre, Council Chamber Eastern SDR: 09h00 on Wednesday, 16 October 2002 Springs Civic Centre, Council Chamber

At all the workshops held, valuable input was obtained with respect to the proposed policy on shipping containers and further issues of concern were raised and noted as follows: (i) The manner in which existing containers are going to be dealt with in so far as compliance with the proposed policy is concerned; (ii) Great care should be taken when dealing with existing containers so as to avoid disrupting and possibly terminating services that are provided by businesses operated from shipping containers; (iii) It is suggested that public meetings be held (per SDR) to inform the wider community of the proposed policy; (iv) Council should remove illegally placed containers; (v) It is suggested that Shipping containers be deemed “special structures/building” so as to facilitate ease of accommodation in terms of land use rights enshrined within existing town planning schemes; and (vi) The uses to which shipping containers may be put to must be speciﬁ ed in the policy.

3. DRAFT POLICY

Currently a draft policy (attached as Annexure A) has been formulated and circulated. The policy provides for the following: * The position of the Council on shipping containers;

160 OCTOBER 2010 C3.7 C3.7 * The placement of containers on private properties; * The placement of containers on Council owned land; * Illegal containers; * Roles and responsibilities of various departments; * Guidelines for applicants; and * Assessment guidelines for ofﬁ cials.

4. COMMENTS OF RELEVANT DEPARTMENTS

The following comments were previously rendered by the various departments:

LED and Environment & Tourism

These departments were part of the initial policy development process and therefore there is no need to obtain comments at this stage.

Public Safety

It is accepted that such containers will be used for business purposes. It must be noted that the placement of any containers in contravention of the National Road Trafﬁ c Act, 1996, cannot be condoned. This includes the placement thereof on a pavement (which by deﬁ nition, is part of the public road) in or on the roadway, or in a road reserve. The placement thereof in a position where it obscures the visibility of a road user or where it obstructs a road sign is equally unacceptable. Such containers will be removed at the cost of the owner.

Roads, Transport and Civil Works

Comments are attached under “ANNEXURE B”

Housing

Report and recommendations are supported.

Municipal Infrastructure (Water, Sanitation, Electricity, Cleansing & Gas)

This department supports the policy, provided there will be a strict identiﬁ cation of the Council’s existing services (e.g. water and sewer lines) before the container is placed to avoid to have them on existing services.

OCTOBER 2010 161 C3.7 C3.7 Corporate & Legal

A. The above policy is supported provided that Corporate and Legal services Department shall be informed timeously of land available & suitable for containers in order to serve notices of eviction for those currently trading illegally on various erven & road reserves etc. Also to advise the community of the available stands in order to relocate them if necessary.

B. The proposed policy in its current form could be difﬁ cult to enforce in certain circumstances. To overcome this it is proposed that the reference to National

Building Regulations in clause 2.2 of the policy be amended to read “National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act, 1977 (Act 103 of 1977)”

It is also suggested that the words “building and site” be inserted before the word “plans” in the ﬁ rst tine of clause 2.6 of the policy.

Other than the above, the policy appears in order from a legal perspective.

COMMENTS OF THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR: DEVELOPMENT PLANNING:

The report served at the Development Portfolio Committee held on 12 November 2002. The item is supported.

ANNEXURE A

DRAFT POLICY AND GUIDELINES ON THE PLACEMENT AND USE OF SHIPPING CONTAINERS WITHIN THE EKURHULENI METROPOLITAN MUNICIPAL AREA

DEFINITIONS

Shipping container: a lockable steel pre-fabricated, movable unit] structure originally designed for purposes of containing bulk goods in transit (on ships, trains and trucks). These shipping containers are no longer required for purposes for which the were originally designed and so are being customised for reuse in numerous circumstances. Road reserve: As per deﬁ nition in the National Road Trafﬁ c Act, 1996 (Includes side walks and pavements).

162 OCTOBER 2010 C3.7 C3.7 PART 1

EKURHULENI METROPOLITAN MUNICIPALITY POLICY POSITION

1.1 The use and placement of shipping containers on properties within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area is supported where desirable, subject to compliance with the provisions contained in this policy. 1.2 The structural adequacy of the shipping containers thus used shall be in accordance with the National Building Regulations and any other by-laws of the Council. 1.3 The use of the shipping container shall exclude residential purposes and shall further be in accordance with, and determined by the land use provisions as contained in the applicable town planning scheme(s) within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area. 1.4 Any application for the placement and use of a shipping container for business purposes shalt be subject to written comments from the surrounding property owners It shall be the responsibility of the applicant to obtain such comments. 1.5 The placing of shipping containers within road reserves is deemed to be undesirable and therefore not supported, except in special circumstances/ allocated streets to be determined by the Council at its sole discretion 1.6 The Municipality reserves the exclusive right to pronounce judgement in respect of the structural adequacy of a container in the context of this policy.

PART 2

PLACEMENT & USE OF CONTAINERS ON PRIVATE PROPERTIES

2.1 The placement and use of shipping containers on private properties shall be in accordance with the land use provisions of the applicable town-planning scheme (including the deﬁ nition(s) associated with containers). 2.2 The shipping containers thus accommodated shall comply with the requirements of the National Building Regulations (or exemption thereof as the case may be) and the Health regulations. 2.3 An owner of any property within the metropolitan area who intends to place container or allow a container to be placed on the property under his/her ownership shall lodge the necessary application with the Metropolitan Council to place a shipping container on his/her property. 2.4 The Metropolitan Council may, on approval of the application to place a container on any pnvate property, impose conditions it deems to be necessary.

OCTOBER 2010 163 C3.7 C3.7 2.5 The Metropolitan Council shall, in all instances, reserve its right to withdraw its permission should the owner! applicant fail to comply with conditions of approval. 2.6 The Council may, on submission of relevant site plans, consider requests to encroach building lines and/or servitudes when the positioning of containers is considered.

PART 3

PLACEMENT & USE OF CONTAINERS ON COUNCIL-OWNED (PUBLIC) PROPERTY

3.1 The Metropolitan Council may, from time to time and where desirable, identify (through the Executive Director, Development Planning) and approve sites! stands under its ownership to be made available for the placement of shipping containers for purposes it may determine and/or approve of as follows: 3.1.1 Sites/stands providing for single occupation; and 3.1.2 Sites/stands providing for multiple occupation. (clustering)

3.2 Any person who wishes to place a container on any site! stand identifi ed by ‘the Council and under its ownership shall be required to enter into a lease agreement on application. Applications to lease Council land for the placement of shipping containers shall be treated on a fi rst come fi rst served basis and sub-letting shall be prohibited.

3.3 Lease agreements with Council for leasing of land for purposes of placing and using shipping containers shall, inter-alia be subject to the following: 3.3.1 Payment of a cash deposit of R1 000,00 (or an amount equivalent to the removal costs of a shipping container as determined by the Council), over and above the relevant application fee. The deposit thus paid shall be used to remove the container in the event that the owner abandons the container. On termination of the lease agreement the deposit shall only be refunded to the owner! applicant once all conditions have been complied with, and the container removed; 3.3.2 Stipulations pertaining to the provision and consumption of services; and 3.3.3 Limit the advertising on the body of the container to advertising the use of the container and in compliance with advertising by-laws.

3.4 The shipping containers thus accommodated shall comply with the requirements of the National Building Regulations (or exemption thereof) and the Health

164 OCTOBER 2010 C3.7 C3.7 regulations

PART 4 ILLEGALLY PLACED CONTAINERS

4.1 A shipping container shall be considered to be illegal under the following circumstances: (a) When placed within the road reserve and any other land , whether publicly owned or privately owned without the prior permission of the Council; (b) When placed on any other Council property without any agreement being entered into or any documented permission being obtained by the owner of the shipping container; and (c) When placed on any other property without the prior approval of the Council.

PART 5

DEPARTMENTS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 Development Planning: 5.1.1 Receive, process and approve or refuse applications for the placement and use of shipping containers for business purposes on properties within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipal area. 5.1.2 Determine appropriate application fees for applications to place containers on private properties as well as effective identiﬁ cation. 5.1.3 Remove (or cause to be removed) illegally placed containers on any property within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area. 5.1.4 Identify council owned sites! stands suitable for placement and use of shipping containers based on need and desirability. 5.1.5 Compile and maintain a database of identiﬁ ed council owned sites! stands suitable for placement and use of shipping containers. 5.1.6 Provide comments on all applications to place shipping containers on private properties. 5.1.7 Provide comments on all applications to lease Council owned land for purposes of. placing shipping containers.

5.2 Public Safety: 5.2.1 Take necessary steps to remove and impound illegally placed containers within the road reserves.

OCTOBER 2010 165 C3.7 C3.7 5.3 Finance: 5.3.1 Determine economical rental for the lease of Council land for shipping containers. 5.3.2 Collect the rental payable for the lease of Council land for shipping containers.

5.4 Corporate and Legal: 5.4.1 Receive and process all applications to lease Council owned. 5.4.2 Draw up and sign the lease agreements (after consultation with the Development Planning Department and the Building Control Division) 5.4.3 Take necessary action against defaulting applicants/ lessees. 5.4.4 Institute necessary and appropriate steps to dispose of impounded shipping containers.

5.5 Building Control Division (Roads, Transport & Civil Works): 5.5.1 Consider and approve site plans submitted with applications to place: and use shipping containers on properties with speciﬁ c reference to positioning and drainage.

5.6 Municipal Infrastructure (Water, Sanitation, Electricity Cleansing and Gas): 5.6.1 Investigate sustainable and appropriate means of providing services to council owned sites! stands identiﬁ ed for placement and use of shipping containers. 5.6.2 Provide services to council owned sites! stands identiﬁ ed for placement and use of containers at the request of the applicant, and only once the applicable deposit(s) have been paid.

PART 6

GUIDELINES TO APPLICANTS

6.1 Ensure that an application form is fi lled/ completed. 6.2 Obtain comments of adjacent and! or surrounding neighbours (one on either side of application site, and three across the street apposite the application site where applicable). 6.3 Provide proof of ownership and permission (i.e. Power of attorney or affi davit from the owner) of the owner in cases where the applicant is not the property owner. 6.4 The intended use of the container must be specifi ed. 6.5 Since a container-operated business need not be considered a permanent

166 OCTOBER 2010 C3.7 C3.7 undertaking, applicants must declare acceptance of responsibility to remove the container when, on demand by the Municipality, the shipping container is no longer structurally adequate.

PART 7

ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES FOR OFFICIALS

All adjacent and! surrounding Neighbours comments must be solicited by the applicant.

7.2 Any “objections” lodged must be substantiated and where applicable alternatives and! or remedial measures must be provided by the dissenting neighbour(s). 7.3 Where remedial measures required are requested! insisted upon by the dissenting neighbour(s), these shall, within reason, be imposed as conditions of approval. 7.4 An Application Form shall be completed by the applicant A full! complete application must consist of a completed application form and the payable application fee. 7.5 The application must also include comments from relevant surrounding neighbours. 7.6 The proposed use of a container shall comply with policy and the relevant town planning scheme. 7.7 In the case of Council owned land being the subject property, the necessary lease agreement shall be concluded prior to or simultaneously with the granting of permission to place and use a shipping container on such Council owned land. 7.8 The applicant must submit a site plan of the application site! property. The proposed position of the container must be satisfactory in terms of. 7.8.1 Not obstructing entrances, view (for trafﬁ c). 7.8.2 Sufﬁ cient space must be left open around the container. 7.8.3 Not “sealing” or obstructing windows and other openings on existing buildings. 7.8.4 Adjacent properties’ privileges.

OCTOBER 2010 167 C3.8 C3.8 C3.8 POLICY: SPAZA SHOPS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Problem statement 2. Purpose 3. Deﬁ nition 4. Main considerations and principles 4.1 Target area 4.2 Functions 4.3 Principles 5. Related legislation 6. Town planning criteria 6.1 Procedure 6.2 Conditions of approval

1. PROBLEM STATEMENT

There are currently unregistered and uncontrolled Spaza Shops within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. The existence of these Spaza Shops indicate an existing demand for such a service within residential areas, especially where communities are less mobile and existing business nodes are out of reach.

Our records indicate that all Service Delivery Centres (SDC’s) have various methods for assessing applications for Spaza Shops. A uniform approach should therefore be developed to address this phenomenon.

2. PURPOSE

The policy is aimed at the following: • Setting guidelines to evaluate applications for Spaza Shops; • Integrating various policies and procedures operative within the Ekurhuleni; • Metropolitan Municipality without taking away any existing rights; • Promoting harmonious development and protecting the residential character of the surrounding areas; and • Promoting small businesses and boosting the economic status of the City.

3. DEFINITION

An area of a dwelling unit and or associated immovable outbuilding not more than

168 OCTOBER 2010 C3.8 C3.8 20m2 in extent, used by the occupant of such a dwelling unit for the purposes of selling basic household goods.

4. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS AND PRINCIPLES

4.1 TARGET AREA

The policy is primarily aimed at residential areas where basic household goods can be obtained within a walking distance.

4.2 FUNCTIONS

The primary function of a Spaza Shop is to provide the occupant of a residential unit with an opportunity to use his/ her property for a smallscale economic activity and thus generate income without negatively impacting on adjoining properties. Another function is to provide a range of household goods to the surrounding community, within walking distance.

Given the functions above, it is clear that a spaza shop must not be confused with retail /business facilities on stands located along activity streets or nodes and serving a wider community at a larger scale. In addition, an erf on which a spaza shop is operated should retain its primary use as residential.

4.3 PRINCIPLES

• Neighbourhoods are allowed an opportunity to determine, within speciﬁ c guidelines, their need acceptance for spaza shops. • The needs of communities are placed before “planning control”. • Public participation at a neighbourhood level.

5. RELATED LEGISLATION

The policy is to be incorporated into the new Town planning Scheme for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality to be compiled at a later stage.

6. TOWN PLANNING CRITERIA

6.1 PROCEDURE

The following procedure should be followed when submitting an application for a Spaza Shop: i. A Spaza Shop must be operated from a building or associated immovable structure approved in terms of the National Building Regulations Act;

OCTOBER 2010 169 C3.8 C3.8 ii. The applicant shall obtain written comments from the surrounding neighbours. The municipality will determine the affected neighbours; iii. A small scale site plan (A4 or any acceptable size) shall be submitted with the application; iv. A motivating memorandum stipulating the intentions of the applicant together with a locality plan shall form part of the application; v. The applicant must present written comments of the Ward Councillor; vi. The Title Deed of the property must form part of the application; vii. If the applicant is not the owner of the property, a Power of Attorney must be submitted; viii. All objections lodged or representations made shall be dealt with at the Development Tribunal; and ix. Advertisement of the intentions of the applicant must be placed on site for 14 days.

6.2 CONDITIONS OF APPROVAL

i. The main use of the property shall remain residential and the occupant shall reside in the dwelling unit. ii. The size of a Spaza Shop shall not exceed 20m2 in extent. iii. The activity shall not be noxious. iv. The activity shall not interfere with or negatively inﬂ uence the amenities of the surrounding area. v. All vehicular and pedestrian access shall be to the satisfaction of the Municipality. vi. No food shall be prepared and sold on the erf unless such is approved by the Health Services Department. vii. The Municipality may impose any other condition/s that it deems necessary to protect the amenities of the area or neighbourhood. viii. No alcoholic drinks/ beverages shall be sold from Spaza Shops. ix. A notice or sign displayed on the property to indicate and advertise the business being conducted from the dwelling shall be to the satisfaction of the municipality in terms of size, position and design. x. A trading license be obtained from the relevant department. xi. No tobacco products shall be sold to persons under the age of 18.

170 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 C3.9 POLICY: STREETS AND TOWNSHIPS NAMING

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. BACKGROUND 2. PURPOSE 3. RELATED LEGISLATION 4. DEFINITIONS AND SCOPE 5. PRINCIPLES 6. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS 7. IMPLEMENTATION 8. APPLICATION PROCEDURE

1. BACKGROUND

1.1 PROBLEM STATEMENT

The naming of streets and townships is an integral part of land use management and is related to processes such as township establishment and subdivision. The naming of streets coupled with street numbering, helps to identify properties for the purposes of provision of a wide range of municipal services ranging from development to emergency services.

According to our records policies for naming streets is only existing in Boksburg while the other Service Delivery Centres (SDC’s) had their own various mechanisms for doing so. There is no record of a township naming policy in Ekurhuleni.There is therefore a need for a uniform approach to the naming of streets and townships for the whole of Ekurhuleni. A metro wide policy is needed in order to standardize street naming, to avoid duplication and to facilitate decision making with regards to related applications.

1.2 THE NEED

Essentially, streets are named and numbered in order to identify properties for various purposes such as the following: 1.2.1 Rendering of municipal services; 1.2.2 Postal services; 1.2.3 Law enforcement eg. Police and traffi c offi cials; and 1.2.4 Emergency services such as ambulance and fi re engines 11.

1.3 OTHER RELATED POLICIES

OCTOBER 2010 171 C3.9 C3.9 Broad guidelines for naming the naming and renaming of SRAC facilities, public and cultural places; townships and streets This document is attached hereto as Annexure A. The guidelines and rules contained in it form a framework within which this detailed policy on naming of streets and townships has been formulated by the Development Planning Department. Under the same guidelines a separate policy has been formulated by SRAC Department.

The need to have two policies was for each department to focus and addresses the naming issues relevant to the respective department in more detail to facilitate implementation.

2. PURPOSE

The purpose of this policy is to create a co-ordinating, metro-wide policy framework in terms of which street names and numbers as well as township names will be allocated and such applications assessed and approved for the whole of Ekurhuleni.

3. RELATED LEGISLATION

The only planning legislation providing for naming of streets is the Local Government Ordinance, 17 of 1939.

Section 69(1)(a) of the Local Government Ordinance, 17 of 1939 provides for the naming of public places and requires that such names be made available to the Post Master General and the Surveyor General.

Furthermore, in terms of section 57(1) of the Rationalization of Local Government Affairs Act, 1998, section 69(1)(a) of the local Government ordinance has been assigned to local authorities.

Although the present draft of the Gauteng Development and Planning Bill does no make a speciﬁ c provision for street naming, it does make provision therefore via section 69(1)(a) of the Local Government Ordinance of 1939 which is not being repealed.

4. DEFINITIONS AND SCOPE

4.1 The scope of this policy covers public streets/ roads and private road/ right of way servitudes as well as township naming. These are deﬁ ned as follows: 4.1.1 Public street/ road Is a portion of land reserved for road purposes (access and movement) in favour of the general public and under the control of the Local authority or other controlling authority. 4.1.2 Private road/ Right of way servitude

172 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 A private road on the other hand is, a portion of land reserved for road purposes (access and movement) in favour of a person or body of persons who are legally in control of such land and is not intended for public road as deﬁ ned above. Although not commonly found, this alternative might arise in a situation where an individual erf/erven cannot be effectively identiﬁ ed from an abutting public road/ street name or common development. Then it becomes necessary to name the private road/ right of way from which individual erven are getting direct street access.

4.2 The application of this policy covers the following instances where street naming is required: (a) Where a road is created due to establishment of a new township or; (b) Subdivision resulting in the formation of a road, public/ private or; (c) When a new road is proclaimed; (d) When an existing street is extended; and (e) When changing names of existing streets, etc.

4.3 This policy also covers street numbering as an integral part of street naming and very useful for site identiﬁ cation purposes.

4.4 This policy also provides for the naming and renaming of townships.

5. PRINCIPLES

5.1 The name must not be already existent in the CCC and adjacent suburbs. 5.2 If the proposed name is that of a person, either living person or a deceased person, it must be must be a leader of stature. 5.3 The name must not be derogatory, racist or an insult in any manner to any person, body or group. 5.4 The name must be inline with a predetermined theme. 5.5 The name must be acceptable to the community. 5.6 With new townships, the application for street names should be lodged simultaneously with the application for township establishment or amendment of township layout and must also indicate street numbers. 5.7 Where an application is lodged with Province for township establishment, comments on such application must put the approval of street names and allocation of street numbers in accordance with policy, as a condition of support. 5.8 With a sub division, an application for street naming must be lodged simultaneously with the sub-division application.

OCTOBER 2010 173 C3.9 C3.9 5.9 “One name, one street” policy to apply to collector roads straddling more than one suburb or where a minor street straddles one or more suburbs of different street naming themes. 5.10 Street numbers must follow sequence of stands on the township layout.

6. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS

The policy is characterized by the following main features:

6.1 Themes

A themes provide for structure and identity in an area. (a) Existing areas and extensions-Where a theme has been established which forms the basis for street names in that area, such theme should form the basis for any new names in the same area. (b) New areas-a theme characteristic of that area has to be ﬁ rst formulated as the basis for street naming. The theme must be acceptable to both the beneﬁ ciary community and/or the ward committee.

6.2 Street names

All the proposed names are to be in line with a predetermined theme of the area and should be acceptable to the community and be in line with all the above-mentioned principles.

6.3 Street numbering

The street numbers must be indicated on the Customer Care Centre (CCC) based cadastre, referred to hereunder.

6.4 Ofﬁ cial Register of Street names

An ofﬁ cial register of street names in each CCC is to be drawn and updated when each application for street names is approved. This will assist in avoiding duplication of names in the same CCC both in the allocation and assessment of applications for street names.

6.5 Township Names

After approval of zone name or allocation of extension number, the new information should be used to update the CCC’s cadastre.

174 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 6.6 Customer Care Centre based Cadastre

This is a cadastre showing all names of suburb, existing streets, stand numbers and street numbers which should be kept in each SDC and made available to the general public.

7. IMPLEMENTATION

7.1 Bodies to be notiﬁ ed

Section 69(1)(a) of the Local Government Ordinance, 1939(ordinance 17 of 1939) reads as follows:

“The Council may from time to time cause ------or any public place to be marked ------and may cause the name , by which the public place is to be known, to be put up ------and any change or variation in the name of any public place shall forthwith be notiﬁ ed by the Council to both the Post master-General and the Surveyor General.”

Although legislation requires that only the above two bodies to be notifi ed, it is important for effi cient service provision to also notify other service providers within Ekurhuleni. The list of parties to be notifi ed is as follows: • Surveyor General; • Post Master General; • Regional Commissioner SAPS; • PIM division; • Municipal Infrastructure and Roads, Transport and Civil Works; • Departments; • Finance Department; • Hospitals; • Telkom; • Brabys; and • Map Studio.

7.2 Enforcement of the policy

Although it is a logical next step in the process of Township Establishment, the naming of street remains undone in most case and unenforceable as it not controlled in terms of the same legislation that provide for the establishment of the townships.

It is therefore envisaged in this policy to enforce the naming of streets by making it a part of township establishment application as follows:

OCTOBER 2010 175 C3.9 C3.9 • For any new application check if a simultaneous application has been submitted for street naming and make ﬁ nal approval subject to ﬁ nalization of the street naming application; • Applications submitted in terms of the relevant legislation to Province where such application is circulated for comments of Council. In such cases support for such applications must be subject to submission and approval of street names by council where such township is located within Ekurhuleni; and • Where a subdivision in a private road/Right of way servitude, a simultaneous application for street naming should be submitted with such application.

8. APPLICATION PROCEDURE

Based on both the principles and other considerations mentioned above, the following procedure for considering applications is recommend:

8.1 Street Names

For every township application make sure that the proposed names together with the applicable themes are shown on the layout plan and are available when the application for township establishment is advertised in the local newspaper.

8.1.1 Check the submitted list and accompanying map against the following principles: • Determine whether or not the name/s has been previously allocated in the relevant CCC or adjacent suburb; • If names of persons are used, check if they are of national or international signiﬁ cance (such as leaders of stature); • That the name is not an insult, derogatory, or racist; • That the name is in line with a predetermined theme/or whether the street straddles more than one suburbs with different themes (does the one street, one name policy apply); • Has a good motivation been provided in the case of renaming; and • Have the names been advertised in the local newspaper for not less than 28 days.

8.1.2 Check the following on the submitted layout plan: • That the street numbers have been indicated; and • That the street numbers are in sequence.

8.1.3 Circulate proposed names to the community via ward committee, for comments. 8.1.4 Submit names in a report to the Portfolio Committee for simultaneous approval

176 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 of a new theme and street names or refusal. 8.1.5 Submit names in a report to Portfolio Committee for approval if, the names are in line with an existing theme. 8.1.6 Submit names to PIM unit to update the relevant register and cadastre 8.1.7 Notify all the relevant parties (external and internal) of the new name/s. 8.1.8 Notify Roads, Transport and Civil Works Department to put up names of the streets (public roads). 8.1.9 Notify the developer/ applicant to put up streets names (private road) 8.1.10 Notify the applicant to put up street names where an application for renaming has been approved. 8.1.11 Notify Roads, Transport and Civil Works Department to put up names of the streets where the applicant for renaming is Council (public roads). 8.2 Township-Naming See section 5 in Annexure “A”(Naming Guidelines) for township naming procedure.

ANNEXURE A

NAMING GUIDELINES

PURPOSE

To lay down principles and guidelines for naming and renaming of SRAC facilities, public and cultural places, townships and streets.

Detailed and focused policies by Sports, Recreation, Arts and Culture and Development Planning Departments will be informed by these guidelines. Two separate policies are needed as the issue of naming straddles functions of the respective Departments.

The detailed policies referred to above will be used to unpack and implement the principles and procedural guidelines laid down in these guidelines.

MOTIVATION

1. BACKGROUND

What is the South African Geographical Names Council (SAGNC)?

The SAGNC was established by the South African Geographical Names Act (NO 118 of 1998) as the body responsible for standardising geographical names in South Africa. A geographical name means the name of any terrestrial feature within the

OCTOBER 2010 177 C3.9 C3.9 territorial limits of the Republic , together with the area of jurisdiction of the Republic acquired treaty , whether-a) natural or man made and b ) populated or unpopulated. The Minister of Arts, Culture, Science and Technology constitutes it. The Council must set standards and guidelines for local and provincial authorities in their respective areas of jurisdiction. The SA National Geographical Names Council must also receive proposed geographical names submitted by local authorities for the process to ensure the standardisation of geographical names and to facilitate the transformation process for geographical names. Based on this requirements it is impossible for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality to consider any application for renaming or naming of building, public space or facility in the Metro without an accepted policy for the process.

Human Rights and the Constitution of South Africa

Determining a name of a place or of a building requires balancing historical, heritage and linguistic considerations, communicative convenience, the spirit of a community and the spirit of a nation. The cultural heritage of all cultures in South Africa has proper protection in terms of the Constitution.

What is the heritage value of a name?

There is cultural signiﬁ cance in a name and cultural signiﬁ cance implies the aesthetic, historical, social, spiritual, linguistic or technological value connected to a culture. Names of buildings and facilities are part of the historical, cultural and linguistic heritage of the nation. It is more desirable to preserve that destroy. Archives, oral tradition, living heritage, historical and cultural historical documents should be consulted in the process of considering a name change.

2. LEGISLATION GOVERNING NAMING

2.1 Local Government Ordinance, 1939

Section 63(1) of the Local Government Ordinance, 1939 (Ordinance 17 of 1939), reads as follows:

Section 63(1) Public places vested in Council.

The Council shall have the control and management of all: (a) Roads, streets, thoroughfares, bridges, overhead bridges, subways, including foot pavements, footpaths, side-walks, and lanes; (b) Squares and other open spaces, gardens, parks and other enclosed spaces; (c) Culverts, and ferries; and (d) Dams, canals, reservoirs, water-courses, and water furrows.

178 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 Which have been or shall be at any time set apart and appropriated by proper authority for the use and beneﬁ t of the public, or to which the inhabitants of the municipality shall at any time have or acquire a common right.

Section 69(1) (a) of the Local Government ordinance, 1939, reads as follows:

The Council may from time to time cause the houses, building or erection fronting upon all or any public places to be marked with such numbers as it thinks ﬁ t, and may cause the name. By which any public place is to be know, to be put up or painted on a conspicuous part of any house, building, fence, wall or place fronting thereon, and may further at its discretion change or vary such number or name, whether or not such number or name existed before the commencement of this Ordinance, and any change or variation in the name of any public place shall forthwith be notiﬁ ed by the Council to both the Postmaster-General and the Surveyor-General, and the Surveyor-General shall make the necessary alteration on the general plan of the township. Provided that no change in the name of a public place shall be made except with the consent of the Administrator after reference to the Surveyor-General. Furthermore, in terms of section 57(1) of the Rationalisation of Local Government Affairs Act, 1998, section 69(1)(a) of the Local Government Ordinance has been assigned to local authorities.

2.2 Rationalization of Local Government Affairs Act, 1998

In terms of section 57 of the rationalization of local government Affairs Act, 1998, section 69(1)(a) of the local Government ordinance, naming of streets has been assigned to Local Authorities.

2.3 Gauteng Development Planning Bill

Although the present draft of the Gauteng Development Planning Bill does not make a speciﬁ c provision of street naming, it does make provision therefore via section 69(1) (a) of the Local Government Ordinance of 1939 which is not being repealed.

2.4 Promotion of Administrative Justice Act, 2000

For the purposes of transparency and democracy, provision is made in this policy for publication of the proposed names.

3. GENERAL RULES FOR NAMING

The following are the types of names that are recommended: • The historical, social, cultural and emotional concerns of the local residents must be considered; • The use of neutral names such as those of trees, birds, minerals and ﬂ owers is

OCTOBER 2010 179 C3.9 C3.9 recommended; and • Names should preferably have a South African character and connection.

The following are the types of names that must be avoided: • Names that duplicate other names; • Names of both living and deceased persons, unless they are of national signifi cance such as leaders of stature; • Names that are offensive, vulgar, blasphemous, indecent or derogatory as regards race, colour, creed or gender; • Names of which the spelling or pronunciation is so close to existing names that may cause confusion; • Names that are diffi cult to pronounce; • Names that are too long or clumsy, especially where the street to be named are short or the places to be names are small, as this could cause cartographic problems; • Names that may be regarded as advertisement for a particular product, service or fi rm; and • The names of existing township as street names.

4. GENERAL PROCEDURAL GUIDELINES FOR NAMING

• All matters/ applications concerning the naming of public places, structures and properties vested in Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality must be referred in writing to the Department of Sports Recreation Arts and Culture. • All matters/ applications concerning the naming of streets and townships within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality must be referred in writing to the Development Planning Directorate of the Municipality. • Any application for a name must include suffi cient information about the name (origin, meaning, pronunciation, etc) and the reason for wanting the name. • The authorised offi cial must evaluate the proposed names against the provisions of this policy. • All proposed names must be submitted to the community for their acceptance and comments through the Ward Committee as well as by advertising thereof in the local press for a window period of 28 days in which time the proposal will be open for inspection by the public for their comments to the relevant Department. • The relevant Portfolio Committees and the relevant stakeholders should approve all naming and renaming. • The relevant municipal departments, Telkom Ltd, the Surveyor-General and the Postmaster-General, the applicant, as well as any other affected parties, must be notifi ed of an approved name(s).

180 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 5. NAMING OF TOWNSHIPS

5.1 Naming townships in already established and named zones

• In the case of an existing, named zone, the authorised ofﬁ cial may allocate a new extension numbers to the zone name, without going through the approval process.

5.2 Establishing new zone names

• The naming of new township zone must take place in accordance with. - A5 The general procedural guidelines and rules for naming public and cultural places, townships and streets; and - A5 The additional procedures set out below. • The proposed new name must be submitted to the Ward Committee for the community’s acceptance. • If no reply concerning the community’s acceptance or non-acceptance of the names is received from the ward committee(s) within a period of 28 days, the names are deemed to have been accepted, and can be considered in terms of the applicable delegation. • The approved names must be forwarded to the Surveyor-General for information. The Council’s approval must be submitted to the South African Geographical Names Council for information.

5.3 Changing the name of a proclaimed township

• A township may be renamed in exceptional circumstances only. • The application for renaming a township must be accompanied by convincing reasons for it. • Renaming must take place in accordance with: - A5 The general procedural guidelines and rules for naming public and cultural places; townships and streets; and - The additional procedures set out below. • The applicant must be held liable for all the costs involved in the changing of the name (endorsements on general plans, new street name boards etc). • A notiﬁ cation of the proposed new name must be published in the local press. • Written comments on the proposed new name must be received within 28 days from the date of publication of the notiﬁ cation. • After publication of the name in the Provincial Gazette by the South African Geographical Names Council, the name is deemed to be approved.

OCTOBER 2010 181 C3.9 C3.9 6. NAMING OF STREETS

6.1 General

• Where existing streets are extended, the existing name must be given to the extension, and the name need not be approved again. • All street names must contain at least one generic term (See the list of generic terms).

6.2 Naming new streets

• The township developer must propose names for the streets and must take into account the names applicable to the theme for the area in which the streets are to be located. • The naming of streets must take place in accordance with: - The general procedural guidelines and rules for naming public and cultural places, townships and streets; and - The additional procedures set out below. • All names must be submitted to the relevant ward committee(s), as the representative of the local community, to obtain the community’s approval and acceptance of the names. • If no reply concerning the community’s acceptance or non-acceptance of the names is received from the ward committee(s) within a period of 28 days, the names are deemed to have been accepted. • The applicant must be held liable for all the costs involved in the changing of the name (endorsements on general plans, new street name boards etc) where such streets are not deemed to be public streets.

6.3 Changing street names

• A street may be renamed in exceptional circumstances only. • The application for the renaming of a street must be accompanied by convincing reasons for it. • Renaming must take place in accordance with: - A5 The general procedural guidelines and rules for naming public places and streets; and - A5 The additional procedures set out below. • A notiﬁ cation of the proposed new name must be published in the local press. • Written comments on the name must be received within 28 days from the date of publication of the notiﬁ cation.

182 OCTOBER 2010 C3.9 C3.9 • The applicant is held liable for all the costs involved in the changing of a name (endorsements on general plans, new street name boards, etc). • The residents are liable for all the costs involved in changing their personal addresses (letterheads, business cards, etc).

7. NAMING OF MUNICIPAL PROPERTIES

7.1 General

• Municipal properties are all properties registered at the Deeds Ofﬁ ce in the name of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality and all its constituent Customer Service Centre).

7.2 Naming new municipal properties

• The department responsible for a particular facility may propose a name for it. • The proposed name, with the relevant substantiation and necessary information about the name, as well as a complete ﬁ nancial report, must be submitted to the Department of Sports Recreation Arts and Culture the Municipality. • The authorised ofﬁ cial must evaluate the proposed name against the provisions of this policy and must submit a report to the Portfolio Committee for approval.

7.3 Renaming municipal properties

• Municipal properties may be renamed in exceptional circumstances only. • The application for the renaming of a municipal property must be accompanied by convincing reasons for it. • The renaming must take place in accordance with: - A5 The general procedural guidelines and rules for naming public and cultural places and streets; and - A5 The additional procedures set out below. • A notiﬁ cation of a name change must be published in the local press. • Written comments on the name change must be received within 28 days from the date of publication of the notiﬁ cation. • The comments must be included in a report to the Sports Recreation Arts and Culture Portfolio Committee for approval.

OCTOBER 2010 183 C3.9 C3.9 8. GENERIC TERMINOLOGY

Avenue A wide and attractive city street, often with an avenue of trees but on a smaller scale than a boulevard. Boulevard A wide, pretentious street, usually a traffi c artery or primary road with an avenue of trees. By-pass A wide road, which runs around a densely populated suburban area to allow traffi c to fl ow past. Close; Place A blind alley or cul-del-sac. Crescent A ring road or street with an arch which subtends an angle of less than 180°. Drive A picturesque route; or a private carriageway to a dwelling. Expressway A dual carriageway with controlled grade-separated intersections at approximately 500m intervals. Freeway A dual carriageway with grade-separated intersections and interchanges at 5km intervals. Lane A narrow road or trail (alley), often only for service vehicles. Nature trail A footpath only for hikers and/or people to enjoy scenery. Road A public communication road (generally used to describe thoroughfares outside built-up areas). Street A road in the city or town serving houses, businesses, shops, etc.

184 OCTOBER 2010 C3.10 C3.10 C3.10 POLICY: TAVERN

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Problem Statement 2. Purpose of the policy 3. Deﬁ nition 4. Related Legislation 5. Town Planning Procedures 6. Main Considerations 7. Town Planning Criteria 7.1 Areas where taverns are permitted 7.2 Guiding principles for assessment 7.3 Conditions 8. Implementation

1. PROBLEM STATEMENT

A number of taverns are presently conducted illegally on residential stands within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality and there is no proper policy to regulate the operation of the taverns on residential stands.

All the SDC`s within the metropolitan municipality have different procedures and conditions for taverns.

Due to poor control measures, some of the taverns create noise or nuisance to the surrounding neighbours.

2. PURPOSE OF THE POLICY

The purpose of the policy is to propose a uniform policy for taverns within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality, in order to ensure that taverns are compatible with the residential character, and that sufﬁ cient conditions are imposed to maintain and control taverns.

It is intended through this policy to promote a peaceful and healthy environment within which taverns will operate in the best interest of both the patrons and the adjacent residents.

OCTOBER 2010 185 C3.10 C3.10 3. DEFINITION

A tavern is deﬁ ned as an area of a dwelling unit, used by the occupant of such dwelling unit for the serving and sale of food and liquor.

4. RELATED LEGISLATION

• Liquor Act 27 of 1989 • Liquor Act No 2 of 2003 (which is not yet operational)

5. TOWN PLANNING PROCEDURES

The Service Delivery Centres within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality have different legislations and regulations presently operating (e.g. Annexure ”F” of the Black community Development Act, 4 of 1984, various Town Planning Schemes etc). The procedures differ from one SDC to another depending on the operating legislation.

6. MAIN CONSIDERATIONS

• The policy applies to the sale of liquor on residential stands within Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. • Uniform procedure for approval of taverns should be included during the compilation of the Metro Town Planning Scheme. • Due to the high rate of unemployment, taverns contribute towards job creation and are a source of income for many families. • The municipality must impose and enforce strict conditions in order to ensure that taverns are compatible with the uses within a residential township (e.g. Dwelling houses, Place of public worship, Place of instruction etc), in such a way that the residential character of the area is not compromised but retained, and that all residents live peacefully.

7. TOWN PLANNING CRITERIA

(Amended by resolution BDP(62004) Mayoral Committee Meeting of 16 September 2004) 7.1 Guiding principles for assessment a. A tavern must be operated from a building or associated immovable structure approved in terms of the National Building Regulations Act. b. The applicant shall obtain written comments from the surrounding neighbours. The municipality will determine the affected neighbours. c. A small scale site plan(A4 or any acceptable size) shall be submitted with the application.

186 OCTOBER 2010 C3.10 C3.10 d. A motivating memorandum stipulating the intentions of the applicant together with a locality plan shall form part of the application. e. A fee will be charged in accordance with the tariffs approved by the Municipality. f. The Title Deed of the property must form part of the application. g. If the applicant is not the owner of the property, a power of Attorney must be submitted. h. All objections lodged or representations made shall be dealt with at the Development Tribunal.

7.2 Conditions a. An application for a tavern shall be lodged in terms of the provisions and procedures of the applicable legislation. b. A tavern shall refer to an area of a dwelling unit, used by the occupant of such dwelling unit for serving and sale of liquor. c. The activity may not be noxious or hazardous to the health and safety of the surrounding property owners. d. The activity may not be a nuisance to the neighbours. e. The main use of the property shall remain residential and the occupant shall reside in the dwelling unit. f. The business operating hours shall be as per applicable legislation. g. A Site Development plan and building plans, drawn to scale shall be submitted to the municipality. No building shall be erected on the property before to such plans have been approved, and the whole development of the property shall be in accordance with the approved plans. The Site Development plan shall show the following: i. The sitting, height, coverage and where applicable, the ﬂ oor area ratio of all buildings and structures; ii. Vehicular entrances and exists to and from the property to any existing or proposed public street, which shall be sited, constructed and maintained, to the satisfaction of the Metropolitan Municipality; iii. Entrances to buildings and parking areas; iv. Building restriction areas (if any); and v. Parking, on and off loading facilities (on and off loading to be provided on site). iv. The elevational treatment of all buildings and structures. h. The applicant shall conduct no other use than that of a tavern, as approved by the municipality.

OCTOBER 2010 187 C3.10 C3.10 i. If there is any change in use or the owner wants to conduct an additional use on the property, the owner/occupant should reapply. j. The Liquor Board must approve a liquor licence of the property before the approval of the municipality comes to operation. k. The applicant may not advertise in any way on the property, except as provided in terms of the relevant Town Planning Scheme, advertising bylaws or advertising policy of the municipality. l. All consumption of liquor should be within the property. m. Should the applicant fail to comply with any of the conditions, the permission granted will not be valid and the municipality may suspend or withdraw the permission granted.

8. IMPLEMENTATION

Development Planning

• The department will be responsible for the processing of all applications for taverns. This will include circulation of the applications to other departments. • The department will have to deal with all the illegal taverns(this will be achieved through the law enforcement strategy).

Roads, Transport and Civil Works

The department will be responsible for the processing and approval of the Site Development Plans and Building Plans. This will include the monitoring of the development to ensure that the proposed development is built in accordance with the approved building plans.

188 OCTOBER 2010 C2 C4.1 C4 SPATIAL PLANNING STRATEGIES

Additional to the Spatial Development Frameworks, a number of Spatial planning Strategies area also in use. These include the following: C4.1 Ekurhuleni Regional Retail Investigation (2004); C4.2 Ekurhuleni Core Economic Development Triangle Study; C4.3 Ekurhuleni Development of Corridors; and C4.4 Ekurhuleni Densiﬁ cation Framework (in process).

C4.1 Ekurhuleni Regional Retail Investigation

The purpose of the study is to conduct a focused analysis of the regional retail sector with the aim of determining current trends in terms of demand and supply on a ﬁ ne- grained geographic basis. The study will assist the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality to better understand the dynamics of the retail sector in terms of the growth or decline patterns of this sector, if any. This report aims to be a manual indicating the potential for future development in the retail sector, identifying areas where the market may be expected to exert pressure and providing concise guidelines indicating how these pressures could be managed. The project outcomes thus include the following: • Indication of the future development potential • Development management guidelines • Spatial Development Framework alignment and reﬁ nement • Development of a database decision support system.

This study includes the following sections: • Section 1: Introduction • Section 2: Deﬁ ning the retail sector • Section 3: Market Perspective • Section 4: Focused trade sector analysis • Section 5: Retail analysis approach • Section 6: Eastern Services Delivery Region • Section 7: Northern Service Delivery Region • Section 8: Southern Service Delivery Region • Section 9: Retail market potential synthesis and prognosis • Section 10: Management Guidelines and recommendations

Section 10 of the study, Management Guidelines & Recommendations, is included below.

OCTOBER 2010 189 C4.1 C2 10.1 Introduction

Preceding sections of report analysed the retail sector of Ekurhuleni in terms of the current supply of retail fl oor space, the net effective demand for additional retail fl oor space, as well as effective market gaps that currently exist in various areas. In the context of these fi ndings, Section 10 provides market related recommendations in the form of strategies and guidelines that could be implemented by the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality in managing the retail sector over the next decade.

The management strategies and guidelines are subsequently discussed under the following headings:

• Vision and goals • Management strategies • Development guidelines.

10.2 Vision and goals

In order to focus the development strategies and guidelines, a clear vision and associated goals were formulated for the retail sector of Ekurhuleni. The vision and goals endeavor to facilitate sustainable development of the retail sector and are founded on sound economic principles. The vision and goals are summarised as follows.

Ekurhuleni Retail Sector Vision

A healthy and balanced retail sector, in which development is fueled by market driven consumer demand.

Ekurhuleni Retail Sector Goals

The following goals are set for the retail sector:

• Provide a supportive and facilitative development framework for growth in ﬁ rst economy areas; and • Engage in active public sector facilitation of investment in second economy areas.

10.3 Management strategies

The market related growth prospects reﬂ ect the growth potential of the retail sector

190 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 in the various towns of Ekurhuleni. In other words, these prospects indicate expected magnitude and nature of retail development in Ekurhuleni over the next 10 years. Hence, these recommendations provide informative guidelines to manage and facilitate future retail sector growth, but remain subject to the normal constraints of econometric modeling techniques.

Individual applications still need to be subjected to micro level (i.e. site speciﬁ c) market potential analyses in order to cater for local idiosyncrasies. It is, nevertheless, possible to formulate broad strategies as guidelines for retail development in certain areas. Four types of strategies are proposed to assist the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality to manage the retail sector, namely:

• Revival strategy; • Growth management strategy; • Maintenance strategy; and • Kick start strategy.

Each of these strategies are brieﬂ y outlined below.

1. Revival Strategy

Application Older Nodes, CBDs

Rationale Majority of buildings are subject to functional obsolescence and do not cater for modern consumer demand.

Focus • Develop nodal repositioning strategies (Reﬁ ne the role and function of CBDs, identify niche markets). • Implement a UDZ Tax incentive scheme. • Building conversion programmes and better building programmes.

2. Growth Management Strategy

Application Rapidly growing nodes

Rationale Development is fueled by market forces which, if left unbridled, may cause the market to overheat in certain areas which, in turn, may be to the detriment of other less attractive

OCTOBER 2010 191 C4.1 nodes, giving rise to increasing vacancy rates, reduced rental income, eventual deferred maintenance and loss of rates and taxes - not only in the retail segment of the market. Furthermore, retail development often serves as catalyst for other types of commercial development, e.g. ofﬁ ce sector development and automotive parks, which is not always factored into forecasts that inform spatial plans.

Focus • In addition to CBDs, identify primary and secondary urban cores, with appropriate strategies for each. • Primary urban cores should be the highest order node of the decentralised realm and, accordingly accommodate higher order retail activities, e.g. regional retail centres and value centres, e.g. East Rand Mall, East Gate and Lakeside Mall (a special case, since it is located in Benoni CBD). • Secondary urban cores should be the second highest order of the decentralised realm. Consequently, it should accommodate secondary retail activities, for instance a community type shopping centre and / or a hyper type centre. Examples include the emerging Carnival City node and a possible future node to the north of Glen Erasmia - Kempton Park’s area of high income residential growth. • Lower order nodes will predominantly serve local neighbourhoods. • Delineate nodal boundaries in order to encourage agglomeration advantages. • Develop a detailed investment strategy, framework and growth plan for each urban core.

3. Maintenance Strategy

Application Stable nodes

Rationale Stable nodes are, more often than not, poised on a knife’s edge and may be on the verge of a decline cycle. Early signs of urban decay may already be visible. Focused intervention is required to protect investments and hence, the city’s rates base. Examples include the Springs CBD and Bedfordview CBD.

Focus • Upgrade and maintenance programmes are required (infrastructure and buildings) in order to retain consumers and instill business conﬁ dence. • Develop a framework with regard to priority investment areas and liaise with the business community. • Create an implementation framework to facilitate implementation of the UDZ tax incentive scheme. • Implement building conversion programmes.

192 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 4. Kick start strategy

Application Previously disenfranchised communities

Rationale Apart from inadequate formal retail centres in these areas, public facilities (e.g. schools, libraries, clinics and community centres, are too dispersed to create agglomeration advantages for private sector development. Retail development requires feet and the grouping of public facilities is an imperative to kick start development in these areas (the new retail centre in Galeshewe, Sol Plaatjie, is a good example to this effect).

Focus • Identify ONE priority node in each of the four major PDI areas. • Develop a business plan that set out a multiyear public sector investment framework - municipal infrastructure, public facilities and social housing to serve as catalyst to kick start private sector investment. • Develop a market related incentive package. • Develop an appropriate economic empowerment framework, including SMME development and BEE targets.

In the context of the above, it is recommended that the most appropriate vehicle through which future retail development should be managed and facilitated, should have as its most basic point of departure a distinction between the following four functional levels: • CBDs (including the core economic area); • Primary urban cores; • Secondary urban cores; and • Neighbourhood nodes.

An urban core can then broadly be described as activity nodes of metropolitan signiﬁ cance, aimed at providing economic, social and residential opportunities in an integrated, vibrant, high-intensity, mix-use and pedestrian friendly environment, linked with inter-modal public transport facilities at the highest level of accessibility. The focus on a selected number of urban cores will enable the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality to: • Make these urban cores more attractive and economically viable for new development by private sector; and • Improve livability, vitality, urban performance, pedestrian access, convenience and sense of performance permanence and structural integration.

Within the context of the above, Table 10.1 synthesis the proposed strategic thrust for selected nodes in Ekurhuleni, based on the above classiﬁ cation.

OCTOBER 2010 193 C4.1 Table 10.1: Spatial manifestation of retail floor space

Name SDR Status Consumer market Strategy CBD Benoni CBD Eastern • National retailers • Local labour force • Revival strategy reinvesting on CBD edge • Daveyton / Etwatwa • Limited recapitalisation of existing CBD assets • Weak market performance due to proximity to East Rand Mall

Brakpan CBD Eastern • National retailers poised • Local labour force • Revival strategy to disinvest • Kwatsaduza • Limited recapitalisation of existing CBD assets • Gradually rising vacancy

Springs CBD Eastern • National retailer still • Local labour force • Maintenance represented in CBD • Kwatsaduza Strategy • Early signs of decay

Nigel CBD Eastern • National retailers still • Local labour force • Maintenance represented in CBD • Kwatsaduza strategy • Early signs of urban decay

Germiston CBD Southern • Declining number of • Local labour force • Revival strategy national retailers • Kathorus • Visible sign of urban decay • Limited recapitalization of existing CBD assets

Alberton CBD Southern • National retailers • Surrounding • Growth represented in CBD suburbs management • CBD attractiveness • Kathorus strategy augmented by Alberton City • Reinvestment trends in CBD

Boksburg CBD Southern • National retailers • Local labour force • Revival strategy reinvesting in • Kathorus decentralised nodes • Limited recapitalization of existing CBD assets • Weak market performance due to proximity to East Rand Mall

194 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 Name SDR Status Consumer market Strategy Kempton Park Northern • National retailers poised • Local labour force • Revival strategy CBD to disinvest • Tembisa • Limited recapitalization of existing CBD assets • Visible sign of urban decay

Edenvale CBD Northern • National retailers • Local labour force • Revival strategy represented in CBD, but • Surrounding some have relocated neighbourhoods • Limited recapitalization of existing CBD assets, although isolated instances of private sector reinvestment are visible • Limited market size

Bedfordview Northern • New investments visible • Local labour force • Maintenance • Good performance in spite • Local residents of strategy of small market size surrounding suburbs • Low vacancy (below 5%)

Primary Urban Core

Lakeside Mall, Eastern • National retailers • Benoni residents • Revival strategy Benoni reinvesting on CBD edge • Daveyton / Etwatwa (as part of CBD) • Limited reinvestment spill- over effect • Weak market performance due to proximity to East Rand Mall

East Rand Southern • Super-regional node • Ekurhuleni • Growth Mall node • Good performance and • Parts of management strong growth due to Mpumalanga strategy significant agglomeration province advantages and urban concentration economies • Inherent growth momentum

Eastgate Northern • Regional node • Western parts of • Growth • Good performance Ekurhuleni management • Inherent growth potential • Eastern suburbs of strategy Johannesburg

OCTOBER 2010 195 C4.1 Name SDR Status Consumer market Strategy Secondary Urban Core

Carnival City Eastern • An emerging urban core • Local residents • Growth Node, Brakpan • Market pressure for new • Surrounding towns management development strategy • Overlap with Benoni CBD, Brakpan CBD, Springs CBD and Lakeside Mall trade areas Other (mainly PDI areas and most likely to have retail components of between 3 500m2 up to 15 000m2 GLA)

Daveyton / Eastern • Existing retail centre • Daveyton / Etwatwa • Kick start Etwatwa • Limited nodal residents strategy development

Kwatsaduza Eastern • Limited formal retail • Kwatsaduza • Kick start (KwaThema) development strategy • Latent development potential

Kathorus Southern • Limited formal retail • Kathorus • Kick start (Tokhoza, development strategy Natalspruit Node) • Latent development potential

Kathorus Southern • Limited formal retail • Kathorus • Kick start (Tokhoza, development strategy Yende Node) • Latent development potential

Kathorus Southern • Limited formal retail • Kathorus • Kick start (Kathlehong, development strategy Zonkizizwe) • Latent development potential

Kathorus Southern • Limited formal retail • Kathorus • Kick start (Vosloorus, development strategy Ramakonopi Node) • Latent development potential

196 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 Within the context of a particular strategy, it is appropriate to provide an indication of the most appropriate format and size for retail development in a particular area, as will in all likelihood be dictated by market forces, and other important considerations pertaining to retail development. Speciﬁ c development guidelines are subsequently discussed in terms of the following subheadings:

1. Retail format and size. 2. Location guidelines. 3. Application evaluation guidelines. 4. Development facilitation guidelines. 5. Monitoring mechanism.

1. Retail format and size

Based on fi ndings of the net effective demand analysis and associated identifi cation of an effective market gap for each town in Ekurhuleni (Sections 5 to 9), short to medium term (5 to 10 year horizon) retail development prospects were identifi ed. Table 10.2 summarises these fi ndings retail format as well as recommended sizes for each town in Ekurhuleni.

Table 10.2: Ekurhuleni 5 to 10 year retail development prospects per town

Town Retail format / Centre type Size

Alberton Community 2 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 4 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Bedfordview Community 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 2 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2 OR Hypermarket 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 2 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Benoni Community 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Neighbourhood 4 centres of ±5 500m2

Boksburg Community 2 centre of ±20 000m2 Neighbourhood 4 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Brakpan Community 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 2 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2 OR Hypermarket 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 2 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

OCTOBER 2010 197 C4.1

Town Retail format / Centre type Size Daveyton / Community Local 1 centre of ±20 000 m2 Etwatwa Multiple smaller centres of 3 500m2+ each

Kwatsaduza Community Local 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Multiple smaller centres of 3 500m2+ each

Kathorus Community Local 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Multiple smaller centres of 3 500m2+ each

Edenvale Community 1 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 2 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Germiston Community 2 centre of ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 4 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Kempton Park Community 2 centre ±20 000m2 Local/Neighbourhood 4 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Nigel Neighbourhood 2 centres of ±6 000-8 000m2

Springs Community 1 centre ±20 000m2 Neighbourhood 2 centres ±6 000-8 000m2

Tembisa Community 1 centre of ±20 000 m2 Local Multiple smaller centres of 3 500m2+ each

The retail format and size represents the development prospects for each town in Ekurhuleni. As such, it reﬂ ects the most likely market response to emerging development opportunities in an area. Actual development may differ from these estimations. Monitoring of new developments and timeous updating of market trends is recommended.

2. Location guidelines

Even in the context of ample demand, a retail centre can still fail due to numerous location factors. Successful, market related shopping centre development is the product of a variety of factors. The following are some of the most important aspects that infl uence successful shopping centre development and over which the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality can exert and infl uence: • Accessibility; • Visibility/Exposure; • Complimentary surrounding activities; • Development trends; • Traffi c routes; and

198 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 • Consumer market proﬁ le.

Each of these factors is brieﬂ y discussed.

1. Accessibility The accessibility of a retail location to both the labour force as well as consumers is an important locational factor in the development of retail centres. Convenient ingress and egress from the premises is of paramount importance.

Pitfalls Lines of no access along prominent roads often force developers to provide access to the centre from a minor back road, which is undesirable.

2. Visibility / Exposure A shopping centre should be highly visible and accessible for potential customers. Shopping centres should be located in close proximity to an efﬁ cient road and transport network. Most new centres have to make provision for taxi facilities.

Pitfalls Although less than ideal, developers sometimes position a shopping centre with its back to a main road, to accommodate climatic aspects, e.g. direction of the sun.

3. Complimentary surrounding activities and development trends The development of a shopping centre often serves as catalyst for further nodal development. As such, positioning and future expansion possibilities should be sensitive to future development prospect, which may include high density residential, ofﬁ ces, other types of specialised trade facilities, e.g. automotive parks and road improvements.

Pitfalls ‘More’ does not necessarily imply duplication. Various retail centres in one node may, although on face value appearing to create severe duplication, be quite different in terms of tenant composition. As such, these centres create a mutually beneﬁ cial energy that strengthens the power of attraction of the node as a whole.

4. Traffi c routes In terms of property development literature endorsed by the SA Property Owner’s Association, shopping centres of a certain nature and size should ideally be located in close proximity to a particular type of road network. Improved traffi c fl ow patterns, coupled with high traffi c volumes, increase the gravitational forces of a shopping centre. The following location criteria with respect to traffi c routes are suggested.

OCTOBER 2010 199 C4.1 Table 10.3: Location of shopping centres with regards to trafﬁ c routes

Hierarchical level Locational criteria Regional shopping centres • Intersection of a freeway and major arterial; or • Close to a junction of a main road and a main traffic artery Community shopping centres • Junction of major arterials Neighbourhood shopping • Intersection of a main road and a collector centres road Local shopping centres • At a collector road in a residential area

Pitfalls Not only road hierarchy, but also the direction of traffi c fl ow has a bearing on successful retail development. Some centres perform better if located on the left hand side of the road for the afternoon peak, i.e. on the customer’s way home. Traffi c islands may completely nullify a centre’s viability if located on the wrong side of the road.

5. Consumer market profi le Retail demand is a derived demand, which means that the nature of the consumer dictates the size and apportionment of new retail fl oor space. Market potential is a function of household income and expenditure patterns, as well as consumer preferences. Hence, the highest prevalence of retail fl oor space in middle and higher income suburbs.

Pitfalls High aggregate community income does not necessarily imply correspondingly large shopping centres. High and low income consumers spend differently. High income households spend more on luxury items, whereas low income households spend more on necessities. Expenditure patterns, in turn, impact on centre size and tenant composition.

6. Competitors Competition plays an important role in the location of a retail facility. An important consideration in retailing is that facilities of the same order size compete in the same market and vice-versa; i.e. regional malls and neighbourhood shopping centres do not compete directly for market share. A thorough competitor proﬁ le is a prerequisite for any new retail development.

Pitfalls A competitor profi le does not merely include the supply of retail fl oor space. It includes quantitative as well as qualitative factors, in particular tenant composition, quality and age of development, parking confi guration, estimated sales par annum and impact on competitor’s sales.

200 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1

3. Application evaluation guidelines

The development prospects of the various towns were conducted on a macro level. Applications for new developments should, however, also be assessed on a focused micro level. This implies that each application submitted should be evaluated in terms of certain criteria. The following are proposed as possible minimum guidelines in terms of which new development applications should be assessed.

1. Specialist market research report Each development application should be accompanied by a specialist market research report. A list of prospective tenants is not sufﬁ cient, as it may purely point to supply driven development.

2. Location The location of the proposed development needs to be evaluated in terms of the above mentioned location guidelines, specifi cally traffi c fl ow and accessibility. The application furthermore needs to be in line with the Spatial Development Framework and must take due cognisance of nodal development implications.

3. Size and composition In order for a retail development to be successful, it must resemble a clear relationship between size and tenant composition. Furthermore, the number of parking bays demanded in ﬁ rst economy areas is in line with the criterion of 6 bays per 100m2 retail GLA. This criterion is inappropriate for second economy areas, where vehicle ownership is in the order of 1 vehicle per household. Excess space may be utilised creatively to accommodate informal trade in a structured, well managed fashion that generates revenue for the investor. A developer should clearly indicate the type of centre and the market in which it will compete.

4. Design layout and appearance The design layout and appearance of a shopping centre should be aligned with local consumer market preferences. Orientation with regard to surrounding developments should be considered carefully. Internal road layout, centre design and tenant positioning should testify to a well thought through development concept.

4. Development facilitation guidelines

In spite of mind boggling large net effective demand ﬁ gures, second economy areas are surprisingly ill supplied with formal retail facilities. A critical consideration in second economy areas is to concentrate the largest possible number of ‘feet’ at a select few nodes. Experience has shown that private sectors investment will follow public sector investment (this notion is afﬁ rmed in the World Bank Development Report).

OCTOBER 2010 201 C4.1 Based on the concept of an urban core in a second economy area, speciﬁ c urban economic requirements and buildings block have been identiﬁ ed to contribute to successful development. These aspects are subsequently outlined in terms of the following subheadings: • Economic principles. • Building blocks of a secondary urban core. • Phasing of a secondary urban core. • Leverage mechanisms.

1. Economic principles

The following economic principles should guide and inform nodal development in second economy areas (also relevant to other areas).

Table 10.4: Economic principles for nodal development in second economy areas Principle Components Description

Urban Agglomeration Agglomeration advantages provide an area concentration advantages with the economic pull factors required in economies order to attract new businesses and investment to a specific area. It also provides a support base for new economic activities.

Sustainability Sustainability is vitally important in terms of economic, social as well as environmental impacts. Accurate assessment of this principle prior to the implementation of any project must be undertaken to limit the irresponsible application of resources

Access and Development should enjoy high levels of exposure accessibility and exposure in order to attract the necessary consumer volumes and support (income and expenditure) to make it sustainable over the short and long term.

Multi-functionality Economic development should be conduced in way that supports multi- functionality. Multi-functionality increases the sustainability of a development. The economic activity composition should be developed in order to be multi-functional.

202 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 Principle Components Description Tax base Local government should invest in the development in order to establish private sector confidence and generate additional income for the local municipality, by means of rates and taxes.

Secure investment, The urban environment should be shopping and developed that provides a secure haven socializing for investment, shopping and socializing. environment A secure 24-hour environment should be created in which the community can work, shop and stay.

Market based Capital core - Development within marginalized areas in concept public investment general requires a relatively large public investment component required to leverage private investment. The capital core of the urban cores should be viewed as the area of public investment. This includes the development of engineering services and roads. It can also include some form of community facilities.

Private sector Attraction of investment from outside the investment marginalized areas is vitally important as this implies that funds are injected into the local economy. This also implies efforts to increase the levels of local investment/equity as well as locally generated capita (i.e. reducing leakage factors).

Integrated Integration must be promoted between new development economic development and existing node on the one side and between the different land uses of the urban core itself. Integration is crucial in order to develop a high intensity economic activity area.

Economic Needs based Public consultation represents an important empowerment development determinant for successful development framework especially within lower income areas. By means of the public consultation process community needs and preferences are identified. This will contribute to the development and upliftment of the communities.

OCTOBER 2010 203 C4.1 2. Building blocks of a secondary urban core

The building blocks of an urban core are determined by the context in which it is developed. The urban form may differ from one context to another. However, the main structuring elements that deﬁ ne the function of the urban core are similar and include: • Public spaces that are not exclusive to class or income (example, markets, open spaces, parks, recreation facilities); • Connections that are not exclusive to class or income (pedestrian, private and public vehicles); • Public sector facilities and institutions that provide crucial amenity value; and • Private enterprises that are scaled to the expenditure needs of the local population.

The following paragraphs provide an indication of the speciﬁ c type of activities to be included as building blocks under the various elements of an urban core, in second economy areas.

Public Spaces

Should include effective public open space in the form of parks, recreational facilities or market areas.

Public sector facilities

Community facilities - Based on experience community facilities are able to attract relatively large numbers of people to a speciﬁ c area. Community facilities form an important anchor activity in second economy areas.

Housing -There is a demand for quality housing within second economy areas. Social housing represents a perfect solution for offering affordable quality housing within these areas. Social housing also provides the opportunity of increasing the density of these urban cores, increasing population thresholds, inducing higher levels of buying power and support.

Connections

Transport facilities - Due to the location of these urban cores, it is important to develop an effective inter-modal facility, with an effective taxi facility supporting the function of the railway station. It is important that the taxi facility should be suitable to the high volumes of taxis and it should promote effective vehicular movement through the facility. The positioning of the multi nodal facilities is key to unlocking the potential of the area, and is viewed as anchor tenants for urban core development.

Private sector facilities

204 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 Commercial activities - The consumer demands of the target market (transient trade and local community) indicated that the niche market of these urban cores should predominantly be convenience orientated, supported by some personal care and ﬁ nancial services.

Structured Informal trade - Informal trade fulﬁ lls an important role within the second economy. Due to high levels of unemployment and the lack of job opportunities within these areas, informal trade forms an important source of employment.

Economic empowerment does not form an element of urban core, but rather an important development objective. The development of urban cores should empower the communities by means of black economic empowerment and SMME development. There is a need to incorporate a local business support centre that would provide facilities and assistance to emerging entrepreneurs and provide basic adult training.

The elements are further subdivided into speciﬁ c type of facilities and addressed according to whether it is public or private sector related.

Table 10.5: Types of facilities

Public sector Private sector • Social housing • Convenience retail • Community Centre/hall • Restaurants and taverns • Clinic • Personal services • Library • Financial services • Pension Pay Point • Service industries • Police station • Internet café • Post office • Traders market • Local Business Support Centre • Business hive • Social housing • Taxi Ranks

Each of these facilities requires a minimum threshold in order to be sustainable. The minimum thresholds for the building blocks of urban cores are indicated by the following development parameters.

OCTOBER 2010 205 C4.1 Table 10.6: Minimum threshold parameters

Activity Parameter Retail 0.2m2/capita Offices 0.1m2/capita Community facilities • Clinic • 5000 people (20 min walking distance) • Library • 10 000 people (30 min walking distance) • Community centre • 22 000 people (30 min walking distance) • Post office • 11 000 people (40 min walking distance) • Police station • 25 000 people (30 min walking distance) Residential 750 units per annum (7 500 units over next 10 years)

Implications • These development parameters determine the composition of urban cores in various locations, based on population and income thresholds. • The development parameters provide and indication of the number of units that can be developed per annum, as well as, a rough approximation of commercial ﬂ oor space that could be supported by the target market. Actual supply will depend on the local community proﬁ le.

Preceding paragraphs provided an overview of the building blocks of an urban core. Subsequent paragraphs provide a discussion on the development process and phasing of an urban core in a second economy market.

3. Phasing of a secondary urban core

Due to the higher perceived investment risks associated with second economy areas, the private sector is generally cautious in investing in these areas. There is therefore a need for the public sector to provide the necessary confi dence indicators in order to reduce risk and indicate its commitment to the area. To ensure a positive investment climate, the urban core should be developed in phases, driven by public sector investment fi rst, with private sector response. An urban core should thus be developed in an incremental way, due to the fact that the consumer base of the development should fi rst be attracted and then extended over time.

Consumer volumes are naturally attracted to the areas, due to the presence of transport facilities and public service infrastructure. One of the ﬁ rst development components of the urban core should be in the form of an inter-modal facility, catering for various modes of transport, ranging from taxis to busses to private vehicles and / or a local railway station (refer to Diagram 10.1).

206 OCTOBER 2010 C4.1 Diagram 10.1: Development of the secondary urban core

Railway Hub (immediate): - Adequate, well positioned multi- modal facilities - Infrastructure investment Inner core (3-10 years): Outer core - Social facility (3-5 years): investment High density - Retail investment response residential - Office investment response

The development of urban cores is further addressed in terms of an inner and outer core. The inner core predominantly consists of a mixture of public and privately owned social and economic activities.

The outer core predominantly focus on the provision of higher density social housing, this strengthens the population thresholds required to sustain the facilities of the inner core.

Although the railway station extends the area of inﬂ uence of the urban cores, 60% of its support originates from the primary market, represented by households within the surrounding area. The remaining 40% of support originates from the secondary market representing commuters that travel further distances to reach the station.

Diagram 10.2 indicates the phasing of the development of an urban core, in terms of various investments over time.

Diagram 10.2: Phasing of an urban core development Coordinated / incremental Public / Private investment

Social Housing Social Housing Public Sector Investment Social Financial Housing Services Social Personal Housing Services Social Restaurants & Taverns Housing Convenience Retail Centre Library / LBSC Clinic

Community Centre Intermodal

1t 2t 3t 4t 5t 6t 7t 8t xt Time

OCTOBER 2010 207 C4.1 Note: the public sector investment should form the anchor of the urban core development. Various public facilities should be developed ﬁ rst, until necessary consumer volumes can be attracted. Then private investors become involved, inducing a coordinated public-private investment approach.

The public sector activities should be developed ﬁ rst, including the inter-modal facility, followed by a range of community facilities. It is imperative to ensure that public investment is phased carefully in order to ensure that the required thresholds are available to sustain the facilities.

Once the public sector facilities have been established and the required volume of customers (‘feet’) attracted to the area, private sector investment can be lured. A concerted, incremental approach of private/public investment should be followed. Ideally, it should include the provision of social housing, followed by a range of economic activities, commencing with the retail and recreational / leisure component, supported by personal services and ﬁ nancial services.

To fast track urban core development, local government may consider the following leverage mechanisms at its disposal.

4. Leverage mechanisms

The following mechanisms are proposed to leverage investment and development in second economy urban cores.

Tax Incentives Local authorities in the United States frequently use reduced rates as an incentive to encourage investment in commerce and industry. South African local authorities are currently prevented from utilising these types of concessions. However, there are a number of national incentives provided for industries located within regions designated as Spatial Development Initiatives (SDI), Industrial Development Zones (IDZ) and other special districts.

Infrastructure Infrastructure concessions often involve the provision of serviced industrial and commercial sites or special efforts to develop infrastructure and services in selected commercial areas in response to the needs of prospective investors. The implications of these infrastructure concessions are that the investor will be attracted, if the local authority is ﬂ exible and sensitive in amending its development/delivery schedule to accommodate the investors’ needs.

Land and Buildings An incentive package of this type may involve the sale, transfer or rental of land, buildings or other facilities owned by the local authority on concessionary terms in

208 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C4.1 order to attract investment. This further implies assistance by the local authority in order to obtain premises. However, if the local authorities intends making some if its own assets available, they must ensure that they are in compliance with national and provincial legislation on the disposal of public assets.

Regulatory Reform These concessions involve special efforts by the local authority to reduce constraining regulation and zoning that may stand in the way of potential business development. This aspect implies an accurate and speedy system to supply information relating to, and the approval of potential investment.

Finance Some international cities provide ﬁ nancial assistance in the form of special grants, access to start-up capital, bridging ﬁ nance and credit, loan guarantees or the underwriting of risks. However, South African local authorities are currently prohibited from undertaking in these activities.

Approval Process One of the most basic incentives involves facilitating prompt decisions such as the approval of building plans and rezoning applications. Prospective investors will lose interest if local authorities take too long to approve plans and applications. The establishment of a one-stop centre could facilitate this process more efﬁ ciently.

5. Retail format and size

To ensure effective implementation of the above mentioned guidelines, Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality needs to implement a monitoring mechanism that tracks new development and consumer market shifts. In this respect it is proposed that: • A register be developed to record new retail development in each town; and • This Regional Retail Report is updated annually.

10.5 Synthesis

Perhaps the most important notion communicated in this chapter, has been the fact that public sector investment shapes the course of development. This is particularly true for the second economy areas in Ekurhuleni where special measures will be required to entice the private sector to develop. Whether it is in a ﬁ rst economy or second economy area, development of a healthy, sustainable and balanced retail sector will hinge on the public sector forging a strong alliance with the private sector. It is in this approach that lies the key to establishing harmony between consumer demand and demand lead growth in retail supply.

OCTOBER 2010 209 C4.2 C1 C4.2: STRATEGY FOR THE EKURHULENI CORE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT TRIANGLE

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality (EMM) was constituted from nine former local authority areas. The EMM therefore comprises, amongst others, nine individual Central Business Districts, a variety of mining activities along an east-west mining belt, a range of industrial and commercial areas, a variety of residential areas of varying density and income groups, as well as agricultural holdings and even extensive rural areas.

This newly established institutional area was never in the past planned as a single functional unit as there were nine different local authority structures in place - each only focusing on its own interests. With the establishment of the EMM it is now necessary to start creating an identity for this metropolitan area.

All the other metropolitan areas in South Africa developed around a primary core area which gives identity to these centres, nationally and even internationally. Examples of this are the Cape Town CBD, Nelson Mandela (Port Elizabeth CBD), Durban, Johannesburg Inner City and Tshwane (Pretoria CBD). Over time these metropolitan areas have developed a multinodal structure, but the core area still remains dominant and lends character to these areas.

The EMM is different in the sense that it currently has a multi-nodal structure, comprising the nine CBDs of the formal local authorities as well as other decentralised nodes, such as East Rand Mall or Bedfordview. The EMM however lacks a primary core which gives character and identity to the new metropolis.

In terms of its long term vision and objectives it is essential that the EMM creates a unique identity which will be nationally and internationally acknowledged. It is important that whichever area is selected should be geographically well located in the context of Ekurhuleni, but it should also be politically acceptable and it should hold the potential to develop into a core area containing and reﬂ ecting the social and economic character of the area in future.

With this in mind the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework of the EMM indicated conceptually a triangular area broadly between the CBDs of Kempton Park, Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni as being the potential optimum location for such future core economic focus area.

This triangular area is graphically illustrated on Figure 1 from the Spatial Development Framework. The area holds many positive elements which could contribute signiﬁ cantly towards the future development of this core area amongst others, the following: • Johannesburg International Airport (JIA); • Kempton Park, Germiston, Boksburg and Benoni CBDs;

210 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C4.2 • Industrial areas such as Spartan, Isando, Elandsfontein, Jetpark, Germiston and Anderbolt; • Vacant pockets of land associated with historic mining activities especially towards the south; • Medium and high density residential areas catering for a wide range of income groups; • Pockets of land which are not densely developed at this stage (agricultural holdings) on which certain development trends are currently taking place; • A railway network which links towards Mpumalanga Province and Mozambique in the east, towards KwaZulu Natal Province in the south and towards Tshwane and Zimbabwe in the north; • The Gautrain Blue IQ project which also links into this area; and • The JIA and IDZ Blue IQ projects.

In essence this area thus holds a wide range of existing strong economic activities including airport related activities like commerce and warehousing, industrial activity, residential and a variety of retail activities and facilities. Apart from the above there is also vacant land available which could be utilised for the further strengthening of economic and institutional activities in the area, and there is land available to cater for future low income and disadvantaged communities in this area.

The primary objective of this study is thus to compile an Integrated Local Spatial Development Framework and Implementation Programme to guide the EMM in terms of the future development of this area. This plan should speciﬁ cally give attention to all land use categories ranging from low cost housing up to industrial, commercial, retail and institutional development.

The project was divided into a few distinct phases. The ﬁ rst phase comprised a Situational Analysis during which the project team collected multi disciplinary information on existing and planned facilities, infrastructure and services for the area. From this phase certain conclusions were drawn regarding the major formgiving elements that may impact on the development proposals to be formulated for the area.

The next step was the formulation of Development Objectives relating to the formgiving elements identiﬁ ed in the Situational Analysis, and then the formulation of a Land Use Budget for the broader area based on an economic land use model. With the Land Use Budget completed the project team formulated spatial proposals pertaining to the optimum location for each land use, or land use concept, and indicated how a transportation network should link these together (Spatial Development Framework).

Once the Spatial Development Framework had been completed, the project team formulated an Implementation Strategy and a Programme for the implementation of projects.

OCTOBER 2010 211 C4.2 C1 IMPLEMENTATION PRIORITIES

Following from the Spatial Development Framework and the proposals emanating it is clear that the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality should focus on the following top priority aspects in order to ensure the optimum development of the Core Area over the next ten to twenty years: • Gautrain construction and management of land use development in Rhodesfi eld to facilitate the proposed land uses. Of special importance is the “Trade Center” that could be established on top of the Rhodesfi eld Gautrain station and which could in future accommodate the Ekurhuleni Municipality Executive structures; • The successful development of the Pomona/R21 corridor. The provision of engineering services to accommodate development in this area is of strategic signifi cance; • Obtain clarity on whether the area immediately to the east of Bonaero Park, the IDZ and Park Haven should be utilised for mixed use or for residential development; • Compile design and development guidelines for the Bartlett-Bardene area to enhance the aesthetic quality of the area - especially the areas abutting the N12 freeway; • Investigate the possibility to declare the Bartlett area north of N12 as an industrial park area; • Pre-actively plan for the increased traffi c volumes once the Bartlett-Bardene- Beyerspark developments materialise; • Investigate ways to construct part of routes PWV13/14 in order to unlock development potential of the mining belt and to functionally link Germiston CBD which holds the institutional seat of the Ekurhuleni Metro, with the JIA precinct; and • Enter into discussions with the mining houses and Department of Housing to assess the possibility of formalising the informal settlements in the mining belt by way of Transit Orientated Subsidised Housing.

212 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C4.2 The table below gives a summary of the priority proposed projects/initiatives as well as the time scale at which it needs to be done.

CORE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT TRIANGLE: PRIORITY PROJECTS AND INITIATIVES Short Med Long Term Term Term A Roads and Transportation 1 R21 Corridor: Planning of Supporting Road Network 2 Gladiator Bridge between Rhodesfield and JIA 3 Upgrading of Voortrekker Road Interchange 4 Construction of Pomona Road Interchange 5 Upgrading of Atlas Road 6 Planning of Supporting Road Network for PWV15 7 Construction of PWV15 8 Construction of K90 North and South 9 Upgrading of Jones Street link: JIA-Isando Road 10 Upgrading of Main Reef Road 11 Phased construction of PWV13 and PWV14 12 Construction of Gautrain 13 Upgrading of Beyerspark-East Rand Mall road network B Land Use Planning and Management 14 Land Use Planning for R21 Corridor 15 JIA SDF 16 Aero City SDF (Rhodesfield and CBD) 17 Isando/Spartan SDF 18 JIA-East Rand Mall Corridor 19 North Rand Road 20 Beyers Park SDF 21 Bonaero Park and Extensions SDF 22 Pomona/Bredell SDF 23 Central Mining Belt SDF and Housing Strategy (TOD) 24 JIA IDZ C Urban Renewal and Design 25 Kempton Park CBD (Tax Incentive Programme) 26 Germiston CBD (Tax Incentive Programme) 27 Main Reef Road Urban Renewal 28 Bartlett-Bardene Urban Design Guidelines D Environmental Management 29 Core Triangle Regional Open Space System and Management Framework

From the table above it is evident that about 29 priority projects or initiatives associated with the development of the Core Economic Development Triangle have been identiﬁ ed. About 13 of the projects relate to roads and transportation. The planning of a supporting road network for the R21 corridor is a short term priority and has already commenced. The Gladiator Bridge link between Rhodesﬁ eld and JIA has long been

OCTOBER 2010 213 C4.2 C1 identiﬁ ed as a priority but it is proposed that this initiative should be taken forward in the medium term. Another pressing issue is the upgrading of the Voortrekker Road interchange to give proper access to the Kempton CBD as well as JIA. This is a short term priority to be dealt with. The construction of the Pomona Road interchange is already underway as part of the Blue IQ initiative and the upgrading of Atlas Road has been completed.

The planning of a supporting road network to unlock the development potential around future road PWV15 to the east of JIA also needs to be given serious attention in the short term before the land use changes materialise in the area. The eventual construction of PWV15 is at this stage seen as a long term initiative.

The construction of K90 north and south will be closely linked to the development of the midﬁ eld terminal initiative of JIA and it is foreseen that this might materialise in the medium term. The upgrading of Jones Street link between JIA and Isando is also identiﬁ ed as a medium term priority.

To the south of JIA one of the priorities is the upgrading of Main Reef Road which is the main eastwest link between the various CBDs of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area. Larges cale urban decay occurs in the vicinity of this road and it needs some serious attention in terms of upgrading. The phased construction of PWV13 and 14 (or parts thereof) also needs to be considered seriously. Negotiations between the metropolitan authority, Gautrans and the National Department of Transport need to commence as soon as possible in this regard as these two roots can play a signiﬁ cant role towards the development of the mining belt and linking Germiston to the JIA precinct.

The construction of Gautrain is a reality and it will be completed in the next ﬁ ve years.

The upgrading of the Beyerspark-East Rand Mall road network also needs to be considered seriously in the short to medium term as levels of congestion currently hampers development of this area to the south of JIA.

As far as land use planning and management is concerned the top priority at this stage should be the planning of land uses around the R21 corridor. This project is closely linked with Project Number 1 under Road and Transportation. As indicated on the table there is a wide range of local spatial development frameworks that have been compiled during the past four to ﬁ ve years and all these plans are relevant in the context of the Core Economic Development Triangle.

The land use planning for the area to the east of JIA (Bonaero Park and Extensions and even areas like Parkhaven) needs to be reconsidered in order to make provision for future mixed use as discussed in previous sections of this document. The revision of this plan (Project 21) might be a short term priority as far as land use planning is concerned.

214 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C4.2 Project 23 relates to the central mining belt SDF and associated housing strategy. The Provincial Department of Housing recently launched a project to deal with the development of the mining belt and the tidying up of the informal developments that have taken place in this area. This project will be a joint venture between the Ekurhuleni Metro and the Provincial Department of Housing and the draft results should be ready by June 2005. The JIA IDZ has been completed (Project 24).

As far as Urban Renewal and Urban Design is concerned the two CBDs of Kempton Park and Germiston respectively have already been incorporated into the National Government Tax Incentive Programme and the upgrading of these two CBDs by way of the Tax Incentive scheme will proceed shortly.

From the Ekurhuleni Urban Renewal Project the upgrading of the areas around Main Reef Road was identiﬁ ed as a very high priority. This project (Project 27) is closely linked toP roject 23 (Central Mining Belt SDF and Housing Strategy) as well as Project 10 which deals with the upgrading of Main Reef Road itself. This is a short term high priority project.

Another important project relating to Urban Renewal is the formulation of proper urban design guidelines for the development of the Bartlett-Bardene area to the south of JIAe specially the parts around the N12 freeway.

As far as environmental management is concerned a top priority is the design of a regional open space system and management framework for the Core Triangle area. It is importantt hat a regional open space system be put in place in this area in order to serve as formgiving element around which land use development will take place in future.

From the above it is evident that there is already a wide range of activities underway in the Core Development Triangle. With a little support from the EMM by way of strategic planning and facilitation of processes the successful development of this area is almost a reality.

OCTOBER 2010 215 C4.3 C1 C4.3: EKURHULENI DEVELOPMENT OF CORRIDORS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1. BACKGROUND

The Development of Corridors Study is one of the projects emanating from the Metropolitan Spatial Development Framework (MSDF). The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality (EMM) indicated to the Project Team1 conducting the Corridor Study that all possible corridors identiﬁ ed in the MSDF and Regional SDF’s should be incorporated, including the R21, N12, N17, N3 and the Germiston - Daveyton corridors.

2. OBJECTIVES

Typical of other South African cities, the EMM metropolitan area grew according to characteristics of segregation and fragmentation that need to be addressed in order to provide it with the global competitive mobility capacity. In accordance with accepted best practice, the objectives to be achieved by this corridor study are: • Restructure, reinvigorate and integrate fragmented, segregated, dysfunctional and dualistic cities; • Unlock new economies for the poorest communities (“townships”); • Reduce the public transport subsidy bill; • Ensure a more dynamic choice generating and sustainable urban form; and • Creation of new investment in the region corridor area.

In addition, the Terms of Reference deﬁ ned the following objectives for the study: • To provide guidelines for the development of the transport corridors in terms of land uses to be encouraged; • To develop a plan for supporting transportation routes along the corridors; • To develop a prioritisation plan for the development of existing corridors in the Ekurhuleni metropolitan area; • To incorporate the Germiston-Daveyton Corridor study and other corridor studies in the Ekurhuleni metropolitan area; and • To provide an implementation plan for development of the corridors.

3. METHODOLOGY

The Project Team believes that relevant stakeholders, who are either actively involved in the study areas or whose interests may be affected by the implementation of the proposed strategies, should be engaged (through existing forums and bilateral meetings) and their needs and expectations addressed.

216 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C4.3 Interaction with stakeholders has been ongoing throughout the project’s progress.

The Project Team comprises: Stewart Scott International; Matingi and Associates; Bohlweki Environmental; Sigodi Marah Martin (Pty) Ltd; and Urban-Econ.

The following ﬂ ow diagram indicates the methodology followed be the Project Team.

Situational Analysis

Guidelines

Criteria for Corridor Prioritisation

Corridor 1 Corridor 2 Stakeholder Participation Development Development Plan Plan

Funding and Funding and Implementation Implementation Plan Plan

Initially a Situational Analysis or status quo analysis was conducted to achieve an integrated understanding of the planning environment and covered areas such as land use, transport, socio-economic aspects, environmental and administrative aspects. The Situational Analyses provided a comprehensive framework with which to identify seven potential corridors, to defi ne them spatially and to establish their characteristics. This, coupled with local and international theory on corridor development, equipped the Project Team to defi ne criteria for the prioritisation of the seven identifi ed corridors. Broadly, the criteria fell into four categories, namely: land-use, economic, transport and environmental.

OCTOBER 2010 217 C4.3 C1 The seven identiﬁ ed corridors were then rated against the established criteria with some criteria carrying different weightings than others. The weighting procedure insured that suitable importance was placed on aspects such as ensuring adequate opportunities for the integration of previously disadvantaged areas into the urban fabric. The Germiston / Daveyton and the Boksburg / Katlorus corridors scored the highest of the seven identiﬁ ed corridors when the weighting and rating procedure was applied.

A development corridor at metropolitan level can be viewed as a linear zone or area (usually between 1 and 2 km wide) surrounding a major mobility and activity spine and containing high concentrations of transport, land-uses and densities. The corridor is situated in such as way as to ensure the enhancement of living standard levels in the area whilst also maximising the mobility between nodes in the corridor, as well as towards nodes outside the corridor.

Development corridors can then be seen as a tool for intervention that aims to improve and structure (through access and visibility needs) the way in which activities locate themselves across the planning surface.

In essence, a development corridor is a package of certain structuring elements: • A distinct road hierarchy; • Mobility spines; • Activity spines; • Urban nodes or activity centres; • An open space system; and • Urban edges and interface.

A strategic conceptual development framework was developed for each of the two corridors to guide and inform their future development. The report then turns to each of the corridors and covers them in more detail covering the following: • The inﬂ uential area of demarcation of the corridor; and • Development status covering current and future investment projects, private sector development; corridor needs; an opportunity scan; main challenges in the corridor; existing corridor elements and activity spines; transport, environmental and socio- economic considerations.

Following the strategic conceptual framework, a Spatial Development Framework (SDF) for each of the corridors is developed. This contains speciﬁ c development proposals such as: • Areas for mixed land uses; • Promotion of residential inﬁ ll development; and • Promotion of commercial and industrial developments.

218 OCTOBER 2010 C1 C4.3 Flowing from the Spatial Development Framework the document turns to the Development and Implementation Plan and includes such aspects as: • Investment promotion; • Industrial revitalisation; • CBD regeneration; • Road and rail infrastructure expansion; • Taxi ranks and multi-modal facilities; and • The identiﬁ cation of selected catalytic projects.

Finally, a funding and action plan is presented for both high priority corridors.

4. STUDY OUTCOMES

The following section sets the corridors in their metropolitan context and then the role and function of each of the corridors is covered.

Setting the Corridors in the Metropolitan Context Although many of the principles of corridor development can be applied on all scales, this study concerns itself with corridor development at metropolitan level. It is important to see metropolitan corridors in terms of their regional (city-wide) context and not in isolation. Metropolitan development corridors form an integral part of the wider spatial development perspective and must be integrated with other spatial development initiatives. The Ekurhuleni Corridors are thus regarded as an integral part of the greater Ekurhuleni spatial planning framework and forms part of various functional networks (eg, economic, physical, social, etc.).

The identifi ed development corridors have an important role to fulfi l in the metropolitan area in terms of: • Fostering an intra-regional linkage between all parts of the metropolitan area, and in particular, between historical disadvantaged, economically isolated areas, and areas of economic and employment activity and growth; • Fostering an inter-regional linkage between the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan area and the City of Johannesburg, the City of Tshwane, the Mpumalanga Province, as well as the Sedibeng District; and • Offer a more attractive and viable alternatives for investment and re-investment in businesses and infrastructure on pockets of land that is currently under developed and pose opportunities for e.g. infi ll development.

Only through integration and co-ordination with wider spatial planning initiatives in Ekurhuleni and Gauteng, can the corridor vision become a reality. Other vital issues that must be taken cognisance of in the initiative are:

OCTOBER 2010 219 C4.3 C1 • The demarcation and implementation of development corridors in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipal area is considered a large intervention in the area’s economy. The extent of certain economic and other forces that are working in the area must be acknowledged; • The solution to low income, unemployment and poverty in parts of the metropolitan area are more complex than to just provide jobs in closer proximity to suburbs of high unemployment. The following points should be addressed: • The skills required by new industries and developments need to match the skills in the areas of unemployment, which are generally quite low in areas such as Khatorus and Daveyton/Etwatwa; • Workers with moderate skills are not as bound to employment close to home and may be more ﬂ exible to seek employment elsewhere in the metropolitan area; and • Job retention is as important as job creation. • Before the implementation of the corridors, certainty must be obtained among all those involved of what the expected beneﬁ ts will be; and • The implementation of Development Corridors and the attraction of investment to this area must be aligned and integrated with the development of the Core Economic Triangle Area and the planning framework envisaged for this area.

Each of these initiatives must establish a niche market and focus with clear investment targets and economic roles.

THE CORRIDORS

The Tembisa-Kempton Park-Boksburg-Germiston-Katlorus Corridor

Vision The Corridor will be an integrated, vibrant, sustainable and unique development corridor that will facilitate job creation, investment and community development in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipal Area.

Role/theme of corridor The future role of the corridor is largely seen as being an activity corridor that will create a vital north-south development link in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipal Area, where higher density development and concentration of economic activity will contribute to a more favourable and market-driven investment environment for businesses and local communities. This corridor will create opportunity for economic development on land is currently under-utilised (without damaging the environmentalsensitive areas) and the more efﬁ cient use of available infrastructure. Envisaged landuses include mixed development, residential, industrial, aviation and transportorientated development and

220 OCTOBER 2010 C4.3 tourism.

The Germiston / Daveyton Corridor

Vision To promote the efﬁ cient linkage of the Eastern portions to the rest of the Metropolis, allowing residents of the eastern areas to beneﬁ t from economic opportunities and development in the rest of the EMM and to address the declining mining activities in the area.

Role/theme of corridor This Corridor extends from Germiston traversing Boksburg and Benoni Local Council areas as far East as Daveyton and Etwatwa on the Mpumalanga border. The main mobility spine of this Corridor is the N12 highway and the railway line that runs parallel to it. The length of the Corridor is approximately 35 kilometres from Germiston to Etwatwa.

There is an important linkage of this Corridor to the main labour and economic pools of the city and to the Johannesburg CBD. Residents in areas such as Kathlehong, Vosloorus and Tsakane are functionally linked to the Daveyton / Germiston Corridor, as this is where an important amount of the job opportunities are located.

The N17 runs from Alberton in the west to Springs in the east. Although it falls outside the primary corridor, it is an important mobility spine serving the corridor and the main link between Springs, Boksburg, Germiston and the southern areas of Johannesburg. The trafﬁ c of this freeway is much lower than the trafﬁ c volume of the N12 and is to a large degree under utilised. The fact that this is a toll road may contribute to this underutilisation.

5. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

The Development of Corridors study has identiﬁ ed various interventions / tools that the municipality should consider, in order to implement the corridor concept. It is important to note that the corridors will NOT develop in the short term and will need time and effort from the different levels of government, and various stakeholders in order for them to develop into mature development corridors. The corner stone of their development are the following.

Land Use • The corridors comprise a combination between activity corridors, mobility corridors and special functional corridor (e.g. for the aviation industry). As such it will see the promotion and establishment of a variety and mixture of land uses along the main spines and streets. The location of signiﬁ cant land-uses on a provincial and metropolitan scale should, however, be promoted to ensure integrated corridor

OCTOBER 2010 221 C4.3 development and the generation of activities along the routes. • Many of the identifi ed corridors still offer opportunities for Infi ll development of vacant land, which will contribute to the densifi cation of activities. • Densifi cation of existing land use activities along the corridors is one of the main development objectives for effective corridor development. This will ensure that available infrastructure and services can be used effi ciently. However, the quality of service provision must not be jeopardised.

Economic • The two indicated high-priority corridors will play a crucial role in functionally linking the northern/southern and eastern/western parts of the Ekurhuleni metropolis. This will contribute signifi cantly to the economic integration and balanced growth of the areas that are now being hampered by an underdeveloped local economy. • The issues of employment creation and poverty eradication are two of the most crucial objectives that must guide and motivate corridor development. In this sense, the corridors should be seen as an economic tool to provide local communities with suffi cient access to economic and physical resources by promoting directed business investment, an effi cient and cost-effective transport system, access to services and infrastructure and a higher quality of life. • The development of the corridors should, however, go hand-in-hand with a broader economic development and investment promotion plan. This strategy should focus on how to integrated the various initiatives in the area without depleting economic and fi nancial resources or energy. In this sense, it is important to promote private- sector driven investment in areas that provide such opportunities, while public-sector have the opportunity to provide strategic interventions in areas that are currently not seen as favourable areas for investment. The IDP and SDF processes, as well as the EMM LED Department and Gauteng Provincial Government’s economic and industrial strategies are crucial tools that ought to be used. • Benefi ts to local communities should receive top priority. It will only be through the generation of additional disposable income and access to services and resources that local communities will really benefi t from the initiative. • Strong management and the dedication and commitment of political and other resources need to be promoted to ensure that the corridors are implemented successfully. Many examples nationally and internationally have failed due to the lack of ongoing support and planning.

Transport • Implementation or upgrading of a public mass transport system that respects human diversity and attends the necessities of the poor while supporting the social- economic growth (improvement of the commercial and labour market efﬁ ciency) of the main corridors of the city. • Identiﬁ cation of the main critical business nucleus and inclusion of them into the

222 OCTOBER 2010 C4.3 design of a network that satisfi es the mobility needs of daily commuters. • Integration and interaction of the different transport modes while taking advantage of their strengths according to the transport necessity. In addition to this, transportation facilities should be designed according to the land use of the corridors land use (stations, frequency, capacity, etc.). • Private vehicles unfairly take up a disproportionate share of the available and scarce transport resources of most cities, to the detriment of the quality of life and environment for the remaining citizens, the majority who are unable to afford private vehicles. Individual mobility should be guarantied by governmental authorities without damaging ecological and social conditions. • The Ekurhuleni transportation system, both public and private, requires changes that will support the wide population and vehicle growth expected for the next future of this city under development. These changes should focus on improving the quality of life of all citizens, by enhancing their ability to contribute to, and benefi t from, the economic growth of the corridors. • Trains reduce road congestion and result very positive as a Public Transport System for large cities and for the people that lives in the periphery (often the poorer). For the particular case of the two prioritised corridors of the EMM, the already existent rail facilities should be intervened and their benefi ts capitalized as an important part of their development. • The transportation facilities of the corridors such as stations, frequency of service, capacity and multi-modality facilities must be considered according to the land use. Due to this fact, it is important to include the identifi ed critical business and residential nucleus and to include them into the planning design and new upgrading of the corridors.

Environment • All open spaces and protected areas are considered “no development zones” in accordance with the requirements of the Gauteng Department of Agriculture, Conservation and Environment (G DACE). However, these may be developed for their recreational, tourism and educational value. • Consideration of the noise contours around the JIA, particularly regarding the development of residential areas within the 65 dBA contour. • Limitation of residential developments along major roads due to health impacts associated with noise and air pollution from road traffi c. • Development within the identifi ed corridors must be undertaken within the limits of the urban edge as defi ned by the EMM and G DACE. • Implementation of the specifi cations of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for the development of the Gautrain as part of the R21 corridor. • Development should take cognisance of the high potential agricultural land which is available in the northern portions of the R21 corridor. Investigations of the

OCTOBER 2010 223 C4.3 incorporation of this agricultural potential into the proposed developments in this area should be undertaken. • Planning of developments within these corridors must include appropriate Environmental Impact Assessments in accordance with all relevant legislation. This is particularly important for the future development of the PWV13 (i.e. extension of the R21 corridor to the south).

Whilst the above factors are taken into consideration for the development of corridors, the environmental impact of these developments should not be ignored, but rather incorporated and addressed into their development. Environmental considerations have been included in the study and should be strictly adhered to. The Strategic integration of corridor development with other metropolitan planning initiatives, including Fundamental Restructuring of Public Transport and the IDP, and the implementation of development guidelines applicable to all corridor types needs to be given priority by the EMM.

Strategies should also be developed in the IDP which provide direction for new growth into corridors by means of public investment and economic development promotion. Nodal points as identiﬁ ed in the SDF and this study should be a major focus, not only for urban restructuring and investment in social facilities, but also for implementation of a rationalised public transport network and economic development, while ensuring that the environment is improved or suffers no major negative environmental impact.

The development of the Tembisa / Kempton Park / Germiston / Katlorus Activity Corridors poses an opportunity to start to redeﬁ ne the spatial, transport and economic structure of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. These two potential corridors have been selected on the basis of certain existing prerequisites for corridor development along the main arterials in these areas and the potential that they have to tap into the multiple developmental opportunities of the metropolitan area.

This does, however, not imply that resources should only be focused on these two corridors. Corridor development and implementation must form part of a broader strategic and integrated planning framework in which the different economic and spatial roles and contributions of various corridors, nodal points and sub regions in the metropolitan context are deﬁ ned and developed accordingly.

6. OVERALL RECOMMENDATIONS

Phase 1 - Ensure the appropriate structures in place • It is recommended that the proposed corridors should be strongly managed and implemented by a dedicated Development Partnership, -Agency or Unit that will take responsibility for the overall management of the corridor. • Investigate and devolve duties, powers and functions to the Development

224 OCTOBER 2010 C4.3 Partnership/Agency and its task teams so that it can implement and manage the relevant identiﬁ ed projects of the corridors. • The implementation of socio-economic alternatives of change requires a strong political commitment, institutional reform and a clear assignment of responsibilities within political institutions. It is also important to guarantee the continuity of the processes, so that they may be implemented as part of a medium to long term transport strategy.

Phase 2 - Corridor Start-up • Establish a comprehensive Corridor Information Database that can be used in the development and marketing processes. • Compile detailed business plans for the respective projects identiﬁ ed in this study- and for other projects which could be identiﬁ ed in future. These business plans are the products that need to be “sold” to potential investors as part of the marketing campaign. • Develop a home-grown incentive package, in cooperation with all tiers of government and the private sector, which will encourage investment in the corridor areas. • Develop a comprehensive marketing plan, which includes the marketing requirements of all the strategies and projects. • Develop the various business networks required for most of the strategies. Existing structures could be used initially, such as the Developers Forum.

Phase 3 - Operations • Undertake the various investigations as detailed in the projects. • Develop and maintain a performance monitoring system/model, which should be linked to the performance monitoring system developed by Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality as part of the IDP process. Note that the performance monitoring of the entire programme is a continuous process.

Strategic economic development planning and the linking of such planning results to the budgetary process are dynamic processes, implying that it should be monitored, evaluated and revised on an ongoing basis. To ensure that the necessary monitoring and evaluation actions do take place, an appropriate monitoring and evaluation mechanism for the corridors should be devised. This system/model will act as an instrument and barometer for investment and marketing the corridor. The monitoring system should conform to international as well as local standards for the purpose of global comparison.

OCTOBER 2010 225 C4.3 7. CONCLUDING REMARKS

The study indicates that there is potential for development of corridors in the Ekhurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. In the light of scarce resources the team thought it prudent to focus on two high priority corridors.

The development of corridors is gradual and requires sustained encouragement and should thus be the focus of government and private sector interventions. Should this occur the corridors could assist in restructuring, invigorating and integrating the EMM and so contribute to a choice generating and sustainable urban form in the EMM’s area of jurisdiction.

226 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 C4.4: Ekurhuleni Densiﬁ cation Framework (in process)

1. INTRODUCTION

The “Status Quo: Analysis and Findings” Document highlighted the current trends and approaches to densifi cation across the globe and in South Africa and its various cities. The trend of densifi cation across the world is driven by a vision for more sustainable citiesand largely by a movement for the protection of the environment. Urban sprawl is a worldwidephenomenon and densifi cation is part of the urban compaction movement, which strives forhigh density, mixed-use developments, promoting and enhancing effi cient public transportsystems and enhancing the quality of life of residents in cities across the world. To achievesustainable densifi cation, a number of selected issues need consideration: · The cost, availability and location of land · Transportation and accessibility · Socio-economic issues · Environmental considerations · Cultural issues · Political position of government · Infrastructure planning and availability

This document will highlight the key proposals in terms of densiﬁ cation for the EMM.

1.1 Purpose of the Residential Densiﬁ cation Strategy The project brief stipulated the formulation of a speciﬁ c product, which should be versatileenough to inform the spatial planning in the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality, especiallywith the revision of the MSDF and which should also be used as part of the Town PlanningScheme (or rather Land Use Management Scheme) which will be developed by Ekurhuleniover a period of time.

The document should therefore be guiding in nature and should provide guidelines on densiﬁ cation in terms of strategic development initiatives, as well as development controls interms of densiﬁ cation throughout the city. However, this should not be a static document butone which evolves over time and with development.

The overall aim of this Strategy is therefore to provide guidance to Ekurhuleni Ofﬁ cials, Planners, Developers and the public in the densiﬁ cation of Ekurhuleni. This document is abroad metro-wide strategy, which is to be incorporated into and applied to any new or revisedpolicy documents and which takes cognizance of all current policy and framework documents.

This document is not produced for the evaluation of individual residential densiﬁ cation

OCTOBER 2010 227 C4.4 applications, but is produced to guide the drafting of LSDFs and other metropolitan policies. The principles and proposals of this strategy may however be used in the evaluation of residential densiﬁ cation applications in areas where there is no LSDF.

The Residential Densiﬁ cation Strategy’s principles, guidelines and controls must be applied with discretion and local knowledge to more localized plans for speciﬁ c areas, especially at LSDF level.

1.2 Users of the Residential Densifi cation Strategy The Residential Densifi cation Strategy should be used by built environment offi cials and Municipality offi cials in the compilation of Local Spatial Development Frameworks and other policies and plans. This document forms part of the greater family of plans and frameworks and should be read in conjunction with metropolitan or areas based plans, such as the LSDF, in order to align thoughts and apply for appropriate densities according to the local situation.

1.3 Structure of Residential Densifi cation Strategy The Residential Densifi cation Strategy consists of a number of sections, each of which deals with certain aspects of densifi cation. The Strategy begins by highlighting the approach and informing principles of densifi cation used in deriving this Strategy. The Strategy sets out the current trends of densifi cation in the EMM and highlights some of the anticipated trends and possible targets for the future. It further relates the issues of density to the broader Ekurhuleni policy framework, which needs to be enhanced through densifi cation.

The Strategy then addresses specifi c categories of densifi cation and provides guidelines in terms of design and control measures for densifi cation to occur. It will further provide guidelines in terms of managing densifi cation throughout the metropolitan area and at various scales and will address issues of short, medium and long terms concern, such as the movement of the Urban Development Boundary.

2. RESIDENTIAL DENSIFICATION STRATEGY

2.1 EMM Vision & Densiﬁ cation The EMM is formed by nine former towns on the East Rand, resulting in a fragmented metropolitan area, which lacks a clear identity in terms of urban form and function.

Furthermore, documentation and policy in the metropolitan area are not aligned, nor do they have a holistic approach, which can be applied to all distinct areas.

The vision for Ekurhuleni, as stated in the GDS 2025, is:

The Smart, Creative and Developmental City

228 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 The approach to densiﬁ cation in Ekurhuleni should build on this vision and strive to provide a clear direction for the City’s morphology and development, which supports the ideals and objectives of creating a sustainable, inclusive and productive city through densiﬁ cation.

2.2 Densiﬁ cation Objectives & Strategies The table below illustrates the proposed objectives and strategies to achieve sustainable densiﬁ cation throughout the Metropolitan area.

Table 1: Objectives and Strategies OBJECTIVES & STRATEGIES OBJECTIVES STRATEGIES 1) To ensure safe, quality living 1a) To create clear guidelines for Urban environments for all residents in Design in higher density residential Ekurhuleni developments 1b) To create guidelines for suitable housing options and typologies 2) To ensure sustainable densifi cation in 2a) To align densifi cation in EMM with terms of infrastructure capacities and bulk infrastructure service delivery and provision maintenance 3) To ensure environmental protection 3a) To create clear guidelines for in the densifi cation to occur in non-sensitive process of densifi cation areas 3b) To provide decision makers/ offi cials, town planners, developers and residents with guidelines and policy which is to be consulted in terms of environmental consideration and procedure 3c) To formulate criteria for the protection of environmental assets 4) To ensure effective and appropriate 4a) To establish clear assessment decision making in terms of density criteria for decision making offi cials in proposals terms of density proposals across EMM 4b) To establish an Aesthetics Committee(s) for assessment/review of building design and urban design principles 5) To ensure effective and effi cient 5a) To establish management criteria management of higher density for various densifi cation classifi cation residential developments

OCTOBER 2010 229 C4.4 OBJECTIVES & STRATEGIES OBJECTIVES STRATEGIES 6) To ensure balanced growth in terms 6a) To place residential densifi cation of densifi cation by providing residents in close proximity to economic and with opportunities close to economic employment opportunities activities 7) To ensure balanced growth in terms of 7a) To align densifi cation to areas densifi cation by providing residents with where adequate social infrastructure is opportunities close to social facilities available 7b) In the event that social infrastructure is limited, provide guidelines for aligning densifi cation with social infrastructure service provision

2.3 Approach to Densifi cation After consultation occurred and comments were received on previous drafts of this document, an approach was adopted in consultation with the client. This approach is based on the principles listed below and discussed in turn, in terms of its relevance to Densifi cation. i. Adherence to National & Provincial Legislation ii. Looking Forward (in line with Current Development Policy) iii. Strategic Densifi cation iv. Sustainability v. Quality Environments

3. EMM DENSITY TARGETS

3.1 Trend vs Target Until the approval of this Strategy, the EMM did not have a proactive density policy, which resulted in densiﬁ cation happening in an ad-hoc, unco-ordinated manner which is unsustainable and not based on the sound principles of densiﬁ cation in strategic locations.

If one analyses the current housing backlog (subsidised housing), the following is seen: • There are approximately 300 000 households on the waiting list • Subsidised housing requires a standalone erf of approximately 250m2 • 300 000 homes on 250m2 of land translate to a land requirement of 75 000 000m2 to build all subsidised housing (7 500 hectares) • This calculation is done without taking into account the annual growth rates (approximately 3%) and migration patterns.

230 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 In terms of the current average population growth rate in the EMM, the following increase in population can be projected over a 15 year time period at ﬁ ve year intervals:

Table 2: Population Projection YEAR POPULATION Current 2 528 303 2010 2 682 276 2015 3 109 793 2020 3 604 754 2025 4 178 898

A 60% population growth is seen between 2008 and 2025, assuming an average growth rate of 3% per annum. By the year 2025, approximately 1 650 595 people will have to be housed. The current ﬁ gures of 1 313 people per km2 will increase to 2 172 people per km2 by 2025. This is almost double the current population and will result in increased densities.

Approximately 40% of EMM (as illustrated on the Geotechnical Maps – Section 5c) are underlain by dolomite, which is deemed undevelopable land in terms of higher density residential developments. Therefore, approximately 1 200km2 is developable, on which development has occurred and small pockets of land are available for development.

This issue around developable land therefore pushes up the required density to 3 482 people per km2 on 60% of the land. This would include moving people from dolomitic underlain areas which are deemed unsafe.

However, not all dolomitic areas are undevelopable. The dolomite classiﬁ cation will determine levels of safety and would most likely be more conducive to lower density residential developments or other uses.

The current EMM density trends have been discussed in the Status Quo Report and, in summary, it was shown that limited high rise buildings or higher density developments are occurring throughout the City. Areas of highest densities include Bedfordview and Alberton and very limited areas in Germiston.

3.2 LSDF Areas The setting of density targets, whether by LSDF area, functional area, wards or any other means is diffi cult. However, in order to meet the needs to accommodate the growing population close to facilities and amenities it is essential to have strategic densifi cation targets in designated areas. De-densifi cation will have to occur in Previously Disadvantaged Areas and informal settlement areas, especially where opportunities for employment, transport and social facilities are limited, as well as in areas on dolomite.

OCTOBER 2010 231 C4.4 Targets for speciﬁ c areas will have to be set through the Local Spatial Development Frameworks in line with the projections indicated above but taking into account more localised conditions and needs for the areas.

3.3 Urban Development Boundary With the establishment of “wall to wall” municipalities, there are no longer peri-urban areas in which limited infrastructure is provided, but Cities cannot afford to provide full infrastructure and social services throughout the Municipality area.

Urban Development Boundaries (UDBs) are a mechanism to contain urban sprawl and to deﬁ ne an “Urban Development Boundary” beyond which only limited services are provided. The deﬁ nition of an Urban Development Boundary assists in urban compaction and also in keeping cities manageable.

UDBs also play an important role in protection of conservation areas. Urban Development Boundaries need to be used to assist in controlling the unsustainable growth of cities and urban areas.

Urban Development Boundaries assist in: · Limiting the City’s footprint and “density sprawl” to prevent excessive consumption of land within the city limits · Focusing on in-fi ll, redevelopment and mixed use/densifi cation strategies · Supporting cost effi cient infrastructure provision · Supporting an urban form that is supportive of effi cient public transport usage · Protecting environmentally sensitive regions and areas · Providing strategic direction in terms of infrastructure capital investments.

Urban Development Boundaries need to be used with other strategic tools to ensure rational integrated development and strategic densiﬁ cation in planned locations. The Urban Development Boundary needs to be accompanied by other strategies and interventions,which inﬂ uence planning and development direction to achieve a city’s desired morphology. Strategies might include promoting Mixed Use Developments to ensure better land use management and control, the improvement of infrastructure co-ordination, development incentives and public transport orientated development.

An Urban Development Boundary does not prohibit development outside the UDB, but any development outside of the UDB should be considered on merit. It is unlikely that

232 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 intensive development can be motivated outside of the UDB.

With the increase in allowable densities in strategic areas, there should be more opportunity to densify in areas close to infrastructure, social and other services. As a result, there should be less pressure on development beyond the Urban Development Boundary.

Provincial Government has indicated that no development should occur east of the Urban Development Boundary in EMM due to natural constraints, especially in terms of the area’s geology. The boundary may therefore not be moved in the near future, due to these constraints.

The boundary to the north may be moved in consultation with Provincial Government, due to the development pressures around OR Tambo International Airport and the Albertina Sisulu (R21) Development Corridor.

No southern boundary movement should occur in the near future as this area is also geologically sensitive and further to this, it was indicated that cross boundary planning and infrastructure provision could become problematic and costly, especially for the EMM (between Municipalities). Provincial Government has therefore warned against moving development south.

The Ekurhuleni Urban Development Boundary, 2005 is illustrated by the light blue line in Map 2. Please note that small changes were made to the Ekurhuleni Urban Development Boundary in 2007. These are not reﬂ ected on Map 2. The insert illustrates the areas which are undermined (yellow) or are underlain by dolomite (light blue). Higher residential densiﬁ cation can not be accomplished in a sustainable manner in the following exclusion areas: · Outside the Urban Development Boundary; · On dolomitic land; and · On shallow undermined land.

Priority areas for increased densifi cation to occur are within the strategic areas already identifi ed by the EMM. These would include the Core Economic Development Triangle and priority infi ll areas.

3.4 Infrastructure Services Infrastructure availability or potential availability is a pre-requisite for densifi cation. However, current infrastructure alone should not dictate future areas for densifi cation. The locational criteria for densifi cation, such as in nodes and along activity corridors, need to be used for the planning of future infrastructure provision. Discussions with the various infrastructure departments revealed that if a principle-based approach is taken, servicing could follow densifi cation and strategic investment in

OCTOBER 2010 233 C4.4 infrastructure could occur. Due to The cost of bulk services per residential unit is the nonfi nalisation of infrastructure currently (May 2008) estimated in the region master plans at the time of this of R60 000.00. This includes water, sewerage document’s development, alignment and electricity for the servicing of a ‘site’/ of budget allocations and priority unit. Increased densities which are effi ciently projects could not be fi nalised. designed could decrease this amount due to However, an estimate of servicing economies of scale. costs per residential unit has been (WSP Engineering Consultants) obtained from an independent engineer.

1. CATEGORIES OF DENSIFICATION AND CONTROLS

Densiﬁ cation is very often perceived as an exercise where homogeneous residential units are produced, aimed at providing for limited income groups (often associated with low-income groups). Ekurhuleni is currently striving for a uniﬁ ed identity across the City, whereby all citizens can feel included.

This section of the strategy will outline the various categories of densifi cation and locational criteria. This is aimed at providing the City with unifi ed densifi cation criteria, which should be applied across the City and to the relevant LSDFs. The Residential Densifi cation Strategy aims to be easily implementable, adaptable and easily integrated with existing and future policies. Due to strategic densifi cation as a principle, densifi cation should occur around areas where investment has occurred and social and engineering infrastructure is already established. For this reason, strategies for densifi cation are developed around the current urban spatial structuring elements identifi ed in developmental policies such as the MSDF.

A description will be given of each category, which will be followed by examples of suggested development controls for higher density residential development.

The section in Annexure A on Mixed Use Developments can be integrated into the various categories of densiﬁ cation. It merely assists with creating “24 hour” sustainable developments across the Metropolitan Area.

The most appropriate urban spatial structuring elements to which residential densiﬁ cation can be linked are Nodes (areas of concentrated economic activity), Transport Oriented Development (corridors/movement system) and Residential Areas, where certain degrees of densiﬁ cation can be accommodated.

234 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 Each of these areas will be discussed in turn below with its relevant densiﬁ cation strategies.

4.1 CATEGORY 1: NODES

Nodes are one of the major structuring elements of cities, together with movement networks and corridors. The strength of a node will have a major effect on the surrounding area. Nodes are where both the private sector and public sector concentrate development. Nodes are associated with higher residential densities and also the intensity of all other relevant land uses in that node.

Nodes can be of a single use type, such as industrial, commercial, residential or even conservation, or they can be mixed in use. In all cases, viable nodes need to promote: · Clustering of activities and higher intensity of investment and use, to achieve economic and infrastructure efﬁ ciency. · Multi-modal transportation and pedestrian accessibility. · A sense of place within a deﬁ ned area. Mixeduse nodes should be small enough such that one can walk from end to end, but not so small that economies of scale cannot be achieved.

4.2 CATEGORY 2: TRANSPORT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT

The movement system of a city is the backbone of its own economy. Furthermore, its design and movement patterns also determine its levels of convenience for users, be it local residents or visitors from other cities or regions. TRANSPORT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT What also makes a movement system and its infrastructure viable, are the levels at which it is used in an efﬁ cient and convenient manner. During the study of the status quo of the current densities of the EMM, many ofﬁ cials, especially those lobbying for public movement systems, said that the densities in the city are too low to make public transportation systems viable and therefore investment has

OCTOBER 2010 235 C4.4 been limited in this sector.

In many of the international examples reviewed in the Status Quo Document, densiﬁ cation supported public transport systems. Due to the success illustrated by these reviewed examples, densiﬁ cation should be encouraged along public transportation routes and in areas of extensive public investment in road and transportation infrastructure.

The EMM currently has a draft ITP (Integrated Transport Plan) which is being fi nalised. On completion and adoption of this plan, this section of the Residential Densifi cation Strategy should be read in conjunction with the ITP. However, this section is based on the Executive Summary of the Draft ITP Report and discussions with the relevant transport and infrastructure departments in the EMM and should be consulted as such. During these discussions, it was agreed that a principled based approach should be taken, in the absence of fi nalisation of the ITP.

The transportation network in Ekurhuleni is based on the various transportation modes used in the City and, as such, densiﬁ cation strategies and recommendations will be made in these various sub-categories of transportation. The Strategic Public Transport Network (SPTN) has also been revised in the Draft ITP report. The SPTN is illustrated in Map 4 (as extracted from the Draft ITP).

The red lines illustrate the SPTN which consists of both rail and road infrastructure (for further detail please refer to the ITP). The SPTN links previously disadvantaged areas (PDAs) to areas of economic activity. The identiﬁ ed SPTN movement routes are: · Thokoza – Alberton · Katlehong – Germiston · Vosloorus – Boksburg · Tsakane – Brakpan · KwaThema – Brakpan · KwaThema – Springs · Duduza – Nigel · Daveyton – Germiston · Tembisa – Kempton Park

The densifi cation strategies discussed below should be applied to these routes as priority projects to enforce investment in public transport infrastructure. Densifi cation should further follow additional public transport strategies proposed over the next fi fteen years.

4.2.1 Rail

236 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 EMM has an extensive rail network within the City which not only links various parts of the City, but also links the City to neighbouring cities and regions. This is emphasized in Section 3.5.5 of the Status Quo Document of this Residential Densiﬁ cation Strategy. Map 5 illustrates the rail network in EMM schematically.

In order for additional investment and rail upgrading programmes to be successful, densiﬁ cation should occur in strategic areas along this rail network, especially where the ITP has also deﬁ ned areas of strategic development.

Railways stations act as the areas in which rail users enter and exit trains and these must be conveniently located and pedestrian friendly. However, to make stations more viable, modal transport facilities should be implemented. These should have some of the following characteristics: · High density residential uses (a variety of housing typologies should be used) · Modal interchanges should be present (between rail and vehicles) · Mixed use developments should be present (presenting economic opportunities for some of the immediate area’s residents) · Limited private vehicle parking should be provided (forces the public to make use of other public transport modes)

The Draft ITP has identiﬁ ed the following stations in EMM as stations at which Mode Transfer Facilities should be developed: • Boksburg • Daveyton • Dunswart • Isando • Kempton Park • Rhodesﬁ eld • Springs • Oakmoor

Densifi cation should be encouraged around railway stations, however, design guidelines must be strictly adhered to due to noise pollution and as a safety precaution. The highest densities should be concentrated around points of modal transfer and adjacent to existing stations, which are currently used by commuters. Most of the stations identifi ed as priority projects are in the central east west line in of the City. It is strongly recommended that densifi cation projects be developed and implemented in the Germiston area, as this is where the major rail infrastructure is centred in the EMM and the Germiston area has been earmarked as a Presidential Project. Densifi cation will have a positive impact on this project.

OCTOBER 2010 237 C4.4 Higher density residential developments may also be incorporated into mixed-use developments (refer to Category 2) around stations. In the case of residential units on the ground ﬂ oor, these units must be designed as live-work units to assist in economic upliftment in these respective areas as well.

Rail extensions are also identiﬁ ed in the ITP, including Daveyton – Etwatwa extension, Angelo – Knights extension, Kwesine – Zonkesizwe extension and the Thembisa loop extension. After completion of these rail extensions, as discussed in the Draft ITP, consideration should be given to implementing Mode Transfer Facilities at the respective stations to maximise the investments to these line extensions.

4.2.2 Road As previously mentioned (as well as in the Status Quo Document), the Strategic Public Transport Network consists of various modes of transport infrastructure. The strategies regarding rail infrastructure have been discussed above.

The EMM has identifi ed a road classifi cation system, which can be studied in the MSDF 2005/6 and the revised ITP. The Draft ITP includes these classifi cations in the SPTN. The classifi cations are simplifi ed into a Freeway Network and a Second Order Road Network as well as a proposed Third Order Road Network. The EMM uses this classifi cation which is derived and defi ned by the Provincial Department of Roads.

Freeway Network The Freeway Network consists of major routes, which link and provide high mobility to road users to other areas in the province and beyond. The EMM Freeway Network connects the EMM with the City of Johannesburg and other areas in the region. Plans are in place to extend this network to create better, more effi cient linkages with other cities. These roads include Class 1 and 2 roads. Most of these routes are identifi ed in the Gauteng Strategic Road Network as K-Routes. The various road classifi cations are: • Freeways • Conventional Principal Arterials (mainly rural) • Conventional Major Arterials

Due to the high mobility and limited access of freeway traffi c, increased densifi cation would not be suitable at interchanges on this road network. (Please note that no clear defi nitions are available for the above-mentioned road classifi cations. Please refer to the revised ITP once available.)

Second Order Road Network The main objectives of this road network are to: • Facilitate movement in the metropolitan area in the north-south and east-west direction

238 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 • Link residential areas to one another and to the core areas of economic activity • Link areas of economic activity to one another • Promote mixed use and high density developments adjacent to these routes (subject to road access management requirements) • Promote transport along these routes as a priority

The Second Order Road Network comprises road classiﬁ cations such as: • Collector Roads • Activity Streets (in the CBD and Industrial Areas) • Residential Streets

This classiﬁ cation group is most conducive to higher residential densities as these roads link residential areas to nodes and other areas of economic activities and other residential areas.

Third Order Road Network This Road Network consists of Class 3 roads, which include minor arterials and activity arterials. These roads serve a local area or the broader metropolitan area where indicated.

The two types of roads have different attributes as indicated in Table 8.

Table 8: Third Order Road Network - Attributes ACCESS PEDESTRIAN TYPE SPEED SPACING FRIENDLY Minor Arterials 70 – 80km/h 450m to 500m NO Activity Arterials 40 – 50km/h 200m to 300m YES

Minor arterials also belong to the Mobility Roads Group but have the characteristics of lower speeds and smaller access spacing.

From the MSDF 2005/6 the following roads were identiﬁ ed: · Transportation Corridors (focus is on mobility and the movement of people and goods) · Activity/Development Corridors (focus on high population numbers and mixed land uses) · Activity Spine (focus on high density residential development along road and rail) · Activity Street (high density residential development to be encouraged with a focus on pedestrian movement and accessibility – not high mobility roads)

OCTOBER 2010 239 C4.4 4.2.3 Aerodromes The EMM has fi ve airports throughout its area of jurisdiction. One of these is OR Tambo International Airport. The noise contours for this particular airport are illustrated to the left. In line with legislation, the Civil Aviation Authority (CAA) has a stringent set of rules and regulations, which need to be adhered to in the event of development in close proximity to an airport or airfi eld. The information document, attached as Annexure C to this document, must be consulted before any densifi cation can occur around airfi elds/airports. Densifi cation around these areas should be in line with the other structuring elements’ criteria and densities consulted with CAA’s requirements.

4.2.4 Gautrain There are two Gautrain Stations in Ekurhuleni. The OR Tambo International Station will service the Airport and will not have a direct impact on residential densiﬁ cation.

The second station is located in Rhodesﬁ eld. This station will serve the residential communities of Ekurhuleni. Residential Densiﬁ cation should be encouraged at this station to levels similar to those in Primary Activity Nodes.

4.3 CATEGORY 3: RESIDENTIAL AREAS

Due to the historical value and settlement pattern in the EMM, three different categories of residential areas have been identiﬁ ed: · Formal Residential Areas (suburbs), · Previously Disadvantaged Areas (townships), and · Informal Settlements (squatter areas).

Due to each of these areas being so different in character, layout, general morphology, environmental and infrastructure issues and systems at work, each one is discussed independently and different recommendations are made for each area.

4.3.1 Formal Residential Areas (suburbs) Some of the areas in Ekurhuleni have a long history and local area knowledge will

240 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 be critical in understanding and applying the Residential Densiﬁ cation Strategy. The strategy is built strongly around urban structuring elements in these particular areas and local area knowledge and planning expertise is required to ensure sustainable development.

Base densities across metropolitan areas are seen to be a norm in South African cities. However, experience has shown that this can become problematic in certain parts of these metropolitan areas. Such complications are usually associated with environmental sensitivities, the urban development boundary and infrastructure constraints.

Base densities do, however, have some positive attributes, such as encouraging infi ll development and the redevelopment of brown fi elds. It also provides owners of agricultural holdings with limited agricultural potential, to maximize the value of their land through densifi cation processes (be it subdivision or increased residential densities).

Established residential areas should be evaluated on merit and with local knowledge, based on the evaluation criteria listed below: a) Proximity to economic centres should be considered. The closer residential areas are to CBDs or nodes, the higher the residential densities may be. All CBD and nodal boundaries must be deﬁ ned in future spatial planning documents to eliminate any confusion or disparities in planning decisions regarding densiﬁ cation measures. The diagram is merely used for illustrative purposes.

Lowest Density

Medium Density

High Density

Highest Density NODE

b) S di it d d l t t b

OCTOBER 2010 241 C4.4 b) Surrounding areas, sites and developments must be considered. This is related to design aesthetics and quality as well as issues of privacy of abutting and owners.

c) Sizes of properties The subdivision of properties in well established residential areas should be limited to minimum erf sizes where densiﬁ cation is concerned. Minimum erf sizes should bedetermined in LSDF documents after local trends have been researched and established. This should also be based on the performance of a residential area in terms of its growth rate, demand for property and infrastructure availability. Densiﬁ cation should not occur to the detriment of the environment, infrastructure or other residents in an area.

d) Critical Site Assessment A critical site assessment must accompany any application for densiﬁ cation and should address and assess the following aspects: • The position, height and privacy of buildings on adjacent properties. • Environmental elements such as slopes, water presence etc. • Accessibility

e) Site Development Plans All inﬁ ll developments must be evaluated against a Draft Site Development Plan, which must indicate the following aspects: • Landscaping (current vegetation and planned future vegetation – 10% of property to be landscaped) • Vehicular access • Pedestrian access • Surrounding properties building positions • Building lines • Current building footprints • Proposed building footprints • Indicate conceptually present infrastructure service • Indicate prevention and mitigation measures in terms of any foreseen problems and/or disasters in terms of any of the above

Applications for residential densiﬁ cation should only be prepared after points (a) to (e) have been considered and it is the opinion of a professional town planner that densiﬁ cation in the subject area would not be to the detriment of the area or its residents.

242 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 The appointed city ofﬁ cial, with local area knowledge, should critically assess such applications on merit with the aid of the guidelines provided above and proposed land use controls provided.

4.3.2 Previously Disadvantaged Areas The four major identiﬁ ed Previously Disadvantaged Areas in Ekurhuleni are: · Kwatzaduza · Daveyton – Etwatwa · Thembisa · Khatorus

These areas are primarily located on dolomitic underlain land where densifi cation becomes a dangerous practice (if not conducted in the correct manner). Densifi cation on this type of land will have serious fi nancial and cost implications on construction and end user affordability.

Further to this environmental constraint, is the issue of placing people closer to employment opportunities. In densifying these areas, the apartheid style development trend will be perpetuated by placing the majority of the population in marginalized areas away from economic opportunity. However, other circumstances need to be understood, such as local support networks, which have been built in these areas among residents, as well as the affordability of their current housing situation.

Densiﬁ cation should deﬁ nitely be encouraged around transportation centres/stations, where it safe from a geotechnical perspective. These areas should be designed in such a manner that the integration of land uses and transport modes are supportive of and supported by higher residential development. Clustering of activities is therefore necessary and densities should be highest at these ‘nodal’ cores, descending gradually from the core area, but remaining relatively high adjacent to the public transport routes, whether rail or road.

HIGHER RESIDENTIAL

DECREASED RESIDENTIAL DENSITIES STATION DECREASED RESIDENTIAL DENSITIES

PUBLIC TRANSPORT ROUTE MIXED USE PUBLIC TRANSPORT ROUTE DEVELOPMENT/NODE DECREASED RESIDENTIAL DENSITIES DECREASED RESIDENTIAL DENSITIES

DENSITIES

OCTOBER 2010 243 C4.4 Within mixed use developments/nodes, provision should also be made for ‘work from home’ opportunities as outlined in Section 5.5 of the Guideline Document for Higher Density Residential Development, 2005, p42. An illustration from this section is provided to the left.

The Guideline Document for Higher Density Residential Development (as mentioned in this document and the Status Quo document), has been developed for the subsidized housing market and gives very clear and speciﬁ c detail pertaining to design and typologies.

That document should be consulted in conjunction with this policy document for further detail on design aspects and layouts.

4.3.3 Informal Settlements Within informal settlement areas, higher residential densities are most likely to be achieved through public sector investment (subsidised housing schemes) or institutional investments (Institutional Housing Initiatives). In situ upgrading would seem the most likely development to occur in such area. However, densiﬁ cation should not be encouraged in these areas as they are usually removed from economic and transport opportunities and densiﬁ cation will not result in sustainable development. Furthermore, these areas are primarily located on dolomitic or undermined land.

Should densiﬁ cation occur in such areas in the future, the following aspects must have careful consideration: a) Proximity to transportation facilities (railways stations, bus routes, mini-bus taxi ranks and routes). b) Affordability levels of the end users. c) Proximity to social facilities and open spaces. d) Physical attributes of the land (which must all be documented on a draft site development plan): i. Topography ii. Vegetation iii. Water courses iv. Geology (many of the informal

244 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 settlements and Previously Disadvantaged Areas are located on dolomitic areas) e) Site assessment and surrounding areas i. Site in its immediate context (privacy, overlooking, building orientation, etc.) ii. Pedestrian and vehicular access iii. Provision of infrastructure (water, electricity, sewage etc.)

Due to current trends and the vision to provide all citizens with adequate housing within the EMM, it is strongly advised that higher density residential development occurs in areas that are economically, socially and environmentally suitable. Densiﬁ cation should only be considered in these areas once all other land possibilities have been exhausted.

4.4 CATEGORY 4: CORE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT TRIANGLE

The EMM derived an economic strategy linked to development in 2004, in which the Core Economic Development Triangle of Ekurhuleni was defi ned. The region is central to Ekurhuleni as a Metropolitan area and hosts the most infrastructure and potential for development and investment. The following main areas have been indentifi ed which link up to form the triangle. These are: · The Kempton Park CBD & Rhodesfi eld · OR Tambo International Airport · Germiston CBD · Boksburg CBD · Benoni CBD · The Mining Belt from Germiston to Benoni

Each of these areas has been identiﬁ ed for a speciﬁ c ‘purpose’ of development in the sense that each area could be used/developed for a different market sector which in turn compliments surrounding areas niche activities.

The Rhodesﬁ eld area has been earmarked for redevelopment due to the location of the Gautrain Station and also its close proximity to the airport. The area surrounding the station has been set aside for mixed use development, including ofﬁ ces, high density residential development with which Ekurhuleni hopes to provide professionals and companies with a business address in the metro area.

The Pomona Agricultural Holdings Area to the North of OR Tambo International Airport is seen to have the potential to pick up and develop any possible economic spin-offs the airport might have.

OCTOBER 2010 245 C4.4 The Bardene-Bartlett Area is in very close proximity to the current local activity node in Boksburg, namely the East Rand Mall. This area, found to the south of the OR Tambo International Airport, is seen to be ideal for high tech industry parks or light industrial parks.

The above areas are very closely concentrated in the vicinity of the airport and business and industry opportunities of a different nature have been identiﬁ ed for them.

The one major linkage area, which has been identiﬁ ed, is the mining belt between Germiston and Benoni which is currently occupied by informal settlers. This area is seen to be the perfect opportunity for Transit Oriented Development to ensure the upgrading and sustainable development of human settlements in this area and also to provide the viable linkage the metro requires across the area. No direct linkage is currently seen between these two major areas of the EMM and complimentary activities can be developed as Germiston harbours the most rail infrastructure within the metro area.

In terms of supporting the economic investment, which in turn will create employment opportunities, this area, demarcated as the Core Economic Development Triangle, will be most suitable for higher density residential developments. It will contribute to the efﬁ cient use of infrastructure in the area and it will contribute to the sustainability of public transport investment and use. It will also bring people’s homes closer to employment opportunities.

This area will therefore have increased densities in terms of nodal development and transit oriented development and the same incentives would apply in the meeting of any special conditions. However, additional incentives may be granted due to the location of the higher residential developments in the demarcated area of the Core Economic Development Triangle.

4.5 SUMMARY OF DENSITY PROPOSALS

Table 13 contains a summary of the proposed density per category.

246 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 30 45 35 50 40 60 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 80 100 90 110 100 120 100 80 100 90 110 115 95 105 75 95 85 25 40 30 45 35 55 2540 65 85 75 95 45 75 85 85 95 95 105 75 85 95 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 CATEGORY 2 CATEGORY As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 As per As per As per Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 45 95 45 95 55 105 60 110 70 120 70 110 60 105 45 95 55 55 110 55 55 140 65 125 70 130110 110 80 60 70 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 100 80 90 60 70 80 MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 boundary boundary boundary PRIMARY PRIMARY * 110 * 100 80 * 90 FREEWAY FREEWAY N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A TERTIARY TERTIARY 60 110 60 110 70 120 80 1 30 90 1 40 CATEGORY CATEGORY 2008 2010 2015 2020 2025 Beyond 250m As per Beyond 250m As per Beyond 250m As per SECONDARY SECONDARY 160 100 70 130 80 140 90 150 ACTIVITY SPINE 20 35 25 40 ACTIVITY ACTIVITY STREET STREET 10 15 20 25 30 35 ACTIVITY RAIL (& WITHIN 500m)WITHIN 200 110170 100 80 150 90 160 (& RAIL Within 250m from corridor 5 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 3corridor 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 from 250m Within Within 250m from corridor 60 80 70 90 Within 250m from corridor 15 30 20 35 Within 250m from corridor 45 65 55 75 TRANSPORTATION CORRIDOR60 80 110 90 100TRANSPORTATION 60 80 70 90 Within 250m from nodal boundary 100 50 60 70 120 80 130 110 nodal Within 250m from nodal boundary 50 from 65 250m 75 Within 65 75 Within 250m from nodal boundary 60 120 60 120 70 130 80 180 40 boundary 90 150 60 120 70 130 nodal from 250m Within Between 250m and 500m corridor 55 75 65 85 RAIL (BETWEEN 500m and 1000m)RAIL 60 130 60 130 70 1 40 80 150 90 160 Between 250m and 500m from nodal Between 250m and 500m from nodal Between 250m and 500m from nodal ACTIVITY DEVELOPMENT CORRIDOR DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITY 70 90 80 100 90 110 100 120 110 130

OCTOBER 2010 247 C4.4 CATEGORY 3 CATEGORY 4 CATEGORY AS PER CATEGORY TABLES AS PER CATEGORY MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX CATEGORY CATEGORY 2008 2010 2015 2020 2025 RESIDENTIAL 12>50du/ha >70du/ha >80du/ha >85du/ha 4 3 RESIDENTIAL 5 RESIDENTIAL RESIDENTIAL 10 15 10 20 25 30 RESIDENTIAL 15 30 15 20 50 25 60 65 RESIDENTIAL 30 50 30 70 60 80 65 85 15 35 20 40 10 30 1030

248 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 5. URBAN DESIGN GUIDELINES

5.1 What is the Purpose of the Guidelines? The urban design guidelines strive to optimise the positive impact that residential densiﬁ cation can have on the performance of urban living areas for the people of Ekurhuleni Municipality.

They aim to achieve this through the improved planning and design of the structure and built form of urban residential areas and, in so doing, strive to contribute to the achievement of the overarching development goals and principles of the Municipal Integrated Development Plan.

In particular, they strive to achieve: · Liveable Environments – i.e. improved safety, security, comfort and convenience for residents and visitors · Sustainable Urban Environments – i.e. residential environments that are resource efﬁ cient for the municipality and cost effective for residents. · Legibility and Imageability – i.e. improved residential neighbourhood identity and character and improved sense of community

Accordingly, these guidelines highlight the various design principles that need to be considered in relation to a number of aspects in the development of residential developments, particularly higher density developments, and they attempt to indicate where they become particularly relevant with respect to the categories of densifi cation area identifi ed in the main body of the Ekurhulemi Residential Densifi cation Strategy i.e. Concentrated Economic Areas, Mixed Use Developments, Transport Oriented Development, Housing Developments and Core Economic Triangle.

5.2 Who should use the Guidelines? The guidelines are written for use by: · Municipalities, in their evaluation and assessment of residential development applications and in their planning of urban areas. · Developers, in their planning for residential developments. · Built Environmental Professionals, in the design of residential developments.

5.3 When should the Guidelines be used? Densifi cation will be achieved in a number of ways, one of which is through the increase in the number of building units within the municipal boundaries. This will occur either through the introduction of increased densities in existing areas and / or through the infi ll of undeveloped Greenfi eld sites.

Densiﬁ cation will occur through both large scale and small scale developments and the

OCTOBER 2010 249 C4.4 guidelines will have different applications in each instance.

5.4 Form of the Guidelines The guidelines have been prepared so as to provide guidance at different stages of the planning and design of higher density residential development and also for the different scales at which the environment is experienced by people viz.:- · The Neighbourhood (Public Domain) · The Development Site (Semi Public / Semi Private Domain) · The Building (Semi Private and Private Domain)

5.5 Neighbourhood Integration Linkage and Connectivity · Establish urban block sizes that improve/ enhance permeability of the neighbourhood · Avoid gated communities which decrease permeability · Avoid long cul-de-sacs (i.e. > 40-50m) with no pedestrian through-link. · Create new link or connector roads through larger development sites. · Provide through-site links for pedestrians and cyclists on larger sites where through roads are not practical. · Ensure that layouts respond appropriately to adjacent uses, activities and buildings · Establish a pleasant, safe and well connected network of paths and roads that support walking and cycling to public transport and local facilities.

Distribution of Use and Activity (Parking / non residential uses /Service Areas) · Protect new or existing residential uses from high impact uses (e.g. restaurants and service areas) and visual intrusions by buffering them with compatible uses or through the use of landscape or architectural features and structures. · Structure non residential uses along high access street frontages · Locate car parking areas and structures so that they do not dominate the development or street frontage. · Reduce impacts of large parking areas with trees, buildings, landscape features or different surface treatments. · Provide car parking underground or in semi-basement where practical. · Locate the multi-storey component of a development towards the road with single storey or car parking at the rear where this will limit impact on the amenity of adjacent residents’ secluded private open spaces.

Urban Character (Legibility, Imageability, Landscaping, Building Form and Massing) · Establish and or retain visual connections to adjacent activities, features, landmarks and/ or amenities.

250 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 · Use built form to identify or signal gateways into new, different or special districts. · Avoid high fences or walls in front of residential buildings along main streets or pedestrian walkways. · Avoid establishing buildings with large scale massing and or monotonous detailing along public streets. · Include existing and or new landmark buildings and or distinctive architectural features to assist with environmental legibility. · Acknowledge the scale and character of existing buildings and or an area when designing new inﬁ ll buildings and features. · Ensure that new buildings front onto existing building frontages across streets and public spaces and ensure a high degree of compatibility of building styles and types. · Major changes in building type or scale along common street frontages should be adequately modulated. · Provide similar type or mix of buildings on both sides of a street to generate a consistent streetscape. · Design new or redeveloped residential buildings to front onto existing and/ or proposed new roads. · Retain and incorporate architecturally or historically signiﬁ cant buildings into the development.

5.6 Site Planning Public and Private Interfaces · Buildings should have clearly defi ned public fronts and private rear areas. · Public frontages should interact with public streets or spaces through the appropriate location of entrances, windows and balconies which overlook streets and spaces. · Buildings which do not have non residential uses on ground fl oor should be set back off main streets to ensure privacy for ground fl oor units.

Communal/Site Facilities · Adequate refuse storage and recycling areas should be located within the site and should be adjacent to a lane or street frontage and not protrude into public streets or spaces. · The refuse storage area and recycling areas should be integrated with the design of the development and have minimum visual impact on the streetscape and should be screened and protected by suitable wall/fencing and roof elements. · Refuse storage and recycling areas should be well ventilated, have access to water and drainage facilities for cleaning and maintenance and should be easily accessible for refuse removal vehicles. · If individual laundries are not provided then a common or shared laundry facilities should be provided in areas that are accessible, visible.

OCTOBER 2010 251 C4.4 · Clothes drying facilities should be provided at ground level and or roof level but should be suitably screened from public streets and space. These facilities should be integrated with the building design and should not detrimentally affect the appearance of the building or its immediate surrounds. · Residential units should have a single common or limited number of television/radio antenna which is/are not visually intrusive to the developments common space or the surrounding streetscape.

Parking Layout · Make parking structures and carports visually compatible with the character of the main development. · Minimise the amount of public street frontage given over to parking facilities. · Ensure that vehicles can exit the development in a forward direction. · Ensure that visitor parking is available and that it does not compromise internal circulation and access arrangements

Landscaping · Landscape features, elements and styles should: o integrate the development with the streetscape and common open space; o contribute to personal safety by ensuring good visibility along streets, paths and driveways and avoid clutter near building entrances; o Contribute to energy effi ciency and amenity by providing shade in summer and/ or permitting winter sunlight to outdoor and indoor living areas; o Create and or enhance privacy between residential buildings and between residential buildings and public streets and spaces. · On-site management of storm water run-off should be promoted by the optimisation of unsealed landscaped areas. · Signifi cant existing vegetation should be retained and incorporated ito the layout design. · All high traffi c area such as walkways, cycle paths, refuse disposal areas, entrances and clothes line areas should be adequately paved. · Pedestrian ways, entrances, driveways, car parking, common open space should be adequately lit to ensure security for residents and visitors at night. · Lighting should be designed to minimise impacts on living areas and adjacent developments.

Private/Communal Open Space · Communal space should be provided particularly if there is not easy access to public space. · It should be useable from a slope, sunlight and shade, landscaping seating and can

252 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 contain play equipment. · Communal space should not be used for parking during daytime. · Communal space should be designed as a positive space and integrated with the layout of the development by way of landscaping, access paths and lighting. · It should be overlooked by residential units for safety and security.

Safety and Security · Maximise the number of windows and balconies facing onto public streets and lanes. · Minimise high fences and walls along streets. · Provide lighting, good visibility and surveillance of entrances, communal areas, pedestrian and cycle lanes, side lanes. · Protect private spaces from inappropriate use as public thoroughfares. · Minimise obscured, overgrown shrubby areas along streets and paths. · Enhance prevention and mitigation in terms of possible hazards and/or disasters whilst promoting development.

5.7 Building Guidelines Massing, Height and Human Scale · Building heights and massing should acknowledge and respond to height and form of adjacent buildings and spaces in the street and should reinforce the shape and form of the topography of the site. · Building massing and heights should contribute to the sense of character and spatial deﬁ nition of adjacent streets. · Massing and height of buildings should ensure a human scale at the street level and particularly at building entrances. · Building height and massing should be distributed on site to minimise overshadowing of public spaces and pedestrian walkways. · Massing and height should be used to create landmark elements and neighbourhood legibility.

Frontages and Facades · Minimise parking structures, ground level car parks and blank walls fronting the road. · Ensure front facades are well articulated by suitably scaled fenestration and building modulation elements such as cornices, plinths and roof lines. · Incorporate balconies into upper level development frontages to provide surveillance of the street. · Locate lower height developments in areas abutting residential back gardens.

OCTOBER 2010 253 C4.4 · Incorporate contextual cues associated with existing streetscapes into new buildings relating to roof form , wall treatment, balcony and fenestration details , choice of material and colour, building scale etc. · Building facades should address and deﬁ ne the street through building elements such as terraces, balconies and verandas and porticoes and highly textured surfaces. · Encourage building facades to respond to street corners and public spaces.

Entrances · Entrances should be well lit and clearly visible from surrounding development to promote security. · Entrances should be clearly articulated through landscaping and architectural features.

Walls and Fences · Fences and walls should be constructed as part of the main building and should not dominate the overall built form · Walls and Fencing should enable views of the street or public spaces for security i.e. low walls in fronts and higher for sides and rear.

Parking · Break up large parking areas with trees, buildings, or different surface treatments. · Provide residents’ car parking underground or in semi basements where practical. · Semi-basement car parking should be designed so that it can be ventilated naturally. · Exposed semi-basement car parking should be detailed with facade treatments particularly on main street frontages. · Minimise access to parking off streets that act as main pedestrian routes.

Visual Privacy · Locate upper storey living room windows and balconies so that views are towards the road or to outdoor spaces within the development. · Locate the windows of one building so that they do not provide direct and close views into the windows of another. · Use upward sloping louvres as an external screen to avoid direct viewing. · Incorporate the use of well designed screening elements to minimise views into units from public spaces and streets. · Step up or set back ground ﬂ oor units which face public streets.

Acoustic Privacy · Use noise resistant materials between units.

254 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 · Locate parking, access ways and communal open space away from bedrooms.

Energy Efﬁ ciency · Use, or provide for the future use of, renewable energy sources such as solar energy where practical. · Encourage the use of building materials which are environmentally friendly. · Encourage the use of appliances and systems which conserve water. · Decrease building operational energy requirements by incorporating low energy lighting. · Maximise the use of natural lighting and ventilation. · Design building form and fenestrations to allow sunlight into habitable rooms and private open spaces. · Design buildings and fenestrations to maximise natural ventilation. · Use textures and colours on surfaces to optimise micro climate control. · Incorporate building elements such as overhangs, vertical screens, heat absorbing materials reﬂ ective glass etc to manage micro climate of buildings.

6. DENSIFICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Many different management systems could be employed for the management of densiﬁ cation. However, the systems employed would need to match the system to be managed in terms of requisite variety. That is, the more complex the system to be managed, the more complex the management system needs to be. Different systems would also need to be employed within the public and private sectors. As any density policy is relatively complex and may require more resources than are currently available within the Municipality Systems, an option may be to establish “Special Purpose Vehicles” (SPVs) for the management and implementation of new policy and approaches to density. Management of densiﬁ cation could occur at public, private or joint management levels. Ownership of developments becomes important in the management of developments.

6.1 Private Sector Management/Initiatives Various management options are currently available for development in general and especially residential development. Ownership of units plays a large role in the various management options which could be explored for managing higher densities. The ownership options associated with higher density residential development are usually linked to the housing typology of the development. Ownership can range from freehold title (usually typologies which are freestanding) to sectional title ownership (usually related to typologies which are attached in some way or another). related to typologies which are attached in some way or another).

OCTOBER 2010 255 C4.4

SECTIONAL TITLE MANAGEMENT The Body Corporate is the collective A Sectional Title life-style brings together name given to all the owners of Units people from diverse backgrounds, in a Scheme. It comes into existence age-groups, interests and philosophies. as soon as the developer of the Often, the only common factor is ownership of a Unit in the Scheme in Scheme transfers a Unit to a new which they live. Inevitably, integrating owner. All registered owners of Units such diverse backgrounds into a stable, in a Scheme are members of the happy and successful Scheme presents Body Corporate. The Body Corporate problems. The Sectional Title Act No. controls and runs the Scheme. Day- 95 of 1986 prescribed Management and Conduct rules that apply to every to-day administration of the Scheme Sectional Title Scheme and laid down is vested in TRUSTEES who are the framework for running such a appointed by the Body Corporate. Scheme. Major decisions regarding the Scheme http://www.maxprop.co.za/needtoknow.asp are made by the Body Corporate, cited 3 April 2008 usually at the ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (AGM), or at a SPECIAL MANAGEMENT AGENTS GENERAL MEETING. At these A managing agent is a person or ﬁ rm meetings, matters which affect the that is appointed by the entity that has control of a property to manage that Scheme are discussed, Budgets are property on their behalf. The managing approved, Rules can be changed and agent is only the agent of the entity, Trustees are appointed. Each member with the contractual responsibility for of a Body Corporate is entitled to vote the management of the property. The at these meetings, providing that the ultimate responsibility for the full and proper management of the property member is not in arrears with levy will always remain with the Trustees payments or in serious breach of the and Directors of the Body Corporate or Rules. Members in default can only Home Owner’s Association. vote in certain circumstances. http://www.propertymanagementservices. An individual member’s voting power is co.za/agent.htm cited 3 April 2008 governed by the member’s percentage ownership of the common property. RESIDENTS’ ASSOCIATIONS This percentage is known as the Residents’ Associations are voluntary PARTICIPATION QUOTA. groups of residents of a geographic area (houses & complexes may join) who http://www.maxprop.co.za/needtoknow.asp, are members, paying monthly/annual cited 3 April 2008 membership fees towards the general upkeep of an area. The committee of such an association has the function to oversee day to day activities regarding security, cleaning, organization of meetings and activities for residents. http://www.sundowner.org.za/AboutUs.htm, http://www.parkhurst.org.za/membership.htm, http://www.cra.org.za/index.htm cited 5 April2008

256 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 City Improvement Districts Just as it is important to maintain developments on the inside, it is important for developments to be part of an urban area which is well functioning and maintained. City Improvement Districts are therefore areas which are maintained and ‘governed’ by a collective body of property owners which ensures that the urban environment directly relating to their properties Is well maintained.

An Improvement District is a defined geographic area within which property owners agree to pay for certain services to enhance the physical and social environment of the area. The services provided are supplementary to those provided by the local authority and usually include safety and security patrol officers, pavement cleaning, litter collection, maintenance of public space and the removal of illegal posters.

(http://www.joburgcentral.co.za/about_detail.php?PHPSESSID=9e8157ef98a0b0ff879cd19fc7ab68b5, cited 5 April 2008)

Beneﬁ ts of CIDs, as posted on http://www.joburgcentral.co.za/about_detail.php?PHPSESSID=9e8157ef98a0b0ff879 cd19fc7ab68b5, are: · The improvement district approach is holistic · Enhancement of the environment and strengthening investor conﬁ dence The improvement district supports investment by business · An improvement district creates a positive identity for the area · The improvement district offers private sector management and accountability The effectiveness of the improvement district is constantly measurable · CIDs monitor any new major developments or interventions that impact the area · Improvement districts have effective working relationships with appropriate bodies or associations · The improvement district is able to put forward ideas for change to council

CIDs have to be legislated. As such, the following steps are usually followed before CIDs can be implemented:

6.2 Public Sector Management/Initiatives Local Authorities, including the EMM, all generally experience a lack in capacity in terms of the day to day running of the Local Authority. For this reason, it is important that partnerships be developed between the public and private sectors to ensure that densiﬁ cation throughout the metropolitan area is managed efﬁ ciently. The high density developments/schemes should be managed by the developer/owner/accredited management agent. The role of the Local Authority should be to ensure that the public areas and infrastructure are maintained on a continuous basis and to assist in the setting up and management of CIDs where necessary or when assistance is requested.

In the event of the Local Authority noticing that any high density residential development

OCTOBER 2010 257 C4.4 is not being maintained at a satisfactory level (examples being that gardens aren’t maintained, security risks are detected or the buildings are in a state of disrepair), and complaints are received by the municipality, interventions may occur.

This will require that the Local Authority has in place, a capacitated Law Enforcement and Inspectorate Body which can do inspections and investigations where necessary and make recommendations on the way forward. An essential part of the Law Enforcement process is for the Local Authority to institute Municipal Courts to deal with Municipal related matters such as these. An Improvement District is a deﬁ ned geographic area within which property owners agree to pay for certain services to enhance the physical and social environment of the area. The services provided are supplementary to those provided by the local authority and usually include safety and security patrol ofﬁ cers, pavement cleaning, litter collection, maintenance of public space and the removal of illegal posters.

6.3 Aesthetics The purpose, function and objectives of the Aesthetics Committee (AC), as well as the members of this committee, are discussed overleaf. Prior to the establishment of such a committee, of great importance is the development of an Aesthetics Manual. This is to be used by the developer, to develop his/her higher density residential development’s aesthetic and integration concept, as well as by the Aesthetics Committee, in reviewing development concepts of higher density residential developments.

6.3.1 Aesthetics Manual The Aesthetics Manual will be an important tool to be used by developers to understand and see what the standards and outcomes of these types of development are for the EMM. It should give an overall vision of these developments and provide examples of what should be taken into account in terms of the broader development vision of the EMM. It should further emphasise, through the examples, the feel and nature of the desired urban form and the interaction between uses and between developments to ensure a diverse and rich urban environment.

The Aesthetics Manual will only be used to assist decision makers in assessing development concepts on merit. Therefore, the decision makers, who will form part of the Aesthetics Committee, should be professionals and ofﬁ cials in the built environment, who have a sound knowledge of local area dynamics and character.

The Aesthetics Manual should build on and be a continuation of Section 5 of this report where the generic design guidelines are applied and expanded on in more details and illustrated in a more graphic manner. Examples of acceptable and unacceptable densiﬁ cation developments should be used as an additional means of illustrating the desirable and undesirable means of densiﬁ cation.

258 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 6.3.2 Aesthetics Committee The Purpose of the Aesthetics Committee The Aesthetics Committee should review development concepts at the stage of Site Development Plan evaluation. This should be after an application for higher density residential development is approved in terms of town planning standards and requirements as stipulated in the Town Planning/Zoning Scheme.

The Aesthetics Committee will review the development concept/Site Development Plan in terms of the guidelines in the Aesthetics Manual. The Aesthetics Committee will also review the building plans once submitted, to ensure the aesthetics and design guidelines are adhered to.

The Members of the Aesthetics Committee The Aesthetics Committee should be a body of professionals, involved in the built environment, as well as local authority ofﬁ cials who have a local area knowledge and knowledge of the applications. Professionals could include Architects, Engineers, Town and Development Planners, Urban Designers, Landscape Architects and Transportation Engineers. The mix of independent professionals and City Ofﬁ cials will ensure a balanced view regarding broader development concepts of the City, as well as more localised issues.

Aesthetics Committee Process(es) The Aesthetics Committee should review design issues in terms of higher density residential developments. Therefore, the Aesthetics Committee will only become part of the densiﬁ cation process after the Town Planning Application has been assessed and approved.

The Aesthetics Committee will therefore assess the following, in terms of subsequent application procedures as contained in the Town Planning/Zoning Scheme: 7. The Site Development Plan · This stage should involve the assessment of the development in terms of the Aesthetics Manuals’s guidelines for integration and compatibility with the broader urban fabric and general design parameters. 8. The Building Plans · This stage will focus on detailed design issues related to the aesthetics of the building and its relationship to the surrounding properties and the street.

OCTOBER 2010 259 C4.4 7. INCENTIVES

It is imperative that higher densities be sought throughout the EMM as limited developable land is available for development. Current ﬁ gures and trends illustrate that increased densities must be sought in strategic locations to not only make the urban fabric more sustainable but also ensure that the population growth rates and needs are accommodated for in the future.

As such, current residents and developers should be ‘enticed’ to develop at higher densities. Increased densities will not only increase property values and returns on investments, but will further expand the rates base of the EMM. Therefore, the following proposals are made to the EMM to incentivise higher density developments: a) Increase in bulk/FAR to be given to developers at discounted service contribution and rates in the event that densities exceed a minimum set requirement in a category.

a) In each of the categories described in the document, minimum densities have been set which must be met in the event of development applications being prepared and submitted. An incentive policy should be developed where applicants/developers receive an increase in FAR at discounted rates and services contributions if the minimum set density plus an additional percentage over and above the set minimum is reached.

b) The sale of Council owned land at a discounted price in strategic locations for the development of higher density residential development only.

b) In the event that Council owned land is strategically located and no plans exist for the development of the land by Council, the option of selling the land at a discounted rate to a residential developer may be explored.

c) Urban Regeneration Incentives should be developed for redevelopment of inner city areas where residential stock exceeds 60% of the development.

c) Urban Renewal Tax (as per the Income Tax Act) should be applied in the event of urban regeneration in CBD areas. Further to this rate deductions can be given in the event where a property has been redeveloped and caters for more that 70% residential use.

d) Special incentives to offset the development and operational cost of higher density development in dolomitic areas. All such development must take place in accordance with the set standards for development in dolomitic areas. e) Decision making regarding exemption from or relaxation in the payment of Parks Contributions.

It is proposed that an appropriate incentive scheme for higher density residential

260 OCTOBER 2010 C4.4 developments be developed in conjunction with the EMM Finance Department should the need arise.

8. CONCLUSION

Densifi cation is an activity which must be conducted in a holistic, integrated manner. Therefore social, environmental and infrastructural issues must be understood and provided for during the course of densifi cation. This Strategy has shown that densifi cation must occur in order for Ekurhuleni to be sustainable and able to house all of its residents in the long term.

This Strategy has not focused on site or area specifi c densifi cation, but has rather proposed principles to which densifi cation should adhere, in order to achieve the vision and desired urban morphology of a sustainable, well balanced city. Cognisance must be taken that not all areas are conducive to densifi cation and that areas have different social, economic and environmental issues to cope with in the greater development paradigm. Therefore, the principles of this Strategy must be transferred to and applied to other spatial plans of more detail, to begin to translate what this Strategy wishes to achieve, across a metro wide scale on local area levels.

This Strategy highlights density targets within strategic areas and sets minimum requirements, which could evolve over the medium to long term as densiﬁ cation is experienced and measured. Densiﬁ cation is not an instant type of development with instant results. Therefore, it is not the aim of this document to achieve the set targets in the short term.

By increasing densities, the municipality will further encourage developers and land owners to utilise their land to the maximum potential and also assist in the redevelopment of Ekurhuleni. Homogenous densiﬁ cation is not encouraged through this process, but a diverse range of design guidelines should provide developers with various options to ensure that good quality living environments are achieved, which cater for a diverse range of people.

The management of these higher density residential developments is of critical importance. Good management of these developments will not only enhance the urban environment, but also the lives of the occupants of these developments. This should be a co-operative venture between the public and private sectors, which will enhance the governance of the urban form. In conclusion, the following recommendations to the right are made:

RECOMMENDATIONS 1. THAT the Ekurhuleni Residential Densiﬁ cation Strategy, 2008 be APPROVED. 2. THAT the following policies be RESCINDED during the drafting of the LSDFs for those areas:

OCTOBER 2010 261 C4.4 · ‘Residential 1’ Densifi cation Policy for Meyersdal Study Area; · Residential Densifi cation in Alberton (21 May 1996); · Residential Densifi cation in New Redruth: Policy; · Densifi cation Policy for Multi-Unit Residential Development in Bedfordview. 3. THAT all approved LSDFs are to BE RESPECTED and are not to be overridden by the Ekurhuleni Residential Densifi cation Strategy, 2008 until they are reviewed. 4. THAT all future LSDFs: · IDENTIFY developable land for higher density residential development; · DETERMINE base densities in each LSDF area; · APPLY the Ekurhuleni Residential Densifi cation Strategy, 2008 to each LSDF area. 5. THAT other EMM Departmental Policies BE ALIGNED with the Residential Densifi cation Strategy. 6. THAT an Aesthetics Committee BE ESTABLISHED. 7. THAT a manual BE DEVELOPED for the Aesthetics Committee based on the guidelines in this Strategy. 8. THAT all projects and programmes listed in the implementation plan BE IMPLEMENTED by the relevant departments.

262 OCTOBER 2010 C5 C5: The Following Policy Documents are available from the Environmental Development Department:

1. State of Environment Report 2004

The First Year State of the Environment Report for 2003/2004 was compiled to provide information to decision-makers to enable them to make informed decisions about the environment in Ekurhuleni. The report is designed as a tool to measure changes in the condition of the environment. It asks and attempts to answer the following questions: • What causes environmental change? • What is the current condition of the environment? • How does this condition affect other components of the environment? • What are we as society doing about the environment?

The provision of this information is intended to set the basis for the development of policy and strategies. It is also intended to allow the monitoring of progress and performance of implemented policy and programmes, and to raise public awareness of environmental issues.

2. Ekurhuleni Environmental Management Framework 2007

Previously Environmental Management Framework (North) and Draft Environmental Management Framework (East and South)

The Ekurhuleni EMF was approved and Gazetted by the MEC of GDARD on 17 June 2008.

The Environmental Impact Regulations (Regulations in terms of Chapter 5 of the National Environmental Management Act, 1998 (Act 107 of 1998), were published on 21 April 2006 in Government Gazettes R385, R386 and R387. These regulations came into effect on 3 July 2006 and make provision for environmental management frameworks (EMFs) as regulatory instruments. EMFs assist MECs responsible for the environment and other government decision-makers to make informed decisions on environmental matters.

The EMF provides a framework that sets out the environmental attributes of Ekurhuleni in a way that determines environmental opportunities and constraints for development of the area while Spatial Development Frameworks (SDFs) provides frameworks for interpreting the development vision, planning principles and structuring elements of Ekurhuleni. The EMF, in terms of the Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations, 2006, must be taken into account in the consideration of applications for environmental authorisation.

OCTOBER 2010 263 C5 3. EMM Air Quality Management Plan 2005

The Air Quality Management Plan was designed with the vision of attainment and maintenance of acceptable air quality for the beneﬁ t of present and future generations.

In order to ensure that this can be achieved the plan describes the key goals which must be considered in order to achieve the vision. These main goals to be achieved by the EMM through its development, implementation, review and revision of air quality management plans are as follows: • To achieve and sustain acceptable air quality levels throughout Ekurhuleni. • To minimize the negative impacts of air pollution on health, wellbeing and the environment. • To promote the reduction of greenhouse gases so as to support the council’s climate change protection programme. • To reduce the extent of ozone depleting substances in line with national and international requirements. Speciﬁ c objectives include: • To promote cleaner production and continuous improvement in best practice as it pertains to air pollution prevention and minimisation. • To promote energy efﬁ ciency within all sectors including industrial, commercial, institutional, mining, transportation and domestic energy use.

4. State of Energy Report 2005

The aim of the project is to provide a status report on the use of energy in EMM, which includes an assessment of the type of data available relating to energy supply and demand by energy carrier and by energy user.

The report ﬁ rst provides a background to EMM, giving a brief overview of its organization into Service Delivery Regions and Areas as well as its overall demographic and economic proﬁ le. The section also provides a short discussion on energy in order to put the reader in context. The second section provides a thorough review of legislation and regulation pertinent to energy in South Africa and in Ekurhuleni, in order to give a full picture of the enabling environment. The third section provides an overview of the sources of data and the validity and quality of data collected for each component of the Report. Section 4 then provides an energy balance as an overview of energy use by energy carrier, by users (demand sectors) and supply. Sections 5 and 6 detail energy demand by carrier and user and energy supply by carrier respectively. Section 7 provides a thorough assessment of environmental issues relating to energy in EMM. Section 8 then presents a detailed discussion on the State of Energy in EMM, integrating the observations from the previous sections and providing conclusions and

264 OCTOBER 2010 C5 recommendations for future action by EMM in support of the preparation of a detailed Energy Strategy.

5. EMM Energy and Climate Change Strategy 2006

The report begins with a brief introduction to the strategy, the goals are explicitly related and the deﬁ nition and objectives of the energy and climate strategy are deﬁ ned.

The second section looks at the use of energy within the City of Ekurhuleni. It highlights the salient aspects of the energy demand within the City and determines the baseline of the current energy conditions. It looks at two common scenarios, namely the business as usual, which is used to draw a distinct picture of where we are heading, and the sustainable future, where we should be aiming for in order to achieve energy efﬁ ciency.

The strategy then sums up the vision and goals of the strategy. This is done in a clear and concise manner in order to ensure understandability and directness. The visions and goals for the City are placed in the greater mission for the City and are closely aligned with the City’s overarching aims and objectives. This is necessary to ensure realization of the goals of the strategy. The placement of the goals in three distinct spheres, i.e. Physical, Economic and Social, was done in order to ensure that the goals could be easily understood and integrated with the different process, roles and responsibilities that are driven within the different departments of the City’s governance.

The fourth section is directly linked to the Energy use of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality (EMM) as a governing organization. The section highlights key issues that relate to the energy use within the organization. It further looks at ways in which the organization can achieve more efﬁ cient energy use and reduce the consumption of energy, in the section titled “Focus areas of the strategy in EMM”.

The following sections are divided per sector. The primary sectors that the strategy has deﬁ ned include the following: 1. Residential 2. Transport 3. Industry, Mining and Commerce 4. Agriculture

These sectors are defi ned in terms of key issues that relate to the energy sector. Each section has a focus area which sums up the mitigation measures that should be implored in order to attain the goals of the strategy and reach greater energy effi ciency. The fi nal section of the strategy gives an overview of the energy supply of the City

OCTOBER 2010 265 C5 of Ekurhuleni. Its key objective is show the need to move away from existing energy supply methods and promote renewable energy sources and clean green methods. It however, still understands the need to electrify households within the City in order to reach poverty alleviation goals. Thus, the alignment of the section with the other goals of the City has been addressed clearly in the section.

6. Environmental Policy for EMM

The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality in delivering services to the community strives to maintain and promote sustainable environmental management by carefully blending ecological, social, and economic considerations into our future planning and decision making processes. The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality will balance the interests of the present with those of future generations, and ultimately, will strive to reduce the environmental impacts of current operations, activities, products, and services. Within the framework of our Environmental Policy the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality commits to: • Comply with all applicable international conventions, national environmental legislation and policies, regulations, codes of practice, and other environmental requirements to which the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality subscribes. To achieve and maintain compliance, to develop and maintain environmental management systems for identifying relevant requirements and for monitoring performance of related activities. • Protect and manage the environment, conserve resources, minimise asset losses, improve our environmental performance, minimise environmental impact; improve health, prevent pollution, encourage avoidance, reuse and recycling, conserve our natural resources and proactively reduce environmental impact. • Improve the quality standard of the environment through partnerships with community organisations, government agencies, customers and Interested and Affected Parties (I&APs). • Foster openness and communication with all stakeholders in order to share relevant information, contribute to the development sustainable solutions, and respond in a constructive and timely manner. • Implement an Environmental Management System (EMS) to enhance and improve the environment within the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality.

266 OCTOBER 2010 C6 C6: The Following Policy Documents are available from the Economic Development Department

• Tourism Strategic Framework • Ekurhuleni Local Economic Development Policy • Ekurhuleni Economic Strategy • LED Policy, Strategy and Implementation Framework • Agricultural Development Policy, Strategy and Process

OCTOBER 2010 267 C7 C7: The Following Policy Documents are available from the Housing Department

• FAST TRACKING A HOUSING SOLUTION • THE DEVELOPMENT OF INTEGRATED SUSTAINABLE HUMAN SETTLEMENTS IN EMM • Towards a Strategy for the Transformation of the Ekurhuleni Hostels • The provision of Basic Services to Informal Settlements • The Provision of Essential Services to Housing Projects • Proposed Framework to Implement the People’s Housing Process in Ekurhuleni • Business Plan: People’s Housing Process • Leeuwpoort Development Plan and implementation Strategy • Farramere Development Guidelines • Municipal Housing Development Plan

268 OCTOBER 2010 C8 C8: The Following Policy Documents are available from the Infrastructure Services Department

• Current Public Transport Record for 2006 : Volume 1: Main Report • Ekurhuleni Integrated Transport Plan • Appropriate development of infrastructure on dolomite: Manual for consultants, PW344 June 2006, • OUTDOOR ADVERTISING CONTROL • POLICY AND GUIDELINES FOR THE RESTRICTION OF ACCESS TO PUBLIC PLACES FOR SAFETY AND SECURITY PURPOSES • Regional Land Use and Transportation Model for the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality • Road Hierachy Plan • Investigation for the Establishment of a Transport Authority for EMM • Bicycle Strategy • Pedestrian Safety Improvement Business Plan • Service Contribution Policy • Water Services Master Plan • Electricity Master Plan • Dolomite Risk Management Plan [Executive Summary below] • PW344 – Appropriate Development of infrastructure on Dolomite: manual for Consultants, June 2006. • SANS 1936 – Part 3 (in draft)

DOLOMITE RISK MANAGEMENT PLAN: EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Background A large portion (50%) of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality is underlain by dolomite that need to be managed, controlled and developed in a manner to prevent the formation of sinkholes and dolines that can have a detrimental impact on infrastructure and human life. Sinkholes and dolines are triggered by one of two factors: 1) Ingress of water: Leaking wet services, poor surface water run-off (ponding of water) normally aggravated during the rainy season; 2) Groundwater drawdown: Cavities within dolomite is exposed and can accommodate material from above, due to the drawdown of the water table previously located above the cavities that stabilized the area.

Aim with the dolomite risk management plan As part of the Dolomite Risk Management Plan (DRMP) of Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality, the purpose of the Dolomite Risk Management Section (DRMS)

OCTOBER 2010 269 C8 functioning under the Department Roads, Transport and Civil Works is: • Township Applications:. The evaluation of and comments on the submission of dolomite stability and geotechnical investigations for new developments, to ensure the development is in accordance with the associated risk of the site to be developed. Enforce standards and specifi cations on wet services according to PW344 guidelines to reduce the risk of sinkhole and doline formation. Inform developers on dolomite legislation, standards and procedures to be followed (i.e. SANS 1936). Advice developers on mitigation measures to be taken in areas prone to sinkhole and doline formation on commercial or industrial sites proposed for development and evaluate the measures taken before development can be approved. Evaluation of site specifi c Dolomite Risk Management Plans submitted by developers to be enforced on a site to manage and reduce the risk of sinkhole and doline formation. Provide comments to other EMM Departments in terms of dolomite issues. • Dolomite stability and geotechnical investigations on all EMM related developments: Investigate, evaluate, design and develop all new council owned infrastructure in accordance with current standards and regulations. • Sinkhole inspections, investigations and rehabilitation: Inspection of potential hazardous conditions reported by the public or Ekurhuleni offi cials is followed up by an inspection to determine the cause and extent of the problem and if it is dolomite related. If the cause is related to an EMM leaking wet services further actions include a detailed sinkhole/doline investigation (i.e. gravity survey and drilling) followed by rehabilitation of the affected area and replacement of wet services according to PW344 standards by reputable earthworks contractors. • Dolomite database: EMM in association with their consultants developed a dolomite database, including existing dolomite stability information obtained from the Council for Geoscience and EMM consultants, such as, gravity data, boreholes, regional groundwater levels, wet services layouts, Inherent Risk Classes of areas and development potential where adequate information is available, position and cause of sinkholes and dolines. The purpose of the database is to manage the dolomite risk within EMM, including the replacement of wet services in areas demarcated as having a high risk of sinkhole and doline formation and the re-location of people located within high risk areas not suitable for residential use. • Dolomite Risk Management Plans: Monitoring of groundwater levels on a three month interval on sites where dewatering will have a detrimental impact on the stability of sites and where NHBRC approval was based on the assurance that such monitoring will be done by EMM. The DRMS of EMM is currently in the process to establish a groundwater monitoring programme in association with Authorities such as the Department of Water Affairs and the Council for Geoscience. The control and monitoring of groundwater is required by all Municipalities underlain by dolomite. Currently a large number of developments in EMM, especially residential developments will not be approved by the Council for Geoscience until such a monitoring programme is in place and can be proven to be functional. Additional

270 OCTOBER 2010 C8 groundwater monitoring boreholes (totalling 50) had been drilled in the Southern Region of Ekurhuleni as part of their long term groundwater monitoring programme ensuring that development can take place in this Region. A groundwater monitoring drilling programme is still required for the Northern and Eastern Region of the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality region. • Public Awareness and participation: EMM ofﬁ cials constantly distribute CD’s, brochures and pamphlets to schools, libraries, clinic’s and Customer Care Centres. Meetings are held with affected communities located within areas affected by dolomite. • By-Laws: The DRMS of EMM is in the process to formulate by-laws applicable to developments on land underlain by dolomite.

SANS 1936 – Part 3

1. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS ON DOLOMITE o “Proposed method for dolomite land hazard and risk assessment in South Africa.” by Buttrick, Van Schalkwyk, Kleywegt and Watermeyer 2001, Journal of the South African Institution of Civil Engineering, Volume 43, Number 2. o Generic Speciﬁ cation GFSH-2, National Department of Housing Speciﬁ cation, “Geotechnical site investigations for housing development”, September 2002. o NHBRC Home Building Manual, Parts 1 and 2, Revision 1, dated February 1999. o Council for Geoscience, 2007, entitled: Consultants Guide: Approach to Sites on Dolomite Land. o PW344 – Department of Public Works, 2006, entitled: Appropriate Development of Infrastructure on Dolomite. Manual for Consultants. o South African National Standard SANS 1936 Parts 1 – 4 (in draft).

2. METHODS AND PROCEDURES ON DOLOMITE

2.1 Dolomite Risk Characterisation Procedure

The available information, geophysical data, borehole data and geohydrological information gathered during the investigation has been pooled and reviewed permitting the formulation of a perspective concerning the characterisation of the stability of the site.

The predominant mobilising agencies considered in this investigation are major groundwater level ﬂ uctuations (>6m), ingress water, ground vibrations and gravity. Use is made of a generalised list of evaluation factors to evaluate the risk of sinkhole and doline formation. These factors are as follows: - Receptacle development;

OCTOBER 2010 271 C8 - Mobilising agencies, particularly ingress water from leaking services; - Potential sinkhole development space; - Nature of the blanketing layer; - Mobilisation potential of the blanketing layer; - Bedrock morphology.

Receptacles or disseminated receptacles refer to any voids or cavities in the dolomite bedrock or in the overburden capable of receiving mobilised materials. Receptacles are assumed to be present as no reliable geophysical tool exists to determine the location of these features. Consequently the information gathered from boreholes, including penetration times, air loss, hammer action, etc, combined with geophysical and geological information are used to formulate an impression of the degree of cavitation.

The potential sinkhole development space, where used, refers to the expected maximum size sinkhole that conservatively may be anticipated to be generated if sustained ingress of water were to occur. This factor is related to the depth of the receptacles or disseminated receptacles. The gravity survey, combined with borehole information strongly guides the appraisal of this factor. The nature of the material covering the receptacles, be they above or in the bedrock, determines the susceptibility of the subsurface material to erosion by ingress water. The presence of materials such as shales or intrusives, which can act as aquitards, serve to reduce the mobilisation potential and enhance the stability. In the case of dramatic groundwater level fl uctuations the susceptibility of the soil material to mobilisation (i.e. consolidation settlement - doline formation, or ravelling and arch failure - sinkhole formation, due to pore pressure changes in soils), is strongly infl uenced by the position of the original groundwater level in the subsurface profi le.

In view of the factors discussed above the following characteristics have been extracted from the gathered information during the assessment process: - Borehole position relative to the gravity data. - Collar elevation. - Depth to dolomite bedrock. - Depth to potential receptacles. - Depth to present groundwater level. - Nature and thickness of blanketing layer i.e. material type, penetration times, etc. - Position of the bedrock with respect to the present and original groundwater level. - Thickness and nature of the soil materials above and below the groundwater level.

Risk of sinkhole and doline formation is expressed in three broad categories, namely low, medium and high risk areas. The following reference to incidences, gives a

272 OCTOBER 2010 C8 perspective of the magnitude of problems encountered in each of the of risk zones in research areas. It is important to note that these ﬁ gures are largely derived from developments not effectively and appropriately designed or maintained.

Risk Explanation LOW There is little chance of a sinkhole or doline occurring. MEDIUM There is a moderate chance of a sinkhole or doline occurring. HIGH There is a great chance of a sinkhole or doline occurring.

The study area is characterised in terms of eight standard Inherent Risk Classes. These classes denote the chance of a sinkhole or doline occurring as well as its likely size (diameter). The terminology used in terms of likely size is deﬁ ned as follows: Maximum Diameter at Ground Surface Terminology < 2 m Small-size 2-5 m Medium-size 5-15 m Large-size > 15 m Very large-size

The larger the Inherent Risk Class number, the greater the chance of a sinkhole or doline occurring and the larger its potential size should it occur. The meaning/deﬁ nition of each Inherent Risk Class is as follows:

Inherent Risk Class Characterisation Of Area Class 1 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a low Inherent Risk of sinkhole and doline formation (all sizes). Class 2 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a medium Inherent Risk of small-size sinkhole and doline formation. Class 3 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a medium Inherent Risk of up to medium-size sinkhole and doline formation. Class 4 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a medium Inherent Risk of up to large-size sinkhole and doline formation. Class 5 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a high Inherent Risk of small-size sinkhole and doline formation. Class 6 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a high Inherent Risk of up to medium-size sinkhole and doline formation. Class 7 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a high Inherent Risk of up to large-size sinkhole and doline formation. Class 8 Areas Areas characterised as refl ecting a high Inherent Risk of up to very large-size sinkhole and doline formation.

OCTOBER 2010 273 C8 The defi nitions above are summaries of the Inherent Risk Class table presented in the 2001 paper referenced in Section 1. Inherent Risk is defi ned in terms of ingress water and groundwater level drawdown refl ected by two Inherent Risk Class designations separated by a double forward slash-

Inherent Risk Class (Ingress water) // Inherent Risk Class (groundwater level drawdown)

As an example, a designation of 1//8 indicates that the zone displays a low Inherent Risk with respect to water ingress but a high Inherent Risk with respect to groundwater level drawdown.

Further combinations may be appropriate:

As an example, a designation of Inherent Risk Class 1//1/4/8 indicates that the zone displays a low Inherent Risk with respect to water ingress but a low to high Inherent Risk with respect to groundwater level drawdown. This defi nition may, for example, be necessary in cases where groundwater was not encountered or the original groundwater level is not known and dolomite bedrock could not be confi rmed. Zones delineated on a site may be combinations of the above. In some instances, the Inherent Risk Classes are indicated with the primary zone description given fi rst followed by a suffi x in brackets. The primary Inherent Risk Class describes the predominant characterisation of the zone and the suffi x describes the characterisation of anticipated pockets or small sub-areas within the zone:

As an example, a designation of Inherent Risk Class 8(4) indicates that the zone predominantly displays a high Inherent Risk for up to very large-size sinkhole and doline formation with anticipated pockets or small sub-areas of Class 4 i.e. displaying a medium risk for up to large-size sinkhole and doline formation.

Development design is determined by the primary Inherent Risk Class: As an example, in a zone designated as Inherent Risk Class 4(1)//1, the Inherent Risk Class 4 will be the determining Risk Class

2.2 Monitoring Designations

According to SANS 1936 Part 4 (in draft) Monitoring Designations must be identiﬁ ed and delineated according to the Inherent Risk characterisation of the site and knowledge of problems which could impact on the infrastructure on site.

The generic Monitoring Activities considered appropriate for dolomite site are as follows:

274 OCTOBER 2010 C8 Annotation Activity A Visual inspections of ground, structures and above ground infrastructure (e.g. roads, storm water canals, ditches). B Visual inspection of stormwater systems crossing the site for blockages. C Testing of wet-services for leaks. D Monitoring of structures and ground levels. E Monitoring of the groundwater level.

The generic Activity reactions are as follows:

Annotation Reaction A Any evidence of cracking or ground settlement should immediately be reported and investigated. B Any evidence of blockages should be reported and cleared immediately. C Any leaks to be reported and repaired immediately. D Any evidence of movement must be reported and investigated. E Evidence of lowering must be reported to the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry.

If there is no evidence, the result should be recorded and the Activity repeated at the recommended frequency.

Activities A to C are intended to monitor, control and therefore prevent concentrated ingress of water.

Activity D aims to monitor the potential effects of triggering mechanisms (i.e. water ingress or groundwater level drawdown) by means of, for example, precision leveling.

Activity E is intended to monitor groundwater level drawdown.

The Frequency with which each Activity is to be performed is selected from the following categories:

Annotation Frequency ()DAILY Activities to be undertaken daily. ()WEEKLY Activities to be undertaken weekly. ()1 Activities to be undertaken once a month.

OCTOBER 2010 275 C8 Annotation Frequency ()3 Activities to be undertaken quarterly. ()6 Activities to be undertaken bi-annually. ()12 Activities to be undertaken annually. ()24 Activities to be undertaken once every two years. ()0 NO ACTION REQUIRED ()tbd TO BE DETERMINED

Areas of ‘no Inherent Risk’ require no monitoring at all from a dolomite risk management perspective. For example, a site on granite rock or Witwatersrand Supergroup rocks may be designated as (ABCDE)0 indicating that no action is required to lower the risk of dolomite related instability.

Areas of ‘low Inherent Risk’ are assigned a low priority and require basic monitoring and maintenance activities at long intervals. For example, where a site is located on thick Karoo Supergroup rocks (in excess of 30 metres) the section may be designated as (ABC)24(DE)0 indicating that all identiﬁ ed activities which control ingress water need only be undertaken once every two years with precision structure and ground levelling and groundwater monitoring not being required. However, where such rocks overlie dolomite residuum below the original groundwater level a designation of (ABC)24E1 may apply, indicating that activities which control the ingress of concentrated water remain necessary once every two years but groundwater level monitoring is critical and should be undertaken once a month.

Areas of ‘high Inherent Risk’ and therefore high priority in terms of monitoring and maintenance should receive attention more frequently. Such areas are typically characterised by: • Metastable subsurface conditions or latent sinkhole formation. • High risk conditions. • Poor subsurface conditions e.g. cavitation, sample or air loss. • Previous sinkhole or doline formation. • Palaeo-sinkhole or palaeo-doline structures. • Geological contact areas. • Fault zones. • Anticipated ground settlement or • Ponding of water, etc.

For example, an area in which various sinkholes have already been reported and where the area is designated as high risk or even medium to high risk from an ingress of water perspective a (ABCD)3(E)0 or even (AB)daily(D)3(E)0 designation may apply,

276 OCTOBER 2010 C8 indicating the need to undertake activities controlling ingress of water quarterly, or even daily, with no action required to monitor the groundwater level.

In areas where it was not possible to assign an Inherent Risk characterisation a difﬁ culty presents itself in terms of the determination of monitoring and the frequency thereof. In such a case a designation (ABCDE)tbd is assigned, indicating that insufﬁ cent data exists, the monitoring activities are yet to be determined.

3. DOLOMITE STABILITY OF A SITE AND POTENTIAL LAND-USE

3.1 Dolomite Stability Characterisation of a site

Development normally results in a disturbance of the meta-stable conditions in the dolomite environment. Consequently, factors such as the basic design of services, construction and service installation procedures, and ongoing infrastructure maintenance programmes are key elements in the overall strategy to reduce the probability of generating ground movement events. Risk management consists of key elements such as implementation of precautionary measures to prevent the concentrated ingress of water into the ground, monitoring actions to detect problems which could lead to ground movement and maintenance of infrastructure.

3.2 Suitability of the site for development

According to the provisional SANS 1936 Part 1 (subject to ratiﬁ cation) the development types suitable for the various Inherent Risk Classes (IRC) are:

IRC Permissible Land Usage Conditions 1 A1 – A2 D2 A3 D1/D2 C1 D3 WITH FI C2 – C5 - C6 D3 WITH FI C7 & C8 D2/D3 WITH FI RH1 – RH3 D2/D3 WITH FI RN1 – RN4 D2/D3 WITH FI RL1 – RL3 D2/D3 WITH FI 2 - 4 A2 D2 A3 D1/D2 C1 – C7 D3 WITH FI

OCTOBER 2010 277 C8 IRC Permissible Land Usage Conditions C8 (in dry areas with deep groundwater D3 WITH FI [BASEMENT] levels) RH2 – RH3 D3 WITH FI RN1 – RN4 D3 WITH FI RL2 – RL3 D3 WITH FI 5A2 D3 A3 D1/D2 C1 – C7 D3 WITH FI RH3 D3 WITH FI [BASEMENT] RN3 – RN4 (D4/D3 WITH FI) 6A2 D3 A3 D1/D2 C2, C4, C5 D3 WITH FI C7 D3 WITH FI 7 A2 D3/D4 A3 D1/D2 C5, C7 D3 WITH FI 8 A2 D3/D4 A3 D1/D2

Agricultural, recreational and private and public open spaces A1 Agricultural that requires intensive irrigation excluding fl ood irrigation. A2 Agricultural that requires limited irrigation. Botanical gardens, sports fi elds, driving ranges, golf courses, parkland and public open space. A3 Agricultural that does not require irrigation in any form or the storage of water. Parkland and public open space that are not irrigated and grazing pastures. Commercial and miscellaneous non-residential usages C1 Places of detention, police stations, hospitals, hostels, hotels and institutional homes for the handicapped or aged with populations not exceeding those calculated in accordance with Regulation A21 of the National Building Regulations. C2 Railway stations, shops, wholesale stores, offi ces. C3 Places of worship, theatrical, indoor sports or public assembly venues, other institutional land uses, such as universities, schools, colleges, libraries, exhibition halls and museums.

278 OCTOBER 2010 C8 C4 High rise commercial developments with populations not exceeding those calculated in accordance with Regulation A21 of the National Building Regulations. C5 Light (dry) industrial developments, dry manufacturing, commercial uses such as warehousing, packaging C6 Fuel depots, processing plants or any other areas for the storage of liquids. C7 Outdoor storage facilities, stock yards, container depots. C8 Waste sites, cemeteries, slimes dams Low Rise Dwelling Units RL1 < 3 Storeys with 80 - 120 units per hectare and a population not exceeding 600 people per hectare. RL2 < 3 Storeys with 40 - 80 units per hectare and a population not exceeding 400 people per hectare. RL3 < 3 Storeys with <40 units per hectare and a population not exceeding 200 people per hectare. Dwelling Houses RN1 26 to 60 dwelling houses per hectare with stands >150m2, and a population of <300 people per hectare. RN2 10 to 25 dwelling houses per hectare with stands > 300m2, and a population of <200 people per hectare. RN3 2 to 10 dwelling houses per hectare with 1000m2 to 4000m2 stands, and a population of <60 people per hectare. RN4 Small holdings, with up to 2 stands per hectare with stands >4000m2 stands and a population of <25 people per hectare. High Rise Dwelling Units RH1 >3 Storeys with a population of < 1500 people per hectare. RH2 >3 Storeys with a coverage ratio of <0,4, no higher than 10 storeys, and a population of < 800 people per hectare. RH3 >3 Storeys with a coverage ratio of <0,3, no higher than 10 storeys, and a population of < 600 people per hectare. Note: FI-Subject to Footprint investigations

The deﬁ nition for the D designation referred to above, as deﬁ ned in Table 8, Section 2, Part 1 of the NHBRC Home Building Manual, Revision 1, dated February 1999, are as follows:

OCTOBER 2010 279 C8 Dolomite Description Area Designation D1 No precautionary measures are required to permit the construction of housing units due to the geological setting. D2 The risk of sinkhole and doline formation is adjusted to be such that only general precautionary measures, which are intended to prevent the concentrated ingress of water into the ground, are required to permit the construction of housing units. D3 The risk of sinkhole and doline formation is adjusted to be such that precautionary measures, in addition to those pertaining to the prevention of concentrated ingress of water into the ground, are required to permit the construction of housing units. D4 The risk of sinkhole and doline formation is such that precautionary measures cannot adequately reduce the risk to acceptable limits so as to permit the construction of housing units, or the precautionary measures which are required are impracticable to implement.

Rationally designed foundations will be required based on site-speciﬁ c footprint geotechnical investigations for multi-storey and commercial structures

3.3 Minimum standards of precautionary measures

Development of dolomite sites are subject to the application of precautionary measures. The minimum standards of water precautionary measures are outlined in the Department of Public Work’s Consultants Manual entitled: “Department of Public Works: Appropriate development of infrastructure on dolomite: Manual for consultants”, dated June 2006.

3.4 Maintenance Strategy

The subsurface conditions noted during these investigations, necessitates the introduction of a pro-active maintenance strategy for water bearing infrastructure. This maintenance strategy and precautionary measures provided above should be adhered to in order to reduce the probability of the occurrence of ground movement events. It should be emphasised that the formation of sinkholes and dolines can only be prevented in this area, by the implementation of a strict maintenance system. Although the primary objective of such a maintenance strategy is to reduce the probability of ground movement there are other important beneﬁ ts, inter alia:

• a reduction in bulk water wastage by timeous maintenance; • avoiding crises expenditure;

280 OCTOBER 2010 C8 • reducing pollution of the aquifer; • involving the community in order to enhance the exchange of information; • developing and evaluating performance criteria in conjunction with the potential stability characterisation, permitting the identiﬁ cation of sub-areas in the township which should be prioritised for service maintenance or replacement.

3.5 Groundwater abstraction

This study conﬁ rms the previously stipulated regional risk management principle that a blanket ban should be placed on the drilling of boreholes for the abstraction of groundwater. Abstraction within urban development’s underlain by dolomite should not be permitted. Regional or local dewatering will impact negatively on the stability of the region and portions of these areas.

3.6 Ongoing monitoring of groundwater levels on and in the immediate vicinity of sites

Based on the results of this study it is recommended that the local authority responsible for development on dolomite in future should ensure the proposed programme of monitoring groundwater levels is implemented. A number of monitoring boreholes should be drilled at selected strategic locations in the area to monitor groundwater levels.

It is essential that the following steps be taken as part of the Dolomite Risk Management Strategy for this region:

• The Local Council should pass a resolution committing itself to the establishment of monitoring wells in the area of the proposed development and to the ongoing measuring of groundwater levels in these wells. In addition, records will be kept of these groundwater levels and the Department of Water Affairs will immediately be notifi ed in the event of a fall in the groundwater level. It is suggested that fl uctuations in excess of 3m are reported to the Department of Water Affairs until the natural seasonal fl uctuation is established, thereafter in excess of 1m fl uctuations should be report. • The Local Council should also keep the Council for Geoscience informed of any communications with the Department of Water Affairs. The Local Authority should designate an offi cial who is responsible for ensuring that the monitoring work is undertaken at the requisite time intervals and that records are kept of the measurements. The Department of Water Affairs and the Council for Geoscience must be notifi ed of the date of commencement of the monitoring process.

OCTOBER 2010 281 C8 3.7 Database of ground movement events and structural damage

It is recommended that a database of ground movement events and any structural damage that may occur in future should be established. Detailed historical records of this nature are most useful in developing a clearer perspective on the stability situation on sites and management of a pro-active maintenance strategy.

3.8 Veriﬁ cation of soil and stability conditions

All service trenches must be inspected during construction to permit further detailed veriﬁ cation of stability conditions e.g. attention must be paid to the presence of potential paleo-sinkhole conditions in trenches and open works.

The Specialist must document the ﬁ ndings of the geotechnical monitoring process in a Construction or Completion Report. This work must be executed in accordance with the Phase 2 investigation outlined in the Generic Speciﬁ cation GFSH-2.

3.9 Township Services Certiﬁ cate

A Township Services Certifi cate confi rming areas of compliance and deviations from the standards and specifi cations of the NHBRC must be prepared.

Maintenance of these services is the responsibility of the Local Authority and continued functioning of the services is dependent on the implementation of a suitable maintenance programme by the Local Authority.

3.10 Comments and Approval of the various statutory authorities

Although dolomite reports are prepared having considered all the relevant industry standards, the Council for Geoscience (CGS) and/or the National Home Builders Registration Council (NHBRC) must approve the dolomite stability report where proposed for residential use of an area.

The proposed development (i.e. residential) must be enrolled with the NHBRC. This must take place subsequent to the issuing of CGS comments and co-signature of the NHBRC B4 form, which must precede construction.

282 OCTOBER 2010 C9 C9: The Following Policy Documents are available from the Health and Community Safety departments respectively

• Facilities Plan of the Family Health Directorate • Master Plan for Sport, Recreation, Art and Culture • Corporate Disaster Management Plan (A-F (22-2010) Resolution 23)

OCTOBER 2010 283 C10 C10: Legislation

A large number of Acts, Ordinances, Regulations, By Laws and other forms of legislation is applicable to land development. The following legislation is applicable:

• Abolition of Racially Based Land Measures Act 108 of 1991; • Advertising on Roads and Ribbon Development Act 21 of 1940; • Agricultural Holdings (Transvaal) Registration Act 22 of 1919; • Alienation of Land Act 68 of 1981; • Atmospheric Pollution Prevention Act 45 of 1965; • Black Communities Development Act 4 of 1984; • Communal Property Associations Act 28 of 1996; • Community Development Act 3 of 1966; • Conservation of Agricultural Resources Act 43 of 1983; • Constitution (interim) of the Republic of South Africa Act 200 of 1993; • Constitution of the Republic of South Africa Act 108 of1996; • Conversion of Certain Rights into Leasehold or Ownership Act 81 of 1988; • Deeds Registries Act 47 of1937; • Development Facilitation Act 67 of 1995; • Development Trust and Land Act 18 of 1936; • Division of Land Ordinance 20 of 1986; • Drive-In Theatres Ordinance 22 of 1960; • Environment Conservation Act 73 of 1989; • Expropriation Act 63 of 1975; • Extension of Security of Tenure Act 62 of 1997; • Gauteng City Improvement Districts Act 12 of 1997; • Gauteng Land Administration Act 11 of 1996; • Gauteng Removal of Restrictions Act 3 of 1996; • Housing Act 107 of1997; • Housing Consumers Protection Measures Act 95; • Interim Protection of Informal Land Rights Act 31 of 1996; • Land Administration Act 2 of 1995; • Land Reform (Labour Tenants) Act 3 of 1996; • Land Survey Act8 of 1997; • Legal Succession to the South African Transport Services Act 9 of 1989; • Less Formal Township Establishment Act 113 of 1991; • Local Government Transition Act 209 of 1993;

284 OCTOBER 2010 C10 • Local Government Transition Act Amendment (Second) Act 97 of 1996; • Local Government: Municipal Demarcation Act 27 of 1998; • Local Government: Municipal Structures Act 117 of 1998; • Minerals Act 50 of 1991; • Mining Rights Act 20 of 1967; • National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act 103 of 1977; • National Environmental Management Act 107 of 1998; • National Heritage Resources Act 25 of 1999 72. 165; • National Monuments Act 28 of 1969; • National Roads Act 54 of 1971; • National Water Act 36 of 1998; • Natural Resources Development Act 51 of 1947; • Nature Conservation Ordinance 12 of 1983; • Physical Planning Act 125 of 1991; • Provincial Government Act 32 of 1961; • Public Resorts Ordinance 18 of 1969; • Regional Services Councils Act 109 of 1985; • Removal of Restrictions Act 84 of 1967; • Removal of Restrictions in Townships Act 48 of 1946; • State Land Disposal Act 48 of l961; • Subdivision of Agricultural Land Act 70 of 1970; • Subdivision of Agricultural Land Act Repeal Act 64 of 1998 The South African National Roads Agency Limited and National Roads Act 7 of 1998; • Town Planning and Townships Ordinance 15 of 1986; • Town-planning and Townships Ordinance 25 of 1965; • Transvaal Board for the Development of Peri-Urban Areas Ordinance 20 of 1943; and • Upgrading of Land Tenure Rights Act 112 of 1991. • Disaster Management Act, Act 57 of 2002.

Source: Adopted from’”Planning Law: principles and procedures of Land-use Management”, Jeannie van Wyk, Juta & Co, Ltd, 1999

OCTOBER 2010 285 C11 C11: DEVELOPER’S GUIDELINES TO INSTALLING WATER AND SEWER SERVICES IN EKURHULENI

CHAPTER 7: MATERIAL AND DESIGN STANDARDS

DEVELOPED BY: WATER SERVICES PLANNING FORUM MEMBERS

1ST WORKSHOP REVIEW Draft 1- 26 APRIL 2005

1ST COMMENTS REVIEW - Members Draft 2 - 18 MAY 2005

2nd COMMENTS REVIEW Regions/SDAs Draft 3 - 22 JULY 2005

3rd COMMENTS REVIEW Regions/SDAs Draft 4 - 04 NOV 2005

4TH COMMENTS REVIEW Regions/SDAs Draft 5 - 07 FEBR 2006

FINAL ADOPTION DATE 15 June 2006

IMPLEMENTATION DATE 01 JULY 2006

REVIEW DATE 01 JUNE 2007

286 OCTOBER 2010 C11 7. MATERIAL STANDARDS

7.1 Approval and Compliance

• The Engineering design for all water services (i.e. water and sewer) shall be based on the Guidelines for the Provision of Engineering Services and Amenities in Residential Township Development (hereinafter called the RED book) as well as the SABS 1200 series. The specifi c engineering design shall further be subject to the approval of the Executive Director: Municipal Infrastructure in terms of the extended/additional standards referred to within this section. • The following sections contain details of material standards that the Infrastructure Services Department’s Water Services Division has standardised on, as well as specifi c details not contained or differed from in the documentation referred to earlier. • The references made within this section, relating to design standards / technical requirements shall be deemed to refer to the latest edition/version, since such references are subject to revision. Information on current valid national and international standards may well be obtained from the South African Bureau of Standards (refer to Paragraph 10). • In the case of installation of water and sewer infrastructure within dolomite areas, all designs, specifi cation and installation of the aforementioned services shall comply with the Department of Public Works Manual ‘PW344 Appropriate Development of Infrastructure on Dolomite: Manual for Consultants’. The latter will prevail until the new SANS 1936 has been legally adopted. • All deviations from these specifi cations shall be approved in writing by a suitable registered Civil Engineering practitioner as nominated by the Director: Water Services: Planning and Construction, prior to the fi nalization of any plan / contract and/or services agreement.

7.2 Water Reticulation

• For normal residential, industrial and commercial developments, a water reticulation shall be installed according to the speciﬁ cations of this Document within the road reserve of a public road. Upon completion, the water reticulation shall be inspected by the Department Infrastructure Services (Water Services) where after the ownership and maintenance of the network will be taken over by the Department Infrastructure Services (Water Services). • In the case of a “security” residential development, where access to the individual properties will be controlled, by means of a “private road” (or road stand), the internal water reticulation is installed on private property, and therefore shall remain the property and responsibility of the registered owner of the “private road”. In this case, only a metered connection point will be provided by the Department Infrastructure Services to the boundary of the “private road”.

OCTOBER 2010 287 C11 • Where a secondary reticulation is to be connected to a main (bulk) water line/s, a bulk water meter shall be provided. • The Council will only take over the operational and maintenance responsibility of any infrastructure from a developer (including connections) upon proclamation and/ or registration of subdivisions where applicable.

7.2.1 Water Pressure Pipes

• Water pressure pipes shall be uPVC/mPVC (i.e. DPI/Sekunjalo/Marley) class 9 minimum. • Water pressure pipes shall be uPVC/mPVC (i.e. DPI/Sekunjalo/Marley) class 12 (solid wall) at road surface crossings, including 1000mm shoulder either side of road surface. • All water pipes to be used shall be classed and sized according to design pressures with slip-on couplings (Lyng or Z Lock joints) refer to design standard section. • The minimum diameter for reticulation pipes shall be 110mm (NB) and 75 mm (NB) with special consent from the Executive Director: Municipal Infrastructure and Director: Water Services (Planning). • All water pressure pipes shall be installed at 1.5 m from erf boundaries where possible. • Detail where services share the same trench must be spelled out. It is not preferred to be norm, but could be considered with the necessary authorization. • The minimum cover over water pressure pipes/mains shall be 1000mm. Water pipes should not be installed deeper than 2,0m, measured from the soffi t of the pipe. • Trenching, bedding and backfi lling shall conform to SABS 1200 LB and SABS 1200 DB and in particular to class B bedding, backfi ll to 93% Mod.AASHTO. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Director: Water Services (Planning). • No connections / tie-ins of new pipe/s onto the existing infrastructure shall be allowed unless all tests have been done, approved and accepted. Water pressure pipe/s/reticulation shall be tested in accordance with the relevant requirements of SABS 1200. • In the case of testing all erf connections and/or draw off points shall be included in the fi nal testing. No separate testing of the erf connections and/or draw off points shall be accepted. • Consultants must ensure that the test is achievable and correct prior to calling of offi cials to witness the test. • All pipelines shall be of uPVC/mPVC material, unless the relevant sizes are not available on the market, in which case only steel pipes shall be used.

288 OCTOBER 2010 C11 • No connections / tie-ins of new pipe/s onto the existing infrastructure shall be allowed unless all tests have been done, approved and accepted. Water pressure pipe/s/reticulation shall be tested in accordance with the relevant requirements of SABS 1200. • In the case of testing all erf connections and/or draw off points shall be included in the ﬁ nal testing. No separate testing of the erf connections and/or draw off points shall be accepted. • Consultants must ensure that the test is achievable and correct prior to calling of ofﬁ cials to witness the test. • All pipelines shall be of uPVC/mPVC material, unless the relevant sizes are not available on the market, in which case only steel pipes shall be used.

The following is a guide to the Consultant/s: • 15mm dia 63mm dia (HDPe pipe); • 75mm dia 400mm dia (uPVC/mPVC); and • Above 400mm dia (steel).

All steel pipes shall meet the requirements of the Water Services Cathodic Protection Manual.

7.2.2 Water Erf Connections

• All erf connections shall be constructed of HDPE (i.e. DPI/Sekunjalo/Marley), type V, class PN12.5, PE80 pressure pipe. • The minimum cover over erf connections (connection leads) underneath road surfaces shall be 1000 mm, elsewhere 800 mm. (within road reserve). • All new erf connections (“Residential 1”) shall be a 25mm (road crossing 32mm) communication pipe (HDPE). • Low cost housing shall have an erf connection off a 20mm (road crossing 25mm) communication pipe (HDPE). • The developer shall be required to install the erf connection pipe off the mains for each erf up to the isolating ball valve refer to drawings. • All erf connections and/or communication pipes shall be fi tted with the appropriate compression ‘Plasson’ fi ttings. (No other fi ttings shall be accepted unless otherwise approved by the Executive Director: Municipal Infrastructure in conjunction with the Director: Planning and Construction).

No individual erf water meters shall be installed by the Developer. • In the case of low cost housing development there shall be a bulk meter with • a pressure reducing valve (PRV) installed at the inlet point of the development (The

OCTOBER 2010 289 C11 bulk meter must be properly sized as well as the pressure reducing valve). Should there be more than one inlet point to the development, both shall have a bulk meter and PRV. • In the case of commercial and industrial stands, no connections need to be provided by the Developer since it requires a separate in-house design. • Provision of water to private road reserves (private enclosed developments) Bulk meter will be provided by Council at the boundary of the development.

7.2.3 Fire Hydrants

• All Fire Hydrants shall be of the ABOVE-GROUND type. • For Industrial and Commercial areas the Industrial, high effi ciency type with two outlets (1 x 100 mm and 1 x 65 mm) shall be provided. • For residential areas the tamperproof type shall be provided. All underground fi ttings shall be fl anged. (Table 1000, SABS 1123) and corrosion protected.

The composition of the standpipe shall be as follows: a) Cast Iron 75mm (NB) fl anged fi re hydrant tee; b) 75mm (NB) fl anged left hand closing isolating valve; c) 75mm (NB) fl anged mild steel pipe with weld-on 90deg. bend; and d) 75mm (NB) mild steel pipe with thread on top end to accommodate fi re hydrant head, white fusion bond powder coated after welding with socket on threaded end to protect thread.

• All underground steel fi ttings shall be treated with a primer/base coat and wrapped with a bitumen based fabric backed tape and protected with a plastic sheeting as per the Denso SA specifi cation. • Hydrants shall be installed between 300 mm and 600 mm from erf boundaries and spaced in accordance with the RED book Refer to design standards section. • A blue “cat’s eye” with a blue backing shall be fi xed to the road surface on the center of tarred/paved road, in line with the hydrant. • In the case of residential type fi re hydrants, the standpipe shall be painted with white fusion bond powder coat road marking paint (applied in one direction only) and the head of the hydrant shall be painted signal red (ex factory). • In the case of industrial and commercial type hydrants, the hydrant shall be painted signal red (ex factory).

All industrial/commercial type hydrants shall conform to the following requirements: • A ﬂ ow rate in excess of 720 l/min; • Dimensions: 300mm L x 550mm B x 720mm H;

290 OCTOBER 2010 C11 • Cast in one iron signal red powder coated body with steel outlet caps; • Full bore opening; • Non rising spindle, left hand closing direction; • Table 1000 SABS 1123 ﬂ anged 100mm BSP inlet; • 100mm threaded large outlet; • 65mm London Round thread small outlet; and • Minimum working pressure of 16 bar.

All residential type hydrants shall conform to the following requirements: • A ﬂ ow rate in excess of 720 l/min; • Tamperproof; • Cast in one cast iron body (not brass) to avoid leaks and theft of outlet parts; • Inlet seals to eliminate nuts and washers; • Right angle pattern; • Globe valve design; • Non-rising stainless steel spindle for unsurpassed strength and durability; • Clockwise closing direction; • Inlet 80 mm B.S.P. (150=R7=B.S.P.); • 65 mm Female instantaneous outlet with cover sleeve and single lug pressure release action; • Minimum working pressure of 16 bar; • A screw-in socket to ﬁ t thread; • Removable, changeable propylene crack washer; and • Adapters shall be manufactured of brass or stainless steel and not aluminium.

7.2.4 Valves

All valves shall be anticlockwise, LEFT HAND closing. All sizes are nominal (DN) with a minimum working pressure rating of 16 bar (PN). All valves supplied must conform to the following relevant speciﬁ cations:

7.2.4.1 Isolating/Gate Valves • All isolating/gate valves in a water reticulation network and/or pipe shall be RSV gate valves (i.e. where possible only AVK), class 16 to SABS 664, cap top, non rising spindle and anti clockwise closing. • The valve shall be of Ductile iron GGG 50, electro-statically applied fusion bonded epoxy resin coated (powder coating) body. • The wedge shall be of ductile iron GGG 50 and fully encapsulated with EDK 70

OCTOBER 2010 291 C11 rubber internally and externally to prevent corrosion and rubber failure, and ozone stabilised. The wedge shall be supported by guides in the side of the valve body with no metal contact. The wedge nut shall be of a fi xed nut concept, press fi t into the wedge not allowing any movement and manufactured from dezinctifi cation resistant high tensile navy brass. • The stem shall be primarily sealed with an NBR rubber hydraulic ‘U’ seal. • The secondary seals shall be at least two NBR O-rings inside and a nylon bush outside for galvanic corrosion protection. A wiper ring shall be included to prevent dirt ingress and housed such to prevent it from UV radiation. • The thrust collar shall be manufactured from a dezinctifi cation resistant brass CZ 132. • All bonnet bolts shall be manufactured from zinc coated, grade 8.8 high tensile steel, entirely sunk into the body casting, sealed and protected with a hot wax melt. The bonnet gasket shall be of a preformed NBR rubber gasket ring set in recess between the bonnet and the body. The gasket shall encircle the bolts as protection against corrosion. • The valve shall be manufactured such to accommodate a non-rising spindle manufactured from 20 Cr 13 stainless steel. • The valve shall carry a 10 year replacement warranty under normal operating conditions. • All valves shall conform to the dimensional and performance specifi cation of the latest SABS 664 standard and shall carry the JASWIC approval. • The operating pressure of all valves shall be to Class 16 with cap tops and shall operate in an anti-clockwise closing direction, • Hydraulic test certifi cates for all valves shall be submitted. These tests shall be carried out at the following pressure ratings: Body tests 1.5 x nominal pressure rating and seat tests 1.1 x nominal pressure rating.

All isolating/gate valves shall be ﬂ anged and drilled to table 1000 SABS 1123.

7.2.4.2 Ball Valves / Ball-o-stop

Only ball valves (i.e. Cobra) shall be used on erf connections/communication lead pipes.

• The body of the ball valves shall be of a one-piece construction. • Ball valves shall be of DZR alloy composition. • Ball valves shall be 12.5 bar rated and of nominal size (DN). • Ball valve components shall conform to table 1 of SABS 1056 Part III. • No gate valves will be used.

292 OCTOBER 2010 C11 7.2.4.3 Butterfl y Valves • Butterfl y valves (i.e. Salvalve / Bermad) will only be considered in cases where the pipe diameter is greater than 300 mm. and of which the use shall have prior approval from the Executive Director: Municipal Infrastructure. • Butterfl y valves shall be of the ‘worm’ gear operated system. • Butterfl y valves shall be left hand closing, fl anged and drilled to table 1000 SABS 1123. • The valves bodies shall be cast from SG 42 Iron with integral shaft hubs and an operator mounting fl ange in stainless steel. • The valve disc offset shall be of a single eccentric type with a highly effi cient hydrofoil profi le to maximise the open fl ow area and cast from the same material as the body. • The valve seal shall be precision injection moulded from Nitrile rubber and fi tted within the body perimeter. • The valve pressure and clamp rings shall be cast from SG 42 Iron, fi tted with stainless steel grub screws. • Twin stub valve shafts shall be machined from grade 431 stainless steel and shall be accommodated with double seals. • The valve bearings shall be of the low friction PTFE type where no lubrication will be needed. • Manual gear operators shall be of quadrant worm reducers, keyed to the valve shaft and fi tted with hand wheel or cap top positioning bolts for disc adjustment. • The valves may be painted with a primer coat and a fi nal enamel, but preferably fusion bond powder coated.

7.2.4.4 Scour Valves • Scour valves shall be installed at all low lying areas within the mainline system to allow for scouring purposes, cleaning and emptying of the mainline. • Scour valves shall be installed at end of network lines (i.e. dead ends). • Fire hydrants should preferably be utilized instead on small reticulation/network lines for this purpose. • Scour valves shall be of the same type and speciﬁ cation as for isolating RSV type valves.

7.2.4.5 Pressure Relief Valves and Flow Control Valves • All pressure relief valves and ﬂ ow control valves shall be installed above ground and housed in an engineering brick building. • All pressure relief valves and ﬂ ow control installations shall be properly designed • Pressure relief valves shall be installed where the Executive Director:

OCTOBER 2010 293 C11 Infrastructure Services (Water Services) in conjunction with the Director: • Water Services (Planning) deems it necessary in order to maintain pressures in the reticulation within allowable limits. • PRVs shall be sized and installed according to the manufacturer’s speciﬁ cations. • PRV installations shall have properly designed anchor blocks. • All PRVs shall be installed with a by-pass arrangement with ﬂ anged RSV gate valves on either side of PRV.

7.2.4.6 Air Valves • Air valves shall be installed at all negative gradients and high lying points only on the mainline system. • All air valves shall be of the Vent-O-Mat type or similar of which shall be approved by the Director: Infrastructure Services • The type single small orifi ce or double orifi ce - utilised shall be designed to allow for the optimal operation. • The function of single orifi ce valves is for pressurised discharge and is for pipeline operating.

The functions for the double oriﬁ ce valves are for pipeline ﬁ lling, draining and operating.

Single small Orifi ce valves: • The body and bonnet shall be of Cast Iron and sintered epoxy powder coated. • The valve shall be fi tted with a stainless steel dirt inhibitor cover. • All fastening bolts shall be galvanised. • The nozzle shall be of 304 Stainless steel. • A Nitrile seal shall be fi tted between the body and the bonnet with a natural rubber seat on the fl oat. • The fl oat shall be of a high density polyethylene material. • The inlet size shall be 25mm.

Double Orifi ce Valves: • The body halves shall be of Cast Iron and sintered epoxy powder coated. • The valve shall be fi tted with a die cast aluminium dirt inhibitor cover. • All fastening bolts shall be galvanised. • The nozzle shall be of 304 Stainless steel. • A Nitrile large orifi ce seal shall be fi tted between the body and the bonnet with a natural rubber seat on the fl oat and shall be fi tted with a polycarbonate basket. • The fl oat shall be of a high density polyethylene material. • The inlet size shall be 50mm.

294 OCTOBER 2010 C11 7.2.4.7 Refl ux/Non-return Valves • Non-Return valves may be of the Swing check type with a pressure rating of 16 bar and shall be fl anged and drilled to Table 1 000 SABS 1123. • The valves shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting with the angle of the door being such as to ensure that closure starts at the point where forward fl ow declines. • The disk and hinge shall be fi xed in the valve bonnet for easy access and maintenance. • The body confi guration shall allow for a full fl ow area during normal operation (full bore) to minimize pressure losses. • The disc shall be fully encapsulated with rubber to prevent corrosion and ensures a drop tight shut-off. • The seat shall be hydraulically pressed into the body. • The hinge shall be designed such to adjust itself accurately to the plane of the seating under load.

7.2.5 Valve Markers

• A concrete/impregnated polymer (plastic) valve marker shall be placed within 500mm from the closest erf boundary. • Powder blue impregnated valve markers with blue caps with a “V” moulded into the marker shall be positioned opposite normal isolating valves. • Powder blue impregnated valve markers with red caps with a “ZV” moulded into the marker shall be positioned opposite zone isolating valves. • No valve marker for hydrants since the hydrant stand pipe is the marker. • All existing valves, where applicable shall be paint marked with a ‘V’ / ‘ZV’ template in the relevant colour of the type of valve on the kerbstone closest to the valve. • In the case of new developments the ‘V’ and/or ‘ZV’ shall be moulded/formed in the relevant kerbstone and paint marked accordingly.

7.2.6 Valve Boxes / Chambers

All reticulation isolation valves referred to in 7.2.4 above shall be installed in valve boxes whilst zone valves, air valves, isolating valves on mainline systems, scour valves and control valves shall be installed and housed in engineering brick constructed chambers with the relevant designed thrust blocks and puddle ﬂ anges where necessary.

7.2.6.1 Valve boxes • The valve boxes shall be supplied complete: assembled and tested. • All valve boxes and lids shall be manufactured to the speciﬁ cations of SABS 558.

OCTOBER 2010 295 C11 • Valve boxes and lids shall be of ultraviolet proof, polypropylene thermoplastic material. • Valve boxes and lids shall be able to withstand temperatures ranging from -300°C to +800°C and shall not deform within these limits. • Built-in stainless steel cable shall secure all lids.

The conﬁ guration of these valve boxes shall be as follows: a) The shaft shall be 150mm minimum PVC pipe depending on the depth of the valve - installed on top of the body of the valve; b) The valve box placed on top of the pipe shaft to protrude 50mm. maximum above ground level and supported by four engineering bricks or any other acceptable means of support approved by the Engineer; c) Backﬁ lling shall be with 3% soilcrete in order to maintain all components true to the installation; and d) No concrete surround shall be cast with valve box in concrete.

7.2.6.5.1 Valve box sizes • Round: Non lockable 150mm dia box with one stainless steel cable. • Round: Non lockable 250mm dia box with one stainless steel cable. • Rectangular: Non lockable 480mm x 380mm x 300mm box with 2 • stainless steel cables. • Square: Lockable 238mm x 238mm Heavy duty box with 2 locks. • Square: Lockable 238mm x 238mm Medium duty box with 2 locks.

7.2.6.5.2 Valve Box Lid Colors • All isolating valves boxes shall be blue pigment impregnated. • All zone isolating valves boxes shall be red pigment impregnated. • All ﬁ re hydrant boxes shall be yellow pigment impregnated. • All erf connection valve boxes > 80mm connections shall be white pigment impregnated.

7.2.6.2 Valve Chambers • All chambers shall be designed to suite the purpose of the speciﬁ c valve/valve w.r.t. size and type and shall be built with engineering bricks and/or constructed from reinforced concrete. • The relevant SABS speciﬁ cation pertaining to water retaining structures shall be adhered to.

296 OCTOBER 2010 C11 • All zone isolating valves shall be protected with Manzi-lock type locking mechanisms built into a brick chamber. • Provision shall be made within all brick/concrete (reinforced) chambers for sufﬁ cient workspace (minimum all round space to be 400mm refer to drawing) • All chambers shall be equipped with a sump (500mm x 500mm x 300mm) deep. • All chambers shall have a removable reinforced concrete slab cover designed for the speciﬁ c chamber and load conditions. • All chambers shall have a lockable steel (galvanized) lid refer to drawing • Provision shall be made in the slab for 100mm diameter holes above all isolating valves.

7.2.7 Corrosion Protection • All underground mild steel ﬁ ttings shall be treated with a primer/base coat and wrapped with bitumen based fabric backed tape. • Different methods are available for various applications which can be obtained from Denso Gauteng. • All materials shall be cleaned thoroughly and be free from any debris, dirt grime or grease and can be washed down with accepted solvents from Denso. • Apply Denso Primer D at a coverage rate of 8m_/l at an even ﬁ lm with no runs or sags. Only prime those areas which will be wrapped the same day. • Follow the procedure for each application as required.

7.2.8 Underground Mild Steel ﬁ ttings

7.2.8.1 • Viking Johnsons (VJ’s) Couplings VJ couplings shall be manufactured from hot rolled asymmetric steel T sections with a • proﬁ led rolled steel sleeve and accommodated with an EPDM gasket. • All bolts shall be of D cup head low carbon steel. All ﬁ ttings shall be fusion bond powder coated.

7.2.8.2 Bolts and Nuts (on ﬂ anges/couplings) • All bolts and nuts shall be of galvanized Gr 8.8 mild steel.

7.2.8.3 Flanges • All fl anges shall be of Gr 8.8 mild steel fi nished to an acceptable machined fi nish.

7.2.8.4 Flange Adaptors • All ﬂ ange adaptors shall be of powder coated mild steel.

OCTOBER 2010 297 C11 7.2.8.5 Valve Flanges • All valve ﬂ anges shall be manufactured from mild steel, drilled to Table 1123.

7.2.8.6 Tee-Pieces • All tee-pieces shall be cast iron complete with rubber/s

7.2.9 Fire Fighting Connections

• No individual/separate fi re fi ghting connection/s will be permitted to a property. • Appropriate and adequately sized combination meter/s shall be installed by the Council. • Also refer to latest water meter specifi cation of Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality in this regard.

7.2.10 Mild Steel Pipes • Mild steel pipes shall only be considered in the case where the size of PVC/mPVC cannot be provided (diameters larger than 400mm). • Mild steel pipes shall be designed and manufactured according to the applicable SABS code. • All mild steel pipes shall be spirally welded and butt welded (Longitudinal welded pipes shall not be considered in these circumstances). • Lining shall be repaired after cutting/welding and shall be cement mortar lined and externally coated with ‘SINTEC’ coating or similar approved by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services in conjunction with the Director: Water Services (Planning). • All steel main lines shall be subject to cathodic protection evaluation and protection and in terms of the requirements of the Water Services Cathodic Protection Manual.

7.2.11 Bulk Meters (Refer to Meter Specifi cations April 2004) • No connection of secondary reticulation networks shall be permitted off main water lines without the provision of a bulk meter and approval from the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services . • A bulk meter shall be installed according to the latest Meter Specifi cations as compiled and approved by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services. • Bulk meters shall be sized and installed according to the manufacturer’s specifi cations. • Bulk meters shall be installed above ground where possible. In the case it need to be installed below ground level and approved accordingly the chamber shall be constructed of engineering bricks. • Bulk zone meters shall be installed with a by-pass, with RSV gate valves (see 7.2.4.1) on either side of the by-pass (refer to drawing).

298 OCTOBER 2010 C11 • Non return valves shall be provided with all bulk consumer meter installations. In the case where a combination meter is used where the meter has a “built-in” non return valve, no additional non return valve shall be required separately.

7.3 Sewer Reticulation

• For all types of developments, a gravity sewer reticulation shall be installed according to the speciﬁ cations of this Document, either within the road reserve of a public road or within the necessary servitude on private property. Upon completion, the sewer reticulation shall be inspected by the Water Services Division of the Infrastructure Services Department where after the ownership and maintenance of the network will be taken over by the Water Services Division. • Private sewer pump stations will only be allowed on a site where a connection point to a gravity sewer system exists. No private rising sewer line will be allowed within a public road reserve or within a servitude on any private property other than the property it serves. • The Water Services Division of the Infrastructure Services Department will only allow the construction of new sewer pump stations in exceptional cases (no other alternative, size of the development, other future developments using same pump station etc.). • No new private development shall make use of septic tanks, conservancy tanks, “French drains” or any other sewer system other than the system as described above.

7.3.1 Sewer Reticulation lines

• All sewer reticulation pipes shall be Vitriﬁ ed Clay (VC) or class 34 solid wall or 400KPa uPVC (i.e. Maincore/Mainlite or similar approved) with slip on couplings (Lyng joints) according to SABS 1601, Heavy duty structured wall pipe 400kPa. pipe stiffness. • All sewer reticulation pipes shall be installed at 2.5 m from erf boundaries in road reserves where possible • In the case of midblocks, all pipes shall be installed at 1300mm from the erf boundary. • Minimum pipe size for reticulation pipes shall be 150mm (NB). • The minimum cover over sewer reticulation pipes shall be 1000mm. Where possible. Cover of less than 600mm within road reserve shall be encased in soilcrete. • The minimum cover over erf connections underneath the road surfaces shall be 1000 mm. Cover of less than 800mm under road surface shall be encased in soilcrete. • Trenching, bedding and backﬁ lling shall conform to the SABS 1200 LB and SABS

OCTOBER 2010 299 C11 1200 DB. • Sewer reticulation to be tested in accordance with the relevant requirements of SABS 1200. • Minimum longitudinal gradients and associated pipe sizes shall be in accordance with the RED book. • Pipes at gradients between 1:6 and 1:10 should be anchored at the joints with concrete anchor blocks designed by the Engineer. • With the establishment of all reticulation systems, a starting manhole shall be introduced.

Installation Criteria • The procedures for trenching are based on the Standard Specifi cation for Civil Engineering Construction, issued by the SABS, Sections 1200DB, LD, LB, and LD OF 1982. Additional standards and recommendations are based on SABS 0112. • The pipes shall however, be backfi lled immediately after laying and not be covered with less than 500mm of backfi ll of not less than 90% MOD AASHTO. • Visual inspections shall be carried out continuously to ensure the maintaining of the pipe shape. • Rodding eyes (ABCs) shall be installed by stand owner/developer at each connection to the municipal system.

CCTV inspection/s of newly laid pipes to be submitted to council before it will be taken over. The inspection must provide the gradient of the installed line.

• In the case of testing all erf connections and/or draw off points shall be included in the ﬁ nal testing. No separate testing of the erf connections and/or draw off points shall be accepted. • Consultants must ensure that the test is achievable and correct prior to calling of ofﬁ cials to witness the test.

7.3.2 Sewer lines

• Sewer lines shall either be class 34 solid wall or 400Kpa uPVC (i.e. Maincore/ Mainlite or similar approved) with slip on couplings or reinforced concrete pipes with sacriﬁ cial layer (class according to load conditions). • Trenching, bedding and backﬁ lling shall conform to the SABS 1200 LB and SABS 1200 DB. • Sewer lines to be tested in accordance with the relevant requirements of SABS 1200 • Minimum longitudinal gradients and associated pipe sizes shall be in accordance

300 OCTOBER 2010 C11 with the RED book. • In the case of testing all connections and/or draw off points shall be included in the ﬁ nal testing. No separate testing of the erf connections and/or draw off points shall be accepted. • Consultants must ensure that the test is achievable and correct prior to calling of ofﬁ cials to witness the test.

7.3.3 Sewer Manholes

Maximum manhole spacing shall be not more than 80m. for sewer reticulation lines and 200m for outfall sewer lines.

Circular concrete manhole covers of 560mm dia. with acceptable lifting mechanisms and 750mm dia. frame constructed of dolomitic origin aggregate shall be used: a) Heavy duty in road reserves with a breaking strength of not less than 135 kN; and b) Medium duty elsewhere with a breaking strength of not less than 45 kN. • Manhole concrete rings for manhole depths up to 3m. shall be 1000mm dia. with a wall thickness of not less than 65mm. • Manhole depths deeper than 3m shall be 1500mm dia. With a wall thickness of not less than 85mm. as indicated on the drawings, including a reducing shaft with a minimum thickness of 150. • All cover slabs shall have 560mm dia. holes with a recess to accommodate the covers. • Round spacers may be used with 560mm dia. holes for slabs. • All manholes shall stand proud/protrude not less than 150mm. above ﬁ nished ground level. • All manhole concrete rings shall be supplied with Calcamite step irons staggered in the chamber. • Joints between the manhole rings shall be sealed with a bitumen sealant and wrapped with a fabric backed bitumen tape to the approval of the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services . • Starter rings for all manholes shall be founded on 20 MPa concrete mixture on compacted soil strata. • In and/or outlet pipe/s shall be installed such to accommodate differential movement of manholes. • All manholes shall be provided with benching and shall be constructed from dolomitic origin aggregate at a max slope of 1:1 and minimum of 1:2. • All benching in manholes shall be constructed in concrete, no PVC piping

OCTOBER 2010 301 C11 • shall be considered as benching/channeling in sewer manholes. • Channeling inside manholes shall be vitriﬁ ed clay embedded in the foundation concrete. Precast channeling will be allowed. • All manholes installed next to a spruit or in the open veld must be installed to have its manhole cover to be 1000 mm above the surrounding ground level. • Manholes to be installed on proper foundations of at least 150 thick and with a diameter of at least 500 mm greater than the manhole diameter.

7.3.4 Sewer Erf Connections

• All erf connections shall be Vitriﬁ ed clay (VC) or uPVC 110mm dia. with slip on couplings. • All erf connections shall be Vitriﬁ ed Clay (VC) or uPVC 150mm dia. with slip on couplings for larger users (i.e. cluster developments and Commercial/Industrial). • All erf connections shall be terminated at the road reserve boundary and 1000 mm from the lateral boundaries at the erf/stand’s lowest hydraulic point. • All erf connections shall be provided with plastic end caps. • A concrete marker with wire attached to the end cap as detailed on the drawings shall be provided at the terminal point/s. • No private connection/s shall be allowed after the sewer reticulation has been taken over by the Water Services Division of the Infrastructure Services Department. • Additional connection point/s shall only be constructed by the Water Services Division against the applicable promulgated tariff.

7.3.5 Sewer Pump stations

TYPICAL DRAWINGS WILL BE AVAILABLE SOON

302 OCTOBER 2010

D1 D1. CITY DEVELOPMENT

In terms of section 75A of the Local Government: Municipal Systems Act, Act 32 of 2000 the City Development Tariffs were further amended by the Ekurhuleni Metro- politan Municipality at a meeting held on 27 May 2010 with effect from 1 July 2010 as follows:

FEE (all fees TYPE OF APPLICATION NOTES EXCLUDE VAT) APPLICATIONS IN TERMS OF THE TOWN PLANNING AND TOWNSHIPS ORDINANCE, 1986 Township Application in terms of * All Township R 4 300,00 section 96 * applications shall be (also Includes published in the press Proclamation as well as on site notice)*. in the Spirit of Just (Only R 2 580,00 if Administrative Action Applicant advertises) Phasing/Division (Section 99(1)) or R 1 720,00 per substantial change of a Township phase (Section96(4)) Consent to Amendment of NO COST IF R 3 440,00 Only documents i.t.o Section 100 * AMENDMENT IS NOT if amendment is MATERIAL material. (Only R 1 720, 00 if Applicant advertises) Extension of Boundaries i.t.o R 1 720,00 Section 88 Council prepares Section 125 R 860,00 Amendment Scheme Amendment Scheme (rezoning). R 1 720,00 Section 56 (also Includes Promulgation notice) Amendment of Section 56 and R 1 720,00 Section 125 which necessitate readvertising Application i.t.o Section 62 or 63 R 1 720,00 (Includes including for the revoking of a notice in Provincial provision in an approved scheme Gazette) or revoking an approved scheme Application i.t.o Section 61(2) for N0 COST further amendment of the Scheme Incorporation of Township into R 860,00 Town Planning Scheme Regulation 38 Certiﬁ cates Refer to subdivision NO COST

OCTOBER 2010 1 D1 FEE (all fees TYPE OF APPLICATION NOTES EXCLUDE VAT) Subdivision of Property – Section One Fee even if there R 215,00 92(1)(a) are different erven in a single application but can be included in one decision. Includes the request for a Regulation 38 Certiﬁ cate Application for amendment of N0 COST Subdivision plan or conditions of approval or cancellation of approval – Section 92(4)(a) and (b) Consolidation of Properties – R 172,00 Section 92(1)(b) Application for amendment of N0 COST Consolidation plan or conditions of approval or cancellation of approval – Section 92(4)(a) and (b) APPLICATIONS IN TERMS OF THE TOWN PLANNING SCHEMES Building Line Relaxation/ Also see SDP’s R 172,00 Relaxation of Servitude Special Consent e.g. Secondary If application is R 258,00 use right amended and necessities readvertising the fees are payable again Written and other Consents R 172,00 eg. Keeping of animals, Home Enterprise, Shipping containers Relaxation of Height if permitted by R 172,00 the Scheme Relaxation of parking requirements R 860,00 if no speciﬁ c fees/policy exist Site Development Plan (SDP) May also include R 172,00 building line relaxation if it forms part of the SDP application / circulation DIVISION OF LAND ORDINANCE 20 OF 1986 Division of Land (Farm Land) R 1 720,00 Application i.t.o Section 17 for N0 COST the amendment or deletion of conditions.

2 OCTOBER 2010 D1 FEE (all fees TYPE OF APPLICATION NOTES EXCLUDE VAT) GAUTENG REMOVAL OF RESTRICTIONS ACT, 1996. (Fixed i.t.o the Act) Removal, amendment, suspension Gazette: Only one R 516,00 of Restrictions in Title – Section 5 notice is required. Newspapers: Two newspaper notices for two consecutive weeks. Simultaneous Removal & Section (5)(4) permits R 1 720,00 Rezoning any other simultaneous application as well. E.g. if a consent use application is also added the application fee stays the same. One combined site notice is acceptable Substitution of powers for R 516,00 Administrator – Section 2 NOTE: Regulation 3(b) of the No fees are payable if N0 COST Gauteng Removal of Restrictions the consent in terms Act, 1996 (Act No 3 of 1996) of a title condition has already been obtained and the application is then submitted i.t.o the Act. BLACK COMMUNITIES DEVELOPMENT ACT, 1984 Rezoning R 1 720,00 Township R 2 580,00 Consent R 258,00 OTHER Zoning Certiﬁ cates R 17,20 Provision of Reasons for a Council N0 COST decision Council or a Committee of Council N0 COST inspects a property and conducts a hearing Notarial Tie Applications R 860,00

NOTES:

· From the date of implementation of these tariffs all Township applications shall be published in the press as well as on site in the Spirit of Just Administrative Action; · *In view of the above, a further R 1 720, 00 is payable on submission of the application for the Council to give notice of a township application in the press and Gazette, unless the applicant is given permission to place the notices; · The Principle of joint press notices is accepted although application fees must

OCTOBER 2010 3 D1 be paid in full for every application (applications cannot be jointly submitted, i.e. unique amendment scheme number for each application); · If an application is submitted on Council land or where Council is the developer/ codeveloper, no application fees are payable; · If the application is linked to a Government Tax Incentive Scheme, no application fees are payable; · Application fees will only be returned if the application processing has not been initiated. Partial refunds will not be considered; · A general principle will still apply that the total fee will still be charged if the applicant is given permission to circulate the application externally.

CITY DEVELOPMENT FEES FOR COPIES (all fees exclude VAT) DOCUMENT TYPE Fee Photo copies: Fees in terms A4 of Schedule E A3 A2 A1 A0 Copies of Town Planning Schemes, SDF’s, Strategies, GDS, R 40,30 Fixed Portfolio or Tribunal agendas, Transcripts of meetings etc fee (excluding map books) A3 Copies of CCC etc. Map Books R 129,00 Developers Guide R 172,00 Application forms, Copies of Land Use Policies, Brochures, NO COST Development Information, Pamphlets, etc.

TARIFFS R SERVICES RENDERED UNIT REMARKS (Excl VAT) CITY DEVELOPMENT – GIS INFORMATION. INFORMATION GIS information provided ito the PAI Act 2 of 2000. (1) Charges in terms of the Regulations attached to Act 2/2000 If the information is requested in terms of the Act by means of an application form then the tariffs are as follows :

4 OCTOBER 2010 D1 TARIFFS R SERVICES RENDERED UNIT REMARKS (Excl VAT) Request fee Each Forms part of requester Regulation 187 dated 15 Feb 2003 Photocopy of an A4 page or part; Each Forms part of Regulation 187 dated 15 Feb 2003 Computer printed copy of an A4 Each Forms part of page or part; Regulation 187 dated 15 Feb 2003 Computer readable stiffy disc Each Forms part of Regulation 187 dated 15 Feb 2003 Computer readable CD Each Forms part of Regulation 187 dated 15 Feb 2003 Searching per hour Forms part of Regulation 187 dated 15 Feb 2003 (2) Charges not speciﬁ ed in the Regulations : Paper Form (Colour Prints) A0 per map These are R 74,56 calculated on the cost price of the inks and paper but do not include the time to construct the map. A1 per map R 39,50 A2 per map R 24,57 A3 per map R 9,64 A4 per map R 4,82 Labour: no charge Material: (i) CD Cost per CD used (II) DVD Cost per DVD used

OCTOBER 2010 5 D1 TARIFFS R SERVICES RENDERED UNIT REMARKS (Excl VAT) Electronic Form: Erf data and street per 1000 erven R 65,80 numbers Aerial Photos: Basic cost per electronic extraction Images 2003(1920 Km²) EMM area (+339 blocks No available) costImages 2005(Tile) (1920 Km²) EMM area (+339 blocks R 5 948,00 available) Images 2005 (Tile) Tile 1 x Tile R 17,55 /tile Images 2007 (EMM 1920 Km²) EMM area (+339 blocks R 11 895,00 available) Images 2007 (Tile) Tile 1 x Tile R 35,10 /tile Images (EMM 2010) EMM area (+339 blocks R 23 790,00 available) Images (Tile) (Tile) 1 x Tile R 70, 20 /tile Packages precut to CD: Contours, Floodline and DEM per CD (contours, R 96,50 ﬂ oodline and digital elevation model) Cadastral Package per CD Will consist R 175,44 of EMM SG Approved, Suburbs/ Townships, Wards, Customer Care Centres, Railway lines, Roads, Rivers, Facilities, Civic Centres, Dams/ Lakes, EMPD Ofﬁ ces etc. 2009 Digital Elevation model: 13 cm R 17 544,00 accuracy 2009 Digital Elevation model: 22 cm R 13 158,00 accuracy 2009 Contours: 1 mitre interval and R 8 772,00 22 cm accuracy

6 OCTOBER 2010 D2 D2. BUILDING PLANS & RELATED FEES

In terms of the relevant legislation the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality at a meeting held on 27 May 2010, resolved to amend its Tariffs for Building Plans and Related Fees, with effect from 1 July 2010, as follows:

ALL TARIFFS LISTED BELOW OR TO BE CALCULATED IN TERMS OF THIS SCHEDULE OF TARIFFS ARE VAT INCLUDED. Tariff Amount 1A Residential Buildings Building Plans: (New Work, Additions, as R 9,25 per m² or part thereof for built etc) 0,1m² to 3 000m² building, plans from 0,13000 m² with a minimum fee of R 480,00 per Building Plan submitted and a maximum fee of R 27 750,00 3001 m² to 10 000 m² R 27 750,00 plus R 5,60/ m² or part thereof for the remaining building area exceeding 3000 m² up to 10 000 m² per Building Plan submitted and a maximum fee of R 66 950,00 10 001 m² and above (No limit) R 66 950,00 plus R 3,40/ m² or part thereof for the remaining building area exceeding 10 000 m² with no limit per Building Plan submitted 1 B All other Uses. Industrial, Commercial 0,1 m² to 3000 m² R 9,25 per m² or part thereof for building plans 0,13000 m² with a minimum fee of R 480,00 per Building Plan submitted and a maximum fee of R 27 750,00 3001 m² to 10 000 m² R 27 750,00 plus R 5, 60/ m² or part thereof for the remaining building area exceeding 3000 m² up to 10 000 m² per Building Plan submitted and a maximum fee of R 66 950,00 10 001 m² and above (No limit) R 66 950,00 plus R 3,40/ m² or part thereof for the remaining building area exceeding 10 000 m² with no limit per Building Plan submitted

OCTOBER 2010 7 D2 Tariff Amount 2. Swimming Pools/Ponds R 250,00 per separate building plan 3. Minor Building Works R 285,00 per separate building plan 4. Mass Contracted Low Cost Housing R 32,00 per dwelling unit projects funded by means of National Housing Capital Subsidies (RDP) 5. Septic, Vacuum, Fuel Tanks and Gas R 300,00 per submission Installations 6. Cell phone masts, radio masts, television R 800,00 per submission masts 7. Reinspection fee (If inspection does not R 320,00 per site inspection comply with approved Plans or Building Regulations) 8. Search fee R 65,00 per erf 9. Building plan fees for Government and R Nil Municipal Buildings 10. Cost Plan copies Paper Size A0 R 20,00 each A1 R 10,00 each A2 R 5,00 each Film Size A0 R 40,00 each A1 R 20,00 each A2 R 10,00 each Micro Film A4 R 17,00 each 11A. Cost of Computer generated prints I plots on MediaCoated paper 80GSM 10% Architecture Size A0 R 18,00 A1 R 9,00 A2 R 4,50 A3 R 2,75 A4 R 1,70 75% Rendered Colour

8 OCTOBER 2010 D2 Tariff Amount A0 R 110,00 A1 R 55,00 A2 R 28,00 A3 R 17,00 A4 R 11,00 11B. Cost of Computer generated prints I plots on Media Coated paper 90GSM 10% Architecture 75% Rendered Colour Size A0 R 22,00 A1 R 12,00 A2 R 8,00 A3 R 4,00 A4 R 2,20 75% Rendered Colour A0 R 132,00 A1 R 66,00 A2 R 33,00 A3 R 17,00 A4 R 11,00 12. Application for demolition permit R 500,00 per erf per application 13 Application for demolition Building Permit R Nil for Government and Municipal Building 14. Provincial authorization to commence R 3 000,00 per application with building work in terms of Section 7(6) of the National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act, 1977 of 103, as amended 15. Application for Certiﬁ cate of occupancy R 65,00 per application

OCTOBER 2010 9 D3 D3. ELECTRICITY TARIFF A - LIFELINE

 This tariff is available for single-phase 230 V connections with a capacity of up to 20 A or 4 600 Watt.  This tariff is only available for prepayment metering customers.  This tariff will suit low consumption residential and micro business customers.

The following charges will be payable: Energy Charge (c/kWh) A.L.1 High Demand Season (June, July and August) A.L.2 Low Demand Season (September to May) VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.65,00c R0.74,1 R0.65,00c R0.74,1

A.L.3 An additional charge, in c/kWh, in the case of A.L.4 An additional charge, in c/kWh, in the repayment for an electricity connection only for low case of repayment for an electricity readyboard cost housing (period = 05 years from connection only for low cost housing (period = 03 years date): from readyboard purchase date): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.04,40c R0.05,0 R0.03,70c R0.04,2

A.L.5 An additional charge, in c/kWh, in the case of repayment for both an electricity connection and a readyboard for low cost housing (period = 05 years from connection date): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.08,10c R0.09,2

Note 1: A prepayment token of 100 kWh per metering point per month may be provided to residenti al customers. Note 2: A connecti on to low cost housing may be supplied at no up-front cost, upon successful applicati on. An additi onal charge will be levied on each electricity unit sold for the indicated periods. The size of these connecti ons is ﬁ xed at 20 Ampere. Conditi ons apply.

TARIFF A

 This tariff is available for single-phase 230 V connections with a capacity of up to 60 A per phase.  This tariff will suit low consumption residential and micro business customers.  This tariff is based on the inclining block principle, that is, the more units used, the higher the rate becomes.

10 OCTOBER 2010 D3 The following charges will be payable: Energy Charge (c/kWh) July to June Inclining Block Rate Tariffs (IBTs) VAT exclusive VAT inclusive A.1 Block (1-50 kWh) R0.90,00 R1.02,6 A.2 Block (>50 to <=350 kWh) R0.95,00 R1.08,3 A.3 Block (>350 to <=600 kWh) R1.15 R1.31,1 A.4 Block (>600 kWh) R1.20 R1.36,8 A.5 Flat rate in the case of a billing system that cannot R0.97,00 R1.10,6 accommodate the inclining block rate

A.7 An additional charge, in c/kWh, in A.6 An additional charge, in c/kWh, in the case of the case of repayment for an electricity repayment for an electricity connection only for low cost readyboard only for low cost housing (period housing (period = 05 years from connection date): = 03 years from readyboard purchase date): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.04,40 R0.05,0 R0.03,70 R0.04,2

A.8 An additional charge, in c/kWh, in the case of repayment for both an electricity connection and a readyboard for low cost housing (period = 05 years from connection date): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.08,10 R0.09,2

Note 1: If the electricity is used for residenti al purposes the amount of electricity consumed may be reduced by 100 kWh per metering point per month before the above charge is calculated. If the consumpti on for a speciﬁ c month is less than 100 kWh per metering point the consumpti on charge will be zero. In the case of a prepayment electricity dispenser, a token of 100 kWh per metering point per month may be provided to the customer.

TARIFF B (RESIDENTIAL)

 This tariff is available for all residential customers single-phase 230 V or multi- phase 400/230 V connections with a capacity of up to 150 A per phase or 100 kVA.  This tariff is not available for medium and high voltage customers.  This tariff will suit medium to high consumption residential customers.

The following charges will be payable: Fixed Charge (Rand/month) BR.1. A ﬁ xed charge, whether electricity is consumed or not, per month, per point of supply, excluding prepayment metering customers. The amount is charged once per month only for a three phase connection: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R17.42 R19.85,9

Optional Internet based consumption display (Rand/month) BR.2. If the electricity consumption is displayed on the internet, an additional monthly charge of: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R257.00 R292.98,0

OCTOBER 2010 11 D3

Energy Charge (c/kWh) BR.3. High Demand Season (June, July and BR.4. Low Demand Season (September to May) August) VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.97,80 R1.11,5 R0.78,80 R0.89,8

Note 1: Prepayment systems will be adjusted on 01 June of each year for winter prices and will revert back to summer prices on 01 September. Note 2: No free basic electricity is available on this tariﬀ , apart from the enti ti es and individuals speciﬁ ed in the Free Basic Electricity Policy. Conditi ons apply. Note 3: The opti onal internet based display will have costs related to equipment to be installed and this will be for the cost of the customer. Note 4: Churches, Government Departments, Educati on, Religion and Municipal connecti on points are treated as business.

TARIFF B (BUSINESS)

 This tariff is available for all business customers single-phase 230 V or multi- phase 400/230 V connections with a capacity of up to 150 A per phase or 100 kVA.  This tariff is not available for medium and high voltage customers.  This tariff will suit medium to high consumption small business customers.

The following charges will be payable: Fixed Charge (Rand/month) BB.1. A ﬁ xed charge, whether electricity is consumed or not, per month, per point of supply, excluding prepayment metering customers. The amount is charged once per month only for a three phase connection: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R17.42 R19.85,9

Capacity Charge (Rand/Ampere) BB.2. A capacity charge, whether electricity is consumed or not, per Ampere of supply capacity, per month, per point of supply. For calculating the capacity of a connection, the capacities of all the phases of a multi-phase connection shall be added together. VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1.94 R2.21,2

Optional Internet based consumption display (Rand/month) BB.3. If the electricity consumption is displayed on the internet, an additional monthly charge of: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R257.00 R292.98,0

Energy Charge (c/kWh) BB.4. High Demand Season (June, July and August) BB.5. Low Demand Season (September to May) VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.84,00 R0.95,8 R0.66,60 R0.75,9

Note 1: The capacity of a supply shall be the capacity as determined by the Engineer. Note 2: Prepayment systems will be adjusted on 01 June of each year for winter prices and will revert back to summer prices on 01 September. Note 3: The opti onal internet based display will have costs related to equipment to be installed and this

12 OCTOBER 2010 D3 will be for the cost of the customer. Note 4: Churches, Government Departments, Educati on, Religion and Municipal connecti on points are treated as business.

TARIFF C

 This tariff is available for bulk supplies at any voltage and with a capacity of at least 25 kVA.  This tariff will suit large residential, business and industrial customers.  This tariff is now available for new and existing customers.  This tariff is not available for high voltage customers (supply voltage exceeding 11 kV).  Customers with a higher than 50% load factor and capacity > 1 MVA are advised to review their load proﬁ le and investigate the feasibility of migrating to Tariff D.

The following charges will be payable: Fixed Charge (Rand/month) C.1. A ﬁ xed charge, whether electricity is consumed or not, per month, per point of supply: C.1.1. If the electricity is supplied at 230/400 V: C.1.2 If the electricity is supplied at a voltage higher than 230/400 V but not exceeding 11 kV: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R769.50 R 877.23,0 R1 080.00 R1 231.20,0

Demand Charge (Rand/kVA) C.2. A demand charge, per kVA registered, per month, per point of supply: C.2.1. High Demand Season (June, July and C.2.2. Low Demand Season (September to May) August) Voltage VAT excl VAT incl Voltage VAT excl VAT incl C.2.1.1. 230/400 V R67.20 R76.60,8 C.2.2.1. 230/400 V R56.00 R63.84,0 230/400 V, C.2.2.2. 230/400 V, C.2.1.2. direct from R66.00 R75.24,0 See direct from R55.00 R62.70,0 See note 2 substation note 2 substation >230/400V >230/400 V C.2.1.3. R64.80 R73.87,2 C.2.2.3. R54.00 R61.56,0 & < = 11kV & < = 11kV

Network Access Charge (NAC) (Rand/kVA) C.2.3. A network access charge, per kVA registered, C.2.3.a. On a standby supply, in cases where the based on the highest demand registered over a use of the supply may have an effect on Council’s rolling 12 month period, during all hours. own demand payable, the network access charge will be levied at the full installed capacity of the connection. Voltage VAT exclusive VAT inclusive C.2.3.1. 230/400 V R19.49 R22.21,9 C.2.3.2. 230/400 V, direct from R19.14 R21.82,0 See note 2 substation C.2.3.3. >230/400V & < = 11kV R18.79 R21.42,1

OCTOBER 2010 13 D3 C.2.3.4. Eskom NMD charges. Where an Ekurhuleni customer requests an increase in notifi ed maximum demand (NMD) at a direct Eskom point of delivery, the customer NAC shall be deemed equal to the NMD from the date that the additional capacity is made available by Eskom. Instances where this occurred prior to implementation of this schedule of tariffs, will see the commencement of charges on the date of this schedule being approved. Ekurhuleni has the right to evaluate any requested increase in the NMD at any Eskom point of delivery. If the NMD is exceeded, NAC charges will prevail. Eskom penalty rates for exceeding NMD will be charged to the customer, as outlined in the Eskom document titled: Notifi cation of demand or changes to notifi ed maximum demand rules, latest revision, at the Ekurhuleni NAC rate. A request for an increase or decrease in NMD by a customer will be made to Ekurhuleni and Ekurhuleni will, after consideration, agree or not agree to increase or decrease the NMD. Note: Eskom, if in agreement, may still continue charging the higher NMD for a period of 12 months and this will be passed on to the customer.

Note: Where an Ekurhuleni customer requests an increase in capacity affecting any Eskom point of delivery, monthly NMD costs incurred may be charged to the customer if the full capacity is not taken up immediately. C.2.3.5. Reduction in NAC, where a customer requires a reduction in NAC, a rolling period of 12 months is normally required, however, if the customer can motivate a downgrade sooner, with written reasons, permission for a shorter notice period, with a minimum of 3 months, will not be unreasonably withheld.

Note: A reduction in NAC to a value that is below the rolling previous 12 months highest recorded demand in all time periods may be allowed by any of the following: change in operations, closure of plant, installation by the customer of load management equipment, the implementation of demand side management initiatives or where demand exemptions have been granted by the General Manager: Electricity and Energy.

Off-peak option C.2.4. The off-peak option remains available for existing off-peak customers from 21:00 to 07:00 on weekdays and from 14:00 on Fridays to 07:00 on Mondays and from 21:00 on 15 December to 07:00 on 02 January. The network access charge will be levied on the highest demand registered over a rolling 12 month period, as per C.2.3.

Energy Charge (c/kWh) C.3. An energy charge, per kWh consumed: C.3.1. High Demand Season (June, July and August) C.3.2. Low Demand Season (September to May) Voltage VAT excl VAT incl Voltage VAT excl VAT incl C.3.1.1. 230/400 V R0.89,60 R1.02,1 C.3.2.1. 230/400 V R0.53,80 R0.61,3 230/400 V, C.3.2.2. 230/400 V, C.3.1.2. direct from R0.88,00 R1.00,3 See direct from R0.52,80 R0.60,2 See note 2 substation note 2 substation >230/400 V >230/400 V C.3.1.3. R0.86,40 R0.98,5 C.3.2.3. R0.51,80 R0.59,1 & < = 11kV & < = 11kV

14 OCTOBER 2010 D3 Note 1: Concession – When the user enti ty is a nonprofi t organizati on registered in terms of the provisions of the Nonprofi t Organizati ons Act, Act 71 of 1997, for the following specifi c purposes:-  the care of old people;  the care of children;  the care of the physically or mentally handicapped, the network access charges will not be applied. To qualify for this concession, an applicati on, with supporti ve documents, need to be made to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for considerati on.

Note 2: The “230/400 V direct from substati on” tariﬀ will only be applied to a low voltage customer who has:  paid for the full transformer capacity, and  take this supply within 10 meter from the transformer, i.e. the meter inside the transformer enclosure or within 10 meter from this enclosure.

Note 3: No free basic electricity is available on this tariﬀ , apart from the enti ti es and individuals speciﬁ ed in the Free Basic Electricity Policy. Conditi ons apply.

Note 4: Existi ng Tariff C customers (as at 30 June 2010) experiencing higher than average increases due to the essenti al restructuring of Tariff C, may apply to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for a possible temporary rebate, based on the merits of each case. The rebate will only be valid for the current fi nancial year. The rebate will be applicable to the current fi nancial year for a maximum of 2 months preceding the month in which applicati on is made. Spreadsheets providing substanti al proof, using valid and similar consumpti on values on both the previous and new tariff s, to be att ached to the applicati on. Conditi ons apply.

Increase of 40% to 44,9% Rebate of 5% Increase of 45% to 49,9% Rebate of 7,5% Increase of 50% and higher Rebate of 10%

TARIFF D

 This tariff is available for bulk supplies at any voltage and with a capacity of at least 1 MVA and a network access charge of at least 1 MVA over the previous 12 months.  This tariff will suit large residential, business and industrial customers.  Existing customers on this tariff, as at 30 June 2010, with a previous 12 months rolling NAC of less than 1 MVA will be moved to Tariff E due to the essential restructuring of Tariff D.

OCTOBER 2010 15 D3 The following charges will be payable: Fixed Charge (Rand/month) D.1. A ﬁ xed charge, whether electricity is consumed or not, per month, per point of supply,: D.1.1. If the electricity is supplied at 230/400 V: D.1.2 If the electricity is supplied at a voltage higher than 230/400 V but not exceeding 11 kV: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R769.50 R 877.23.0 R1 080.00 R 1 231.20.0 D.1.3. If the electricity is supplied at a voltage higher than 11 kV: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1 960.00 R 2 234.40.0

Demand Charge (Rand/kVA) D.2. A demand charge, per kVA registered, per month, per point of supply: D.2.1. High Demand Season (June, July and D.2.2. Low Demand Season (September to May) August) VAT VAT VAT VAT Voltage Voltage exclusive inclusive exclusive inclusive D.2.1.1. 230/400 V R32.48 R37.02.7 D.2.2.1. 230/400 V R32.48 R37.02.7 230/400 V 230/400 V D.2.1.2. D.2.2.2. direct from R31.90 R36.36.6 direct from R31.90 R36.36.6 See note 2 See note 2 substation substation >230/400V >230/400 V D.2.1.3. R31.32 R35.70.5 D.2.2.3. R31.32 R35.70.5 & < = 11kV & < = 11kV D.2.1.4. >11kV R29.00 R33.06.0 D.2.2.4. >11kV R29.00 R33.06.0 Network Access Charge (NAC) (Rand/kVA) D.2.3. A network access charge, per kVA registered, D.2.3.a. On a standby supply, in cases where the based on the highest demand registered over a use of the supply may have an effect on Council’s rolling 12 month period, during all hours. own demand payable, the network access charge will be levied at the full installed capacity of the connection. VAT VAT Voltage exclusive inclusive D.2.3.1. 230/400 V R19.49 R22.21,9 230/400 V, D.2.3.2. direct from R19.14 R21.82,0 See note 2 substation >230/400V D.2.3.3. R18.79 R21.42,1 & < = 11kV D.2.3.4. >11kV R17.40 R19.83,6

16 OCTOBER 2010 D3 D.2.3.5. Eskom NMD charges. Where an Ekurhuleni customer requests an increase in notifi ed maximum demand (NMD) at a direct Eskom point of delivery, the customer NAC shall be deemed equal to the NMD from the date that the additional capacity is made available by Eskom. Existing cases will be dealt with on an individual basis. Ekurhuleni reserves the right to evaluate any requested increase in the NMD at any Eskom point of delivery. If the NMD is exceeded, NAC charges will prevail. Eskom penalty rates for exceeding NMD will be charged to the customer, as outlined in the Eskom document titled: Notifi cation of demand or changes to notifi ed maximum demand rules, latest revision, at the Ekurhuleni NAC rate. A request for an increase or decrease in NMD by a customer will be made to Ekurhuleni and Ekurhuleni will, after consideration, agree or not agree to increase or decrease the NMD.

Note: Eskom, if in agreement, may still continue charging the higher NMD for a period of 12 months and this will be passed on to the customer. Note: Where an Ekurhuleni customer requests an increase in capacity affecting any Eskom point of delivery, monthly NMD costs incurred may be charged to the customer if the full capacity is not taken up immediately. D.2.3.6. Reduction in NAC, where a customer requires a reduction in NAC, a rolling period of 12 months is normally required, however, if the customer can motivate a downgrade sooner, with written reasons, permission for a shorter notice period, with a minimum of 3 months, will not be unreasonably withheld.

Energy Charge (c/kWh) D.3. An energy charge, per kWh consumed: D.3.1. High Demand Season (June, July and August) Peak Standard Off-Peak

Voltage VAT excl VAT incl VAT excl VAT incl VAT excl VAT incl

D.3.1.1. 230/400 V R1.97,90 R2.25,6 D.3.1.5. R0.69,40 R0.79,1 D.3.1.9 R0.41,90 R0.47,8

D.3.1.2. 230/400 V, direct from R1.94,40 R2.21,6 D.3.1.6. R0.68,20 R0.77,7 D.3.1.10 R0.41,10 R0.46,9 See note 2 substation >230/400V D.3.1.3. R1.90,80 R2.17,5 D.3.1.7. R0.67,00 R0.76,4 D.3.1.11 R0.40,40 R0.46,1 & <=11kV D.3.1.4. >11kV R1.76,70 R2.01,4 D.3.1.8. R0.62,00 R0.70,7 D.3.1.12 R0.37,40 R0.42,6

OCTOBER 2010 17 D3 D.3.2. Low Demand Season (September to May) Peak Standard Off-Peak VAT VAT VAT VAT VAT VAT Voltage exclusive inclusive exclusive inclusive exclusive inclusive D.3.2.1. 230/400 V R0.73,60 R0.83,9 D.3.2.5. R0.48,30 R0.55,1 D.3.2.9. R0.38,10 R0.43,4 230/400 V, D.3.2.2. direct from R0.72,30 R0.82,4 D.3.2.6. R0.47,40 R0.54,0 D.3.2.10 R0.37,40 R0.42,6 See note 2 substation >230/400 V D.3.2.3. R0.70,90 R0.80,8 D.3.2.7. R0.46,60 R0.53,1 D.3.2.11 R0.36,70 R0.41,8 & <=11kV D.3.2.4. >11kV R0.65,70 R0.74,9 D.3.2.8. R0.43,10 R0.49,1 D.3.2.12 R0.34,00 R0.38,8 Energy Effi ciency Rebate (c/kWh) D.4. A rebate on the kWh and demand amounts according to the following criteria: D.4.1. If a customer implemented an energy effi ciency and/or demand side management system that will result in a proven annual saving of 15% or more on the pre-implementation baseline consumption. A detailed report certifying the aforementioned is to be submitted to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for approval before this rebate will be considered. The rebate will be valid for a period equal to 12 months, or until the current set of tariffs lapses, whichever comes fi rst. Further conditions will apply. In the case of any nationally implemented incentive or penalty tariff system, this portion of the tariff will no longer be applicable. Rebate value: 1%

Note 1: Demand registered during off -peak hours will not be taken into account when calculati ng the demand charge payable. Note 2: The “230/400 V direct from substati on” tariff will only be applied to a low voltage customer who has:  paid for the full transformer capacity, and  take this supply within 10 meter from the transformer, i.e. the meter inside the transformer enclosure or within 10 meter from this enclosure. Note 3: A newly established site may be exempted from demand charges for a limited period in order to conclude installati on tests, upon prior applicati on to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy. Conditi ons will be att ached in the case of favourable considerati on. Note 4: Concession – When the user enti ty is a nonprofi t organizati on registered in terms of the provisions of the Nonprofi t Organizati ons Act, Act 71 of 1997, for the following specifi c purposes:-  the care of old people;  the care of children;  the care of the physically or mentally handicapped,

the network access charges will not be applied. To qualify for this concession, an applicati on, with supporti ve documents, need to be made to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for considerati on.

Note 5: For the purposes of this tariﬀ : Peak Hours will be from 07:00 to 10:00 and 18:00 to 20:00 on weekdays. Standard Hours will be from 06:00 to 07:00, 10:00 to 18:00 and 20:00 to 22:00 on weekdays and from 07:00 to 12:00 and 18:00 to 20:00 on Saturdays. Oﬀ -peak Hours will be from 22:00 to 06:00 on weekdays, 12:00 to 18:00 and 20:00 to 07:00 on Saturdays and all of Sundays. A public holiday falling on a weekday will be treated as a Saturday. An unexpectedly announced

18 OCTOBER 2010 D3 public holiday will be treated as the day of the week on which it falls.

Note 6: No free basic electricity is available on this tariﬀ , apart from the enti ti es and individuals speciﬁ ed in the Free Basic Electricity Policy. Conditi ons apply.

Note 7: Existi ng Tariff D customers (as at 30 June 2010) experiencing higher than average increases due to the essenti al restructuring of Tariff D, may apply to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for a possible temporary rebate, based on the merits of each case. The rebate will only be valid for the current fi nancial year. The rebate will be applicable to the current fi nancial year for a maximum of 2 months preceding the month in which applicati on is made. Spreadsheets providing substanti al proof, using valid and similar consumpti on values on both the previous and new tariff s to be att ached to the applicati on. Conditi ons apply. Increase of 40% to 44,9% Rebate of 5% Increase of 45% to 49,9% Rebate of 7,5% Increase of 50% and higher Rebate of 10%

TARIFF E

 This tariff will suit small to medium size business, industrial and residential complexes.  The tariff is available for bulk supplies not exceeding 11kV and with a capacity of > 25kVA and a NAC of < 1 MVA.  This tariff is available for new and existing customers.

The following charges will be payable: Fixed Charge (Rand/month) E.1. A ﬁ xed charge, whether electricity is consumed or not, per month, per point of supply,: E.1.2 If the electricity is supplied at a voltage E.1.1. If the electricity is supplied at 230/400 V: higher than 230/400 V but not exceeding 11 kV: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R769.50 R877.23,0 R1 080.00 R1,231.20,0

Demand Charge (Rand/kVA) E.2. A demand charge, per kVA registered, per month, per point of supply: E.2.1. High Demand Season (June, July and August) E.2.2. Low Demand Season (September to May) VAT VAT VAT VAT Voltage Voltage exclusive inclusive exclusive inclusive R R E.2.1.1. 230/400 V R56.00 E.2.2.1. 230/400 V R50.40 63.840 57.45,6 230/400 V, 230/400 V, R R E.2.1.2. direct from R55.00 E.2.2.2. direct from R49.50 62.700 56.43,0 substation substation >230/400V R >230/400 V R E.2.1.3. R54.00 E.2.2.3. R48.60 & < = 11kV 61.560 & < = 11kV 55.40,4

OCTOBER 2010 19 D3 Network Access Charge (NAC) (Rand/kVA) E.2.3. A network access charge, per kVA E.2.3.a. On a standby supply, in cases registered, based on the highest demand where the use of the supply may have registered over a rolling 12 month period, an effect on Council’s own demand during all hours. payable, the network access charge will be levied at the full installed capacity of the connection. VAT VAT Voltage exclusive inclusive E.2.3.1. 230/400 V R19.49 R22.21,9 230/400 V, E.2.3.2. direct from R19.14 R21.82,0 substation >230/400V E.2.3.3. R18.79 R21.42,1 & < = 11kV E.2.3.4. Eskom NMD charges. Where an Ekurhuleni customer requests an increase in notifi ed maximum demand (NMD) at a direct Eskom point of delivery, the customer NAC shall be deemed equal to the NMD from the date that the additional capacity is made available by Eskom. Existing cases will be dealt with on an individual basis. Ekurhuleni reserves the right to evaluate any requested increase in the NMD at any Eskom point of delivery. If the NMD is exceeded, NAC charges will prevail. Eskom penalty rates for exceeding NMD will be charged to the customer, as outlined in the Eskom document titled: Notifi cation of demand or changes to notifi ed maximum demand rules, latest revision, at the Ekurhuleni NAC rate.

Note: Where an Ekurhuleni customer requests an increase in capacity affecting any Eskom point of delivery, monthly NMD costs incurred may be charged to the customer if the full capacity is not taken up immediately. E.2.3.5. Reduction in NAC, where a customer requires a reduction in NAC, a rolling period of 12 months is normally required, however, if the customer can motivate a downgrade sooner, with written reasons, permission for a shorter notice period, with a minimum of 3 months, will not be unreasonably withheld.

Energy Charge (c/kWh) E.3. An energy charge, per kWh consumed: E.3.1. High Demand Season (June, July and August) Peak Standard Off-Peak Voltage VAT excl VAT incl VAT excl VAT incl VAT excl VAT incl E.3.1.1. 230/400 V R2.26,20 R2.57,9 E.3.1.4. R0.82,90 R0.94,5 E.3.1.7 R0.38,30 R0.43,7 230/400 V, E.3.1.2. direct from R2.22,20 R2.53,3 E.3.1.5. R0.81,40 R0.92,8 E.3.1.8 R0.37,60 R0.42,9 substation

20 OCTOBER 2010 C1D3 >230/400V E.3.1.3. R2.18,10 R2.48,6 E.3.1.6. R0.79,90 R0.91,1 E.3.1.9 R0.36,90 R0.42,1 & <=11kV

E.3.2. Low Demand Season (September to May) Peak Standard Off-Peak VAT VAT VAT VAT VAT VAT Voltage exclusive inclusive exclusive inclusive exclusive inclusive E.3.2.1. 230/400 V R0.88,50 R1.00,9 E.3.2.4. R0.58,50 R0.66,7 E.3.2.7. R0.47,30 R0.53,9 230/400 V, E.3.2.2. direct from R0.86,90 R0.99,1 E.3.2.5. R0.57,40 R0.65,4 E.3.2.8 R0.46,40 R0.52,9 substation >230/400 V E.3.2.3. R0.85,30 R0.97,2 E.3.2.6. R0.56,40 R0.64,3 E.3.2.9 R0.45,60 R0.52,0 & <=11kV

Energy Effi ciency Rebate (c/kWh) E.4. A rebate on the kWh and demand amounts according to the following criteria: E.4.1. If a customer implemented an energy effi ciency and/or demand side management system that will result in a proven annual saving of 15% or more on the pre-implementation baseline consumption. A detailed report certifying the aforementioned is to be submitted to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for approval before this rebate will be considered. The rebate will be valid for a period equal to 12 months, or until the current set of tariffs lapses, whichever comes fi rst. Further conditions will apply. In the case of any nationally implemented incentive or penalty tariff system, this portion of the tariff will no longer be applicable. Rebate value: 1%

Note 1: Demand registered during off -peak hours will not be taken into account when calculati ng the demand charge payable. Note 2: A newly established site may be exempted from demand charges for a limited period in order to conclude installati on tests, upon prior applicati on to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy. Conditi ons will be att ached in the case of favourable considerati on. Note 3: Concession – When the user enti ty is a nonprofi t organizati on registered in terms of the provisions of the Nonprofi t Organizati on Act, 1997, for the following specifi c purposes:-  the care of old people;  the care of children;  the care of the physically or mentally handicapped, the network access charges will not be applied. To qualify for this concession, an applicati on, with supporti ve documents, need to be made to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for considerati on. Note 4: For the purposes of this tariff : Peak Hours will be from 07:00 to 10:00 and 18:00 to 20:00 on weekdays. Standard Hours will be from 06:00 to 07:00, 10:00 to 18:00 and 20:00 to 22:00 on weekdays and from 07:00 to 12:00 and 18:00 to 20:00 on Saturdays. Off -peak Hours will be from 22:00 to 06:00 on weekdays, 12:00 to 18:00 and 20:00 to 07:00 on Saturdays and all of Sundays. A public holiday falling on a weekday will be treated as a Saturday. An unexpectedly announced public holiday will be treated as the day of the week on which it falls. Note 5: No free basic electricity is available on this tariff , apart from the enti ti es and individuals specifi ed in the Free Basic Electricity Policy. Conditi ons apply.

OCTOBER 2010 21 D3 Note 6: Existi ng Tariff D customers (as at 30 June 2010) that is now moved to Tariff E, experiencing higher than average increases due to the essenti al restructuring of the two tariff s, may apply to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy for a possible temporary rebate, based on the merits of each case. The rebate will only be valid for the current fi nancial year. The rebate will be applicable to the current fi nancial year for a maximum of 2 months preceding the month in which applicati on is made. Spreadsheets providing substanti al proof, using similar consumpti on values on both the previous and new tariff s to be att ached to the applicati on. Conditi ons apply. Increase of 40% to 44,9% Rebate of 5% Increase of 45% to 49,9% Rebate of 7,5% Increase of 50% and higher Rebate of 10%

TARIFF F

 This tariﬀ will be suitable for street light and traﬃ c light consumpti on.

Fixed Charge (Rand/month) F.1. A ﬁ xed charge, per month, per point of supply: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R40.50 R46.17,0

Street light Energy Charge (c/kWh) F.2. High Demand Season (June, July and August) F.3. Low Demand Season (September to May) VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.80 R0.91,2 R0.65 R0.74,1

Trafﬁ c light Energy Charge (c/kWh) F.4. High Demand Season (June, July and August) F.5. Low Demand Season (September to May) VAT exclusive VAT inclusive VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.75 R 0.85,5 R0.55 R0.62,7

Note 1: Un-metered street lights will be deemed to operate for 10 hours per night, 365 nights per annum, at its actual size in kilowatt s plus 20% of this size to compensate for control gear losses, i.e. each 125 Watt mercury vapour lamp will be treated as a 150 Watt lamp, or 0, 15 kilowatt . Calculati on: Street light consumpti on per month = number of street lights x (the actual kilowatt of one street light x 1, 2) x 10 hours per day x 30 days x summer / winter rate detailed above. Note 2: Un-metered traffi c lights will be deemed to operate for 24 hours a day, 365 days per annum, at its actual size in kilowatt s. In the absence of detailed fi gures for a traffi c light, the size will be assumed as 1 kilowatt . Calculati on: Traffi c light consumpti on per month = number of traffi c lights x actual kilowatt of one traffi c light intersecti on (or 1 kilowatt ) x 24 hours a day x 30 days x summer / winter rate detailed above.

22 OCTOBER 2010 D3 TARIFF G

 This tariﬀ will be suitable for the purchase of “green” electricity, if available.

Green Energy Charge (c/kWh) G.1. An energy charge surcharge on the applicable tariff, per kWh consumed: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.30 R0.34,2

Note 1: Customers will be required to contract for the clean power for a period of ti me. Note 2: Customers will receive a certi ﬁ cate that the power supply is green, for a period of ti me equal to the contract period and for a parti cular porti on, or the enti re supply.

MISCELLANEOUS CHARGES

The following charges will be payable: 1. For changing from one tariff to another: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R0.00 R0.00,0 Note 1: A customer will be charged according to the new tariff for a minimum period of 12 months after any change of tariff. New customers will however be allowed to change once within the ﬁ rst year after having been connected to the network. Note 2: The cost of any changes to metering equipment necessitated by the change of tariff will be for the account of the customer, unless otherwise decided by the Engineer.

2. For the delivery of a notice of intended disconnection where a customer has failed to pay his account on the due date: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R70.00 R79.80,0

3. For discontinuing and restoring a supply due to non-payment of the account 3.1. For discontinuing a supply due to non-payment of the account: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R115.00 R131.10,0 3.2. For restoring a supply due to non-payment of the account: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R115.00 R131.10,0 Note 1: If an attempt to discontinue a supply is unsuccessful due to action taken by the customer this charge will also be payable in respect of each such attempt.

4. For discontinuing and restoring a supply at the request of a customer 4.1. For disconnecting a supply at the customer’s request: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R115.00 R131.10,0 4.2. For reconnecting a supply at the customer’s request: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R115.00 R131.10,0

OCTOBER 2010 23 D3 C1 Note 1: This charge will not be payable in respect of a disconnection done because of the termination of a supply agreement or in respect of a reconnection done because of a new supply agreement that was entered into.

5. For re-instating a customer connection that has been removed due to tampering by the customer: Estimated cost of material, labour and transport + 10% with a minimum charge of: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1 800.00 R2 052.00,0 Note 1: The connection reinstated will not necessarily be identical to the one removed. Note 2: The second tampering event will see the above fee doubled, the third event will see the above fee tripled.

6. For reading a meter: 6.1. On request of a customer: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R135.00 R153.90,0 Note 1: The above amount will be refunded to the customer if the requested reading proves the current reading on record to be defective. It will also not be payable in respect of readings taken because of the commencement or termination of a supply agreement. 6.2 After ofﬁ ce hours on a regular basis as arranged by a customer: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R135.00 R153.90,0

7. For repeatedly attending to a customer complaint where the reason for the complaint is not the fault of the supply authority, per visit: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R160.00 R182.40,0

8. For testing the accuracy of a meter on request of a customer: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R400.00 R456.00,0 Note 1: The above amount will be refunded to the customer if the accuracy of the meter proves to be out of the speciﬁ ed limits.

9. For the lease of a transformer, per month, per kVA of transformer capacity: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R2.00 R2.28,0 Note 1: This service is subject to the availability of suitable transformers.

10. For providing a service connection: Estimated cost of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT Note 1: The amount payable may be reduced if funds are available from another source.

11. For modifying a service connection on request of a customer: Estimated cost of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT

24 OCTOBER 2010 D3 12. For the provision of material or equipment or the execution of work on behalf of a customer or on request of a customer: Estimated cost of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT

13. For exempting a customer’s water heating apparatus from control by the supply authority, per month: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R130.00 R 148.20,0 Note 1: In cases where there is more than one geyser in a residence, Council reserves the right to install a controlling device on each geyser. A customer requesting exemption from this control will be required to pay the above amount in respect of every geyser exempted from Council’s intended installation. Note 2: In the case of exemption, the owner of the property will be responsible for the amount stated above. Note 3: The above cost is based on a geyser capacity of up to 200 litres. Geysers with a larger capacity that is exempted from heating control, will pay the above amount pro-rata.

14. Meter access problems 14.1. Security townships without a manned gate, where access to meters is not possible during day light hours will be charged a ﬁ xed rate per meter per month in addition to an estimated consumption charge. An application may be made to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy to investigate the possibility of an alternative arrangement in terms of the metering layout. VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R70.00 R79.80,0 14.2. Any other metering point, where access to meters is not possible during day light hours may be charged a ﬁ xed rate per meter per month in addition to an estimated consumption charge. An application may be made to the General Manager: Electricity and Energy to investigate the possibility of an alternative arrangement in terms of the metering layout. VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R18.00 R20.52,0

15. Excavations within public areas leading to damage to electricity cables, including attempts of theft: 15.1. In the case of damage to a low voltage cable or line installation, or any part of that installation Estimated cost of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT 15.2 Cost for damaging any 6.6\11 kV cable R20 000,00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT 15.3 Cost for damaging any 22 kV cable R30 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.4 Cost for damaging any 33 kV Oil Filled cable R100 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.5 Cost for damaging any 33 kV PILC/XLPE cable R40 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.6 Cost for damaging any 44 kV Oil Filled cable R100 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.7 Cost for damaging any 44 kV PILC/XLPE cable R50 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.8 Cost for damaging any 66 kV Oil Filled cable R120 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT.

OCTOBER 2010 25 D3 15.9 Cost for damaging any 66 kV PILC/XLPE cable R60 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.10 Cost for damaging any 88 kV Oil Filled cable R100 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.11 Cost for damaging any 88 kV PILC/XLPE cable R70 000.00 per cable plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.12 Cost for damaging any 132 kV Oil Filled cable R150 000.00 plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT. 15.13 Cost for damaging any 132 kV PILC/XLPE cable R80 000.00 plus additional cost incurred of material, labour and transport plus 10% plus 14% VAT.

Note 1: In cases where the excavation occurred without authorization, or where the provisions of the wayleave policy were not followed, Council reserves the right to institute further steps.

16. Purchasing a solar geyser by means of an Ekurhuleni scheme (once available, conditions apply). Actual cost

17. Operational cost for a street light supplied from the Ekurhuleni grid, per month. VAT exclusive VAT inclusive 17.1. 125 Watt lamp R75.00 R85.50,0 VAT exclusive VAT inclusive 17.2. 250 Watt lamp R130.00 R148.20,0 VAT exclusive VAT inclusive 17.3 400 Watt lamp R200.00 R228.00,0

18. Charge for providing a clearance certiﬁ cate when a meter reading cannot be obtained. Average of previous consumption values, or a ﬁ xed charge of R1 000.00 per month.

19. Connecting illegally to the electricity grid without a supply agreement VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1 800.00 R2 052.00,0

20. Tariff to remove an illegal electricity connection and to reinstate the network: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1 800.00 R2 052.00,0

21. Reselling electricity at excessive charges which are not justiﬁ ed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, following a written notice to comply (charged per month since date of notice): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R7 000.00 R7 980.00,0

22. Painting, defacing, pasting posters, tampering or interfering with any service connection or service protection device or supply or any other equipment of the Council: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1 800.00 R2 052.00,0

26 OCTOBER 2010 D3 23. Wilfully hindering, obstructing, interfering with or refusing admittance to any duly authorized ofﬁ cial of the Council in the performance of his duty under these by-laws or of any duty connected therewith or relating thereto, per incident: VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R1 800.00 R2 052.00,0

24. Customer request for converting to prepayment metering from an existing credit meter installation (property value on valuation roll < R200 000): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R298.25 R340.00,5

25. Customer request for converting to prepayment metering from an existing credit meter installation (property value on valuation roll > R200 000): VAT exclusive VAT inclusive R596.49 R679.99,9

DEPOSIT SCHEDULE

DESCRIPTION DEPOSIT (VAT excl.) Single phase connection up to 80 Ampere, all use (residential, business or other). Tariff A or Tariff B customer (OWNER of premises) R3 480.00 Tariff A or Tariff B customer (TENANT on premises) R4 575.00 Electricity prepayment meter customer R0.00 Single phase connection up to 80 Ampere (PENSIONER, residential only). Tariff A or Tariff B customer (PENSIONER – based on assessment rates criteria in respect of owner, registered tenant or registered “life R1 290.00 right” tenant) Single phase connection above 80 Ampere, all use (residential, business or other). Tariff B customer R8 378.00 Three phase connection up to 3 x 80 Ampere, all use (residential, business or other). Tariff A or Tariff B customer R11 858.00 Three phase connection higher than 3 x 80 Ampere, all use (residential, business or other). Tariff B customer R30 807.00 All customers on Tariff C, D or Tariff E Tariff C (business, industrial, residential or other use) 2 x consumption* Tariff D (business, industrial, residential or other use) 2 x consumption* Tariff E (business, industrial, residential or other use) 2 x consumption* Defaulting debtors All tariffs 2 x consumption

*The Engineer will determine the exact amount based on the expected Load Factor of the customer. Note 1: A revised deposit may be requested when a customer moves between tariffs

OCTOBER 2010 27 D3 C1 and / or for an increase in connection size. Note 2: Bank guarantees will only be accepted for Tariff C, D and E customers to a maximum of 1/3 (one third) of the required deposit.

The following shall be noted:

1. The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality shall have the right to refuse to sell or supply electricity to any customer who has any unsett led debt with the Municipality. 2. These tariﬀ s shall be read in conjuncti on with the By-Laws for the Supply of Electricity, as well as applicable policies published by the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality.

28 OCTOBER 2010 C1 D4 D4. WATER

1. TARIFFS: WATER SUPPLY SERVICES AND INCIDENTAL CHARGES The amounts due for water services for the 2010/2011 ﬁ nancial year be paid on dates as indicated on accounts which will be rendered from 1 July 2010. · The Tariffs as listed include a 2.0 % “ringfenced” maintenance levy to be used for critical water supply services maintenance only. · The Sewerage Charges will be linked to the account where the water connection is billed. Where water is supplied and metered by Rand Water or any other legal entity to premises connected to the Council’s Waste Water Reticulation System, the readings supplied by Rand Water or other legal entity will be used to calculate and render a waste water account to the owner)tenant concerned. · Reference to “per month” in the tariffs is based on a meter reading period of 30,4375 days with regard to the calculation of a charge for the free consumption portion. · ALL TARIFFS LISTED BELOW OR TO BE CALCULATED IN TERMS OF THIS SCHEDULE OF TARIFFS EXCLUDE VAT.

2. WATER TARIFFS Charges shall be levied in respect of each separate connection for water (as deﬁ ned in the Water Supply Bylaws of the Council). It is further noted that the tariffs effective to consumption as from 01 July 2010 and accounts as from those generated in July 2010 on a pro rata basis where applicable, will be levied.

3. CONSUMPTION TARIFFS All tariffs listed in items 3.1, 3.5, 3.6, as well as 3.9, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, 3.14 if not excluded in terms of the agreement, shall be applied accumulatively. 3.1 Household Use: (Tariff Code WA0017) Household Use Municipal: (Tariff Code WA0010) Except where the tariffs listed in items 3.3 or 3.4.1 below are applicable, the tariffs listed in this item shall be payable where water, used solely for household purposes, including temporarily connections for this purpose, has been supplied. In the case of hostels and old age homes, every 4 beds shall be deemed to be a residential unit. Where the Housing Department offi cially accommodates two or three benefi ciaries (families) per stand, each benefi ciary (family) is deemed to be a residential unit. · This tariff is only applicable to properties used exclusively for household purposes.

OCTOBER 2010 29 D4 C1

In the event that a small business is conducted as a primary right in terms of a Town Planning Scheme, or home enterprise in terms of the Council’s policy, from a property used for household purposes, and the connection size is either a 15mm or 20mm connection, the tariffs in the table below shall apply. However, any connection which is greater than 20mm and the property is not exclusively used for residential purposes, shall be charged in terms the tariffs as detailed in 3.6 below. Spaza Shops, deﬁ ned as an area of a dwelling unit and or associated immovable outbuilding not more than 20m² in extent, used by the occupant of such a dwelling unit for the purposes of selling basic household goods, is also included in this tariff, provided the connection size is either a 15mm or 20mm connection.

· That an additional 3 kl free basic consumption be granted to all registered indigent account holders subject to the stipulations of the Council’s indigent policy

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Number of residential units x (0 – 6 kl / month) R 0,00 Number of residential units x (7 – 15 kl / month) R 7,00 Number of residential units x (16 – 30 kl / month) R 9,00 Number of residential units x (31 – 45 kl / month) R 11,10 Number of residential units x (46 – 60 kl / month) R 11,50 Number of residential units x (61 or more kl / month R 12,70

3.2 Institutional Use (Tariff Code WA0009) Public Beneﬁ t Organizations, Non Governmental Organizations and Cultural Organizations approved in terms of section 30 of the Income Tax Act 58 of 1962, read with items 1, 2 and 4 of the ninth Schedule to the Act; Welfare organizations registered in terms of the National Welfare Act, 1978 (Act No 100 of 1978), State Assisted Public Schools or Colleges, Public Hospitals and Churches.. The tariff payable in terms of this item is as follows:

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed Rate R 8,70

30 OCTOBER 2010 C1 D4 3.3 Informal Settlements: (Tariff Code WA0008)

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl This item is applicable in cases where stands and /or 0,00 dwelling units are supplied by means of a standpipe (no stand connection available

3.4 Unmetered and/or Unread Connections Tariffs payable in respect of unmetered and/or unread connections where the Water Supply Bylaws of the Council do not provide an alternative method for calculating consumption or estimating consumption for purposes of interim charges: 3.4.1 Household use: (Tariff Code WA0018) Household Use Municipal: (Tariff Code WA0019) The applicable tariff listed below, and not the tariffs listed in item 3.1, is payable where water is supplied but there is no relevant meter reading available for the relevant month, irrespective of whether or not a meter has been ﬁ tted.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed rate per month (estimated consumption less than or R 71,60 equal to 15 kl / month Fixed rate per month (estimated consumption exceeding 15 R 214,80 kl / month, but less than or equal to 30 Fixed rate per month (estimated consumption exceeding 30 R 451,60 kl / month)

3.4.2 Institutional Uses as listed in item 3.2: (Tariff Code WA0020) The tariff specifi ed below, and not the tariff specifi ed in item 3.2, is payable where water is supplied, but there is no relevant meter reading for the relevant month, irrespective of whether or not a meter has been fi tted.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed rate R 831,60

3.4.3 Business and Other Uses not included in items 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 3.5: (Tariff Code WA0021) Business and Other Uses Municipal: (Tariff Code WA0016) The tariff speciﬁ ed below, and not the tariffs listed in item 3.6, is payable where water is supplied but there is no relevant meter reading for the relevant month, irrespective of whether or not a meter has been ﬁ tted.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed rate per month R 1099,60

OCTOBER 2010 31 D4 C1 3.5 Flow Restriction (Tariff Code WA0022) 3.5.1 Properties used exclusively for household purposes as deﬁ ned in 3.1: For as long as a ﬂ ow restriction as implemented by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services or his nominee in respect of the supply of water to the relevant premises is applicable and the volume of water supplied to the premises does not exceed the appropriate under mentioned limit set in terms of such restriction, the relevant tariff listed below shall be payable:

Limit Tariff R/kl A maximum of 6 kl / month 0,00 Between 7 kl to 15 kl / month R 6,70 More than 16 kl / month Total Consumption as per the sliding scale in item 3.1

The registered indigent will receive the allocated 9 kl free basic water per month on a daily pro rata basis where after the tariff in 3.5.1 will be applicable.

3.6 Business and Other Uses: (Tariff Code WA0001) Business and Other Uses Municipal: (Tariff Code WA0002) The tariffs listed in this item are payable in respect of all uses not listed in items 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3.

These tariffs apply to e.g. the following uses: business, commercial, industrial, government, mining, private schools, crèches, sport clubs including sport clubs whose lease agreements with Council have expired, private hostels, private hospitals and clinics, agriculture, temporary connections for building or business use, ﬁ re hydrant use, including Council owned properties, where the usage is not deﬁ ned as in paragraphs 3.1, 3.2 or 3.3

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl 0 200 kl / month R 10,75 201 – 1 000 kl / month R 10,35 1 001 – 2 500 kl / month R 10,10

32 OCTOBER 2010 C1 D4 Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl 2 501 – 5 000 kl month R 9,65 5 001 – 25 000 kl / month R 9,40 25 001 – 50 000 kl / month R 8,95 50 001 or more kl / month R 8,70

The tariffs listed in this item shall be levied in respect of each water connection provided to the premises on which a use as intended in this item is being exercised. The relevant tariffs listed in this item shall be levied accumulatively.

3.7 Minimum Basic Charges 3.7.1 Mm Basic Household Use: (Tariff Code WA0080) Mm Basic Household Use Municipal: (Tariff Code WA0081) Any premises, including vacant stands, where Council Water Supply is available, but not used, because such premises/vacant stand can but is not connected to the Council’s water reticulation system, the monthly minimum basic charge below will be levied until such time that the relevant premises including vacant stands, have been connected where after the tariff sliding scale in item 3.1 will apply.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed Rate per month R 71,60

3.7.2 Min Basic Institutional Uses: (Tariff Code WA0082) Any premises, including vacant stands, where Council Water Supply is available, but not used, because such premises / vacant stand can but is not connected to the Council’s water reticulation system, the monthly minimum basic charge below will be levied until such time that the relevant premises including vacant stands, have been connected where after the ﬁ xed tariff in item 3.2 will apply.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed Rate per month R 144,40

3.7.3 Min Basic Informal Settlements: (Tariff Code WA0083) Tariff as per item 3.3. 3.7.4 Min Basic Business and Other Uses: (Tariff Code WA0084) Min Basic Business and Other Uses Municipal: (Tariff Code WA0085) Any premises, including vacant stands, where Council Water Supply is available, but not used, because such premises / vacant stand can but is not connected

OCTOBER 2010 33 D4 C1 to the Council’s water reticulation system, the monthly minimum basic charge below will be levied until such time that the relevant premises including vacant stands, have been connected where after the tariff sliding scale in item 3.6 will apply.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed Rate per month R 360,40

3.8 Private Internal Water Leaks (Tariff Code WA0006) In case of exceptionally high meter readings of water consumption, due to bona fi de leaks from a private internal pipeline, the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services, may determine that the excess consumption be levied at R 5, 45 per kiloliter for a maximum period of three months, the commencement date of such period to be determined in the entire discretion of the said Executive Director. Proof of the leak being rectifi ed in the form of a plumbers invoice or affi davit from the consumer and a reduction in consumption is required.

3.9 ERGO (Tariff Code WA0023) Water supplied in terms of an existing agreement with the erstwhile Town Council of Springs. ERGO shall pay the following tariff: The cost payable to Rand Water by the Council plus 45.7% as administration charges.

3.10 SAPPI (Tariff Code WA0024) Tariff payable by SAPPI for water supplied in terms of an agreement entered into on 18 October 1943 by the erstwhile Town Council of Springs The cost as provided for in the agreement entered into on 18 October 1943: Rand Water Cost.

3.11 Sports Clubs with existing unexpired lease agreements with the Council: (Tariff Code WA0026) The tariffs speciﬁ ed in the agreement shall apply until the expiry date of the relevant agreement. Thereafter, and unless amended, the tariffs listed in item 3.6 or speciﬁ ed in item 3.4.3 as the case may be, shall be payable.

3.12 Special tariff agreements / contracts with the Council: (No Tariff Code) The tariffs speciﬁ ed per such agreement shall apply until the expiry date of the relevant agreement. Thereafter, and unless and until amended, the tariff(s) speciﬁ ed in the appropriate item contained in this schedule of tariffs shall be payable.

34 OCTOBER 2010 D4 3.13 Water supplied to Johannesburg Water and Other Local Authorities: (Tariff Code WA0025) The tariff(s) per kiloliter as determined in terms of the contracts, shall be payable.

3.14 Water supplied outside the Municipal Area at a tariff not listed in any other item of this schedule of tariffs: (Tariff Code WA0027)

The tariffs payable shall be as set out in item 3.2 plus an administration fee of 15%

3.15 Service Audit 3.15.1 Where a service audit identiﬁ es residential and agricultural zoned properties used for business purposes, the adjustment to property tax and service charges from residential to business use will be effected from the date the audit was conducted.

3.15.2 The water consumption in government subsidized housing scheme areas identiﬁ ed through a service audit in respect of water meters not being incorporated in the Council’s records will be calculated from the date the error was detected, provided a reading was obtained on such a date.

4. CONNECTION PIPES, WATER CONNECTIONS INCLUDING FIRE CONNECTIONS OR UPGRADING OF SUCH CONNECTIONS, METERING OF UNMETERED CONNECTIONS AND METERING OF UNMETERED FIRE CONNECTIONS USED ILLEGALLY.

The following tariffs or charges are payable in respect of the installation of connection pipes, water connections including ﬁ re connections or upgrading of such connections, the metering of unmetered connections and where existing unmetered ﬁ re connections are unlawfully used. In the latter case the Council reserves the right to change the water supply installation to a meter installation metered by a combination meter as sized by the Council and to recover the appropriate cost as listed in 4.1.1 from the owner. (All tariffs exclude Vat).

4.1 Where a water or ﬁ re hydrant connection is supplied: (Note: Only combination meters are to be installed for connections larger than 25mm up to 150mm.)

OCTOBER 2010 35 D4 4.1.1 Combination meters

Main Meter Size Tariff 50mm R 23 907,00 80mm R 26 072,00 100mm R 32 046,00 150mm R 50 862,00

4.1.2 Normal meters (i) Installation, including a standpipe, the connection into the reticulation pipeline, connection pipe to meter, isolating valve, meter, meter box with connecting pipe extending to boundary line and / or entrance to stand. (Including road crossing, if necessary):

Main Meter Size Tariff 15mm R 1 646, 00 25 mm R 6 383, 00

(ii) Installation of water taps: Tap Size Tariff 15mm – 25mm R 429,70

4.1.3 Where the normal water or ﬁ re hydrant connections mentioned in item 4.1 above (read with items 4.1.1 and 4.1.2) must be supplied within 14 days after approval of the application on special request, the tariff speciﬁ ed in item 4.1.1 and/or 4.1.2, as the case may be, plus an additional amount of 15% of the relevant tariff(s) shall be payable.

4.1.4 Above ground installations of water connections and meters for Low Cost Housing Developments as well as Chartered Housing Developments (maximum selling price per unit R 300, 000.00).

4.1.4.1 Full Installation by Council, which includes a standpipe, the connection into the reticulation pipeline, connection pipe to meter, isolating valve, meter, meter box with connecting pipe extending to boundary line and I or entrance to stand, (road crossing, if necessary included):

Main Meter Connection Tariff 15mm R 1 252,00

4.1.4.2 In the event that the Chief Director: Water consent that a Low cost housing/ Chartered housing Developer install the Water Meter connections themselves

36 OCTOBER 2010 D4 which must include the meter, meter box, a standpipe, the connection into the reticulation pipeline, connection pipe to meter, road crossing (if necessary) isolating valves, meter box with connecting pipe extending to boundary line and I or entrance to stand, an inspection fee of these installations will be charged in terms of 4.1.4.4

The consent will be subject to a commitment given in writing by Low Cost Housing/chartered Housing Developer that: - No less than 50 meters be applied for at the same time - That all necessary fees in terms of inspections, depositor’s and other related administration costs be paid on application. - The installation must comply to EMM speciﬁ cation which include a standpipe, owners isolating valve, meter, meter box, connection in pipeline, connection pipe, meter control valve, etc as per standard drawing which can be obtained from Water Services division Boksburg. - The installation of the meters is concluded within 30 days of application. - If it should be required the additional fees in terms of the EMM inspections will be paid without delay. The above application must be done prior to installation process. Council will inspect 10% of the connections and if the number of meters and/or their appurtenances installed not complying to any one of the speciﬁ cations exceed 2.5 %, all installations will be inspected and the cost thereof will be for the developer.

4.1.4.3 Installation of a meter only by Council, excluding a Council approved water connection, which entails a standpipe, the connection into the reticulation pipeline, connection pipe to meter, isolating valve, meter box with connecting pipe extending to boundary line and / or entrance to stand, road crossing, if necessary, as well as administration costs. Inspection fee as deﬁ ned in 4.1.4.2 and applied in terms of 4.1.4.4 excluded.

Main Meter Connection Tariff 15 mm R 634,00

4.1.4.4 Council will as a ﬁ rst inspection, randomly inspect 10% of the water connections and meters installed by the Low Cost Housing Developer in terms of paragraph 4.1.4.2. and 4.1.4.3. Should the number of connections and meters inspected not complying with the Council’s approval exceed 2.5% of the number inspected by the Council, the Council will conduct an inspection of 100% of the connections and meters installed by the Low Cost Housing Developer at the charge outlined below:

OCTOBER 2010 37 D4 Main Meter Connection Tariff 15 mm R 340,00

4.1.5 Applications for water connections and meters by Developers excluding cases referred to in item 4.1.4.

4.1.5.1 Should the Developer, excluding the cases referred to in item 4.1.4, submit a single application comprising 50 or more connections and meters for installation by the Council, which includes a standpipe, the connection into the reticulation pipeline, connection pipe to meter, isolating valve, meter, meter box with connecting pipe extending to boundary line and / or entrance to stand, (road crossing, if necessary included), the charge per connection and meter installed will be:

Main Meter Connection Tariff 15mm R 1 590,00

4.2 Tariffs for charges payable in respect of the relocation of water meters: An owner of the premises will be charged for the relocation of a meter if the meter becomes inaccessible due to the installation of a fence or wall.

4.2.1 Relocation not further than 2 metres:

Meter Size Tariff 15mm R 675,70 20mm R 698,80 25mm R 860,50

4.2.2 Relocation further than 2 metres and up to 10 meters:

Meter Size Tariff 15mm R 993,00 20mm R 1 045,00 25mm R 1 201,00

4.2.3 Should any Household water consumer who needs to install an isolating valve, require the water supply to a property to be turned off, the charge for the turn off, locating of the isolating valve, maintenance work in respect thereof or the replacement of the isolating valve by the Council, shall be as follows and shall be payable in advance by such party: R 310, 00 per event. (Tariff Code WASTO1)

38 OCTOBER 2010 D4 4.2.4 Should any Business or Other water consumer who needs to install an isolating valve, require the supply to a property to be turned off, the charge for the turn off, locating of the isolating valve, maintenance work in respect thereof or the replacement of the isolating valve by the Council, shall be as follows and shall be payable in advance by such party: R 620, 00 per event. (Tariff Code WASTO2)

4.3 Tariffs for the installation of a replacement meter where a water connection exists. Installation of a replacement water meter where an unauthorized connection was found in terms of 5.1 and a fee in terms of 5.1.1 or 5.1.2 has been levied.

Meter Size Tariff 15mm R 1 250,00 25mm R 2 045,00

4.4 Temporary hydrant connections: (Subject to approval by the Director: Revenue Section: Water Services)

4.4.1 Meter Deposits (70% Refundable)

Size of Meter Fitted Meter Deposit (a) 25mm connection R 13 282,00 (b) 50mm connection R 26 565,00

4.4.2 Consumption Deposits

Size of Meter Fitted Consumption Deposit (a) 25mm connection R 4 030,00 (b) 50mm connection R 6 711,00

4.5 Upgrading of existing Water Connection: The tariff for the upgrading of an existing water connection is the sum of 4.5.1 and

4.5.2 which determines as follows;

4.5.1 The tariff for the removal of the existing meter is as listed in 11.1 titled “To disconnect the water supply by removing the connection pipe and meter’

OCTOBER 2010 39 D4 4.5.2 The difference between the existing connection tariff and the tariff for the required upgraded connection size as listed in 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.

4.5.3 The additional consumption deposit payable is determined in terms of 13.1.

5. ILLEGAL CONNECTIONS AND OR CONSUMPTIONS AND DAM- AGES TO SERVICES

5.1 Illegal use of the ﬁ re connection and/or use of unauthorized connections / consumption:

5.1.1 A fee of R 3 627, 00 per unit representing water consumption and related administration costs in cases of Household usage. (Tariff Code SUWAIR)

5.1.2 A fee of R 7 392, 00 per unit representing water consumption and related administration costs in cases where Business and Other usage is applicable. (Tariff Code SUWAIL)

5.1.3 A fee of R 10 000, 00 per incident representing water consumption and related administration costs in cases of unauthorized usage by vehicles such as tankers. (Tariff Code SUWAIV)

5.2 Any damages to the network or connections: Actual cost of repairs + cost of water loss +15% administration fee per incident.

5.3 Neglect by an owner to repair a leaking ﬁ re connection within 48 hours after notiﬁ cation in terms of clause 7: Actual cost of repairs + 15% administration fee per incident.

6. CHARGES IN RESPECT OF SERVICES FOR WHICH NO TAR- IFFS ARE LISTED In cases where a connection to or service in respect of the water system is required and for which a charge has not been listed above, the party applying for such connection or service shall pay the cost of such work plus an administration fee of 15%, such cost to be determined by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services or his nominee in advance and such cost to be paid in advance.

40 OCTOBER 2010 D4 7. INSPECTION FEES

7.1 In respect of a speciﬁ c contravention of the Water Supply Bylaws or notices of the Council whether continuous or interrupted during a period of 12 months:

1 st inspection No charge 1 st followup inspection subsequent to a notice of rectifi cation R 808,00 (Tariff Code SUWAI1) 2 nd followup inspection subsequent to the notice of R 1 732,00 rectifi cation intended above (Tariff Code SUWAI2) 3 rd or subsequent followup inspection subsequent to the R 4 943,00 notice of rectifi cation intended above (Tariff Code SUWAI3)

7.2 In respect of locating Council meter chambers, private connections and acceptance by the Council of new water infrastructure, installations and connections during a period of 12 months:

1 st inspection on a site No charge 1 st followup inspection on the site intended above (Tariff R 808,00 Code SUWAI1) 2 nd followup inspection on the site intended above (Tariff R 1 732,00 Code SUWAI2) 3 rd or subsequent followup inspection on the site intended R 4 943,00 above (Tariff Code SUWAI3)

8. TESTING OF WATER METER

Tariffs payable by a consumer requiring the testing of a water meter for accuracy. Replacing a meter and testing the accuracy thereof by means of an accredited test bench. Tariff for Tariff for Description & testing of meter Total Tariff Tariff code Size of meter meter replacement 15mm R 136,00 R 624,00 R 760,00 WAT015 25mm R 159,00 R 1 027,00 R 1 186,00 WAT025 50mm WP R 463,00 R 13 421,00 R 13 884,00 WAP050 Series 80mm WP R 488,00 R 13 373,00 R 13 861,00 WAP080 Series 100mm WP R 530,00 R 16 045,00 R 16 575 ,00 WAP100 Series

OCTOBER 2010 41 D4 Tariff for Tariff for Description & testing of meter Total Tariff Tariff code Size of meter meter replacement 150mm WP R 804,00 R 29 040,00 R 29 844,00 WAP150 Series 50mm R 463,00 R 13 421,00 R 13 884,00 WAC050 combination 80mm R 488,00 R 13 373,00 R 13 861,00 WAC080 combination 100mm R 530,00 R 16 045,00 R 16 575,00 WAC100 combination 150mm R 804,00 R 29 040,00 R 29 844,00 WAC150 combination

Note: In the event of a 20mm meter being removed from the site for testing purposes, it will be replaced with a 15mm meter. Should a meter removed for testing be found to be defective, the relevant total tariff paid by the customer for testing and replacement will be credited to his/her account.

9. READING OF METERS ON REQUEST

Should a person require that a meter be read at any time other than the time appointed by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services or his nominee, a charge of R 171, 00 shall be paid in advance for each such reading.

10. DISCONTINUATION AND RESTRICTION OF WATER SUPPLY AS CREDIT CONTROL MEASURE AND REINSTATEMENT OF SUPPLY In the event of the water supply to a premises being cut off or restricted as a credit control measure, the consumer will be charged the following tariffs:

10.1 Household Usage

10.1.1 To deliver by hand at the premises being supplied with water, a notice addressed to the consumer instructing the consumer to settle the account within 14 days from the date of the notice: No proof of delivery required: R 57,00. (Tariff Code SUWARW) 10.1.2 To install a ﬂ ow restrictor in order to restrict the ﬂ ow through the connection to 30 kI or less per month: R 271,00

42 OCTOBER 2010 D4 (Tariff Code WAORIN)

10.1.3 To disconnect the water supply by removing the connection pipe and I or T piece or meter R 606,00 (Tariff Code WAORDC)

10.1.4 To remove the ﬂ ow restrictor in order to reinstate full ﬂ ow to the premises: R 271,00 (Tariff Code WAORRI)

10.1.5 To reconnect the water supply where the connection pipe and / or Tpiece or meter has been removed rates in 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 will be charged.

10.2 Business and Other Usage

10.2.1 To deliver by hand at the premises being supplied with water, a notice addressed to the consumer instructing the consumer to settle the account within 14 days from the date of the notice: No proof of delivery required: R 57,00 (Tariff Code SUWARW)

10.2.2 To install a manzi lock for the termination of the water supply R 606,00 (Tariff Code WAMZIN)

10.2.3 To remove a manzi lock for the reinstatement of the water supply R 271,00 (Tariff Code WAMZRM)

11. DISCONNECTION OF WATER SUPPLY AT THE OWNERS RE- QUEST

11.1 To disconnect the water supply by removing the connection pipe and meter:

Size of Meter Tariff 15mm R 360,00 20mm R 360,00

OCTOBER 2010 43 D4 Size of Meter Tariff 25mm R 430,00 40mm R 588,00 50mm R 1 011,00 80mm R 1 074,00 100mm R 1 730,00 150mm R 1 883,00

To reconnect the water supply where the connection pipe and / or Tpiece or meter has been removed rates in 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 will be charged.

11.2 To install a metered ﬂ ow restrictor/controller:

Size of Meter Tariff 15mm R 360,00 20mm R 360,00 25mm R 430,00

12. FACTOR AND COUPLING ERRORS (Tariff Code WA0005) In the event a miscalculation was made and charged for by the Council for water services rendered due to a factor or coupling error, the rectiﬁ ed charges applicable shall be calculated as follows, upon approval by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services: The Charges applicable shall be the levy Rand Water charges the Municipality (at that point in time, including the WRC levy), + 15% levy, for the duration that the incorrect charges was rendered, up to a maximum of 36 months backdated, based on the average monthly consumption registered over three succeeding metered periods after the factor error or incorrect coupling was rectiﬁ ed.

13. DEPOSITS

13.1 The following consumption deposits shall be applicable to all water users. (The deposits are payable upon application of the water connection. In the event an upgrade in connection is applied for, the deposit payable shall be the difference between the deposit already paid and the deposit applicable to that size connection):

Size of Meter Deposit 15mm R 430,00 20mm R 1 250,00 25mm R 1 250,00

44 OCTOBER 2010 D4 Size of Meter Deposit 40mm R 2 822,00 50mm R 2 822,00 80mm R 6 981,00 100mm R 9 664,00 150mm R 11 943,00

13.2 The consumption deposit in respect of a Temporary Fire Hydrant Connections connection shall be that listed in 4.4.2.

13.3 In the case of defaulters, the deposit shall be calculated as the monetary value of the sum of the two highest consecutive consumptions measured during the 12 months preceding the application for the water service.

13.4 The deposit can be altered if the connection is upgraded or downgraded, retrospectively.

13.5 A deposit of R 63, 50 shall be applicable for all residential water connections in the undermentioned townships or any other similar area identifi ed and approved by the Chief Financial Offi cer and Executive Director: Infrastructure Services. (The deposits will be levied on the account upon application for the connection and I or after signature of a user agreement). In the absence of an application and I or a signed user agreement, the registered owner I approved benefi ciary will be regarded as the consumer of the services.

TOWNSHIP REGION Langaville Ext 6 East Chris Hani Pr & Ext 1 & 2 East Etwatwa Ext 30 and 31 East Etwatwa Ext 32 East Chief Albert Luthuli Ext 4 East Etwatwa Ext 8, 21 and 24 East Etwatwa Ext 4, 12, 13 and 14 East Kwa Thema Ext 3 & 7 and Ekurhuleni East Tsakane Ext 19, 20, 21 East Kwa Thema Ext 2 East Kwa Thema Ext 6 East Duduza Ext 3 East Daveyton Ext 12 East

OCTOBER 2010 45 D4 TOWNSHIP REGION Tsakane Ext 11 East Tsakane Ext 5 East Mayfi eld Ext 6 East Mayfi eld Ext 7 East Mayfi eld Ext 8 East Etwatwa Ext 36 East Etwatwa Ext 9 and 10 East Geluksdal Ext 3 East Chief Albert Luthuli Ext 2 East Tsakane Ext 8, 9, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17 & 18 East Langaville Proper, Ext 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 East Tswelopele Ext 6 North Tswelopele Ext 5 North Esselen Park Ext 1 and 2 North Inxweni North Tswelopele Ext 8 North Tembisa Ext 23,24 North Isekelo North Palm Ridge Ext 1 to 8 South Katlehong South South Moleleki Ext 2 South Vosloorus Ext 20 South Zonkizizwe Proper, Ext 1 and 2 South Reiger Park Ext 5 South Windmill Park Ext 9 South Vosloorus Ext 24 South Zonkizizwe Ext 3 South Zonkizizwe Ext 6 South Tinasonke Ext 3 South Villa Liza Ext 2 South Eden Park Ext 5 South Eden Park Ext 4 South Isekelo North Tswelopele Ext 8 North Mayfi eld Ext 8 East Etwatwa Ext 36 East

46 OCTOBER 2010 D4 TOWNSHIP REGION Daveyton Ext 12 East Langaville Ext 6 East Langaville Ext 7 East Blue Gum View Ext 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6 East Masetjhabaview Proper & Ext 1 & 4 East Alra Park Ext 2 East Cool Breeze East Cerutiville Ext 1 East

All properties as deﬁ ned in the customer audit project, including the areas where the water midblock reticulations have been moved to the road reserve, will also be charged a once off levy of R 63, 50 for the uploading process, subject to the approval of the Chief Financial Ofﬁ cer and the Executive Director Infrastructure Services.

13.6 Accessibility problems and After Hours Readings (Tariff Code WA0090) Security townships without a manned gate during day light ofﬁ ce hours will be charged a ﬁ xed tariff of R 63,50 per meter per month over and above an estimated or actual consumption charge. Alternatively, an application can be made by the Home Owner’s Association, to have a bulk water meter installed, (at Council’s cost), outside the entrance of the security township. The total water consumption will then be charged to the Home Owner’s Association account. The onus will be on the Home Owner’s Association to calculate the individual water accounts of the dwelling units in the security township. In the event a gate is locked at any other premises and the water meter is inside and inaccessible due to the locked gate, the same charge as detailed above will be levied.

The same charge of R 63,50 will also apply to prearrange after hour readings.

THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE NOTED: 1. The Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality shall have the right to restrict the water supply to any customer who has unsettled debt with the Municipality. 2. The ﬁ gures quoted in this Schedule of Tariffs EXCLUDE Value Added Tax. 3. These tariffs shall be read in conjunction with the Bylaws for the

OCTOBER 2010 47 D5 D5. WASTE WATER

The amounts due for water services for the 2010/2011 ﬁ nancial year BE PAID on dates as indicated on accounts which will be rendered from 1 July 2010.

The Tariffs as listed include a 2.0% “ringfenced” maintenance levy to be used for critical Sewage Disposal Services maintenance only. · The Sewerage Charges will be linked to the account where the water connection is billed. Where water is supplied and metered by Rand Water or any other legal entity to premises connected to the Council’s Waste Water Reticulation System, the readings supplied by Rand Water or other legal entity will be used to calculate and render a waste water account to the owner/tenant concerned. · Reference to “per month” in the tariffs is based on a meter reading period of 30.4375 days with regard to the calculation of a charge for the free consumption portion. · ALL TARIFFS LISTED BELOW, OR TO BE CALCULATED IN TERMS OF THIS SCHEDULE OF TARIFFS EXCLUDE VAT.

2. WASTE WATER AND INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENT CHARGES

Charges shall be levied in respect of each discharge point for sewage (as deﬁ ned in the Waste Water Bylaws of the Council) whether such discharge point is a drain or the Council’s sewage disposal system. It is further noted that the tariffs effective to consumption as from 01 July 2010 and accounts as from those generated in July 2010 on a pro rata basis where applicable, will be levied.

3. WASTE WATER AND INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENT TARIFFS

All references in item 3 hereof to volumes expressed in kilolitres shall mean the volume of water supplied by the Council to the relevant premises during the period for which the relevant municipal account is compiled.

All tariffs listed in items 3.1, 3.5, 3.6 as well as, 3.9, 3.10, 3.11 if not excluded in terms of the agreement, shall be applied accumulatively.

3.1 HOUSEHOLD USE: (Tariff Code SE0017) HOUSEHOLD USE MUNICIPAL: (Tariff Code SE0010) Except where the tariffs listed in items 3.3 and 3.4.1 below are applicable, the tariffs listed in this item shall be payable where water, used solely for household purposes, including temporary connections for this purpose, has been supplied. In the case of hostels and old age homes, every 4 beds shall be deemed to be a residential unit. Where the Housing Department offi cially accommodates two or three benefi ciaries (families) per stand, each benefi ciary (family) is deemed to be a residential unit. · This tariff is only applicable to properties used exclusively for household purposes.

48 OCTOBER 2010 D5 · In the event that a small business is conducted as a primary right in terms of a Town Planning Scheme or home enterprise in terms of the Council’s policy from a property used for household purposes, and the connection size is either a 15mm or 20mm connection, the tariffs in the table below shall apply. However, any connection which is greater than 20mm and the property is not exclusively used for residential purposes, shall be charged in terms of the tariffs as detailed in 3.6 below. Spaza Shops, deﬁ ned as an area of a dwelling unit and or associated immovable outbuilding not more than 20m² in extent, used by the occupant of such a dwelling unit for the purposes of selling basic household goods, is also included in this tariff, provided the connection size is either a 15mm or 20mm connection. - That an additional 3 kI free basic consumption be granted to all registered indigent account holders subject to the stipulations of the Council’s approved Indigent Policy.

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Number of residential units x (0 6 kl I month) R 0,00 Number of residential units x (7 15 kl I month) R 5,64 Number of residential units x (16 30 kl / month) R 2,34 Number of residential units x (31 45 kI I month) R 2,14 Number of residential units x (46 60 kI / month) R 2,07 Number of residential units x (61 or more kl/month) R 0,76

In the case of hostels and old age homes, every 4 beds shall be deemed to be a residential unit.

3.2 INSTITUTIONAL USE: (Tariff Code SE 0009)

Public Beneﬁ t Organizations, Non Governmental Organizations and Cultural Organizations approved in terms of section 30 of the Income Tax Act 58 of 1962, read with items 1, 2 and 4 of the ninth Schedule to the Act; Welfare organizations registered in terms of the National Welfare Act, 1978 (Act No 100 of 1978), State Assisted Public Schools or Colleges, Public Hospitals and Churches.

The tariff payable in terms of this item is as follows: Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl Fixed Rate R 5,23

3.3 INFORMAL SETTLEMENTS: (Tariff Code SE 0008)

Tariff Summary Tariff R/kl This item is applicable in cases where stands and/or dwelling 0, 00 units are supplied with water by means of a standpipe (no stand connection available)

OCTOBER 2010 49 D5 C2 3.4 UNMETERED AND /OR UNREAD CONNECTIONS:

Tariffs payable in respect of unmetered and/or unread water connections where the Water Supply Bylaws of the Council do not provide an alternative method for calculating consumption or estimating consumption for purposes of interim charges:

3.4.1 Household use: (Tariff Code SE0018) Household Use Municipal: (Tariff Code SE0019)

The applicable tariff listed below, and not the tariff listed in item 3.1, is payable where a sewage disposal system used solely for household purposes is supplied but there is no relevant water meter reading available for the relevant month, irrespective of whether or not a meter has been ﬁ tted: Tariff Summary Tariff Fixed rate per month (estimated consumption less than or R 51,10 equal to 15 kl / month Fixed rate per month (estimated consumption exceeding 15 R 95,00 kl / month, but less than or equal to 30 kl / month Fixed rate per month (estimated consumption exceeding 30 R 185,35 kl / month

3.4.2 Institutional Use as listed in item 3.2: (Tariff Code SE0020) The tariff specifi ed below, and not the tariff specifi ed in item 3.2, is payable where a sewage disposal system is supplied but there is no relevant water meter reading for the relevant month, irrespective of whether or not a meter has been fi tted. Tariff Summary Tariff Fixed rate R 221,00

3.4.3 Business and Other Uses not included in items 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 3.5: (Tariff Code SE0021) Business and Other Uses Municipal (Tariff Code SE0016) The tariff speciﬁ ed below, and not the tariffs listed in item 3.6, is payable where a sewage disposal system is supplied but there is no relevant water meter reading for the relevant month, irrespective of whether or not a meter has been ﬁ tted. Tariff Summary Tariff Fixed rate per month R 814,00

3.5 FLOW RESTRICTION (Tariff Code 0022)

3.5.1 Properties used exclusively for household purposes as deﬁ ned in 3.1. For as long as the restriction implemented by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services or his nominee in respect of the supply of water to the relevant

50 OCTOBER 2010 D5 premises is applicable and the volume of water supplied to the premises does not exceed the appropriate under mentioned limit set in terms of such restriction and a sewage disposal system is supplied to the relevant premises, the relevant tariff listed below shall be payable.

Limit Tariff R/kI A maximum of 6 kl I month 0,00 Between 7 kl to 15 kl / month R 4,16 More than 16 kl / month Total Consumption as per sliding scale in item 3.1

3.5.2 Registered Indigent Account Holders as deﬁ ned in the Indigent Policy: If so requested by a registered indigent account holder, or deemed necessary by the Executive Director Infrastructure Services, a ﬂ ow restrictor can be installed on the premises, subject to such Indigent being registered in terms of the Indigent Policy. The registered indigent will receive the allocated 9 kI free basic water per month on a daily pro rata basis where after the tariff in 3.5.1 will be applicable.

3.6 BUSINESS AND OTHER USES: (Tariff Code SE0001) BUSINESS AND OTHER USES MUNICIPAL: (Tariff Code SE0002) The tariffs listed in this item are payable in respect of all uses not listed in items 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.5 and 7. These tariffs apply to e.g. the following uses: business, commercial, industrial, government, mining, private schools, crèches, sport clubs including sport clubs whose lease agreements with Council have expired, private hostels, private hospitals and clinics, agriculture, temporary connections for building or business use, ﬁ re hydrant use including Council owned properties, where the usage is not deﬁ ned as in paragraphs 3.1, 3.2 or 3.3. Tariff Summary Tariff R/kI 0200 kl/month R 6,12 201 - 1 000 klImonth R4,81 1 001 - 2 500 kl/month R 2,82 2 501 - 5 000 kl/month R 1,38 5 001 - 25 000 kl/month R 1,24 25 001 - 50 000 kl/month R 1,16 50 001 or more kl/month R 0,62

The tariffs listed in this item shall be levied in respect of each sewer connection provided to the premises on which a use intended in this item is being exercised. The relevant tariffs listed in this item shall be levied accumulatively.

OCTOBER 2010 51 D5 C2 3.7 MINIMUM BASIC CHARGES

3.7.1 Minimum Basic Household Use: (Tariff Code SE0080) Minimum Basic Household Use Municipal: (Tariff Code SE0081) Any premises, including vacant stands, where a Council Waste Water Disposal Service is available, but not used, because such premises/vacant stand can but is not connected to the Council’s waste water reticulation system, the monthly minimum basic charge below will be levied until such time that the relevant premises including vacant stands, have been connected where after the tariff sliding scale in item 3.1 will apply. Tariff Summary Tariff R Fixed Rate per month R 51,10

3.7.2 Minimum Basic Institutional Uses: (Tariff Code SE0082) Any premises, including vacant stands, where a Council Waste Water Disposal Service is available, but not used, because such premises/vacant stand can but is not connected to the Council’s waste water reticulation system, the monthly minimum basic charge below will be levied until such time that the relevant premises including vacant stands, have been connected where after the ﬁ xed tariff in item 3.2 will apply.

Tariff Summary Tariff R Fixed Rate per month R 102,20

3.7.3 Minimum Basic Informal Settlements: (Tariff Code SE0083) Tariff as per item 3.3.

3.7.4 Business and Other Uses: (Tariff Code SE0084) Business and Other Uses Municipal: (Tariff Code SE0085) Any premises, including vacant stands, where a Council Waste Water Disposal Service is available, but not used, because such premises/vacant stand can but is not connected to the Council’s waste water reticulation system, the monthly minimum basic charge below will be levied until such time that the relevant premises including vacant stands, have been connected where after the tariff sliding scale in item 3.6 will apply.

Tariff Summary Tariff R Fixed Rate per month R 254,25

3.8 PRIVATE INTERNAL WATER LEAKS (Tariff Code SE0006) In case of exceptionally high meter readings of water consumption, due to bona ﬁ de leaks from a private internal water pipeline, the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services, may determine that the following efﬂ uent tariff shall be levied as follows on

52 OCTOBER 2010 D5 the excess consumption for a maximum period of three months, the commencement date of such period to be determined in the entire discretion of the said Executive Director: Tariff Summary Tariff R Fixed Rate R 0,76

3.9 SPORTS CLUBS WITH EXISTING UNEXPIRED LEASE AGREEMENTS WITH THE COUNCIL: (Tariff Code SE0026) The tariffs speciﬁ ed in the agreement shall apply until the expiry date of the relevant agreement. Thereafter, and unless amended, the tariffs listed in item 3.4.3 or speciﬁ ed in item 3.6 as the case may be, shall be payable.

3.10 SPECIAL TARIFF AGREEMENTS I CONTRACTS WITH THE COUNCIL: (NO CODE) The tariffs speciﬁ ed per such agreement shall apply until the expiry date of the relevant agreement. Thereafter, and unless amended, the tariff(s) speciﬁ ed in the appropriate item contained in this schedule of tariffs shall be payable.

3.11 SERVICE RENDERED OUTSIDE THE MUNICIPAL AREA

3.11.1 Where water is supplied by the Council to the premises situated outside the municipality from which sewage excluding industrial efﬂ uent is disposed into the sewage disposal system of the Council, the tariffs payable shall be as set out in item 3.2 plus an administration fee of 15%, unless a different tariff or different tariffs are listed in this schedule for the relevant use in which event the latter tariff(s) plus an administration fee of 15% will apply. (Tariff Code SE0028)

3.11.2 Where water is not supplied by the Council to those premises situated outside the municipality and such premises dispose of sewage — excluding industrial efﬂ uent into the sewage disposal system of the Council, the tariffs payable shall be negotiated directly with the party concerned, by the Executive Director Infrastructure Services, plus an administration fee of 15% will apply. (Tariff Code SE0029)

3.11.3 Where water is supplied by the Council to the premises situated outside the municipality from which industrial efﬂ uent is disposed into the sewage disposal system of the Council paragraphs 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, 5, 6 and 7 will apply. Where tariffs are applicable in these paragraphs an additional administration fee of 15% will apply.

3.11.4 Where water is not supplied by the Council to those premises situated outside

OCTOBER 2010 53 D5 C2 the municipality and such premises dispose of industrial efﬂ uent into the sewage disposal system of the Council, the tariffs payable shall be negotiated directly with the party concerned, by the Executive Director Infrastructure Services, plus an administration fee of 15% will apply

3.12 GREASE, OIL, SILT or SAND TRAP (Tariff Code SETRAP)

In addition to any other tariffs payable in terms of this schedule of tariffs an amount of R 282, 00 per month shall be payable in respect of any discharge point discharging waste water and I or industrial efﬂ uent into the Council’s sewage disposal system through a grease, oil, silt or sand trap.

3.13 DISCHARGE OF CERTAIN EFFLUENT WHERE AN INDUSTRIAL DISCHARGE PERMIT AS INTENDED IN SECTION 34 OF THE COUNCIL’S WASTEWATER BYLAWS IS REQUIRED

3.13.1 In cases where water is supplied and metered by the Council and such water is used exclusively in an industrial process for which a valid and applicable industrial effl uent discharge permit has been issued in terms of section 34 of the Waste Water Bylaws of the Council, the tariffs specifi ed in item 3 hereof shall not apply. Where the permit referred to above has been issued the tariffs intended in item 7, as the case may be, will be payable from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the permit is issued. (No Code)

3.13.2 In cases, such as complexes housing different businesses, where the quantity of water used in an industrial process, for which a permit, as referred to in

3.13.1 hereof is required, cannot readily be determined or at reasonable cost be metered by the Council, the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services may, subsequent to receipt of a written application submitted to him and containing suffi cient information for his purposes, in his entire discretion, estimate the average monthly utilization of water for industrial purposes, to be refl ected as a constant percentage of the water consumed on the premises, and in such event the tariffs specifi ed in item 3 shall apply to the balance of the monthly water consumption: Provided that such estimate, as well as the application of the tariffs intended in item 3 hereof to the balance of the monthly water consumption, shall only be effective from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the estimate was made. Where the permit referred to above has been issued the tariffs intended in item 7, as the case may be, will be payable from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the certifi cate is issued. (No Code)

54 OCTOBER 2010 D5 3.14 DISCHARGE OF CERTAIN EFFLUENT WHERE NO INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENT DISCHARGE PERMIT AS INTENDED IN SECTION 3 OF THE COUNCIL’S WASTE WATER BYLAWS IS REQUIRED

3.14.1 In cases where: (i) The consumption of water supplied and metered by the Council exceeds 150 kl per month; and (ii) Subsequent to receipt of a written application submitted to him, the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services has issued to the Chief Financial Offi cer of the Council, a certifi cate confi rming that all such water is utilized exclusively for industrial / manufacturing purposes producing effl uent which may be discharged into the sewer disposal system of the Council without it being required to obtain permission as intended in section 34 of the Waste Water Bylaws of the Council the tariffs specifi ed in item 3 hereof shall not apply to the water thus consumed from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the certifi cate as foresaid was issued. Where the said certifi cate has not been issued, the tariffs specifi ed in item 3 hereof shall be payable. Where the certifi cate referred to above has been issued the tariffs intended in items 7.3.3 and 7.3.4, as the case may be, will be payable on the balance of the consumption calculated after the percentage lost in the industrial I manufacturing process, as indicated in the certifi cate, has been subtracted, from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the certifi cate is issued.

3.14.2 In cases where: (i) the consumption of water supplied and metered by the council exceeds 150 kI per month and (ii) subsequent to receipt of a suffi ciently detailed written application submitted to him, the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services has issued to the Chief Financial Offi cer of the Council, a certifi cate confi rming that such water is mainly utilized for industrial / manufacturing purposes which produce effl uent which may be discharged into the sewer disposal system of the Council without it being required to obtain permission as intended in section 34 of the Waste Water Bylaws of the Council, the executive Director: Infrastructure Services, may in his entire discretion, estimate the average monthly utilization of water for industrial/manufacturing purposes, to be refl ected as a constant percentage of the water consumed on the premises, and in such event the tariffs specifi ed in item 3 shall apply to the balance of the monthly metered water consumption: Provided that such estimate as well as the application of the tariffs intended in item 3 hereof to the balance of the monthly water consumption, shall only be effective from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the said estimate was made.

OCTOBER 2010 55 D5 C2 Where the said certifi cate has not been issued, the tariffs specifi ed in item 3 hereof shall be payable. Where the certifi cate referred to above has been issued the tariffs intended in items 7.3.3 and 7.3.4, as the case may be, will be payable on the balance of the consumption calculated after the percentage lost in the industrial I manufacturing process, as indicated in the certifi cate, has been subtracted, from the fi rst day of the month following the month in which the certifi cate is issued.

4. SEWER CONNECTIONS OR UPGRADING OF UNAUTHORISED SEWER CONNECTIONS

4.1 Where a connection to the Council’s sewage disposal system is to be installed, the following charge shall be levied and will be payable in advance: (The charge excludes VAT)

Description Amount 100mm diameter connection onto a 100mm or R 4 921, 00 150mm diameter pipe (no road crossing 150mm diameter connection onto a 150mm diameter pipe R 5 763,00 (no road crossing) 100mm diameter connection requiring a road crossing, R 11 095,00 whether partial or whole 150mm diameter connection requiring a road crossing, R 13 414,00 whether partial or whole

Where connections are provided in lieu of a discontinued bucket system, vacuum tank service, ablution block, chemical toilets or such other facility as the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services may determine, the charges listed in item 4.1 shall not be payable.

4.2 Charges in respect of services for which no tariffs are listed In cases where a connection to or service in respect of the sewage disposal system is required and for which a charge has not been listed above, the party applying for such connection or service shall pay the cost of such work plus an administration fee of 15%, such cost to be determined by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services or his nominee in advance.

5. INSPECTION FEES

5.1 In respect of a speciﬁ c contravention of the Waste Water Bylaws or notices of the Council whether continuous or interrupted during a period of 12 months:

1 st inspection No charge

56 OCTOBER 2010 D5 1 st followup inspection subsequent to a notice of rectifi cation R 832,00 Tariff Code SUSEI1 2 nd followup inspection subsequent to the notice of R 1 782,00 rectifi cation intended above Tariff Code SUSEI2 3 rd or subsequent followup inspection subsequent to the R 5 085,00 notice of rectifi cation intended above Tariff Code SUSEI3

5.2 In respect of locating Council manholes, private connections and acceptance by the Council of new sewer infrastructure, installations and connections during a period of 12 months:

1 st inspection on a site No charge 1 st followup inspection on the site intended above Tariff R 832,00 Code SUSEI1 2 nd followup inspection on the site intended above Tariff R 1 782,00 Code SUSEI2 3 rd or subsequent followup inspection on the site intended R 5 085,00 above Tariff Code SUSEI3

6. READING OF EFFLUENT METERS ON REQUEST

Should any party require that a meter be read at any time other than the time appointed by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services or his nominee, a charge of R 176, 00 shall be paid for each such reading. (No Code)

7. INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENT

7.1 Issuing of an Industrial Efﬂ uent Discharge Permit (Section 34 of the Waste Water Bylaws of the Council) No charge

7.2 In respect of industrial efﬂ uent, the highest of the tariffs calculated in terms of item or speciﬁ ed in items 7.3.3 or 7.3.4 shall be payable.

7.3 Industrial Efﬂ uent Treatment and conveyance charge. (Tariff Code SEEFFL)

7.3.1 Calculation of Industrial Efﬂ uent Treatment and Conveyance Charge The following provisions apply with regard to and for purposes of calculating the treatment and conveyance charge provided for in paragraph 7.3.2. (a) In addition to any other charges provided for in these tariffs or in any other law, a charge calculated in accordance with the provisions of these tariffs shall be payable to the Council in respect of each month during which industrial efﬂ uent is discharged from any premises.

OCTOBER 2010 57 D5 C2 (b) Each user of the Council’s sewerage disposal system (hereinafter referred to as “the said user”) discharging effl uent into such system shall test such industrial effl uent, on a regular schedule as provided for in the permit to discharge industrial effl uent, and report the results to the Council. (c) The Council shall in its entire discretion conduct analysis of industrial effl uent at random. The values obtained by the Council shall be taken as correct and used to calculate the treatment and conveyance charge. Whenever the Council takes a sample, one half thereof shall be made available to the said user, if required at the time when the sample is taken. (d) The average of the values of the different analysis results of 24 hourly composite or grab samples of the effl uent, taken during the relevant month and as prescribed in terms of the permit referred to in subparagraph (b) above will be used to determine the treatment charge payable. Should the said user not accept the values obtained from the said analysis intended in this subparagraph the said user may request further tests at the cost of the said user to be done by a laboratory acceptable to the Council and the said user. (e) In the total absence of a sample, the said user shall pay to the Council the higher of the amounts as determined per items 7.3.3 or 7.3.4 hereof per month plus such other applicable tariffs prescribed herein. (f) Should the said user fail to submit to the Council timeously the results required in terms of subparagraph (b) above, the results obtained by the Council from the last test results submitted in terms of the provisions of subparagraph (b) shall remain applicable: Provided further that the Council may apply the provisions of subparagraph (c) above for the purposes of calculating the charges payable: Provided further that should the result of the formula in item 7.3.2 be less than the amount specifi ed in items 7.3.3 or 7.3.4 the highest amount calculated will be payable for the relevant month. (g) In the absence of any direct measurement, the quantity of industrial effl uent discharged during a period shall be determined by the Council taking into consideration the quantity of water consumed on the premises during that period, the quantity of the water consumed on the premises for domestic purposes, the quantity lost to the atmosphere during the process of manufacture and the quantity present in the fi nal product produced on the premises. Thus calculated, the quantity of industrial effl uent discharged will be refl ected as a constant percentage of the water consumed on the premises. (h) If a meter metering the quantity of water consumed on the premises is proven to be defective, the appropriate adjustments shall be made to the quantity of effl uent discharged when calculated as prescribed in subparagraph (g) and the defective meter shall be repaired or replaced

58 OCTOBER 2010 D5 as soon as possible. (I) For the purpose of calculation of the quantity of effl uent discharged from each point of discharge of effl uent as aforesaid, the total quantity of water consumed on the premises shall be allocated among the several points of discharge as accurately as is reasonably practical after consultation between the Council and the said users of the relevant premises. (j) The owner or occupier of premises where an effl uent meter is installed shall ensure that the meter is calibrated annually. (k) In the absence of both direct measurement and water consumption, the quantity of industrial effl uent discharged during a period shall be determined by the Council taking a six month average of the direct measurement or a six month average of the water consumption for calculation of the quantity of effl uent as prescribed in subparagraph (g)

7.3.2 Treatment and Conveyance Charge In addition to any other fee or charges payable in terms of this schedule of tariffs, there shall be payable to the Council, in respect of any premises on which any trade or industry is carried out and from which, as a result of such trade or industry or of any process incidental thereto, any effl uent (hereinafter referred to as “industrial effl uent”) is discharged into the Council’s sewage disposal system, a treatment and conveyance charge, being an amount calculated on the industrial effl uent discharged, the strengths and the permitted (allowed) concentrations of the industrial effl uent discharged during the relevant month and in accordance with the following formula:

&⎛ 4L⎞ ⎡ ⎛ &2'L⎞ ⎛ 3L⎞ ⎛ 1L⎞ ⎛ 66L⎞ ⎤ 7L= ⎜ ⎟ ⎢ D+ E⎜ ⎟ + G⎜ ⎟ + H⎜ ⎟ + I⎜ ⎟ ⎥ ⎝ 4W⎠ ⎣ ⎝ &2'W⎠ ⎝ 3W⎠ ⎝ 1W⎠ ⎝ 66W⎠ ⎦

Where Ti = Charges due per month for the treatment and conveyance of industrial effl uent. C = R 365 600 000, 00 Qi = sewage fl ow (as defi ned in the Council’s Waste Water bylaws) originating from the relevant premises in kilolitres per day determined for the relevant month Qt = fi ve year average of total sewage infl ow (as defi ned in the Council’s Waste Water Bylaws) to the Council’s sewage disposal system in kilolitre per day; CODi = average chemical oxygen demand of the sample originating from the relevant premises in milligrams per litre determined for the relevant month; CODt = fi ve year annual average chemical oxygen demand of the sewage in the total infl ow to the Council’s sewage disposal system in milligrams per litre; Pi = average Orthophosphate concentration originating from the relevant premises

OCTOBER 2010 59 D5 C2 in milligrams phosphorus per litre determined for the relevant month; Pt = annual average Orthophosphate concentration of the sewage in the total infl ow to the Council’s sewage disposal system in milligrams phosphorus per litre; Ni = average ammonia concentration originating from the relevant premises in milligrams nitrogen per litre determined for the relevant month; Nt = fi ve year annual average ammonia concentration of the sewage in the total infl ow to the Council’s sewage disposal system in milligrams nitrogen per litre; SSi= average suspended solids concentration originating from the relevant premises in milligrams per litre determined for the relevant month; SSt = fi ve year annual average suspended solids concentration of the sewage in the total infl ow to the Council’s sewage disposal system in milligrams per litre; a = portion of the fi xed cost of treatment and conveyance; b = portion of the costs directly related to the removal of chemical oxygen demand; d = portion of costs directly related to the removal of phosphates; e = portion of the costs directly related to the removal of ammonia; f = portion of the costs directly related to the removal of suspended solids

For calculating of the treatment charges according to the above formula the following system values will apply: Qt 559 780 CODt 816 Pt 5,9 Nt 24,8 SSt 308 a 0,60 b 0,26 d 0,16 e 0,15 f 0,14

7.3.3 Volume Charge (Tariff Code SE0003) Where the discharging of efﬂ uent per volume per month as indicated in the table below occurs, the appropriate tariff set out in the table below shall be payable and the said appropriate tariff shall also apply where a certiﬁ cate has been issued as intended in item 3.13 hereof:

Volume of Efﬂ uent Discharged Tariff R/kl Efﬂ uent 0 - 200 kl / month R 6,06 201 - 1 000 kI I month R 5,64 1 001 - 2 500 kI I month R 5,16

60 OCTOBER 2010 D5 Volume of Efﬂ uent Discharged Tariff R/kl 2501 or more k/ I month R2,97

7.3.4 Minimum charges: Efﬂ uent (Tariff Code SE0004) R 929,00

7.4 Additional Tariff Payable In Respect of the Discharge of Efﬂ uent having a Value Contrary to the Discharge Limits

7.4.1 The acceptable discharge limits are as speciﬁ ed in Schedule “A” hereof.

7.4.2 Where effl uent contrary to the limits specifi ed in Schedule “A” is discharged, treatment and conveyance charges being the higher of R 1,03 per kilolitre industrial effl uent discharged during the relevant month or R 1 018,00 per month for each individual parameter deviating from the acceptable parameters specifi ed in Schedule “A”, shall be payable to the Council in addition to all other charges payable to the Council in terms of this schedule of tariffs.

8. VACUUM TANK SERVICES

All existing and new customers receiving or requiring a vacuum tank service will be required to register with the Council prior to any service being rendered, at the relevant Service Delivery Centre. Where the Council, in its entire discretion, is willing to provide a vacuum tank service, the following charges shall be levied and payable: Note:

In the event the quality of the effl uent does not conform to the standards as determined in Section 7 above, the Council reserves the right not to collect the effl uent, or impose a penalty for the non conforming quality of effl uent. In the event a penalty is imposed, the amount will be to the sole discretion of the Executive Director (Infrastructure Services). In the event Council exercises its right not to collect the non conforming effl uent, the user will be obliged to treat the effl uent, so as to conform to the standards set out in Section 7, and all costs in this regard will be for the users account.

8.1.1 Domestic Sewerage (Tariff Code: SEVAC2) In cases where the premises can, but is not connected to the Council’s sewage disposal system, in the case of domestic sewerage, and the existing sewerage reticulation is adjacent to the said erf: The user of the vacuum tank service pays a charge of R 964, 00 per call out irrespective of the quantity of wastewater removed for that call out. For the purposes of item 8 “Domestic Sewage” shall mean sewage removed from residential premises, as deﬁ ned in 3.1 above, including agricultural holdings and farm portions (only if such holdings or farm portions are primarily used for

OCTOBER 2010 61 D5 C2 residential purposes), sport ﬁ elds and old age homes.

8.1.2 Other Sewerage (Tariff Code: SEVAC3) In cases where the premises can, but is not connected to the Council’s sewage disposal system, in the case of the property zoned all other uses, excluding uses as deﬁ ned in 3.1 above, and the existing sewerage reticulation is adjacent to the said erf: The user of the vacuum tank service pays a charge of R 1 465, 00 per call out irrespective of the quantity of wastewater removed for that call out.

8.2.1 Domestic Sewage (Tariff Code: SEVAC4) In cases where the premises cannot be connected to the sewer disposal system (where the existing sewer reticulation is not adjacent to the said erf): A charge of R 252, 00 per callout (max of 5 kI), thereafter R 252, 00 per trip For the purposes of item 8 “Domestic Sewage” shall mean sewage removed from residential premises, as deﬁ ned in 3.1 above, including agricultural holdings and farm portions (only if such holdings or farm portions are primarily used for residential purposes), sport ﬁ elds and old age homes.

8.2.2 Other Sewage (Tariff Code: SEVAC5) In the case of the property zoned all other uses, excluding uses as deﬁ ned in 3.1 above, and the existing sewerage reticulation is not adjacent to the said erf: A charge of R 523, 00 per callout (max of 5 kI), thereafter R 523, 00) per trip

9. DISCHARGING OF WASTE WATER INTO COUNCIL’S WASTE WATER RETICULATION BY A PRIVATE CONTRACTOR

The contractor is required to enter into a license agreement, with a monthly fee of R 1 775,00 payable for permission to discharge into the mainlines and R 133,00 for every discharge of 5 kI made, The main lines will be identiﬁ ed by the Chief Area Engineer or his representative and only those may be used as the discharge point. Any deviation from the agreed point of discharge will result in a penalty of R 3 700,00 being levied, per incident. The company will be required to enter into a license agreement to discharge.

The Council reserves the right to take samples of the discharge at any time, and if the quality is deemed to be outside the standards as deﬁ ned in Section 8 above, a penalty may be enforced, and the Council reserves the right to terminate the contractor’s permission to discharge into the reticulation. The penalty in the event of non conforming quality of efﬂ uent discharged shall be to the sole discretion of the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services. The penalty shall be charged as detailed in Section 7 above. License Fee (Tariff Code SEVACL)

62 OCTOBER 2010 D5 Discharge Fee (Tariff Code SEVACD) Discharge Penalty (Tariff Code SEVACP)

10. DISCHARGING OF WASTE WATER INTO COUNCIL’S WASTE WATER RETICULATION BY COUNCIL APPOINTED ANNUAL CONTRACTOR

The contractor is required to enter into a license agreement, with a monthly fee of R 1 775,00 payable for permission to discharge into the main lines. The main lines will be identiﬁ ed by the Chief Area Engineer or his representative and only those may be used as the discharge point. Any deviation from the agreed point of discharge will result in a penalty of R 3 700, 00 being levied, per incident. The company will be required to enter into a license agreement to discharge. License Fee (Tariff Code SEVACL) Discharge Fee (Tariff Code SEVACP)

11. INCORRECT SEWER ACCOUNT

11.1 or Factor Errors (Tariff Code SE0005) In the event a miscalculation was made and charged for by the Council for sewerage services rendered due to a factor or coupling error related to the water meter, the rectiﬁ ed charges applicable shall be calculated as follows, upon approval by the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services: The charges applicable shall be the levy ERWAT charges the municipality (at that point in time, including the WRC levy), + 15% levy, for the duration that the incorrect charges was rendered, up to a maximum of 36 months backdated based on the average monthly consumption registered over three succeeding metered periods after the factor or coupling error was rectiﬁ ed.

11.2 Non Measurement by Water Meter In the event sewerage charges are levied where water supplied by the Council to any premises is in any way taken by the consumer without such water passing through the water meter of the Council, the Council may for the purpose of rendering an account for sewerage, estimate the quantity of water supplied to the consumer during the period from the last previous reading of the water meter, back dated not longer than 36 months, until the date it is discovered that water is so taken by the consumer. This estimate of the quantity of water supplied to a consumer shall be based on, as the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services may decide — · The average monthly consumption of water on the premises during any three consecutive metering periods during the twelve months period prior to the date on which the taking of the water mentioned above was discovered; or

OCTOBER 2010 63 D5 C2 · The average monthly consumption on the premises registered over three succeeding metered periods after the date of discovery of the way the water was taken.

11.3 Dysfunctional Water Meter Where a water meter becomes dysfunctional and ceases to register the quantity of water supplied to a consumer, the quantity of water supplied during the period between the date of the last reading of the water meter (prior to the reading consequent on which the failure was discovered) and the date of its repair or replacement, shall for purposes of determining a sewerage charge, be estimated, as the Executive Director: Infrastructure Services may decide, on either of the following basis — · The average daily consumption of water registered by the water meter, which has ceased to register, calculated on the preceding three meter readings taken before the meter ceased to register; · The average daily consumption of water registered by the replaced or repaired water meter, calculated on two successive meter readings taken after the repair or replacement of the defective water meter; or · The consumption of water at the same water connection recorded for the corresponding period in the previous year.

THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE NOTED: 1. The ﬁ gures quoted in this Schedule of Tariffs DO NOT INCLUDE Value Added Tax. 2. These tariffs shall be read in conjunction with the Bylaws for the Supply of Wastewater Services published by the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality.

64 OCTOBER 2010 D6 D6, ROADS AND STORMWATER

Tariff (VAT Description Unit incl.) The Provision of Driveway Entrances Fixed Charge R 1 300,00 Metre R 325,00 The Repair / Replacement of Kerbing Metre R 450,00 Tar Surface Repairs m2 R 400,00 The Repair / Provision of block paving m2 R 250,00 The Repair / Provision of brick paving m2 R 250,00

OCTOBER 2010 65 D7 C2 D7. FINANCIAL

TARIFF DESCRIPTION BASIS (VAT Included) FINANCIAL SERVICES Valuation Certiﬁ cate or property related Per Property R 37,00 information Issuing of a Duplicate Receipt Per Property R 37,00 Application for Clearance Figures — Prepaid tariff Per Property R 165,00 for manual applications Application for Clearance Figures — Tariff for Per Property R 60,00 Electronic applications Deeds Search Per Property R 63,00 Warning Notices (if applicable) (excluding water Per Notice R 63,00 and electricity notices) Administration fee for dishonoured payments, RD Per Item R 150,00 cheques and electronic payments reversed Account Analysis Computer Per Account R 100,00 Account Analysis Manual Per Account R 190,00 including child accounts Duplicate Account statement Per Account R 8,00 Service Fee payable with payment of deposit for Per Account R 90,00 services Photo copy charges · A0 Black & White Per Copy R 20,00 · A1 Black & White Per Copy R 15,00 · A2 Black & White Per Copy R 8,00 · A3 Black & White Per Copy R 2,00 · A4 Black & White Per Copy R 1,00 · A0 Colour Per Copy R 270,00 · A1 Colour Per Copy R 125,00 · A2 Colour Per Copy R 80,00 · A3 Colour Per Copy R 14,00 · A4 Colour Per Copy 7,50 Interest on arrear accounts — Ambulance and Hostel accounts Interest at 0%

66 OCTOBER 2010 D7 TARIFF DESCRIPTION BASIS (VAT Included) Interest on arrear accounts — Government Interest at the prime rate of accounts the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality’s bankers (currently ABSA Bank Ltd) will be charged per month or part thereof on all arrears 60 days and older in terms of the Credit control and Debt collection policy. (The prime rate effective on the fi rst day of each quarter will be the fi xed interest rate for that quarter of the fi nancial year. The quarters will be 1 January, 1 April, 1 July and 1 October) Interest on arrear accounts — exclusive of Interest at the prime rate of Ambulance, Hostel and Government the Ekurhuleni Metropolitan accounts Municipality’s bankers (currently ABSA Bank Ltd) will be charged per month or part thereof on all arrears in terms of the Credit control and Debt collection policy. (The prime rate effective on the fi rst day of each quarter will be the fi xed interest rate for that quarter of the fi nancial year. The quarters will be 1 January, 1 April, 1 July and 1 October)

OCTOBER 2010 67 D8 C2 D8. ADVERTISING SIGNS

1. TARIFFS

DESCRIPTION TARIFF Including VAT APPLICATION FEE: Super, large and small billboards and electronic signs R 755,00 per sign Undefi ned advertising signs >4,5m² Sky, roof, fl at, on premises business signs or service facility signs Landscaped advertisements Advertising on bridges, boundary walls and fences Advertisements on water towers, reservoirs, silos and on ground level Gantry, construction site, product replicas, threedimensional, product replica, threedimensional and security advertising signs Street name advertising signs R 206,00 per new sign Temporary Banners R 135,00 per event per Aerial signs Customer Care Centre Category one posters and notices for auction sales R 6,50 per event per sign and events of a cultural, political, social, sporting or per Customer Care Centre recreational nature. with a minimum of R 135,00 payable Category one posters and notices of a charitable, R 41,50 per event per religious or educational nature. Customer Care Centre Category three posters and notices to display news R 5,10 per frame headlines for a newspaper Project advertising signs in road reserve R 135,00 per sign Development advertising signs R 680,00 per sign Lodging of an appeal R 2 740,00 per appeal Submission of adhoc proposal R 10 000,00 per proposal FACE CHANGE Super, large and small billboards and electronic signs R 420,00 per face change Undefi ned advertising signs >4,5m2² Sky, roof, fl at, on premises business signs and service facility signs Landscape advertisements Advertising on bridges, boundary walls and fences

68 OCTOBER 2010 D8 DESCRIPTION TARIFF Including VAT Advertisements on water towers, reservoirs, silos and R 420,00 per face change on ground level Gantry, construction site, product replicas, threedimensional and security advertising signs Street name advertising sign R 70,00 per face change INSPECTION FEE: Super, large and small billboards and electronic signs R 104,00 per m² of the Undeﬁ ned advertising signs >4,5m² total face of each sign Sky, roof, ﬂ at, on premises signs and service facility signs Landscape advertisements Advertising on bridges, boundary walls and fences Advertisements on water towers, reservoirs, silos and on ground level Gantry, construction site, product replicas, threedimensional and security advertising signs ADVERTISING FEE: Temporary Banners R 27,00 per event per sign Category three posters and notices to display news R 5,10 per frame per headlines for a newspaper month ANNUAL LICENSING FEE: Estate agent signs R 996,00 per agency per annum per Customer Care Centre Portable advertising signs R 70,00 per annum per Permanent and semipermanent Flags enterprise Category Four posters and notices in frames for R 41,50 per frame per public awareness and community based campaigns annum and notices of a public meeting STORAGE FEE: Trailer and vehicular advertising R 270,00 per sign per month DEPOSIT: Temporary Banners R 420,00 per event

OCTOBER 2010 69 D8 C2 DESCRIPTION TARIFF Including VAT Category one posters and notices for auction sales R 27,00 per sign and events of a cultural, political, social, sporting or recreational nature or of a charitable, religious or educational nature. CONTRACTS: Advertisements on litter bins and public transport Rate per tender shelters Suburb name and stack signs Category Two posters and notices for commercial advertising Street name advertising signs REMOVAL FEE: Super, large and small billboards and electronic signs Tendered rate or R 135, Undefi ned advertising signs >4,5m² 00 per m² of the total face of each sign if removed by Sky, roof, fl at, on premises business signs and EMM service facility signs Landscape advertisements Veranda, balcony, canopy and under awning signs Painted advertisements Portable advertising signs Residential homeundertaking and community institution signs Advertising on bridges, boundary walls and fences Advertisements on water towers, reservoirs, silos and on ground level Gantry, construction site, product replicas, threedimensional and security advertising signs Project and development advertising signs Aerial signs Advertising signs at educational facilities and sport stadiums and fi elds < 18m² Security services and projecting signs Trailer or vehicular advertising R 1 080,00 per vehicle or trailer Bicycle trailer advertising R 270,00 per bicycle

70 OCTOBER 2010 D8 DESCRIPTION TARIFF Including VAT REMOVAL FEE CLASS TWO SIGNS: Licensed permanent and semipermanent R 70,00 per sign Flags Licensed Temporary Banners Unlicensed Estate agent signs <1 m² Category one unlicensed posters and notices for auction sales and events of a cultural, political, social, sporting or recreational nature or of a charitable, religious or educational nature and for commercial advertising. Unlicensed permanent and semipermanent Flags Unlicensed Temporary Banners R 135,00 per sign Licensed Estate agent signs <1 m² Category one licensed posters and notices for auction sales and events of a cultural, political, social, sporting or recreational nature and of a charitable, religious or educational nature and for commercial advertising Category three posters and notices to display news R 27,00 per sign headlines for a newspaper Category four posters and notices in frames for public awareness and community based campaigns and notices of a public meeting Category fi ve posters and notices for parliamentary or municipal elections, byelections, referenda and registration process R 27,00 per sign All Class two boards > 1m² Tendered rate or R 135,00 per m² of the total face of each sign if removed by EMM Temporary signs pasted against bridges, transformer Rates per tender boxes, substations, traffi c signs, etc. Class 1 Primary metropolitan distributor R 86,00 Class 2 Metropolitan distributor R 70,00 Class 3 District distributor R 41,50 Class 4 & 5 Collector and Access street R 14,80 Super, large, small billboards and electronic signs Undefi ned advertising signs >4,5m²

OCTOBER 2010 71 D8 C2 DESCRIPTION TARIFF Including VAT Sky, roof and fl at signs R 14,80 Signs painted on walls and roofs and mural advertisements Landscape advertisements Advertising on bridges, boundary walls and fences Advertisements on ground level Service facility signs in road reserve Gantry and construction site advertising signs 20% of the gross profi t earned Board not being fl ighted EXEMPTED Signs exempted from tariffs except removal fees R Nil Category Five posters and notices for parliamentary or municipal elections, byelections, referenda and registration process Project advertising signs not on Council property Projecting and security services signs Veranda, balcony, canopy and under awning advertising signs Painted advertisements Advertising signs at educational facilities and sport stadiums and fi elds <18m² Flat signs smaller than 36m² Residential homeundertaking and community institution signs Window signs R Nil Signs incorporated in the fabric of a building Sponsored road traffi c projects Locality bound canopy, internal direction and orientation signs at service facility signs

2. All charges, except removal fees, levied in terms hereof are payable in advance. 3. The classiﬁ cation of signs as listed herein is in accordance with the Policy on Outdoor Advertising Control. 4. That the EMM and its departments be exempted from payment of tariffs as stipulated above subject to compliance to the provisions of the Policy on Outdoor Advertising Control.

72 OCTOBER 2010 D9 D9. SOLID WASTE

1. ALL TARIFFS LISTED BELOW, OR TO BE CALCULATED IN TERMS OF THIS SCHEDULE OF TARIFFS, EXCLUDE VAT

2. COLLECTION TARIFFS

Charges shall be levied on and recovered from all consumers of the Councils Solid Waste Services who utilized / requested the Councils Solid Waste services, such consumers shall include the owners and occupiers of the premises in respect of which the services are rendered and such charges shall be recoverable from such owners and occupiers jointly and severally. “Occupiers” and “Owners” as intended herein shall be as deﬁ ned in the Solid Waste Bylaws of the Council.

Charges shall be levied per consumer as intended above in respect of each service point (as deﬁ ned in the Solid Waste Bylaws of the Council).

2.1 Domestic tariffs Informal settlements Free of charge.

Formal areas Stand size: Tariff per month: 0-300 m2 R 61,61 301-600 m2 R 71,97 601-900 m2 R 79,95 901-1200 m2 R 87,95 1201-1500 m2 R 101,27 1501-2000 m2 R 114,59 2 000 m2 + R 127,90

Domestic service for 240L bin Proposed tariff per month: R 61,61 per 240L bin. The same tariff will apply for each additional bin.

2.2 Flat / town house complexes refuse Per unit: Tariff per month: 1 x per week R 67,77 2 x per week R 128,63

2.3 Institutions Domestic tariff equal to the 301 – 600 m2 stand size. This tariff will apply to charity organisations after submission of proof of registration as

OCTOBER 2010 73 D9 C2 a Welfare Organisation, and will include: registered schools, crèches and churches.

2.4 Business refuse removal Three 85 litre bin liners or part thereof or 1 x 240 litre bin of refuse or part thereof will constitute one business refuse removal service.

Frequency of removal Tariff per month: (85 litre container): 1 x per week R 145,25 2 x per week R 290,50 3 x per week R 435,75 4 x per week R 581,00 5 x per week R 726,25 6 x per week R 871,50

Frequency of removal Tariff per month: (240 litre container): 1 x per week R 184,85 2 x per week R 369,70 3 x per week R 554,55 4 x per week R 739,40 5 x per week R 924,25 6 x per week R 1 109,10

Frequency of removal Tariff per month: (660 litre container): 1 x per week R 554,54 2 x per week R 1 109,08 3 x per week R 1 663,62 4 x per week R 2 218,16 5 x per week R 2 772,70 6 x per week R 3 327,24

Frequency of removal Tariff per month: (900 litre container): 1 x per week R 739,35 2 x per week R 1 478,70 3 x per week R 2 218,05 4 x per week R 2 957,40 5 x per week R 3 696,75 6 x per week R 4 436,10

74 OCTOBER 2010 D9 Frequency of removal Tariff per month: (1 100 litre container): 1 x per week R 832,19 2 x per week R 1 664,38 3 x per week R 2 496,57 4 x per week R 3 328,76 5 x per week R 4 160,95 6 x per week R 4 993, 14

2.5 Litter picking levy R 0,04 per m2 at all business and industrial zoned erven where a scheduled litter picking service is provided at least once per week, with a maximum of R 900,00 per month.

2.6 Bulk container services Container size Tariff per removal: 1,75 m3 R 182,14 2,5 – 3 m3 R 383,03 3 – 4 m3 R 409,56 4 – 5 m3 R 434,26 5 – 6 m3 R 468,66

Compactable 5 – 6 m3 R 572,57

Non Compactable 6 – 7 m3 R 572,57 7 – 8 m3 R 690,86 8 – 9 m3 R 860,37 9 – 10 m3 R 888,24 10 – 11 m3 R 957,56 11 – 12 m3 R 1 056,06 12 m3 rolon R 263,59 per ton or part thereof. R 805,42 minimum levy per service. 25 m3 rolon R 263,59 per ton or part thereof. R 805,42 minimum levy per service. 30 m3 rolon R 263,59 per ton or part thereof. R 805,42 minimum levy per service 10 m3 compactor R 263,59 per ton or part thereof. R 805,42 minimum levy per service. 25 m3 compactor R 263,59 per ton or part thereof. R 805,42 minimum levy per service.

OCTOBER 2010 75 D9 C2 30 m3 compactor R 263,59 per ton or part thereof. R 805,42 minimum levy per service Ad Hoc domestic use 5 – 6 m3 Non compactable R 572,57

2.7 Sundry tariffs Carcass removal Private users Cats and similar animals R 31,79 Dogs and similar animals R 42,84 Sheep/Goats R 111,28 Bovine/Horses R 262,33 Poultry R 15,88

S.P.C.A. Free of Charge

Veterinary Surgeons Monthly tariff R 532,64 Bovine/Horses R 325,94

Rubble etc. per m3 or part thereof R 198,73 Condemned foodstuffs per m3 or part thereof R 119,24

3. SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL TARIFFS

Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the WELTEVREDEN Tariff R per ton VAT waste disposal site: excluded General public up to 1 000 kg Free Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 118,75 waste by the general public and contractors, in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of clean compostable garden refuse by the general R 61,34 public and contractors in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid waste by the general public and contractors, from outside the boundaries of the metro R 322,92 Safe disposal of products: Crushed / Buried R 180,00 Clean building rubble (less than 300mm in diameter) Free Soil, usable as cover material Free Tyres – rim size up to 70cm in diameter (normal motor R 17,25 vehicle tyre) Tyres – rim size up to 110cm in diameter (normal truck tyre) R 28,75

76 OCTOBER 2010 D9 Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the WELTEVREDEN Tariff R per ton VAT waste disposal site: excluded Tyres – rim size up to 116cm in diameter and greater than R 230,00 116mm in diameter (Earthmoving equipment) Tyres cut or shredded per 1000kg or part thereof R 172,50 The above tariffs include a R 9,00 per ton rehabilitation levy

Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the PLATKOP waste Tariff R per ton VAT disposal site: excluded General public up to 1 000 kg Free Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 118,75 waste by the general public and contractors, in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of clean compostable garden refuse by the general R 61,34 public and contractors in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 322,92 waste by the general public and contractors, from outside the boundaries of the metro Safe disposal of products: Crushed / Buried R 180,00 Clean building rubble (less than 300mm in diameter) Free Soil, usable as cover material Free Asbestos waste R 489,08 Tyres – rim size up to 70cm in diameter (normal motor R 17,25 vehicle tyre) Tyres – rim size up to 110cm in diameter (normal truck tyre) R 28,75 Tyres – rim size up to 116cm in diameter and greater than R 230,00 116mm in diameter (Earthmoving equipment) Tyres cut or shredded per 1000kg or part thereof R 172,50 The above tariffs include a R 9,00 per ton rehabilitation levy

Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the SIMMER & JACK Tariff R per ton VAT waste disposal site: excluded General public up to 1 000 kg Free Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 177,26 waste by the general public and contractors, in excess of 1 000 kg

OCTOBER 2010 77 D9 C2 Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the SIMMER & JACK Tariff R per ton VAT waste disposal site: excluded Disposal of clean compostable garden refuse by the general R 91,57 public and contractors in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 373,75 waste by the general public and contractors, from outside the boundaries of the metro Safe disposal of products: Crushed / Buried R 180,00 Clean building rubble (less than 300mm in diameter) Free Soil, usable as cover material Free Tyres – rim size up to 70cm in diameter (normal motor R 20,70 vehicle tyre) Tyres – rim size up to 110cm in diameter (normal truck tyre) R 34,50 Tyres – rim size up to 116cm in diameter and greater than R 230 00 116mm in diameter (Earthmoving equipment) Tyres cut or shredded per 1000kg or part thereof R 172,50 The above tariffs include a R 9,00 per ton rehabilitation levy

Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the RIETFONTEIN Tariff R per ton VAT waste disposal site: excluded General public up to 1 000 kg Free Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 118,75 waste by the general public and contractors, in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of clean compostable garden refuse by the general R 61,34 public and contractors in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 322,92 waste by the general public and contractors, from outside the boundaries of the metro Safe disposal of products: Crushed / Buried R 180 00 Clean building rubble (less than 300mm in diameter) Free Soil, usable as cover material Free Delisted solids (less than 300mm in diameter) R 200,53 Delisted sludge (trench and cover) R 647,59 Delisted liquids (trench and cover) R 800,00 Disposal of treated liquids/sludge of contaminated foods R 182,48 Tyres – rim size up to 70cm in diameter (normal motor R 17,25 vehicle tyre)

78 OCTOBER 2010 D9 Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the RIETFONTEIN Tariff R per ton VAT waste disposal site: excluded Tyres – rim size up to 110cm in diameter (normal truck tyre) R 28,75 Tyres – rim size up to 116cm in diameter and greater than R 230,00 116mm in diameter (Earthmoving equipment) Tyres cut or shredded per 1000kg or part thereof R 172,50 Paper pulp exceeding 40% moisture content R 690,51 Disposal of treated liquids/sludge of contaminated food Standard fee of stuff where lime is used will be calculated according to the R 182,48 an additional amount of bags used on the said product amount for number of lime bags used for the treatment of waste The above tariffs include a R 9,00 per ton rehabilitation levy

Tariffs for disposal of refuse at the ROOIKRAAL waste Tariff R per ton VAT disposal site excluded General public up to 1 000 kg Free Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 118,75 waste by the general public and contractors, in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of clean compostable garden refuse by the general R 61,34 public and contractors in excess of 1 000 kg Disposal of general and nonhazardous industrial dry solid R 322,92 waste by the general public and contractors, from outside the boundaries of the metro Safe disposal of products: Crushed / Buried R 180,00 Clean building rubble (less than 300mm in diameter) Free Soil, usable as cover material Free Tyres – rim size up to 70cm in diameter (normal motor R 17,25 vehicle tyre) Tyres – rim size up to 110cm in diameter (normal truck tyre) R 28,75 Tyres – rim size up to 116cm in diameter and greater than R 230,00 116mm in diameter (Earthmoving equipment) Tyres cut or shredded per 1000kg or part thereof R 172,50 The above tariffs include a R 9,00 per ton rehabilitation levy

OCTOBER 2010 79 D10 C2

80 OCTOBER 2010 D10

OCTOBER 2010 81 D10 C2

82 OCTOBER 2010 D10

OCTOBER 2010 83

E1 Tebogo MotsaanakaTebogo Alrich Bestbier [email protected] [email protected] 999-7480 999 5215 011 Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number CCC ManagerCCC ManagerCCC ManagerCCC Manager Boksburg CCC CCC Manager Brakpan CCCCCC Manager Edenvale CCCCCC Manager (Acting) Germiston CCC Dirk van Rooyen Kemptonpark CCC Springs CCC BEKKER MARTIN Staden Thinus Van Celia Manda Nigel CCC Ntambudzeni Makhari [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Arrie De Beer [email protected] [email protected] 999 0148 999 2298 011 011 999 7783 011 999-3159 011 [email protected] 011-999-3818 999 9136 011 CCC ManagerCCC Manager Alberton CCC Benoni CCC Clive Dunstan [email protected] 999-2643 (011)

E1. CARE CENTRE MANAGERS CUSTOMER

OCTOBER 2010 1 E2 Position Department Name and Surname EmailNumber Contact CCC ManagerArea managerSpecial ProjectsPlanning Inspector Alberton CCCPlanning InspectorPlanning Inspector City Development City Development City DevelopmentArea Planner Clive Dunstan Thinus van Staden Deon Claassen City DevelopmentArea Planner Lucky Mkhabela City DevelopmentArea Planner Sophie LetsoaloArea Planner Zamokuhle Mazibuko [email protected] Planner City Development [email protected] [email protected] Planner [email protected] City Development Slindile Mpontshane 999-2298 (011) [email protected] Building Insprector [email protected] City DevelopmentTshabalala Dudu 999-2890 (011) 999-2269 Building Inspector (011) 999-2305 (011) City Development Building Control Gerard Mac CarronBuilding Inspector City Development Rodney Kubheka [email protected] Xolani LamaBuilding Inspector 861-2302 (011) 999-2643 (011) City Development 999-2301 (011) Building Inspector Building Control [email protected] [email protected] Inspector Building Control Joel Seabela Building Control [email protected] Jabulani Msimango Building Control Joel Maroaneng [email protected] 999-2273 Building Control (011) Naresh Dass 999-2269 (011) Xoliswa Masuku 861-2351 [email protected] (011) [email protected] [email protected] 999-2595 (011) 999-2597 (011) [email protected] [email protected] 999-2594 (011) 861-2370 (011) 999-2762 (011) 999-2592 (011)

E2. CCC LINE DEPARTMENTS ALBERTON

2 OCTOBER 2010 E2 Barend Deminey (JP)Jean Pierre Daffue Johann Marx [email protected] [email protected] 874-6757 (011) [email protected] 999-0978 (011) Edmond van WykJohan Kamffer 999-1223 (011) Imanuel Joemath [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 999-2470 (011) 999-0530 (011) 999-2348 (011) Stormwater Stormwater Stormwater Pollution Health Health Position Department Name and Surname EmailNumber Contact Call Centre NumberCall Centre Number Roads and Call Centre Number Roads and Call Centre NumberCall Centre Number WaterCall Centre Number WaterCall Centre Number ElectricityCall Centre Number ElectricityCall Centre Number Solid Waste Craig PearsonAdminAnd Legal Call Centre Number Ernst Ziegenhagen Essie Esterhuizen Integreated Jas De Klerk Michiel De Wet Dawn PienaarCall Centre Number Environmental [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Environmental [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 999-2645 (011) 999-2332 (011) 999-2048 (011) 999-2548 (011) 999-2598 (011) 999-2476 (011) Building InspectorCall Centre Number Building Control Roads and Drikus Keulder [email protected] 999-2590 (011)

OCTOBER 2010 3 E2 ALBERTON CCC AREA

4 OCTOBER 2010 E2 Tebogo MotsaanakaTebogo Mirriam MahlanguPieter CrousAmos Mahlulo [email protected] MatlouMsebenzi Mahlangu [email protected] Monyamane 999-7480 Glyn Kelly [email protected] Pilane 999-7356 [email protected] [email protected] Mkhize New [email protected] Shivambu 999-6425 RatshitangaVincent 999-6423 Susan Maluleke 999-3810 999-6422 Gert Oosthuizen [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Harris [email protected] [email protected] Tesner 999-6421 999-6319 Rory Blyth [email protected] Matemane [email protected] Mofokeng 999-6417 999-6418 Catrien Le Roux New Hannelie Alberts [email protected] 999-7112 999-6424 [email protected] 999-7163 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 999-7302 [email protected] 999-7358 999-7296 999-7167 999-7172 999-6320 999-7354 Position Department Name and Surname EmailNumber Contact BENONI

OCTOBER 2010 5 E2 999-6453 Charles MynardtAndre KrugerThea PeetersE Moeng [email protected] Nicholas [email protected] [email protected] 999-7132 999-6439 999-7346 Position Department Name and Surname EmailNumber Contact

6 OCTOBER 2010 E2 BENONI CCC AREA

OCTOBER 2010 7 E2 011 999 5494 011 gov.za Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Area managerRegional managerPlanning InspectorPlanning Inspector City Development City DevelopmentPlanning Inspector City Development Alrich BestbierArea Planner Zunaid Osman City DevelopmentArea Planner Leonie Hermans City Development [email protected] City Development [email protected] Louise Cremer [email protected] City Development 999 5215 011 Nhlanhla Nelwamondo 999 5527 011 999 3084 011 Nhlanhla.Nelwamondo@ekurhuleni. [email protected] 999 5253 011 Area PlannerArea PlannerArea Planner City Development Mpho Pekane City Development Allan Smith City Development Aadil Engar [email protected] [email protected] 999 5527 011 [email protected] 999 5602 011 999-5498 011 BOKSBURG

8 OCTOBER 2010 E2 BOKSBURG CCC AREA

OCTOBER 2010 9 E2 Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Area managerPlanning InspectorArea PlannerArea Planner City Development City DevelopmentArea Planner Charlotta MokhethiChief Building Insprector Dirk van RooyenBuilding Inspector City Development Building ControlBuilding Inspector City Development Andre Pretorius Johan CraffordBuilding Inspector City Development [email protected] Thembeka Nxumalo Building Control [email protected] Busiwe Sithole 999 7962 011 Building Control Tjaart vd Watt Building Control [email protected] [email protected] 999 7783 Ben Woest 011 999 7920 011 [email protected] Robert Maditlaba 999 7784 011 [email protected] 999 7792 011 [email protected] 999 8166 011 [email protected] [email protected] 999 7798 011 999 7924 011 999 7721 011 BRAKPAN

10 OCTOBER 2010 E2 BRAKPAN CCC AREA

OCTOBER 2010 11 E2 011 999-3035 011 999-3036 011 za01 za Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Building InspectorBuilding Inspector Building Control SREACHE TSHEGOFATSO Building Control [email protected]. MHLANGA NOMUSA [email protected] 999-3034 011 Area managerPlanning InspectorPlanning InspectorArea Planner City Development City DevelopmentArea Planner City Development MAPONYA MATSHIDISO Area Planner BEKKER MARTIN MAPHELA MOIRA Area Planner [email protected] Planner City Development 999-3083 011 Area Planner City Development SAGREN GOVENDER [email protected] Building Insprector City Development SAMKELISIWE NGCOBO [email protected] Inspector City Development Building Control NOSI MGAGA [email protected] Inspector [email protected] 999-3159 011 City Development CARMEN PAULSEN 999-3084 011 MBESHE MNGUNIBuilding Inspector City Development TUMISI KGOMO 999-3088 011 Building Control 999-3291 011 SIBONELO NGCOBO Building Control [email protected] JOHAN ERASMUS Building Control [email protected] [email protected] MPITIKI NKWANA [email protected] 999-3360 011 [email protected] RAKHIVHANI GODFREY 999-4530 011 999-3398 011 999-3092 011 [email protected] [email protected]. 999-3270 011 [email protected] 999-3033 011 999-3294 011 EDENVALE

12 OCTOBER 2010 E2 EDENVALE CCC AREA

OCTOBER 2010 13 E2 011 861 2302 011 za Barend Deminey [email protected] 874 6575 011 Stormwater Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Area PlannerArea PlannerArea PlannerArea PlannerArea Planner City DevelopmentArea Planner City Development Gerald mac CarronChief Building Insprector City Development Rodney KubhekaBuilding Inspector City Development Building ControlTshabalala Dudu Building Inspector City Development Themba Xakaza Xolani LamaBuilding Inspector [email protected] City Development Man Mathebula Building ControlBuilding Inspector 999 2273 011 [email protected] Building ControlBuilding Inspector [email protected] Drikus Keulder 999 2303 011 Building ControlCall Centre Number Joel Maroaneng [email protected] Building Control 999 2267 011 Joe Seabela [email protected] Building Control [email protected] 999 2268 011 Roads and Naresh Dass Xoliswa Masuku 999 2266 011 [email protected] 999 2595 011 [email protected] 999 2590 011 999 2762 011 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 999 2491 999 2594 011 011 999 2592 011 Area managerRegional managerPlanning InspectorPlanning Inspector City Development City DevelopmentPlanning Inspector City Development Staden Thinus Van City Development Lucky Mkhabela City Development Sophie Letsoalo Zamokuhle Mazibuko [email protected] 999 2298 011 [email protected] [email protected]. [email protected] 999 2269 011 999 2301 011 GERMISTON

14 OCTOBER 2010 E2 Jean Daffue [email protected] 874 6545 011 John Marx [email protected] 874 6971 011 Edmund van Wyk [email protected] 861 2563 011 Hendrick Kleynhans [email protected] 871 7180 011 Stormwater Stormwater Pollution Health Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Call Centre Number Roads and Call Centre Number Roads and Call Centre NumberCall Centre NumberCall Centre Number WaterCall Centre Number WaterCall Centre Number ElectricityCall Centre Number ElectricityCall Centre Number Solid Waste Ernest ZiegenhagenAdminAnd Legal Craig Pearson Essie Essterhuizen Integreated Jas de Klerk Elsabe Smith Jan Bloem [email protected] 861 2239 011 [email protected] 861 2393 011 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 861 2336 011 [email protected] 999 2549 011 861 2393 011 999 2599 011 Call Centre Number Environmental

OCTOBER 2010 15 E2 GERMISTON CCC AREA

16 OCTOBER 2010 E2 011-999-4773 za cer City Development Emma Mnguni [email protected] 011-999-3517 ﬁ Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Admin AssistantAdmin AssistantAdmin TechnicianGIS TechnicianGIS City Development City Development Thozama NqebeGeneral Worker City Development Bosney MonyatsiMessenger City Development Thandi Booi motshele Mashabela City Development [email protected] Priscilla Stulo [email protected] City Development 011-999-3542 [email protected]. 011-999-3813 Thuvhakhali Frans [email protected] 011-999-3513 011-999-4753 011-999-3815 Area managerPlanning InspectorPlanning InspectorPlanning Inspector City Development City DevelopmentArea Planner City DevelopmentArea Planner Mariana Wright Celia Manda City DevelopmentArea Planner Barry MonnakgotlaArea Planner Simon MatjiArea Planner City DevelopmentArea Planner City Development Mali Msimango [email protected] [email protected] Of City Development Lovemore Nkuna [email protected] 011-999-3817 City Development Daphney Matlala 011-999-4144 City Development Ramokoka Tshepo [email protected] 011-999-3818 City Development Musa Ndaba [email protected] Dubula Vuyo [email protected] 011-999-3814 [email protected] 011-999-3515 011-999-4772 [email protected] 011-999-3819 011-999-3809 [email protected] [email protected] 011-999-3818 011-999-3812 KEMPTON PARK KEMPTON

OCTOBER 2010 17 E2 KEMPTON PARK CCC AREA

18 OCTOBER 2010 C1E2 086 054 3000 086 054 3000 086 054 3000 Stormwater Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Call Centre NumberCall Centre Number Water Solid Waste Area managerPlanning InspectorArea PlannerChief Building Insprector City Development City DevelopmentBuilding Inspector Building ControlCall Centre Number Nompumelelo Ncube Arrie De Beer Anton Basson City Development Building Control Roads and Pieter Behrmann [email protected] Johan Ferreria 999 9138 011 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 999 9136 011 999 9134 999 8720 011 011 [email protected] 999 9198 011 NIGEL

OCTOBER 2010 19 E2 NIGEL CCC AREA

20 OCTOBER 2010 E2 011 999 0148 011 gov.za Position Department Name and Surname Email Contact Number Planning InspectorArea PlannerChief Building Insprector City DevelopmentBuilding Inspector Building ControlBuilding Inspector Mathole Tumelo Building Inspector Alfred Sinda City Development Building ControlBuilding Inspector Musa Maseko Building Control Ike Makola Building Control [email protected] Banie Hattingh Building Control Nonhlanhla Nene 999 8356 011 [email protected] Phillipine Mokoena [email protected] 999 8646 011 999 8354 011 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 999 8614 011 999 8739 999 8613 011 011 999 8610 011 Area manager ( Acting)Area manager ( City Development Ntambudzeni Makhari Ntambudzeni.makhari@ekurhuleni. SPRINGS

OCTOBER 2010 21 E2 SPRINGS CCC AREA

22 OCTOBER 2010 E3 Email [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] motubatse.motsubatse@ekurhuleni. gov.za [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Tel Cell 082 493 5032 082 886 1643 083 877 6098 082 350 6630 082 076 9156 082 452 6720 082 554 4030 072 598 3971 073 181 5515 Silindile Majola 999 4023 [email protected] Gift Motsepe 999 4661 Pieter Swanepoel 999 4035 Maggy Hadebe 999 4043 Regional Planner: SSDR Rudolph Botha 999 4015 GIS Manager: Spatial Systems Executive Manager Gregory Setei 999 3503 Director Morena Letsosa 999 4019 Director Sanmari Briedenhann 999 4677 Tribunal Spatial Frameworks Special Projects informatics informatics informatics informatics Development Department Directorate Position Person City Development Corporate Geo- City Development Corporate Geo- City Development Corporate Geo- City Development Land Use Management Director Motubatse 999 4022 City DevelopmentCity Development Land Use ManagementCity Development Executive Manager: City Development Land Use Management Manager Land Use Management Manager Corporate Geo- Allers Marthina Thema Nelson 999 4011 999 4036 [email protected] [email protected] City Development Spatial Planning Director Ivan Kadungure 999-4044 City DevelopmentCity Development Spatial PlanningCity Development Spatial Planning Development Planner: Urban Management and Development Planner:

E3. CONTACT INFO FOR CORPORATE OFFICES INFO FOR CORPORATE E3. CONTACT

OCTOBER 2010 23 E3 Email [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] za Tel Cell 999 3013 [email protected] 082 339 8761 082 417 0345 082 770 1350 Elsabeth van der Merwe Manager Jacob Legadima 999 2971 [email protected] Planning & Coordination Manager: GIS Projects Philip Viljoen 999 4039 Environmental Health DirectorEnvironmental Health ManagerIntegrated Pollution Control Jerry Chaka Sibusiso Madlala 999 2969 999 2968 [email protected] [email protected] Environmental PlanningEnvironmental Planning Executive Manager: Env Bahlekazi Vuyelwa 999 3242 [email protected] Environment Director Lebohang Raliapeng 999 3028 [email protected]. informatics Department Directorate Position Person Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development City DevelopmentCity DevelopmentCity Development GermsitonCity Development AlbertonCity Development BoksburgCity Development Kempton ParkCity Development Area Manager EdenvaleCity Development Benoni Area Manager Brakpan Area Manager Area Manager Springs Area Manager Thinus van Staden Area Manager Celia Manda Alrich Bestbier Area Manager 999 2298 Area Manager 999 5215 999 4535 [email protected] Motsanaka Tebogo Dirk van Rooyen [email protected] [email protected] 999 7480 Martin Bekker 999 7783 [email protected] 999 8682 [email protected] City Development Nigel Area Manager Arrie De Beer 999 9136 Environmental Development Environmental Development City Development Corporate Geo-

24 OCTOBER 2010 E3 Email [email protected] [email protected] gov.za Tel Cell 082 681 6143 079 516 4063 / 082 571 5661 999 3285 nomaxhosa.jongilanga@ekurhuleni. Fanie LouwJongilanga 999 8585 [email protected] Hudson Mboweni 999 0979 [email protected] Douglas Cowley 999 3746 [email protected] cer Angela Rakolojane 999 3095 [email protected] ﬁ cer Jan Bodenstein 999 3984 [email protected] ﬁ Director Mazibuko Titus 999 8128 Executive Manager: Mbongeni Ndlela 999 7737 Manager Manager Manager Sector Support Special Projects Solid Waste ESDRSolid Waste Regional Executive Solid Waste SSDRSolid Waste Regional Executive Noise ControlParks Health Of ParksCemeteries Acting DirectorSolid Waste Manager NSDRSolid Waste: Manager Nesengani Victor Regional Executive Executive Manager 999 5492 Zandile Khathi Deryck Day Denis Ing [email protected] 999 5344 999 5322 999 5322 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Department Directorate Position Person Economic Development Investment & Trade, Economic Development TourismEconomic Development Development Tourism Economic Development Strategic Support & of Tourism Director Nomaxhosa Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development Environmental Development

OCTOBER 2010 25 E3 C1 Email [email protected] za Tel Cell 084 582 1241 John MkhwanaziFanie Maree 921 2027Eddie Nkomotse [email protected] 999 2227 999 6716 [email protected] [email protected] Executive Manager Broderick Chiloane 999 3747 [email protected] Manager Manager Manager Public TransportPublic TransportPublic Director Pheko Letlonkane 999 3845 Jele Teboho [email protected] 999 3646 [email protected] Civil Works Building Civil Works: Control & Outdoor Advertising Director Pieter Grobler 999 4559 [email protected] Department Directorate Position Person IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works Economic Development Investment Promotion Manager: Investment Sinah Mphatse 999 7755 Economic DevelopmentTrade Informal Economic DevelopmentTrade Informal Economic DevelopmentHousing DirectorHousing Project ManagerHousingHousing Planning Sthembiso Garane GIS Alfred SepirwaHousing 999 7950 NSDR & Transport IS - Roads, 999 7961 [email protected] Civil Works Executive Manager SSDR & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works [email protected] ESDR Executive Manager Miemie van Maltitz Regional Executive 999 7404 Neville Govender Bernard Williamson Regional Executive 999 7211 [email protected] 999 7738 Regional Executive [email protected]. [email protected]

26 OCTOBER 2010 C1 E3 Email [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]. za [email protected] Tel Cell 1111 082 490 2646 082 490 3875 082 467 2016 079 393 6111 082 451 1578 082 334 0631 John Robertson 999 6809 [email protected] Barend Dimeney 999 Marius van Huyssteen 999 3864 Director Dudley Davidson 999 8394 Director Chief Area EngineerChief Nico van den Berg 999 3881 Director Thabang Motla 999 3875 Regional Executive Manager Regional Executive Manager Regional Executive Manager Regional Director Philip Du Plessis 999 3848 [email protected] Chief Engineer Motlatsi Dwanya 999 3645 [email protected] Chief Engineer: Dorothy Magau 999 3648 c ﬁ Kempton, Tembisa Project Regional Planning Planning NSDR: Roads & Stormwater Planning NSDR: Roads & Stormwater Planning NSDR: Roads & Stormwater Planning NSDR: Roads & Stormwater Roads: Traff Engineering & Planning Transportation Roads: Land Development & Infrastructure Planning Department Directorate Position Person Infrastructure Services Services: East, Water Infrastructure Services Revenue Services Infrastructure Services Services: WSDP Water Chief Engineer Danie van der Merwe 999 3882 Infrastructure ServicesInfrastructure Services Services: WSDP Water Chief Engineer Services: Water Jantjies Tsholofelo 999 3870 [email protected] Infrastructure Services Services: Water IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works IS - Roads, Transport & Transport IS - Roads, Civil Works

OCTOBER 2010 27 E3 C1 Email [email protected] [email protected] gov.za Tel Cell 082 453 3032 082 491 1587 Anthony KestenBafanna Mazibuko 999 0185 874 5014Sandra Du Rand [email protected] 999 0793 [email protected] Director Chanda Tebogo 999 0989 Planning & Operations Proactive Services - North South Edenvale, Bedfordview, Edenvale, Bedfordview, Boksburg Department Directorate Position Person Electricity and EnergyElectricity and Energy EnergyElectricity and Energy ElectricityElectricity and Energy Electricity PlanningElectricity and Energy Electricity PlanningElectricity and Energy Senior Engineer Electricity: NSDRElectricity and Energy Director Director Electricity: SSDR Director Community Safety Electricity: ESDR Regional Director Community Safety Lindile Mbewu Regional Director Disaster Management Regional Director Disaster Management DirectorCommunity Safety 999 3917 Executive Manager: Serutle NtlatengCommunity Safety Japie De Villiers Emergency Services [email protected] 999 5231Community Safety Director Emergency ServicesCommunity Safety Erica Swart [email protected] Executive Manager - Emergency ServicesCommunity Safety Emergency Services 999 1591 Emergency Services - Joe Makhubalo [email protected] 999 0171 joemhlengi.makhubalo@ekurhuleni. Petrus Brits 898 1221 [email protected] Infrastructure Services Services: South, Water

28 OCTOBER 2010 C1 E3 Email gov.za [email protected] [email protected] ockert.bezuidenhout@ekurhuleni. gov.za kleinbooi.mahlangu@ekurhuleni. gov.za [email protected] [email protected] Tel Cell 073 433 8334 082 781 5942 082 490 2628 082 469 8442 082 557 5841 083 965 9743 ce Deputy Director Madelaine Bloemhof 999 0079 madeleine.bloemhof@ekurhuleni. ﬁ - East Department Directorate Position Person Metro Police NSDR Director Armstrong Trish 999 4546 Community SafetyCommunity Safety Emergency Services Metro PoliceMetro Police Licensing ServicesMetro PoliceMetro Police Director Metro PoliceMetro Police Security & Loss ControlMetro Police Deputy Chief of Police Operations Metro Police Acting Chief of Police Ashok Boodhoo Metro PoliceThabethe Vusi Metro Police Corporate Of Mkhabela Sibeko Deputy Chief of Police 999 1470Metro Police Deputy Chief of Police 999 0179 999 0338 Deputy Chief of Police Nonhlanhla Zulu [email protected] Johan Friedlander NSDR Isaac J Mapiyeye [email protected] [email protected] SSDR 999 1473 921 8811 999 0231 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Dep. Director Director Piet van Staden 082 490 2628 Christo Sybersma 999 5843 Metro Police SSDR Dep. Director Ockert Bezuidenhout 999 5736 Metro Police ESDR Director Kleinbooi Mahlangu 360 2322 Metro Police ESDR Dep. Director Sarel van Vuuren 999 8662 Metro Police ESDR Dep. Director Thulare Gregory 999 8661 Health Support Service Director Kruger Toy 999 2408 [email protected]

OCTOBER 2010 29 E3 C1 Email [email protected] ﬁ za Tel Cell Johan Ferreirra 999 4145 [email protected] Dr Khomo Dr Selhatle Manager Director Audrey FihlaManager Manager 999 2517Manager audrey. Sport & RecreationArts & Culture DirectorArts, Culture & Heritage Manager: DirectorHeritageLibrariesTshabangu Ezera NSDR 999 4112 Micha Hannemann Services Manager Reggie Mabogane 999 3310 [email protected] 999 3215 Maumela Vincent [email protected] Regional Executive [email protected]. 999 6833 [email protected] Zingisa Maneli 999 3211 [email protected] Development Department Directorate Position Person HealthHealthHealthHealthHealth Special Programmes Special ProgrammesHealth HIV/AIDS Unit Director NSDRArt & Sport, Recreation, Culture SSDR Acting Executive ManagerArt & Sport, Recreation, Culture Dominica Mdiya ESDRArt & Sport, Recreation, Culture Regional Executive 999 2706Art & Sport, Recreation, Joseph SepuyaCulture Regional Executive [email protected] Art & Sport, Recreation, 999 2416Culture Regional Executive Art & Sport, Recreation, Culture [email protected] HealthHealth Family Health Community Director Annatjie Botha 999 2431 [email protected]

30 OCTOBER 2010 C1 E3 Email pelonomi.kgantlapane@ekurhuleni. gov.za gov.za [email protected] [email protected] Tel Cell 999 6771 082 420 1925 999 7114 annette.vschalkwyk@ekurhuleni. 083 477 7861 0842607937 Kgantlapane Schalkwyk Andries du PreezErne Smal 999 2358 [email protected] 999 8712 [email protected] Lizz Mey 999 0091 Motshidiso Mohlabane JN Molaka Manager Manager Director Pelonomi Publications Manager Manager & Support Services CommunicationCommunication PRO………. Manager: Design & MarketingMarketing Executive Manager Manager Mdubeki Vuyo 999 0093 ESDR Regional Executive SSDR Regional Executive Department Directorate Position Person FinanceFinanceFinanceFinance IncomeFinance Budget & FinanceFinanceFinance Budget & Finance Director Budget & Finance Finance Director NSDRAccountant Chief NSDR SSDR Lovedalia Selabe Annette van ESDR Co-ordinator: Income 999 7433 Manager: Expenditure Regional Executive Sammy Skhosana [email protected] Herbert Olivier 999 7422 Regional Executive 999 6519 [email protected] [email protected] Finance Financial Administration Communication & Marketing Communication & Marketing Communication & Marketing Communication & Marketing Sport, Recreation, Art & Sport, Recreation, Culture Sport, Recreation, Art & Sport, Recreation, Culture

OCTOBER 2010 31 E3 C1 Email [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Tel Cell 084 505 2644 072 757 8674 079 022 5873 SAKIE KEKANA SAKIE KEKANA 999 8517 Manager Researcher Ernest Hlongo 071 955 2385 Director Elizabeth Ramaoka 999 7430 [email protected] Manager: ESDR Bheki Sithebe 999 6763 [email protected] Manager: SSDR Dawie Maree 999 5408 [email protected] Manager: NSDR Herman Bayer 921 2113 [email protected] Director Bertus van Zyl 999 6764 [email protected] DirectorArnold Sihlahla Andile 999 0679 ce Co-ordinator Swereen Govender 082 377 1183 fi Risk Management2010 & Special Projects Executive ManagerAssistant Admin Mildred Nkopane Preggy Vandayar 999 0835 999 4009 [email protected] Research & Development Research & Development Integrated Development Plan Integrated Development Plan Integrated Development Plan Integrated Development Plan Services Department Directorate Position Person ce of the City ce of the City ce of the City ce of the City ce of the City ce of the City ce of the City ce of the City fi fi fi fi fi fi fi fi Customer Care Centres CCCs Acting Special Project Of Manager Of Manager Of Manager Of Manager Of Manager Of Manager Of Manager Of Manager Legal & AdministrationLegal & AdministrationLegal & Properties & EstatesAdministrationLegal & NSDR Executive Manager AdministrationLegal & SSDRAdministrationLegal & ESDR Speaker's Of Regional Manager Regional Manager Regional Manager Wilhelm Etsebeth Cobus Hendrikse 999 3705 Hall JA 861 2165 [email protected] [email protected] Legal & AdministrationLegal & Property & Legal

32 OCTOBER 2010 E3 Email [email protected] nompumelelo.phakathi@ekurhuleni. gov.za [email protected] gov.za [email protected] [email protected] Tel Cell 999 7356 [email protected] 086 253 3588 999 3111999 6978 [email protected] 082 336 0819 999 1520 082 791 2532 999 8915 matshidiso.phalatse@ekurhuleni. 082 494 4828 072 757 8674 MAHLANGU PHAKATHI MOKGATLE TSHABALALA PHALATSE Department Directorate Position Person Customer Care Centres AlbertonCustomer Care Centres BenoniCustomer Care Centres Boksburg CCC Manager CCC Manager CCC Manager CLIVE DUNSTANCustomer Care Centres Etwatwa MIRRIAM 999 2643 ACE PHIRI [email protected] CCC Manager 999 5533 NOMPUMELELO Customer Care Centres BrakpanCustomer Care Centres DaveytonCustomer Care Centres DuduzaCustomer Care Centres Edenvale CCC Manager CCC Manager Customer Care Centres Germiston CCC ManagerCustomer Care Centres CCC Manager KatlehongCustomer Care Centres MOKEBE PAPA Katlehong 2Customer Care Centres 999 8068 Kempton Park NDOLI MOSIANECustomer Care Centres CCC Manager LORRAINE Kwa-Tema CCC Manager 999 9303 CCC ManagerCustomer Care Centres [email protected] Nigel CCC Manager [email protected] MABALANE ARIEL CCC Manager LAPPIES DE BEER 999 0624 XOLISILE 999 1411THABATHA NELI [email protected] CCC Manager [email protected] 999 4142 MATSHIDISO [email protected] THANDI RADEBE 999 9187 Customer Care Centres Springs CCC Manager SAKIE KEKANA 999 8517

OCTOBER 2010 33 E3 Email [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Tel Cell 082 305 2763 082 572 1452 083 417 8106 083 291 8863 082 490 1281 Department Directorate Position Person Customer Care Centres Tembisa CCC Manager ZWANE ARTHUR 999 4239 Customer Care Centres 2 Tembisa CCC Manager Mmabatho RANTHO 999 4522 Customer Care Centres Tokoza CCC Manager ZYL VAN AMANDA 999 2796 Customer Care Centres Tsakane CCC Manager JOUBERT LIDIA 999 8002 Customer Care Centres Vosloorus CCC Manager HENNIE BOTHA 999 5742

34 OCTOBER 2010 E4 E4. COUNCILLORS

OCTOBER 2010 35 E4

36 OCTOBER 2010 E4

OCTOBER 2010 37 E4

38 OCTOBER 2010 E5.1 Email Motlatjo.Makaepea@gauteng. gov.za Tel Fax Cell 011 723 1531011 [email protected] 012 841 2470 013 665 6046 [email protected] 741 3548011 [email protected] 355 1374 011 082 432 1493 Zyl Biermann Steenkamp Koos Wilken 929 7000 011 [email protected] Leon Naude 929-7000 011 [email protected] Phumza Jizana “Motlatjo Makaepea “ Agri-hubs info) Agriculture Agriculture and Agriculture (GAPA Lize Bothma 355-1953 011 [email protected] Pieter Muller 355 1487 011 [email protected] Town PlanningTown Land ManagerDevelopment Agriculture & Rural Jan Development Agriculture & Rural Development Agriculture & Rural Development Organisation Department Section Position Person Civil AviationCivil Council of GeoscienceCouncil of GeoscienceCSIR AirspaceDelmas Local Municipality East Rand Water Company (ERWAT) East Rand Water Company (ERWAT) East Rand Water Company (ERWAT) Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Lizelle StrohGauteng Provincial Mr C. Forbes 545 1232 011 Government 012 339-5000 [email protected] Motjale Mr.MI 012 841 1153 Sharon ACSA Planning Justeyn van E5.1. EXTERNAL DEPARTMENTS AND SERVICE PROVIDEERS AND SERVICE DEPARTMENTS E5.1. EXTERNAL

OCTOBER 2010 39 E5.1 Email Estee.campher@gauteng. gov.za [email protected] Noma.makwela@gauteng. gov.za Ntombi.Radebe@gauteng. gov.za gabisile.hlongwane@gauteng. gov.za Samuel.Mafadza@gauteng. gov.za za Tel Fax Cell 011 355 0176011 [email protected] 007 8966011 [email protected] 011 634 7059 011 634 7093 011 634 7093 011 634 7066 011 - 634 7090 011 634 7047 011 - 634 7090 011 011 355 1820; 355 1820; 011 082 785 1293 355 1000 011 Mukokie Mavoni Campher Mafadza Noma Makwela Radebe Gabisile Hlongwane Ekurhuleni East IDP(IDZ)(IDZ)Special ProjectsToit Neels Du 634 7080 011 Sam Gopane Samuel Ntombi [email protected] IDP(IDZ)Special Projects - Estee IDZ; G2055 Nhlanhla Mxo [email protected]. Environmental Planning & Impact Assessment Economic Development Economic Development Economic Development Economic Development EducationGautrain PST PlanningGautrain PST StationsGautrain PST Stations Eric Cotzee 355 7217 011 [email protected] Nina Otto Sylvia 997 8949 Whisky 011 [email protected] Economic Development Economic Development Economic Development Conservation, Environment Organisation Department Section Position Person Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government

40 OCTOBER 2010 E5.1 Email [email protected] [email protected] com [email protected] Tel Fax Cell 016 340 4333 012 309 3170 [email protected] 012 309 3205 [email protected] 221 2500011 [email protected] 6511/082 8861643 Macozoma Phewa Andre BurgerMakhado [email protected] Whittaker AhmedPeter 407 6903 011 [email protected] Chris AndrewsChris 997 82 55 011 chris.andrew@bombelatkc. Civil Construction Director (Gautrain) HealthHousing Ekurhuleni regionTransport Tshitshi Transprot Mr Makhudu 876 1817 011 [email protected] Osman Aareff 012 421 1786 [email protected] Planning Skhumbuzao Town Manager Greg Sitei 016 422 Gautrain PST Bombela Organisation Department Section Position Person Lesedi Local Municipality Gert Oelofse 016 340 4346 Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Provincial Government Gauteng Economic Developemnt Agency (GEDA) PRASAPRASAPRASAJohannesburg Metropolitan Municipality IntersiteSedibeng District IntersiteMunicipality Intersite Ivy Modiselle 221 2559 011 Mpho [email protected] Keened Gauteng Provincial Government

OCTOBER 2010 41 E5.1 Email [email protected] za [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] gov.za Tel Fax Cell 012 394 1166 012 394 1166 011 358 9700011 [email protected]. 086 603 1503 016 360 7538 012 310 6500 [email protected] 012 426 6226 083 283 6041 083 275 0010 358 97 00011 [email protected] 358 9793011 nondumiso.Radebe@dme. Natasha Morris Baepi Harmse Agnes Makgobola Jeff NkunaJeff 082 332 34 23 Henry Herman 016 360 7571 Sambo Alex van Niekerk Klaus Schmid 012 426 6247 Thandiwe Biyela Radebe Director Director Director Dewaldt Smit (IDZ) Antoinette IDZ(IDZ) Deputy Charlene Social Plan Nondumiso Industry Industry Industry Energy Town PlanningTown Executive National Roads Agency National Roads Agency Energy Energy Organisation Department Section Position Person National Government and Trade National Government and Trade National Government and Trade Midvaal Local Municipality National Government Minerals and National GovernmentAffairs Land GDIRO Phoster Midvaal Local Municipality National GovernmentAfrican South National GovernmentAfrican South National Government Minerals and National Government Minerals and Metsweding District Municipality

42 OCTOBER 2010 E5.1 Email [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Tel Fax Cell 011 495 0727011 [email protected] 082 778 7614 [email protected] 774 3959011 [email protected] 012 336 8633 [email protected] 2111/2249 012 336 8686 012 336 8949 012 3366 833 012 3368 629 Matthew Zide 495 0729 011 [email protected] Sydney Jassop Shaun Basson 082 412 8499 [email protected] Benelize Taljaard Merwe Barend Fouche Job Khubeka 682 0433 011 [email protected] Modingoana Matamela Truter Land Matters Jabu Land Matters E.M (IDZ) Francois ciency eciency fi fi Provision Provision Services Services and Energy and Energy rights and Energy Industry ce ce Service Service fi fi Organisation Department Section Position Person Registrar of Deeds Post Of SA Pretoria Post Of SA SAPSSAPSPRASAPRASA Ef Ef Metro Rail Mesefo Mr. Wits Region Metrorail 012 338-7034 [email protected] Dawie van der Johan Todkiicc 083 2870389 [email protected] National Government Affairs Water National Government Affairs Water TransnetRand WaterRegistrar of Deeds Johannseburg Propnet Land and Cloete Mr. 378 011 Thorne B.J Mr. 4950729 011 [email protected] National Government Affairs Water National Government and Trade

OCTOBER 2010 43 E5.1 Email za sasol.com [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Tel Fax Cell 011 815 2709011 [email protected] 012 358 3460 [email protected] 012 358 7957 [email protected]. 011 774 5900 011 865 8563011 charmaine.vanderberg@ 011 773 1427 773 1427 011 774 6299 011 774 5900 011 Theletsane Pauline van der Venter Nompumzo Maphosa Heavel Dries van der Walt Emeran Johanna Lata 773 1461 011 [email protected] General Manager Chief Planner Hishaam Regional Planner Metro Planning Colin Hattingh 012 358 7813 [email protected] Regional Spatial Planning Regional Spatial Planning and Development and Development and Development Metro Planning Metro Planning Metro Planning Organisation Department Section Position Person Tshwane Metropolitan Tshwane Municipality Surveyor GeneralTELKOMTELKOM Metropolitan Tshwane Municipality Metropolitan Tshwane Municipality Mr Denyssen 012 303 1616 [email protected] John Danie Venter 309 9154 011 [email protected] PRASA SARCC Network Planning PRASAPRASASasol Gas SARCC Network Planning Intersite Ivy Modiselle 773 1700 011 B van der Mr. PRASAPRASA SARCC Network Planning Intersite Neo Kutama 773 1700 011

44 OCTOBER 2010 E5.2 012 364 3436 083 321 0318 012 663 3179 921 6990011 082 820 6384 086 607 1535 723 1531011 723 1486011 082 336 6619 086 607 1759 086 605 7490 011 874 8000011 082 413 6212 ex.com 083 270 0220 086 684 8349 fl ex.com 072 122 2801 086 570 9221 fl co.za airports.co.za airports.co.za co.za co.za GideonLeonJan Sauer Der Vyfer Van Eduard [email protected] Der Vyfer Van jans@afri 552 7500 011 082 416 5668 [email protected] 086 631 0179 Lotz 552 7500 011 082 900 8332 552 7011 011 eduard@afri ex Consult (PTY) LTD ( Town Town ( ex Consult (PTY) LTD Town ( ex Consult (PTY) LTD fl fl Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Airports Company South Africa.Airports Company South AndreAfrica.Airports Company South JusteynAfrica.Airports Company South DavenAll at Once Service Cc Crouse PlannersTown AMS AMK & Zyl Van Anchor Park Invesments Aubrey Govendar Fezeka Faith andre.crouse@airports. Bruce Justeyn.vanZyl@ Mahuzi Daven.Govender@ Masha Gu [email protected] [email protected] 012 460 5451 082 418 9146 086 514 3782 [email protected] 073 154 8848 609 0168 011 076 193 3338 086 558 9592 609 0175 011 Agri BapsfonteinAgri GautengAgri Nigel Francois Freek Den Berg Van Deon [email protected] Tomlinson 012 364 3436 083 349 1064 012 663 3179 Lezar [email protected] 012 364 3436 082 313 0042 012 663 3179 deonlezar@vodamail. Abrosie Bros (PTY) Ltd.AbsaAbsa Budwa Abrosie Modise Catherine [email protected] 616 4220 011 082 490 8092 616 4318 011 Nthatisi Mapena [email protected] catherinemap@absa. 874 8000 011 082 413 9703 ACSA/ Osmond Lange ArchitectsACSA/ Osmond Lange LouwrensAfrican Kingdoms Holdings (PTY) Ltd. African Kingdoms Holdings (PTY) Ltd. Du PlessisAfri Planning) Afri Planning) [email protected] 921 6071 011 084 817 2310 086 661 8215 E5.2. DEVELOPMENT FORUM E5.2. DEVELOPMENT

OCTOBER 2010 45 E5.2 011 680 9791011 083 274 4424 086 606 9791 016 341 6892 5503 082 411 016 341 6892 012 427 2092 082 892 8542 086 603 4023 394 6436011 084 580 3795 975 6977 011 011 873 6127011 082 460 8923 872 0551 011 997 8255011 082 908 1011 997 8008 011 012 61 1177 082 571 3875 012 661 1139 co.za af.aurecongroup.com af.aurecongroup.com co.za bombelelatkc.com co.za co.za Andrew Barker andrew@andrewbarker. ChristinaSandra More Pyke [email protected] 519 4600 011 [email protected] 519 4600 011 807 5670 011 807 5670 011 CharlieFerdi Bentel Willemse [email protected] 325 5290 011 082 551 2231 [email protected] 325 5792 011 325 5290 011 082 560 7927 325 5792 011 hlile Developments (PTY) LTD. Fanile Mntambo cdsm@worldonline. ﬁ Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Andrew Barker Development Consultant. Anton NienaberAPS Planafrica Inc.Arcus Gibb Engineering & Sience And Rural Planning. Urban Arcus Gibb Engineering & Sience And Rural Planning. Urban Anton AssociatesAttwell Malherbe NicoAssociatesAttwell Malherbe Aurecon Engineering Dirk Nico Aurecon. Nienaber KriekBa Philip Malherbe p.nienaber@mweb. Der Walt Van [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Hendricks 327 5062 011 463 1189 011 083 679 2246 Shannon Ramsarup188/9463 011 327 5072 011 philip.hendricks@ shannon.ramsarup@ 463 1422 011 463 1422 011 Bental Property Consultants (PTY) Ltd. Bental Property Consultants (PTY) Ltd. BombelaBondev MidrandAssociates.Brian Grey & Business InitiativeBVN Consulting Engineers. Brian Jan Chris Johannes.J.B. Chris Niekerk Van Grey Zeederberg Andrew [email protected] Biljon Van jaz@midrand-estates. 975 0608 011 082 567 5681 [email protected] chris.andrew@ 975 0625 011 [email protected] 788 3232 011 082 920 5726 325 4512 011 073 763 9426 086 631 8104

46 OCTOBER 2010 E5.2 083 277 1921 970 2000 011 011 873 6127011 082 460 8923 872 0551 011 012 336 8635 082 886 1956 012 336 8629 011 867 4324011 072 782 5454 086 543 3546 2477/8 973 4756011 083 266 0367 086 544 6627 012 347 1613 082 557 7979 012 347 1622 012 347 1613 082 327 0478 012 347 1622 gov.za co.za co.za co.za co.za co.za LizelleFanile Koch Mntambo [email protected] cdsm@worldonline. 867 1875 011 082 772 2006 086 503 4763 PrinceMarinda Dludla Kock [email protected] 394 2683 011 082 341 6701 394 1538 011 marinda@envirosphere. Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax CBA Specialist EngineersCBA Cell C.Cell C.Civitas Planning & Property ChrisConsultancy Brooker Hannes Herman [email protected] 465 0510 011 083 453 4645 Freysen 465 0509 011 Liebenberg [email protected] [email protected] 084 777 4556 324 6136 011 084 777 1838 324 6136 011 Community Development Services and Management Demacon Market Studies Zyl Consultants.Deon Van Zyl Consultants.Deon Van Di Cicco & Buitendag Cc. Hein AlbertDi Cicco & Buitendag Cc. Deon PlannersTown Niekerk Dirk Van Dludla Development Planning Dirk MarioConsultancy. WillieDWAToit Du Eeden Van ZylEnvirosphere Environmental Van Consultancy Di Cicco Niekerk Van [email protected] Buitendag [email protected] 012 460 7009 [email protected] [email protected] 396 1335 011 082 898 8667 082 578 1132 012 807 4847 012 346 5883 [email protected] 396 2667 011 083 437 7128 [email protected] 012 807 2877 622 5199 011 396 1335 011 083 654 0180 083 693 8249 622 5570 Joey 011 622 5560 011 083 650 3321 396 2667 011 622 5560 011 Rooyen Van vanrooyenJC@dwa. Erikson Group (PTY)Ltd.ERWAT.Eugene Marais Stadbeplanners Johan EugeneEVS PlanningEVS Planning Erikson Marias Jakobus Willem Charlie Wilken [email protected] em-townplan@mweb. Maxi 394 011 Els [email protected] 929 7000 011 Swanepoel 083 676 7050 929 7102 011 evsplanning@mweb. evsplanning@mweb.

OCTOBER 2010 47 E5.2 C2 011 421 7683 011 083 277 1921 970 2000 011 082 600 3174 486 4544 011 2477/8 2013/4 011 955 5537011 082 821 9138 086 612 8333 011 482 1648011 012 346 3787 083 541 2276 086 699 6109 849 0000011 482 1216 011 082 801 8528 849 2020 011 425 0020011 082 651 5857 849 2020 011 012 427 2260 083 324 3765 012 427 3050 012 427 2260 082 331 9061 012 427 3050 822 1792011 3056/7 482 3445011 082 371 4017 822 1843 011 482 3454 011 [email protected] 391 1054 011 083 450 1328 391 1054 011 ﬁ worldonline.co.za com georgerennie.co.za co.za net co.za caxton.co.za co.za co.za Johan Erikson [email protected] 394 011 Francois Du Plooy [email protected] 646 011 Petrus Steyn petrussteyn@ Andrew Luke [email protected]. Dr. AntonDr. Hartman antonh@geostrada. Mokgele Matheba mokgelem@geostrada. Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Fiesta Holdings John Argyropoulos Flawless Property Holdings (PTY) Ltd. Francois Du Plooy Associates Francois Du Plooy Planners. Town Future Plan. & Regional Town Future Scope Planners Peter james De Vries [email protected] 892 4149 011 082 565 5277 086 614 1857 Gapp Architects & Urban Gapp Designers. Gauteng Tourism Authority. Tourism Gauteng GE Survey Solutions (PTY)Ltd. Gerhard JeanetteGeorge Rennie & Co (PTY)Ltd. Errol DesmondGeorge Rennie & Co (PTY)Ltd. Lance Mark Heerden Van Molotsi SwartGeostrada Engineering Materials Laboratory management@ Heerden Van [email protected] 639 1600 011 gerhard@gesurveys. 073 678 5162 lance@georgerennie. 086 609 3936 Geostrada Engineering Materials Laboratory Germiston City News.Gillespie / Organisation + Partners AllanArchitects.GREENinc Landscape Melissa StuartGroundbase Purchase Hart Glen [email protected] Francois 845 011 germistoncitynews@ [email protected] 327 3687 011 082 569 9480 Le Roux 327 2688 011 francois@groundbase.

48 OCTOBER 2010 E5.2 082 080 0011 082 517 1252 012 460 3226 083 279 0955 012 346 4168 472 1613011 082 881 2564 472 1613 011 472 1613011 082 883 1936 472 1613 011 472 1613011 083 635 5466 472 3454 011 921 6071011 083 415 4305 921 6078 011 011 360 3326011 082 889 3755 360 3087 011 011 866 9032011 084 871 6396 866 8983 011 012 430 2888 083 289 5119 012 430 2979 homestead.co.za co.za co.za co.za co.za ikemelengarchitects.com co.za com lokshinmedia.co.za JohannesGerdouw JacobsSiphon Steyn [email protected] Khumalo 394 4320 011 [email protected] 394 4320 011 kathorusmail@ 394 4327 011 394 4327 011 neries Paul Jordaan paul.jordaan@implats. ﬁ Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Help-U-Sell-Homestead EstelleHeerdeninfo@helpusell- Van Holm Jordaan Group (PTY)Ltd. GerritHunkydory Investments.Theron Inc.Hunter Theron Inc.Hunter Elizabeth Jordaan Planners.Town Theron Inc. Hunter Etienne Chris. S.Ikemeleng Architects Botha Hannelie. J.Impala Platinum Ltd Re Gerrit@holmjordaan. Der Schyff Van Theron Evans Jonathan etienne@huntertheron. [email protected] chris@huntertheron. Manning hannelie@huntertheron. jonathan@ 083 729 4912 086 601 3624 INFRAMAX.Architects.Interdesign Landscape AbbigailArchitects.Interdesign Landscape Karen Leonie PlannersTown Izwelisha PlannersTown Izwelisha Group Of Companies Property JT Botes El MohamadiHunt (PTY) Ltd. Kobus Group Of Companies Wietpro JT Willie Jan Housing (PTY) Ltd. [email protected] Mail Independent Newspaper [email protected] 012 348 1922 Buitendag 012 348 1922 Els 082 893 4702 Schoeman 012 348 7154 [email protected] 918 0100 011 012 348 7154 082 854 6128 [email protected] 918 0267 011 918 0100 011 082 854 6129 [email protected] 918 0267 011 021 530 5760 083 449 8719 021 531 7792 Kayamandi Development Services. Russell Aird Russell@kayamandi.

OCTOBER 2010 49 E5.2 C2 011 472 1613011 082 839 6556 472 3454 011 482 3666011 082 613 3466 482 9734 011 co.za malulekeluthuli.co.za WillemLeon Groenewald [email protected] 012 667 4773Mark Bezuidenhout 082 371 5770 012 667 4450 [email protected] 849 3898 011 072 926 1081 849 3883 011 Dansie [email protected] 425 4486 011 082 899 6227 086 684 0794 Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Kempton ExpressArchitects.KH Landscape Khare Inc. Karien Julie Hanekom Eddie Scott [email protected] 475 9049 011 Taute 082 854 4287 475 7860 011 [email protected] 970 3030 011 084 409 0406 970 4337 011 eddie@huntertheron. Khare Inc.Khare Inc.Khuthele Projects (PTY)Ltd.Africa (PTY)Ltd.Komatsu Southern RajenKoplan Consultants. Chris KS Devco (Pty Ltd)KS Lonehill Properties (Pty) LtdArchitects. KWP Kevin Chris.SArchitects. KWP Govender Paul Hannelie.J & Town Landmark Planning, BritzRegional Planning. MontyAssociates.Len Kline & [email protected] Kline & Evans Theron Engelbrecht 923 1197 011 & 082 949 1727Town Leon Bezuidenhout Izaak 923 1330 011 regional Planners Almer Johannes Kotze [email protected] JulianLuluthi City Planning. Engelbrecht [email protected] 012 430 3223 Len Du PisanieAssociatesMaluleke Luthuli & 083 650 4767 012 342 3922 [email protected] [email protected] NtombekayaMark Dansie & 472 1613 011 [email protected] 472 1613 011 Lotz 082 881 2564 082 883 1936Professional Land Surveyor 472 1613 011 472 1613 011 [email protected] [email protected] Dimitri KlineAssociates.Matingi and 970 3343 September 011 Metroplan 082 705 7512 888 8685 Kline 011 970 3342 082 894 4123 011 Mhiduve Consulting (PTY) Ltd. 086 641 7769 082 651 8625 AssociatesMidplan & Deon James Matingi [email protected] ntombekaya@ Pananis [email protected] 082 562 6348 970 3343 011 Ngobeni 083 259 9113 450 3090 011 [email protected] 970 3342 011 082 431 0998 455 0738 011 Paul 450 3090 011 [email protected] Duvenage 082 410 1779 Deon 455 0738 011 425 1589 [email protected] 011 076 828 3628 403 9501 011 073 477 0194 086 538 6202 403 9503 011 [email protected] Zietsman 425 0162 011 082 940 8174 425 2061 011 Bester [email protected] 764 5753 011 082 881 2563 764 5753 011 [email protected] 012 804 2522 083 291 0397 012 804 2877

50 OCTOBER 2010 E5.2 082 551 3932 011 486 0062011 486 0088 011 011 486 0062011 012 348 1343 083 277 1213 012 348 7219 086 554 6570 011 849 0425011 082 924 7882 849 5628 011 408 5049011 082 661 0479 012 362 1741 082 457 3746 012 362 0983 012 993 5848012 621 8000 082 377 5893 086 633 8735 482 9886011 082 659 7025 482 8856 011 012 993 1292 974 4491011 082 904 6662 507 6265 011 co.za townplanners.co.za co.za co.za co.za co.za co.za powerhouseconsortium. co.za co.za co.za co.za Charles Mills info@millsandotten. Kirsten Otten info@millsandotten. Marzia Jonker info@mztownplanning. Natasha Nigrini natasha@plankonsult. ca. Tim White [email protected] 463 0074 011 083 299 2868 463 0114 011 ﬁ Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Mills and Otten Environmental Consultants Mills and Otten Environmental Consultants MTO Town & Regional PlannersTown MTO Mauritz Planning & Property Town MZ Service. Oosthuizen Mauritz@mto- Ndibu Motaung Property Research NdibuOsborn Oakenfull & Meekel.Associates.Plan Plan Practice Pretoria Cc. L.J Mr. MotaungPlanit Planning Solutions and Town Plankonsult Inc. Peter Regional Planners Oakenfull Theo.G. ndibu.motaung@liberty. Pieter Dacomb [email protected] Pretorius 888 7644 Botha 011 082 882 0511 888 7648 011 peter@planpractice. [email protected] 012 342 8701 082 576 1658 [email protected] 012 342 8714 849 7833 011 082 881 4458 086 641 2981 Power Developments.Powerhouse Consortium (PTY)Ltd. Stan TommiePro Technologies Transit Questek R.N.Properties. Tusini Ronald RichardsRates Watch Salis stan@ trichards@powergrp. Rosemary Rudi Nicholas [email protected] 706 0405 011 082 469 6504 706 0308 011 Rosemaryn@absamail. Prinsloo rudiprinsloo@polka.

OCTOBER 2010 51 E5.2 C2 082 552 7385 086 670 9678 084 491 0529 011 339 6771011 076 316 5509 086 568 1481 011 447 1501011 084 710 9267 447 3581 011 394 2964011 082 414 6202 0040/1 011 904 2720011 082 552 5946 086 678 2539 co.za com co.za voddamail.co.za org.za ths SGPlanning@ fi Rinus Rob BritsMolly Taylor [email protected] Gallant 888 2232 011 082 456 4229 [email protected] 888 2165 011 482 2308 011 082 653 7796 726 2784 011 Molly.gallant@ryden. Demond Sweke [email protected] 467 011 Ahmed Ismael-Smiley smiley@siyafundactc. Manda Smit [email protected] 954 5490 011 954 5904 011 ce. ce. Isaac Sydney Mokhatla Jassop [email protected] [email protected] 496 0726 011 082 418 7624 086 688 4684 495 0727 011 072 404 5525 086 688 5157 fi fi Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Redcon Property Development.Redcon Property Development. LewisRedcon Property Development. MendelRendani Consultation Sydney Civin Medalie Percy Darier [email protected] [email protected] 455 0927 011 Makwinzha 084 400 4078 [email protected] 388 5775 011 455 0927 011 082 324 2899 455 0927 011 076 129 4046 388 5775 011 388 5775 011 prconsult@vodamail. Rinus Brits Town Planning Town Rinus Brits Solutions. AssociatesRob Fowler & and Assoc (Town @ Taylor Rob Regional Planners). Strategies.Transport Route 2 - RobRyden International Property JacConsultants Fowler Botha [email protected] [email protected] 314 2450 011 082 459 4902 314 2452 011 082 814 2230 012 665 1011 S.A. Post Of Serengeti Golf & Wildlife Estate.Settlement Planning Services LeonGauteng Cc ( Setplan). Der Vyfer Van [email protected] 552 7500 011 082 900 8332 552 7011 011 S.A. Post Of Authority Avation Civil SA Associates.Thomson and Seaton Judy Properties.Seeff Lizell Johnson Andre’ Stroh [email protected] Landman 012 667 2107 082 920 6115 [email protected] 012 667 2109 545 1232 011 083 461 6660 kemptonpark@seeff. 545 1282 011 SG Planning Technology Siyafunda Community Centre Susan Grif Smit & Associates Urban Smit & Development Consultants Cc.

52 OCTOBER 2010 E5.2 082 456 0095 975 3716 011 082 417 1000 086 604 5473 083 702 1866 086 589 8897 011 726 4334011 079 141 9053 482 9838 011 011 394 011 1418/9 975 8542011 082 441 8109 975 3716 011 622 2263011 082 552 2366 622 4988 011 896 3641011 073 414 9727 086 697 3238 co.za co.za [email protected] co.za co.za gmail.com co.za SanetSalome Breda Van Truter [email protected] 954 4000 011 salome@t-squared. 954 4011 011 KobusJan Buitendag Schoeman [email protected] [email protected] 918 0100 011 082 854 6128 918 0267 011 918 0100 011 082 854 6129 918 0267 011 Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax SNOW Consultants Incorporated. Anton Siebrits info@snowconsultants. StudiomasSumali Investments 101 (PTY)Ltd Julia Sumali Investments 101 (PTY)Ltd TinaSVR Land SurveyorsSwakteka Development Solutions SibusisoSwart Redelinghuys Nel & Partners Inc. Zhang Squared Corporate Solutions T Stefan(PTY)Ltd. Edna Haung Buthelezi [email protected] Van Janse [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Peres 012 654 9769 609 0168 913 8078 082 857 0423 011 011 082 964 8153 073 660 3111 012 654 3436 609 0175 011 086 614 4992 609 0168 011 072 183 3186 609 0175 011 [email protected] 486 2979 011 083 227 6380 646 5399 011 Terraplan Associates.Terraplan Thabiso Consulting.African Planning Partnership The Pieter(TAPP) African Planning Partnership The (TAPP) DiggieTrustThe Belekazi Le Roux Mseme Belekazi terraplan@interkom. [email protected] or Mbelle Belekazi@belekazitrust. Tebolo Construction (PTY)LtdTebolo Construction (PTY)LtdTebolo Eduard IQ Consulting Engineers Cc.Tech Pieter Herman. S. Dr. Associates.Terraplan Joubert Lotz Terbalanche Pieter [email protected] teboloconstruction@ [email protected] Venter 012 346 5336 082 651 9550 086 517 3132 083 270 0220 086 684 8349 terraplan@interkom.

OCTOBER 2010 53 E5.2 C2 072 206 1558 012 546 8683 082 375 0575 012 546 8720 482 4131011 482 4131011 082 654 6696 482 9734 011 482 4131011 482 9734 011 482 4131011 482 4131011 482 9734 011 484 4131011 082 714 4664 482 8418 011 482 9734 011 482 9734 011 011 646 6228011 072 210 1301 086 603 6934 391 6420011 082 320 0025 391 6420 011 org.za co.za urbandynamics.co.za urbandynamics.co.za co.za co.za co.za co.za net co.za Tino Ferero fererokp@netactive. Mpho Hlahla [email protected] 483 2108 011 082 570 8863 086 657 7340 Richardt Venter info@vhsarchitects. Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax The Edge Properties Tshilidzi Munyai ceo@thamimnyele. The Town Planning Hub Cc.Town The and Town Ferero & Sons Tino Regional Planners Bea Fletcher [email protected] 012 809 2229 082 807 2030 012 809 2090 Tirana Consulting ( Town & Town Consulting ( Tirana Regional Planners) Acht (PTY)Ltd. Trans URBAN Consult townplannersUrban Dynamics Gauteng Inc. Robert DanieUrban Dynamics Gauteng Inc. Corne’ HannesUrban Dynamics Gauteng Inc. Streak Jean-LucUrban Dynamics Gauteng Inc. Der Merwe Van Botha JonUrban Dynamics Gauteng Inc. Potgieter Danie@urbandynamics. Nico LimacherUrban Dynamics. [email protected] 012 347 5112Terrain.Urban 082 573 0409 hannes@ [email protected] 012 347 5112 PlannersTown VBH Busser jean-luc@ PlannersTown VBH Architects Human Strydom Venter Venter Harriet(PTY)Ltd. Stephen jon@urbandynamics. Craig Patrick 083 263 5129 Nico@urbandynamics. 086 601 3624 Kpama Baylis Baylis Pretorius harriet@urbandynamics. [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] 315 9908 011 2904 082 411 805 1411 011 315 9908 011 2904 082 411 805 1411 011 082 337 5901 086 671 8540 Waywing CcWaywing Tom Der Merwe Van propconsult@telkomsa.

54 OCTOBER 2010 E5.2 011 462 5663011 082 296 1393 462 8364 011 012 361 4141 082 413 7235 012 361 4142 co.za wspgroup.co.za Thys Human [email protected] 016 933 9293 072 989 6258 016 933 9881 Company Name / Organisation Name Surname E-mail Telephone Cell Fax Web ConsultingWeb & Regional Town Welwyn Planners. Johann Joraan [email protected] 082 499 1474 086 684 1441 WESSA.Witfontein X 28 (PTY)Ltd.WSP.Associates Inc. Stuart & Young ElizabethAssociates Inc. Stuart & Young Norman Thato Garth Botha Stuart Machola Desmund Barnes [email protected] [email protected] Hundermark [email protected] 867 7544 011 083 407 7560 867 7544 011 867 0909 011 gbarnes@wessanorth. 084 504 5555 867 0909 011 desmund.hundermark@ 083 729 4912 086 601 3624

OCTOBER 2010 55

© 2010 Ekurhuleni Metropolitan Municipality. All rights reserved. Published by the Directorate: Communications and Marketing. Private Bag X1069, Germiston, 1400, South Africa Tel: +27 11 999 0099 www.ekurhuleni.gov.za

An initiative of the Department of City Development For further information contact your nearest City Development Customer Care Centre, or 011 398 2009 of [email protected]